Table of Contents
- MF729Cx/MF728Cdw/MF724Cdw/MF628Cw/MF623Cn
- Important Safety Instructions
- Basic Operations
- Parts and Their Functions
- Using the Display
- Entering Text
- Logging on to the Machine
- Placing Documents
- Loading Paper
- Registering in the Address Book
- Adjusting the Volume
- Entering Sleep Mode
- Setting Auto Shutdown Time (MF724Cdw / MF623Cn)
- Copying
- Basic Copy Operations
- Canceling Copies
- Various Copy Settings
- Enlarging or Reducing
- Selecting Document Type
- Adjusting Density
- Adjusting Color Balance
- Adjusting Sharpness
- 2-Sided Copying (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
- Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)
- Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page
- Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines (Erase Frame)
- Collating Copies by Page
- Configuring Copy Settings to Your Needs
- Faxing
- Configuring Initial Settings for Fax Functions (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
- Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
- Receiving Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
- Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
- Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents
- Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
- Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)
- Using the Machine as a Printer
- Printing from a Computer
- Printing a Document
- Canceling Prints
- Checking the Printing Status and Log
- Various Print Settings
- Enlarging or Reducing
- Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
- Collating Printouts by Page
- Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet
- Printing Posters
- Printing Booklet (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
- Printing Borders
- Printing Dates and Page Numbers
- Printing Watermarks
- Setting Color Mode
- Printing Specific Pages onto Different Paper
- Selecting Document Type
- Saving Toner
- Combining and Printing Multiple Documents
- Configuring Printer Settings on the Machine
- Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
- Configuring Print Settings to Your Needs
- Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
- Printing from a Computer
- Using the Machine as a Scanner
- Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner
- Scanning from the Machine
- Scanning from a Computer
- Convenient Scanning with a Machine-Based Operation
- Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
- Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
- Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
- Canceling Sending Documents (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
- Specifying Detailed Settings
- Sending Using Registered Destinations (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
- Configuring Scan Settings to Your Needs
- Checking Log for Sent Documents (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
- Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
- Printing/Scanning through Canon Mobile Application and Plug-in
- Printing by Touching a Mobile Device to the Machine (NFC) (MF729Cx)
- Making a Simple Wireless Connection Using Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
- Using Remote UI from a Mobile Device
- Using AirPrint
- Using Google Cloud Print
- Network
- Connecting to a Network
- Viewing Network Settings
- Configuring the Settings for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
- Configuring the Machine for Printing or Faxing from a Computer
- Configuring Scan Settings (E-mail/I-Faxes/Shared Folders/FTP Server)
- Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment
- Configuring Ethernet Settings
- Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
- Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
- Configuring DNS
- Configuring SMB
- Configuring WINS
- Registering LDAP Servers
- Configuring SNTP
- Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
- Configuring Settings for Device Management Software
- Security
- Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access
- Restricting the Machine's Functions
- Implementing Robust Security Features
- Using Remote UI
- Setting Menu List
- Troubleshooting
- Maintenance
- Appendix
- Feature Highlights
- Specifications
- Machine Specifications
- Wireless LAN Specifications (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
- Document Type
- Paper
- Copy Specifications
- Fax Specifications (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
- Scanner Specifications
- Printer Specifications
- Specifications for E-mail Sending
- Specifications for Scanning to Shared Folders
- Consumables
- Optional Items
- Manuals Included with the Machine
- Using e-Manual
- Others
- Contact Us
- MF Driver Installation Guide
Canon MF628cw User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for MF628cw by Canon which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Important Safety Instructions 9
Installation 10
Power Supply 12
Handling 13
Maintenance and Inspections 15
Consumables 16
Basic Operations 18
Parts and Their Functions 20
Front Side 21
Back Side 23
Interior 24
Manual Feed Slot 25
Paper Drawer 26
Operation Panel 27
Display 29
Customizing the <Home> Screen 32
Using the Display 36
Entering Text 39
Logging on to the Machine 41
Placing Documents 44
Loading Paper 47
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer 50
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot 53
Loading Envelopes 57
Loading Preprinted Paper 59
Specifying Paper Size and Type 61
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer 62
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot 63
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Manual Feed Slot 65
Registering a Custom Paper Size 67
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed 70
Registering in the Address Book 71
Registering Destinations in the Address Book 72
Registering Destinations for Favorites 75
Registering Multiple Destinations for Group Dial 77
Adjusting the Volume 79
Entering Sleep Mode 81
Setting Auto Shutdown Time (MF724Cdw / MF623Cn) 83
Copying 84
Basic Copy Operations 85
Selecting Copy Paper 87
Canceling Copies 88
Various Copy Settings 90
Enlarging or Reducing 91
Selecting Document Type 92
Adjusting Density 93
Adjusting Color Balance 95
Adjusting Sharpness 97
2-Sided Copying (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw) 98
㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1) 100
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page 101
Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines (Erase Frame) 102
Collating Copies by Page 103
Configuring Copy Settings to Your Needs 104
Changing Default Settings 105
Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings 106
Faxing 108
Configuring Initial Settings for Fax Functions (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw) 110
Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use 111
Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name 112
Selecting the Receive Mode 114
Connecting the Telephone Line 116
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw) 118
Specifying Registered Destinations 122
Specifying from Address Book (Fax) 123
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers (Fax) 125
Specifying Previously Used Destinations (Fax) 127
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (Fax) 129
Various Fax Settings 132
Adjusting Resolution 133
Adjusting Density 134
Adjusting Sharpness 135
Scanning 2-Sided Documents (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw) 136
Configuring Fax Settings to Your Needs 137
Changing Default Settings 138
Registering Frequently Used Fax Settings 139
Canceling Sending Faxes 142
Receiving Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw) 143
Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw) 146
Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending) 147
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast) 148
Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception) 150
Forwarding Received Faxes 153
Selecting a Document to Forward 154
Forwarding All the Received Documents Automatically 155
Archiving Sent Faxes 158
Receiving Fax Information Services 159
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents 161
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw) 163
Sending PC Faxes 164
Attaching Cover Sheets to PC Faxes 167
Using Address Book for PC Faxes 170
Registering Destinations 171
Using Registered Destinations 175
Importing/Exporting Address Book Data from the Fax Driver 177
Using Internet Fax (I-Fax) 182
Sending I-Faxes 183
Receiving I-Faxes 188
㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Using the Machine as a Printer 189
Printing from a Computer 190
Printing a Document 192
Canceling Prints 195
Checking the Printing Status and Log 197
Various Print Settings 199
Enlarging or Reducing 200
Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw) 202
Collating Printouts by Page 204
Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet 205
Printing Posters 206
Printing Booklet (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw) 207
Printing Borders 209
Printing Dates and Page Numbers 210
Printing Watermarks 211
Setting Color Mode 213
Printing Specific Pages onto Different Paper 215
Selecting Document Type 216
Saving Toner 217
Combining and Printing Multiple Documents 218
Configuring Printer Settings on the Machine 221
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw) 222
Preparing for Using Secure Print 223
Printing via Secure Print 224
Configuring Print Settings to Your Needs 228
Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings 229
Changing Default Settings 231
Printing from USB Memory (USB Print) 232
Changing Default USB Print Settings 242
Using the Machine as a Scanner 243
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner 244
Scanning from the Machine 245
Scanning from a Computer 248
Scanning Using an Application 249
Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF 250
Configuring Scan Settings in Simple Mode 251
Configuring Scan Settings in Advanced Mode 253
Convenient Scanning with a Machine-Based Operation 264
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory 265
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine 268
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server 274
Canceling Sending Documents (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server) 276
Specifying Detailed Settings 278
Specifying a Scanning Size 279
Selecting a File Format 280
Adjusting Density 283
Specifying Orientation of Your Document 284
Selecting Document Type 285
Scanning 2-Sided Documents (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw) 286
㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Adjusting Sharpness 287
Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality 288
Setting Gamma Values 289
Sending Using Registered Destinations (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server) 290
Specifying from Address Book 291
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers 294
Specifying Previously Used Destinations 296
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (E-mail/I-Fax) 297
Configuring Scan Settings to Your Needs 300
Changing Default Settings 301
Registering Frequently Used Scan Settings (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server) 303
Checking Log for Sent Documents (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server) 306
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device 307
Printing/Scanning through Canon Mobile Application and Plug-in 309
Printing by Touching a Mobile Device to the Machine (NFC) (MF729Cx) 310
Making a Simple Wireless Connection Using Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw) 311
Using Remote UI from a Mobile Device 312
Using AirPrint 313
Printing with AirPrint 316
Scanning with AirPrint 318
Faxing with AirPrint (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw) 320
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used 321
Using Google Cloud Print 322
Printing with Google Cloud Print 323
Network 326
Connecting to a Network 327
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw) 329
Connecting to a Wired LAN 330
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw) 331
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode 333
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode 335
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router 337
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings 340
Checking the SSID and Network Key 343
Setting IP Addresses 345
Setting IPv4 Address 346
Setting IPv6 Addresses 349
Viewing Network Settings 352
Configuring the Settings for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw /
MF724Cdw / MF628Cw) 355
Configuring the Machine for Printing or Faxing from a Computer 356
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions 357
Configuring Printer Ports 360
Setting Up Print Server 363
Configuring Scan Settings (E-mail/I-Faxes/Shared Folders/FTP Server) 366
Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-mail, Sending & Receiving I-Faxes) 367
Configuring Basic E-mail Settings 368
Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings 372
Configuring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders 375
㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location 376
Configuring the Machine for Scanning to FTP Server 380
Configuring FTP PASV mode 381
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment 383
Configuring Ethernet Settings 384
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit 386
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network 387
Configuring DNS 388
Configuring SMB 392
Configuring WINS 394
Registering LDAP Servers 396
Configuring SNTP 400
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP 402
Configuring Settings for Device Management Software 406
Security 410
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access 411
Preventing Unauthorized Access 412
Setting Access Privileges 414
Setting the System Manager ID 415
Setting the Department ID Management 417
Setting a Remote UI PIN 423
LDAP Server Authentication 425
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls 429
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules 430
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules 433
Changing Port Numbers 436
Setting a Proxy 437
Restricting the Machine's Functions 439
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions 440
Setting a PIN for Address Book 441
Limiting Available Destinations 442
Prohibiting PC Faxing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw) 443
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations 444
Checking Destinations before Sending Documents 445
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw) 447
Restricting USB Functions 448
Disabling HTTP Communication 450
Disabling Remote UI 451
Implementing Robust Security Features 452
Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI 453
Configuring IPSec Settings 456
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication 463
Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 467
Generating Key Pairs 468
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 474
Generating a Device Signature Key (MF729Cx) 477
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 479
Using Remote UI 481
Starting Remote UI 482
㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Remote UI Screens 484
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status 487
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI 491
Saving/Loading Registered Data 493
Saving Settings Data 494
Loading Settings Data 496
Registering Address Book from Remote UI 498
Setting Menu List 501
Network Settings 502
Preferences 511
Timer Settings 515
Common Settings 519
Copy Settings 522
Fax Settings (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw) 524
Scan Settings 534
Memory Media Print Settings 541
Printer Settings 545
Adjustment/Maintenance 574
System Management Settings 579
Troubleshooting 590
Clearing Jams 591
When an Error Message Appears 599
When an Error Code Appears 613
Common Problems 622
Installation/Settings Problems 623
Copying Problems 626
Printing Problems 627
Faxing/Telephone Problems (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw) 628
When You Cannot Print Properly 629
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory 630
Paper Creases or Curls 633
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly 634
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved 635
Maintenance 636
Cleaning the Machine 637
Exterior 638
Platen Glass 639
Feeder 640
Fixing Unit 642
Transfer Belt 643
Replacing Toner Cartridges 644
How to Replace Toner Cartridges 646
Relocating the Machine 648
Maintaining and Improving Print Quality 650
Correcting the Gradation 651
Correcting "Print Color Mismatch" 655
Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility in Color Documents 656
Printing Reports and Lists 657
TX Result Report 658
㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Communication Management Report 660
RX Result Report 661
Department ID Management Report 662
Address Book List 663
User Data List/System Manager Data List 664
IPSec Policy List 665
Consumables Status Report 666
PCL Font List (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw) 667
PS Font List (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw) 668
Viewing the Counter Value 669
Using a USB Memory Device to Export/Import Registered Data 670
Exporting Registered Data to a USB Memory Device 671
Importing Registered Data from a USB Memory Device 673
Initializing Settings 675
Initializing Menu 676
Initializing Key and Certificate 678
Initializing Address Book 679
Appendix 680
Feature Highlights 681
Going Green and Saving Money 682
Improving Efficiency 684
Going Digital 686
So Much More 688
Specifications 691
Machine Specifications 692
Wireless LAN Specifications (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw) 694
Document Type 695
Scan Area 696
Paper 697
Copy Specifications 700
Fax Specifications (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw) 701
Scanner Specifications 702
Printer Specifications 703
Specifications for E-mail Sending 704
Specifications for Scanning to Shared Folders 705
Consumables 706
Optional Items 708
Manuals Included with the Machine 711
Using e-Manual 712
Installing e-Manual 713
Uninstalling e-Manual 716
Screen Layout of e-Manual 718
Viewing e-Manual 723
Others 724
Basic Windows Operations 725
For Mac OS Users 730
Notice 731
Contact Us 735
㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-000
Important Safety Instructions
The content described in this chapter is for the prevention of damage to property and injury to users of the machine and others. Before
using this machine, read this chapter and follow the instructions to properly use this machine. Do not perform any operations not
described in this manual. Canon will not be responsible for any damages resulting from use not described in this manual, improper use,
or repair/changes not performed by Canon or a third party authorized by Canon.
㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-001
Installation
To use this machine safely and comfortably, carefully read the following precautions and install the machine in an appropriate location.
Do not install in a location that may result in a fire or electrical shock
A location where the ventilation slots are blocked
(too close to walls, beds, rugs, or similar objects)
A damp or dusty location
A location exposed to direct sunlight or outdoors
A location subject to high temperatures
A location exposed to open flames
Near alcohol, paint thinners or other flammable substances
Other warnings
Do not connect unapproved cables to this machine. Doing so may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not place necklaces and other metal objects or containers filled with liquid on the machine. If foreign substances come in
contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
When installing and removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn OFF the power, unplug the power plug, and then
disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the machine. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be
damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not use near any medical equipment. Radiowaves emitted from this machine may interfere with medical equipment, which
may cause a malfunction and result in serious accidents.
If any foreign substance falls into this machine, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
Do not install in the following locations
The machine may drop or fall, resulting in injury.
Unstable location
Location exposed to vibrations
Other cautions
When carrying this machine, follow the instructions in this manual. If carried improperly, it may fall, resulting in injury.
When installing this machine, be careful not to get your hands caught between the machine and the floor or walls, or between
the paper drawers. Doing so may result in injury.
Do not install in the following locations that may result in damage
A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or humidity
A location near equipment that generates magnetic or electromagnetic waves
A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur
A location exposed to corrosive or toxic gases
A location that may warp from the weight of the machine or where the machine is
liable to sink (a carpet, etc.)
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
This machine generates a slight amount of ozone, etc. during normal use. Although sensitivity to ozone, etc. may vary, this
amount is not harmful. Ozone, etc. may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs, especially in poorly
ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room where the machine operates be appropriately ventilated to maintain a
comfortable working environment. Also avoid locations where people would be exposed to emissions from the machine.
Do not install in a location where condensation occurs
Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine when the room where the machine is installed is heated rapidly,
and when the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location. Using the machine under these
conditions may result in paper jams, poor print quality, or damage to the machine. Let the machine adjust to the ambient
temperature and humidity for at least 2 hours before use.
When using wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Set the machine at a distance of 50 m or less from the wireless LAN router.
Do not set machine in a location where any object blocks communication. The signal may be degraded when passing through
walls or floors.
Keep the machine as far as possible from digital cordless phones, microwave ovens, or other equipment that emit radio waves.
Connecting the Telephone Line
This machine conforms to an analog telephone line standard. The machine can be connected to the public switched telephone
network (PSTN) only.
If you connect the machine to a digital telephone line or a dedicated telephone line, it might impede proper operation of the
machine and could be the cause of damage. Make sure to confirm a type of telephone line before connecting the machine.
Contact your optical fiber line or IP telephone line service providers if you want to connect the machine to those telephone
lines.
In altitudes of 3,000 m or above sea level
Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters above sea level, or
higher.
㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-002
Power Supply
This machine is compatible with voltages of 220 to 240 V, and electrical frequency of 50/60 Hz.
Use only a power supply that meets the specified voltage requirements. Failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
The provided power cord is intended for use with this machine. Do not connect the power cord to other devices.
Do not modify, pull, forcibly bend, or perform any other act that may damage the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on
the power cord. Damaging the power cord may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not plug in or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in an electrical shock.
Do not use extension cords or multi-plug power strips with the machine. Doing so may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not wrap the power cord or tie it in a knot, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet. Failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Remove the power plug completely from the AC power outlet during a thunder storm. Failure to do so may result in a fire,
electrical shock, or damage to the machine.
Install this machine near the power outlet and leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily
in an emergency.
When connecting power
Do not connect the machine to an uninterruptible power source.
If plugging this machine into an AC power outlet with multiple sockets, do not use the remaining sockets to connect other
devices.
Do not connect the power cord into the auxiliary outlet on a computer.
Other precautions
Electrical noise may cause this machine to malfunction or lose data.
㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-003
Handling
Immediately unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact an authorized
Canon dealer if the machine makes an unusual noise, emits an unusual smell, or emits
smoke or excessive heat. Continued use may result in a fire or electrical shock.
Do not disassemble or modify this machine. There are high-voltage and high-
temperature components inside the machine which may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
Place the machine where children will not come in contact with the power cord and other cables or internal and electrical
parts. Failure to do so may result in unexpected accidents.
Do not use flammable sprays near this machine. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside this
machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
When moving this machine, be sure to turn OFF the power of this machine and your computer, and then unplug the power
plug and interface cables. Failure to do so may damage the power cord or interface cables, resulting in a fire or electrical
shock.
When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not touch the metal
part of the connector, as this may result in an electrical shock.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
This machine generates a low level magnetic flux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away
from this machine and consult your physician immediately.
Do not place heavy objects on this machine as they may fall, resulting in injury.
For your safety, please unplug the power cord if the machine will not be used for a long period of time.
Use caution when opening and closing covers to avoid injury to your hands.
Keep hands and clothing away from the rollers in the output area. If the rollers catch your hands or clothing, this may result
in personal injury.
The inside of the machine and the output slot are very hot during and immediately after use. Avoid contact with these areas to
prevent burns. Also, printed paper may be hot immediately after being output, so use caution when handling it. Failure to do
so may result in burns.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw MF628Cw / MF623Cn
When copying with a thick book placed on the platen glass, do not press the feeder forcefully. Doing so may damage the
platen glass and result in injury.
Be careful not to drop a heavy object, such as a dictionary, on the platen glass. Doing so may damage the platen glass and
result in injury.
Do not carry the machine with the paper drawers or the optional paper drawer
installed. Otherwise, the paper drawer may fall and result in injury.
Laser beam
This machine is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product under IEC60825-1: 2007, EN60825-1: 2007. The laser beam can be harmful
㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
to the human body. The laser beam is confined in the laser scanner unit by a cover, so there is no danger of the laser beam
escaping during normal machine operation. Read the following remarks and instructions for safety.
Never open covers other than those indicated in this manual.
Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of the laser scanner unit.
If you operate the machine in manners other than the control, adjustment, and operating
procedures prescribed in this manual, this may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to
your eyes.
When transporting the machine
To prevent damage to the machine during transport, perform the following.
Remove the toner cartridges.
Securely pack the machine in the original box with packing materials.
If the operating noise concerns you
Depending on the use environment and operating mode, if the operating noise is of concern, it is recommended that the
machine be Installed in a place other than the office.
Other precautions
Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this machine.
Avoid shaking or applying shock to this machine.
Do not forcibly open and close doors, covers, and other parts. Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
Do not touch the toner cartridge contacts ( ). Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
To prevent a paper jam, do not turn OFF the power, open/close the operation panel area or covers, and load/unload the paper
when printing.
Use a telephone cable with a length of 3 m or less.
The display is a touch panel. Press gently to operate. Avoid pressing with a mechanical pencil, ballpoint pen, or other pointed
object. Doing so may scratch or damage the touch panel's surface.
㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-004
Maintenance and Inspections
Clean this machine periodically. If dust accumulates, the machine may not operate properly. When cleaning, be sure to observe the
following. If a problem occurs during operation, see Troubleshooting. If the problem cannot be resolved or you feel the machine
requires an inspection, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved.
Before cleaning, turn OFF the power and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Failure to do so may result in a fire
or electrical shock.
Unplug the power plug periodically and clean with a dry cloth to remove dust and grime. Accumulated dust may absorb
humidity in the air and may result in a fire if it comes into contact with electricity.
Use a damp, well wrung-out cloth to clean the machine. Dampen cleaning cloths with water only. Do not use alcohol,
benzenes, paint thinners, or other flammable substances. Do not use tissue paper or paper towels. If these substances come
into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, they may generate static electricity or result in a fire or electrical shock.
Check the power cord and plug periodically for damage. Check the machine for rust, dents, scratches, cracks, or excessive
heat generation. Use of poorly-maintained equipment may result in a fire or electrical shock.
The inside of the machine has high-temperature and high-voltage components. Touching these components may result in
burns. Do not touch any part of the machine that is not indicated in the manual.
When loading paper or removing jammed documents or paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper.
When removing jammed paper or replacing toner cartridges, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or clothing. If
toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water.
㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-005
Consumables
Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. Also, do not store toner cartridges or paper in a location exposed to
open flames. This may cause the toner to ignite, and result in burns or fire.
If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully wipe up the loose toner with a damp, soft cloth and avoid inhaling any toner
dust. Do not use a vacuum cleaner that is not equipped with safety measures to prevent dust explosions to clean up loose
toner. Doing so may cause damage to the vacuum cleaner or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge.
Use caution not to inhale any toner. If you should inhale toner, consult a physician immediately.
Use caution so that toner does not get into your eyes or mouth. If toner should get into your eyes or mouth, immediately
wash with cold water and consult a physician.
Use caution so that toner does not come into contact with your skin. If it should, wash with soap and cold water. If there is
any irritation on your skin, consult a physician immediately.
Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested, consult a physician or
poison control center immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the toner cartridge. Doing so may cause the toner to scatter.
Remove the sealing tape of the toner cartridge completely without using excessive force. Doing otherwise may cause the toner
to scatter.
Handling the toner cartridge
Be sure to hold the toner cartridge using the handle and do not touch the drum surface. ( ).
Do not touch the toner cartridge memory ( ) or the electrical contacts ( ).
Do not scratch the drum surface ( ) or expose it to light.
Do not remove the toner cartridge from this machine or from the protective bag unnecessarily.
Storing the toner cartridge
㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Store in the following environment to ensure safe and satisfactory use.
Storage temperature range: 0 to 35°C
Storage humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (relative humidity/no condensation)
Store without opening until the toner cartridge is to be used.
When removing the toner cartridge from this machine for storage, attach the protective cover for the drum, and then place
the removed toner cartridge into the original protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth.
When storing the toner cartridge, do not store it upright or upside down. The toner will solidify and may not return to its
original condition even if it is shaken.
Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner cartridge if there is a difference of temperature
inside and outside the toner cartridge. Condensation will adversely affect the print quality of toner cartridges.
Do not store the toner cartridge in the following locations
Locations exposed to open flames
Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for five minutes or more
Locations exposed to excessive salty air
Locations where there are corrosive gases (i.e. aerosol sprays and ammonia)
Locations subject to high temperature and high humidity
Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity where condensation may easily occur
Locations with a large amount of dust
Locations within the reach of children
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner cartridge may
result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused
by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit.
Availability period of repairing parts and toner cartridges
The repairing parts and toner cartridges for the machine will be available for at least seven (7) years after production of this
machine model has been discontinued.
Toner cartridge packing materials
Save the protective bag for the toner cartridge and protective cover for the drum. They are required when transporting this
machine.
The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice.
Dispose of the removed sealing tape according to local regulations.
When disposing of a used toner cartridge
Attach the protective cover for the drum, place the toner container into its protective bag to prevent the toner from scattering,
and then dispose of the toner cartridge according to local regulations.
*
*
㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-006
Basic Operations
This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper and documents, that are
frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.
Parts and Their Functions
This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys on the operation
panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions
Using the Display
The display used on this machine is a touch panel display. This section describes how to use the display for tasks such as selecting items
and adjusting settings. Using the Display
Entering Text
This section describes how to enter the characters and numbers for registering destinations in the Address Book or sending faxes.
Entering Text
Logging on to the Machine
This section describes how to log on when a logon screen is displayed. Logging on to the Machine
Placing Documents
This section describes how to place documents on the platen glass and in the feeder. Placing Documents
㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Loading Paper
This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and manual feed slot. Loading Paper
Registering in the Address Book
This section describes how to register destinations for sending faxes or scanned documents. Registering in the Address Book
Adjusting the Volume
This section describes how to adjust the volume of various machine sounds, such as those produced when fax sending is complete or
when an error occurs. Adjusting the Volume
Entering Sleep Mode
This section describes how to set the sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode
Setting Auto Shutdown Time
This section describes how to enable the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting. Setting Auto Shutdown Time (MF724Cdw / MF623Cn)
㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-007
Parts and Their Functions
This section describes the parts of the machine (exterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In addition to
describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as placing documents, loading paper, and replacing the toner
cartridges, this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this section for tips on how to use the machine
properly.
Front Side
Back Side
Interior
Manual Feed Slot
Paper Drawer
Operation Panel
㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-008
Front Side
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Feeder
Automatically feeds documents into the machine for scanning. When two or more sheets are loaded in the feeder, documents can
be scanned continuously. Placing Documents
Operation panel
The operation panel consists of keys such as the numeric keys and [Start] key, a display, and status indicators. You can perform
all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel. Operation Panel Display
Front cover
Open the front cover when replacing toner cartridges or clearing paper jams.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges Clearing Jams
Paper drawer
Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
Power switch
Turns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Ventilation slots
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in front of the
ventilation slots prevents ventilation. Installation
Speaker
Emits sounds produced by the machine, such as fax tones and warning tones.
Lift handles
Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. Relocating the Machine
Scanning area
Documents loaded in the feeder are automatically fed to the scanning area for scanning.
Output tray
Printed paper is output to the output tray.
㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Manual feed transport guide
Lower the manual feed transport guide when paper is jammed in the manual feed slot to remove the jammed paper. Clearing
Jams
Platen glass
Place documents to scan on the platen glass. Also, use the platen glass to place thick or bound documents such as books when
they cannot be loaded in the feeder. Placing Documents
USB port (USB2.0)
Use this port to connect a third-party USB memory device or USB keyboard. Connecting a USB memory device allows you to print
data from the memory device or store scanned documents on the memory device. Printing from USB Memory (USB
Print) Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Manual feed slot
Load the paper into the manual feed slot when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from that which is loaded in
the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-009
Back Side
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
USB port (USB2.0)
Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.
LAN port
Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc. Connecting to a Wired LAN
USB port (USB1.1) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Use this port to connect devices such as a third-party USB keyboard.
Telephone line jack (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Connect a telephone cable when connecting the machine to a telephone line. Connecting the Telephone Line
External telephone jack (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Connect your telephone or answering machine. Connecting the Telephone Line
Handset Jack (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Connect the optional handset.
Rear cover
Open the rear cover when clearing paper jams. Clearing Jams
Rating label
The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine. When a Problem Cannot Be
Solved
Ventilation slots
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in front of the
ventilation slots prevents ventilation. Installation
Power socket
Connect the power cord.
㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00A
Interior
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Toner cartridge tray
Install the toner cartridges. Load the Y (yellow), M (magenta), C (cyan), and K (black) toner cartridges in the slots from the rear
to the front respectively. How to Replace Toner Cartridges
LINKS
Replacing Toner Cartridges
㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00C
Manual Feed Slot
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the machine.
Paper tray (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Pull out the paper tray when loading paper.
Tray extension (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Open the tray extension when loading large paper.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00E
Paper Drawer
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the machine. Press the
lock release levers that are marked with arrows in the illustrations to release the locks and slide the paper guides.
Lock release lever (for extending the paper drawer)
When loading Legal size paper, the paper drawer needs to be extended. Press this lever to release the lock and extend the length
of the paper drawer.
When Legal size paper is loaded
The front side of the paper drawer is not flush with the machine when the extended paper drawer is inserted.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00F
Operation Panel
The operation panel shown above is for the MF729Cx. The available keys or functions vary depending on the model
[Home] key
Press to display the <Home> Screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as copy and scan.
Customizing the <Home> Screen
Display
You can view the progress of copy, fax, and other jobs and error statuses. The display is also a touch panel, so you can specify
settings by touching the screen directly. Display Using the Display
[*] key
Press to switch the type of text that is entered.
Press to use tone dialing such as when receiving fax information services. Receiving Fax Information Services
Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)
Press to enter numbers and text. Entering Text
[#] key
Press to enter symbols such as "@" or "/".
[Energy Saver] key
Press to put the machine into sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode. Press the key again to exit
sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode
Sound Volume key
Press to adjust volume. Adjusting the Volume
NFC (Near Field Communication) mark (MF729Cx)
You can also use functions such as printing by waving a smartphone or similar device with Canon Mobile Application installed over
this mark. Printing by Touching a Mobile Device to the Machine (NFC) (MF729Cx)
Counter Check key (MF729Cx)
Press to view the counter values of printouts as well as the list of the available optional equipment. Viewing the Counter
Value Display
[Stop] key
Press to cancel copying, faxing, and other operations.
[Clear] key
Press to delete the entered numbers and text.
[Start] (Color) key
Press to scan or copy documents in color. In addition, if you press this key when you start printing images from a USB memory
device, printouts are printed in color.
[ID] key
㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Press after entering the ID and PIN to log on when Department ID Management is enabled. After you finish using the machine,
press this key again to log off. Logging on to the Machine
[Start] (B&W) key
Press to scan or copy documents in black and white. In addition, if you press this key when you start printing images from a USB
memory device, printouts are printed in black and white.
[Reset] key
Press to cancel the settings and restore the previously specified settings.
[Status Monitor] key
Press to check the status of printing or faxing, to view the usage history, or to view the network settings such as the IP address
of the machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as the remaining amounts of paper and the amount remaining
in the toner cartridges, or whether any errors occurred. Display
[Error] indicator
Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs
Wi-Fi indicator (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Lights up when the machine is connected to wireless LAN.
[Processing/Data] indicator
Blinks while operations such as sending or printing are being performed. Lights up when there are documents waiting to be
processed.
[Quick Guide] key
Press to view operation guidance and error causes/solutions.
[Back] key
Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the settings are not applied
and the display returns to the previous screen.
LINKS
Using the Display
㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00H
Display
The <Home> Screen or settings screen appears on the display, allowing you to initiate functions such as copying or scanning. You can
also use the display to check information such as error messages and the machine's operation status. The screen is also a touch panel,
so you can perform operations by touching the screen directly.
<Home> Screen
The <Home> Screen is displayed when the power is turned ON or by pressing on the operation panel. Use this screen to specify
settings for and register functions.
<Copy>
Use this button to start copying. Copying
<Fax> (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Use this button to send a fax from the machine. Faxing
<Scan>
Scans a document and converts it into an electronic file. You can save scanned files on your computer
or send them via e-mail. Using the Machine as a Scanner
<Memory Media Print>
Prints files stored in a USB memory media. Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
Change page button
Use this to view another page in the <Home> Screen. This works in the same way as flicking
left/right.
<Address Book>
Use this to register or edit the destinations for e-mails and faxes. You can also display a registered
destination when sending an e-mail or fax. Registering in the Address Book
<Menu>
<Timer Settings>, <Preferences>, and many other machine settings start from this button. Setting
Menu List
<Secure Print> (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Use this function to print a secure document. Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure
Print) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
<Paper Settings>
This button is also used for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in the paper drawer and
manual feed slot. Specifying Paper Size and Type
<Home Screen Settings>
Allows you to change the order that <Home> Screen buttons are displayed in. Customizing the
<Home> Screen
<ID Card Copy>
Settings are preregistered for copying the front and back sides of a driver's license or other ID card
onto the same side of a page at actual size.
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page
<Direct Connection> (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Use this to establish a direct wireless connection to a mobile device. Configuring the Settings for
Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Shortcut buttons
Display "Favorite Settings" that are registered to Copy, Fax, and Scan. Adding Buttons to the
<Home> Screen
<Status Monitor> Screen
When you press , a screen appears in which you can check the progress of documents that are being printed, sent or received, as
well as the status of the machine (amount remaining in the toner cartridge, etc.) and network settings such as the machine's IP
address.
㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
<Error Information/Notification>
Displays the details of any errors that occurred. When an Error Message Appears
<Device Status>
Displays the status of the machine, such as the amount of paper or the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.
<Paper Information>
Displays whether paper is loaded in each paper source.
<Amount Remaining in Cartridge>
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the toner
runs out.
<Remove Memory Media>
Use to safely remove a USB memory device. Printing from USB Memory (USB Print) Scanning Documents Directly
to USB Memory
<Check Counter> (MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw / MF623Cn)
Displays the separate totals for black and white and color printouts. Viewing the Counter Value
<Secure Print Memory Usage> (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Displays the amount of memory currently used for storing secured document data. Printing a Document Secured by a PIN
(Secure Print) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
<Version Information>
Displays firmware version information.
<Serial Number>
Displays the serial number.
Status of copy/print/send/receive jobs
Displays the current status of the selected item. The <Copy/Print Job Status> screen is shown below as an example.
<Network Information>
Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of wireless LAN
communications. Viewing Network Settings
<Check Counter> Screen (MF729Cx)
When you press (), the <Check Counter> screen is displayed. From this screen, you can view the counter values of printouts,
㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
as well as the serial number of the machine and the machine configuration.
<Check Device Configuration>
Displays the serial number of the machine and the list of the equipment that is attached or enabled.
Counters
Select the counter to check the counter value. Items have different defaults depending on the country or region of
purchase. Viewing the Counter Value
When a Message Is Displayed
Messages are displayed at the top of the screen in situations such as when paper runs out or end of toner cartridge lifetime. The
display alternates between showing the normal screen and the message.
When an Error Message Appears
When Is Displayed
Tap to view the notification.
When an Error Occurs
In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-screen instructions to
solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an example. When an Error Message
Appears
LINKS
Customizing the <Home> Screen
Using the Display
㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00J
Customizing the <Home> Screen
You can add/delete shortcut buttons displayed in the <Home> Screen according to your application or a preferred arrangement. You can
also change the order that they are displayed in.
Adding Buttons to the <Home> Screen
Changing the Arrangement of Buttons
Inserting a Blank
You can add shortcut buttons to the <Home> Screen for frequently used functions such as <Copy>, <Fax>, and <Scan>. For example,
you can carry out tasks more quickly and efficiently by assigning a sequence of settings (e.g. "Scan both sides of a document, save it as
a highly compressed PDF file and send it via e-mail") to a single button.
The settings to be added as a shortcut button must be registered beforehand as Favorite Settings.
Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings
Registering Frequently Used Fax Settings
Registering Frequently Used Scan Settings (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
You can register up to 11 shortcut buttons.
Press and tap <Home Screen Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Select Button to Display>.
Select the function with the Favorite Settings you want to add as a button.
Select the check box for all settings to be displayed in the <Home> Screen and tap <Apply>.
Adding Buttons to the <Home> Screen
1
2
3
4
㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To remove a registered button, clear the check box for the settings in the button you want to remove and then tap <Apply>.
Once you remove a registered button, a space appears where the button was displayed in the <Home> Screen. If necessary,
delete the space. Inserting a Blank
Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
A button for the newly selected settings is added to the <Home> Screen.
If the <Home> Screen is full and no more settings can be registered, Delete registered buttons and spaces in <Home Screen
Settings>.
To make the buttons easier to use, you can rearrange the buttons however you like. For instance, you can put the most frequently used
functions first, or arrange the function buttons together with shortcut buttons for Favorite Settings.
Press and tap <Home Screen Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Set Display Order>.
Select the button to move.
The selected button is highlighted. Tap the selected button again to deselect it.
Tap <Previous> or <Next>.
Changing the Arrangement of Buttons
5
1
2
3
4
㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The button moves as many times as you tapped.
Long touching <Previous>/<Next> to move the button continuously.
Tap <Apply>.
To make the <Home> Screen easier to view, you can insert spaces instead of buttons.
Press and tap <Home Screen Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Insert and Delete Blank>.
Select the button where you want to insert a blank, and tap <Insert>.
A space is inserted before the selected button.
Deleting Spaces
To delete a space, select the space to be deleted and tap <Delete>.
Tap <Apply>.
LINKS
Inserting a Blank
5
1
2
3
4
㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00K
Using the Display
The display is a touch panel, allowing you to operate directly on the screen.
Avoid the following actions.
The display may misfunction or be damaged.
Pressing forcefully
Pressing with pointed objects (fingernails, ballpoint pen, pencil, etc.)
Operating with wet/soiled hands
Operating the display while an object is placed on it
Tap
Touch the screen lightly and quickly. Use for selecting or finalizing items.
Long Touch
Keep finger held on the screen. When text cannot be completely displayed on one line ("..." appears), touch and hold the line to
scroll all of the text. You can also use a long touch to continuously increase or decrease numbers, such as the copy magnification.
Flick
Flick with the finger on the display. The effect of flicking varies depending on the screen. For instance, flicking in the <Home> Screen
moves you one page in the direction of the flick, while flicking in the <Copy> screen scrolls the screen in accordance with the flicking
motion.
Selecting items
Tap an item name or button to make a selection.
㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If an item is mistakenly touched
Slide your finger away then release it from the screen to cancel the selection.
To return to the previous screen
Press to return to the previous screen.
Scrolling the screen
The scroll bar appears on the screen when there is still information that is undisplayed. If the scroll bar is displayed, flick the screen
to scroll in the direction of the flick. Note that the scroll bar only appears while the screen is being touched.
Changing values and settings
Changing values
Tap / to enter values. If an icon such as below is displayed at the upper left of the screen, you can enter values directly using
the numeric keys.
To move the cursor
When / is displayed, tap to move the cursor.
Value range
Values in ( ) displayed below the entry box are the enterable value range.
Changing setting values
Tap / to adjust the setting on the scale. You can also adjust a setting by flicking the slider left or right.
㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00L
Entering Text
Use the display and numeric keys to enter text and values.
Switching the Type of Text
Tap <A/a/12> to switch the type of text that is entered. The currently selected type of text is indicated by the "A", "a", or "12"
displayed above and to the right of the text input field.
You can also press to switch the type of text.
Types of Text That Can Be Entered
Text that can be entered is listed below.
Key A a 12
@ . - _ / 1
ABC abc 2
DEF def 3
GHI ghi 4
JKL jkl 5
MNO mno 6
PQRS pqrs 7
TUV tuv 8
WXYZ wxyz 9
(Not available) 0
(space) -.*#!",;:^`_=/|'?$@%&+\~()[]{}<> (Not available)
Press or tap <#> when the type of text that is entered is <A> or <a> to display enterable symbols in the screen. Tap
symbols to enter.
Deleting Text
One character is deleted each time is pressed. Press and hold to delete all of the entered text.
㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)
Tap or to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and tap .
Example of Entering Text and Numbers
Example: "Canon-1"
1Tap <A/a/12> repeatedly until <A> is selected.
2Press repeatedly until the letter "C" is selected.
3Tap <A/a/12> repeatedly until <a> is selected.
4Press repeatedly until the letter "a" is selected.
5Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
6Press repeatedly until the letter "o" is selected.
7Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
8Press repeatedly until the symbol "-" is selected.
9Tap <A/a/12> repeatedly until <12> is selected.
10 Press .
11 Tap <Apply>.
Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard
When is displayed on the screen, you can connect a keyboard to the USB port for USB devices on the Back Side and enter text
from the keyboard. When using a keyboard, you can still use the number keypad.
Some keys on the USB keyboard, such as the [Backspace], [Home] and [End] keys, cannot be used. When keys that cannot
be used are pressed, nothing is entered or changed.
To delete text, press the [Delete] key.
Pressing the [RETURN/ENTER] key completes text entry in the same way as tapping <Apply>.
You can specify the type of keyboard layout (US layout or UK layout). English Keyboard Layout
You can disconnect the USB keyboard from the machine at any time. No special operation is required to disconnect it.
Depending on the display language, you may not be able to enter some characters correctly.
The USB keyboard may not operate correctly depending on the type of keyboard.
㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00R
Logging on to the Machine
If Department ID Management is enabled or System Manager IDs are enabled, you must log on before using the machine. You also need
to log on if use of the fax and scan functions is restricted.
Department ID Management logon
Logging on to Authorized Send
When the logon screen appears, use the procedure below to enter the Department ID and PIN.
If the screen is displayed prompting you to insert a control card, see Optional Items.
Enter an ID.
1Tap <Department ID> or <System Manager ID>.
2Enter a ID using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
If no PIN is registered, proceed to step 3.
Enter the PIN.
1Tap <PIN>.
2Enter a ID using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Press .
The logon screen will be changed to the <Home> Screen.
After you finish using the machine, press again to display the logon screen.
If the Send function authorization setting ( LDAP Server Authentication ) is enabled, the Authorized Send logon screen appears when
Department ID Management logon
Logging on to Authorized Send
1
2
3
㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
the fax or scan function is used.
Enter your user name.
1Tap <User Name>.
2Enter your user name using the numeric keys, tap <Apply>.
Enter the password.
1Tap <Password>.
2Enter the password using the numeric keys, tap <Apply>.
Tap <Server Name>, and Select the server for your authentication.
Select the LDAP server where your user name and password are registered.
Press .
The logon screen switches to the fax or scan function <Home> Screen.
After you finish using the machine, press again to display the logon screen.
If the logout selection screen appears
If you are logged in to both Authorized Send and Department ID Management, a dialog box appears in which you can select
the items you want to log out of.
<Log Out from All Authenticated Functions>
Select to log out of Authorized Send (fax or scan function) and Department ID Management simultaneously.
<Log Out from Authenticated Sending>
Select to log out of Authorized Send (fax or scan function) only. You are still logging on to Department ID
Management. After you finish using the machine, press again to log out of Department ID Management.
1
2
3
4
㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00S
Placing Documents
Place documents on the platen glass or in the feeder. Use the platen glass when scanning thick or bound documents such as books. You
can load two or more sheets of documents in the feeder so that they can be scanned continuously. For information about the types of
documents that can be placed on the platen glass or in the feeder, and information about the scannable area of a document, see
Document Type or Scan Area.
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass
Placing Documents in the Feeder
Use documents that are completely dry
When placing documents, make sure that any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the documents has completely dried.
To avoid paper jams
Do not place the following types of documents in the feeder as this may cause paper jams:
Wrinkled or creased paper
Carbon paper
Curled or rolled paper
Coated paper
Torn paper
Onion skin or thin paper
Stapled or clipped documents
Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
Transparencies
To scan documents more accurately
Documents placed in the feeder are scanned while being fed into the machine. On the other hand, documents placed on the
platen glass remain in a fixed position while they are scanned. To ensure more accurate scanning results, placing documents
on the platen glass is recommended.
To scan tracing paper or transparencies
To scan transparent documents (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), place them on the platen glass.
Open the feeder.
Place the document face down on the platen glass.
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass
1
㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Align the corner of the document with the top-left corner of the platen glass.
To scan transparent documents (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), cover them with plain white paper.
Gently close the feeder.
The machine is ready to scan the document.
When scanning is complete, remove the document from the platen glass.
Spread the document guides apart.
Slide the document guides outward until they are slightly farther apart than the actual document width.
Pull out the tray extension when loading large documents to prevent them from drooping over the edge of the feeder.
Fan the document stack and align the edges.
Fan the document stack in small batches, and align the edges by lightly tapping the stack on a flat surface a few times.
Place the document(s) face up in the feeder.
Make sure that the document stack does not exceed the load limit lines ( ).
Do not load documents of various sizes at the same time.
Up to 50 sheets can be loaded at a time. If 51 or more sheets are loaded, scanning may stop or a paper jam may occur.
Placing Documents in the Feeder
2
3
1
2
3
㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Align the document guides against the edges of the document.
Slide the document guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the document.
The machine is ready to scan the document.
Align the document guides securely against the edges of the document
Document guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jam.
While documents are being scanned
Do not add or remove documents.
When scanning is complete
Remove the scanned documents from beneath the feeder to prevent paper jams.
4
㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00U
Loading Paper
You can load the paper into the paper drawer or manual feed slot. Load the paper you usually use into the paper drawer. The paper
drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the manual feed slot when you temporarily use size or type of paper that
is not loaded in the paper drawer. See Paper for available paper sizes.
Paper Type and Setting for the Machine
See the table below to specify the paper settings according to the type and weight of the paper to load into the paper source. For
more information about how to specify the paper settings on the machine, see Specifying Paper Size and Type. For the amount
of paper that can be loaded in each paper source, see Paper.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
Paper Type Paper Weight Paper Setting
on the Machine
Plain paper
60 to 74 g/m² <Plain 1>
70 to 84 g/m² <Plain 2>
75 to 90 g/m² <Plain 3>
Recycled paper 60 to 74 g/m² <Recycled>
Color paper 60 to 74 g/m² <Color>
Heavy paper
86 to 119 g/m² <Heavy 1>
120 to 128 g/m² <Heavy 2>
129 to 163 g/m² <Heavy 3>
Envelope <Envelope>
Coated paper
100 to 110 g/m² <Coated 1>
120 to 130 g/m² <Coated 2>
155 to 165 g/m² <Coated 3>
210 to 220 g/m² <Coated 4>
Transparency <Transparency>
Label <Labels>
You can specify either <Plain 1> or <Plain 2> as the paper type for 70 to 74 g/m² paper. If you experience any of the following problems after
specifying either of these two settings, specify the other setting.
Paper that is output curls.
Afterimages appear on the blank area.
Toner is not fully fixed and the printouts are faded.
You can specify either <Plain 2> or <Plain 3> as the paper type for 75 to 84 g/m² paper. If you experience any of the following problems after
specifying either of these two settings, specify the other setting.
Paper that is output curls.
Afterimages appear on the blank area.
Toner is not fully fixed and the printouts are faded.
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
*1
*1 *2
*2
*1
*2
㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Paper Type Paper Weight Paper Setting
on the Machine
Plain paper
60 to 74 g/m² <Plain 1>
70 to 84 g/m² <Plain 2>
75 to 90 g/m² <Plain 3>
Recycled paper 60 to 74 g/m² <Recycled>
Color paper 60 to 74 g/m² <Color>
Heavy paper
85 to 120 g/m² <Heavy 1>
121 to 163 g/m² <Heavy 2>
Index card <Heavy 2>
Envelope <Envelope>
Coated paper
100 to 110 g/m² <Coated 1>
111 to 130 g/m² <Coated 2>
131 to 160 g/m² <Coated 3>
161 to 220 g/m² <Coated 4>
Transparency <Transparency>
Label <Labels>
Thin paper 60 g/m² <Thin>
You can specify either <Plain 1> or <Plain 2> as the paper type for 70 to 74 g/m² paper. If you experience any of the following problems after
specifying either of these two settings, specify the other setting.
Paper that is output curls.
Afterimages appear on the blank area.
Toner is not fully fixed and the printouts are faded.
You can specify either <Plain 2> or <Plain 3> as the paper type for 75 to 84 g/m² paper. If you experience any of the following problems after
specifying either of these two settings, specify the other setting.
Paper that is output curls.
Afterimages appear on the blank area.
Toner is not fully fixed and the printouts are faded.
You can also specify <Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Plain 3>, <Recycled>, <Color>, <Heavy 1>, <Envelope>, or <Thin> as the paper type for index cards.
Do not use the following types of paper:
Wrinkled or creased paper
Curled or rolled paper
Torn paper
Damp paper
Very thin paper
Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
Highly textured paper
Glossy paper
Paper handling and storage
Store the paper on a flat surface.
Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.
Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.
Do not store the paper vertically or stack too much paper.
Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes in temperature
or humidity.
*1
*1 *2
*2
*3
*1
*2
*3
㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture
Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form on the back side of the operation panel or
around the paper output area. There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat
generated from fixing toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room
temperatures).
LINKS
Registering a Custom Paper Size
㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00W
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load
the paper in the manual feed slot. Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
Make sure to load paper in portrait orientation
Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation. Make sure to load the paper in portrait orientation, as shown in the
illustrations below.
Follow the procedure below when loading paper into the optional paper drawer (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw).
Pull out the paper drawer.
Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage the paper drawer by
dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
Slide the paper guides apart.
Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward. On the MF628Cw / MF623Cn, there is no lock release lever for the
side paper guides.
When loading Legal size paper
Press the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw MF628Cw / MF623Cn
1
2
㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the rear side of the paper drawer.
Load the paper in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the print side face up. Paper cannot be
loaded in landscape orientation.
Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can cause paper jams.
When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes or Loading Preprinted Paper.
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
Insert the paper drawer into the machine.
When Legal size paper is loaded
The front side of the paper drawer is not flush with the machine when the extended paper drawer is inserted.
Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
When changing the paper size or type
The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain 2>, respectively. If you load a different size or type
of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change the settings, the machine cannot print
properly.
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the paper drawer or
manual feed slot ( Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot), with the side to print face up (previously printed side face
down).
When using the manual feed slot, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
If the printouts look faded, select <On> for <Drawer 1>, <Drawer 2>, or <Multi-Purpose Tray>, depending on the paper
source you are using, in <Manual Back Side Settings (for 2-Sided Only)>. Special Processing
If you are using A5 paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
3
4
5
»
㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00X
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load the paper in the manual feed slot. Load the paper that
you usually use in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
For the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
For the MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Make sure to load paper in portrait orientation
Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation. Make sure to load the paper in portrait orientation, as shown in the
illustrations below.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Make sure to insert the paper drawer
The machine only prints when the paper drawer is inserted, even if paper is loaded in the manual feed slot. An error message
is displayed if you attempt to print without inserting the paper drawer.
Open the cover.
Hold the top center of the cover to open it.
Pull out the paper tray and the tray extension.
Pull out the tray extension when loading large paper.
Spread the paper guides apart.
Slide the paper guides outward.
For the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
1
2
3
㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Insert the paper into the manual feed slot until the paper stops.
Load the paper in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the print side face up. Paper cannot be
loaded in landscape orientation.
Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can cause paper jams.
When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes or Loading Preprinted Paper.
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
Slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the paper drawer
(Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer) or manual feed slot, with the side to print face up (previously printed side face down).
When using the manual feed slot, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
If the printouts look faded, select <On> for <Drawer 1>, <Drawer 2>, or <Multi-Purpose Tray>, depending on the paper
source you are using, in <Manual Back Side Settings (for 2-Sided Only)>. Special Processing
If you are using A5 paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
4
5
»
㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Make sure to insert the paper drawer
The machine only prints when the paper drawer is inserted, even if paper is loaded in the manual feed slot. An error message
is displayed if you attempt to print without inserting the paper drawer.
Load only one sheet of paper at a time
Only one sheet of paper can be loaded each time you print.
Spread the paper guides apart.
Slide the paper guides outward.
Insert the paper and align the paper guides against the width of the paper.
Load the paper in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the feed slot), with the print side face up. Paper cannot be
loaded in landscape orientation.
Insert the paper 10 to 20 mm into the manual feed slot, and then slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely
against the edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
Insert the paper slowly into the rear of the manual feed slot.
The paper is pulled slightly into the machine when inserted into the slot.
When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes or Loading Preprinted Paper.
Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the paper drawer
(Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer) or manual feed slot, with the side to print face up (previously printed side face down).
When using the manual feed slot, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
For the MF628Cw / MF623Cn
1
2
3
»
㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-00Y
Loading Envelopes
Make sure to flatten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes and which side is
face up.
Before Loading Envelopes
In the Paper Drawer
In the Manual Feed Slot
This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you need to complete
before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading envelopes in the paper drawer or manual feed
slot, see Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer or Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot.
Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.
On the MF628Cw / MF623Cn, only one envelope at a time can be loaded in the manual feed slot. Follow steps 1 to 3 in the
procedure below to prepare the envelope for loading.
Close the flap of each envelope.
Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed tightly.
Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten any curls.
Align the edges of the envelope on a flat surface.
Before Loading Envelopes
1
2
3
4
㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Load the envelopes Monarch (MF628Cw / MF623Cn), COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the long edges on either side),
with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
Monarch size envelopes cannot be loaded in the paper drawer on the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw. Load them into the
manual feed slot.
Load the envelopes so that the edge with the flap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.
Load the envelopes Monarch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the non-glued
side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
Load only one envelope for the MF628Cw / MF623Cn each time you print.
Load the envelopes so that the edge with the flap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw MF628Cw / MF623Cn
In the Paper Drawer
In the Manual Feed Slot
㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-010
Loading Preprinted Paper
When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading. Load the paper
properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a description of the
general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or manual feed slot, see Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer or
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot.
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
Load only one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot of the MF628Cw / MF623Cn each time you print.
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the first page of the document) face down.
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
The <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you perform 1-sided and
2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>, the facing that you use for loading
preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face down) can also be used for 1-sided printing. This setting is especially
useful if you frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided printing. Switch Paper Feed Method
㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-011
Specifying Paper Size and Type
You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper settings when you
load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.
If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.
㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-012
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
Press and tap <Paper Settings>.
Tap <Drawer 1> or <Drawer 2>.
<Drawer 2> is displayed only when the optional paper drawer (drawer 2) is installed. (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Select the paper size.
If the loaded paper size is not displayed, tap <Other Sizes>.
Select the paper type.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
Paper
Notify to Check Paper Settings
1
2
3
4
㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-013
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot
The screen shown here is displayed when paper is loaded in the manual feed slot. Follow the on-screen instructions to specify settings
that match the size and type of the loaded paper.
If the screen shown above is not displayed when paper is loaded
If you always load the same paper in the manual feed slot, you can skip the paper setting operations by registering the paper
size and type as the default setting. When the default setting is registered, however, the screen shown above is not displayed.
To display the screen, select <Off> for <Register Default Settings> ( Registering Default Paper Settings for the Manual
Feed Slot).
Select the paper size.
If the loaded paper size is not displayed, tap <Other Sizes>.
When loading custom size paper
1Tap <Custom>.
2Specify the length of the <X> (shorter) side.
Tap <X>.
Input the length of the <X> side using /or the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
3Specify the length of the <Y> (longer) side.
Tap <Y>.
Input the length of the <Y> side, and tap <Apply>.
1
㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-014
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Manual Feed Slot
You can register default paper settings for the manual feed slot. Registering default settings can save yourself the effort of having to
specify the settings each time you load the same paper into the manual feed slot.
After the default paper setting is registered, the paper setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded, and the same
setting is always used. If you load a different paper size or type without changing the paper settings, the machine may not
print properly. To avoid this problem, disable the default setting by selecting <Off> in step 3, and then load the paper.
Press and tap <Paper Settings>.
Tap <Multi-Purpose Tray>.
Tap <On>.
Select the paper size.
If the loaded paper size is not displayed, tap <Other Sizes>.
Registering a custom paper size
1Tap <Custom>.
2Specify the length of the <X> (shorter) side.
1
2
3
4
㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select the paper type.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
Paper
Tap <X>.
Input the length of the <X> side using /or the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
3Specify the length of the <Y> (longer) side.
Tap <Y>.
Input the length of the <Y> side, and tap <Apply>.
4Tap <Apply>.
5
㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-015
Registering a Custom Paper Size
You can register up to three frequently used custom paper sizes.
Press and tap <Paper Settings>.
Tap <Register Custom Paper>.
Tap <Not Registered>.
If paper sizes <1> to <3> have already been registered, either change or delete the setting to continue. The procedures for
changing and deleting these settings are described below.
Changing a setting
1Select the registered size you want to change.
2Tap <Edit>, and proceed to step 4.
Deleting a setting
1Select the registered size you want to delete.
2Tap <Delete>.
3Tap <Yes>.
1
2
3
㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the paper size.
1Specify the length of the <X> (shorter) side.
Tap <X>.
Input the length of the <X> side using /or the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
2Specify the length of the <Y> (longer) side.
Tap <Y>.
Input the length of the <Y> side, and tap <Apply>.
3Tap <Apply>.
Select the paper type.
Selecting a Registered Custom Paper Setting
The paper sizes that are registered in the procedure above are displayed on the screen for selecting the paper size.
When selecting the paper size for the paper drawer
On the screen to specify the size of the paper that is loaded in the paper drawers, the registered paper sizes are displayed.
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
Only the registered paper sizes that can be loaded in the paper drawer are displayed. Paper
When selecting the paper size for the manual feed slot
When paper is loaded in the manual feed slot, the screen for selecting the paper size for the manual feed slot is displayed. The
registered paper sizes are displayed on this screen. Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot
4
5
㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The registered paper sizes are displayed when you set the default paper settings for the manual feed slot. From the screen,
you can select one of the displayed sizes as the default paper size for the manual feed slot. Registering Default Paper
Settings for the Manual Feed Slot
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HA
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
You can ensure that only frequently used paper sizes are shown in the screen for selecting the paper size setting.
Press and tap <Paper Settings>.
Tap <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>.
Tap <Multi-Purpose Tray>, <Drawer 1>, or <Drawer 2>.
<Drawer 2> is displayed only when the optional paper drawer (drawer 2) is installed. (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Clear the check boxes for paper sizes you do not want displayed.
Ensure that only the check boxes for frequently used paper sizes are selected.
Paper sizes that are not selected can be viewed by tapping <Other Sizes> in the paper size setting selection screen.
Tap <Apply>.
LINKS
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Manual Feed Slot
1
2
3
4
5
㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-016
Registering in the Address Book
You can register frequently used destinations in the Address Book and easily select them when needed. You
can register up to 300 destinations in the Address Book. Destinations can be searched alphabetically, from
lists in the Address Book, or by entering three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers). You can also specify
destinations more quickly by using the following features.
Favorites
Registering a lot of addresses in the Address Book makes it difficult to find the destination you need. To avoid this situation, register
frequently used destinations as Favorites. Destinations registered in Favorites can be searched from the Favorites list (< > tab in the
Address Book). You can register up to 19 destinations as Favorites. Registering Destinations for Favorites
Group Dial
You can select multiple destinations that have already been registered and register them together as a group. You can send faxes or e-
mails to multiple destinations at the same time. You can register up to 299 destinations (100 destinations for e-mails) for a group.
Groups can also be registered in Favorites. Registering Multiple Destinations for Group Dial
Use the Send Function Setting Tool or the Remote UI when registering a shared folder or FTP server as the destination for
scans.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
You can save the Address Book as a file on your computer (although you cannot use the computer to edit the Address Book).
You can also import a saved Address Book from the computer to the machine. Saving/Loading Registered Data
You can print a list of destinations registered in the Address Book. Address Book List
If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can register destinations searched from the server in the Address Book. You
need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand. Registering LDAP Servers
㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-017
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
You can register up to 281 destinations for Coded Dial in the Address Book. You can edit or delete destinations that you have registered.
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
Press and tap <Address Book>.
Tap <Register Dest.>.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Setting a
PIN for Address Book
Select <Coded Dial> Select type of address to register.
According to the address being registered, select <Fax>/<E-Mail>/<I-Fax>.
The types of destinations that can be selected vary depending on the machine model.
Registering destinations with the LDAP server
If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can register destinations searched from the server in the Address Book. You
need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand. Registering LDAP Servers
Tap <Name>.
Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.
Enter the name using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Tap <Fax Number>, <E-Mail Address>, or <I-Fax Address>.
Enter the number using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Making detailed settings (only when registered for fax)
1Tap <LDAP Server>.
2Search for the destination to register.
See steps 3 to 8 on Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (Fax) for the procedure.
According to the content registered in the LDAP server, the user name and the fax number/e-mail address of
the specified destination that is registered on the LDAP server will be automatically input
3Select a destination.
4Proceed to step 8.
After tapping <Details>, a screen similar to the following is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Tap <Apply>.
A three-digit number is automatically set to destinations. The number can be edited after it has been registered.
Editing the Content of Registered Destinations
After registering destinations, you can change type so that a number registered for fax is usable for e-mail, change automatically set
coded dial numbers, and also change, names, types, and coded dial numbers.
Press and tap <Address Book>.
Tap <Details/Edit>.
Select the tab containing the destination you want to edit, and select the destination.
Tap <Edit>.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Setting a
PIN for Address Book
Select the item you want to edit, perform editing, and then tap <Apply>.
<ECM TX>
If an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper image
from being sent when setting <On>.
<TX Speed>
If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust the
transmission start speed downward incrementally starting from "33600 bps".
<Long Distance>
Specify <International (1)> to <International (3)> according to the transmission conditions when registering overseas
fax numbers.
You can also specify <ECM TX> and <TX Speed> from <Menu> <Fax Settings>. However, settings made
from <Address Book> are enabled for the detailed settings of destinations registered in the Address Book.
8
1
2
3
4
5
㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Deleting a Registered Destination
Press and tap <Address Book>.
Tap <Details/Edit>.
Select the tab containing the destination you want to delete, and select the destination.
Tap <Delete>.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Setting a
PIN for Address Book
Tap <Yes>.
1
2
3
4
5
㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-018
Registering Destinations for Favorites
You can register frequently used destinations as Favorites in the Address Book. Destinations can be edited or deleted after they have
been registered. You can register up to 19 destinations in Favorites.
Three-digit numbers are not assigned to Favorites.
Press and tap <Address Book>.
Tap <Register Dest.>.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Setting a
PIN for Address Book
Tap <Favorites>.
Select type of address to register.
According to the address being registered, select <Fax>/<E-Mail>/<I-Fax>.
The types of destinations that can be selected vary depending on the machine model.
Registering destinations with the LDAP server
If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can register destinations searched from the server in the Address Book. You
need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand. Registering LDAP Servers
Tap <Name>.
Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.
Enter the name using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Tap <Fax Number>, <E-Mail Address>, or <I-Fax Address>.
Enter the number or address using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Tap <Apply>.
1Tap <LDAP Server>.
2Search for the destination to register.
See steps 3 to 8 on Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (Fax) for the procedure.
According to the content registered in the LDAP server, the user name and the fax number/e-mail address of
the specified destination that is registered on the LDAP server will be automatically input.
3Select a destination.
4Proceed to step 9.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Editing the Content of Registered Destinations in Favorites
After registering destinations, you can change the content of destinations such as numbers, names, and types.
Press and tap <Address Book>.
Tap < >.
Tap <Details/Edit>, and select the destination you want to edit.
Tap <Edit>.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Setting a
PIN for Address Book
Tap the item you want to edit, perform editing, and then tap <Apply>.
Tap <Apply>.
Deleting a Registered Destination
Press and tap <Address Book>.
Tap < >.
Tap <Details/Edit>, and select the destination you want to edit.
Tap <Delete>.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Setting a
PIN for Address Book
Tap <Yes>.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-019
Registering Multiple Destinations for Group Dial
Multiple destinations can be combined into groups. You can register up to 299 destinations (100 destinations for e-mails) for a group.
After a group is registered, you can add or delete destinations.
Press and tap <Address Book>.
Tap <Register Dest.>.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Setting a
PIN for Address Book
Tap <Coded Dial>.
Groups can also be registered in Favorites. Tap <Favorites> to register the group as Favorites.
Tap <Group>.
Tap <Name>.
Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.
Enter the name using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Tap <Number of Destinations>.
Tap <Add>.
Select the tab and select a destination you want to register.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until you have registered all of the destinations that you want to register, and then tap
<Apply>.
Tap <Apply>.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Editing the Content of Registered Groups
After registering destinations, you can change the content of groups such as names, destinations, and coded dial numbers.
Press and tap <Address Book>.
Tap <Details/Edit>.
Tap < >, and select the destination you want to change.
Tap <Edit>.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Setting a
PIN for Address Book
Select the item you want to edit, perform editing, and then tap <Apply>.
Tap <Apply>.
Deleting a Group
Press and tap <Address Book>.
Tap <Details/Edit>.
Tap < >, and select the group you want to delete.
Tap <Delete>.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Setting a
PIN for Address Book
Tap <Yes>.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01A
Adjusting the Volume
The machine produces sounds in a variety of situations, such as when fax sending is complete or when a paper jam or error occurs. You
can set the volume of each of these sounds individually.
Adjusting <Fax Volume>
Press the ( ) key.
To change <Fax Volume>, tap / , and tap <Apply>.
You can also adjust the volume by flicking the slider.
Tap and move the cursor all the way to the left to mute the sound.
Adjusting <Other Volume>
Press ( ) key.
For MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw, tap <Other Volume>.
Select a setting.
Setting Description Procedure
<Ring Tone> Sound produced when an incoming fax is received
Go to step 3.
<TX Done
Tone> Sound produced when fax sending is complete
<RX Done
Tone> Sound produced when fax receiving is complete
<Scanning Done
Tone> Sound produced when fax document scanning is complete
<Entry Tone> Confirmation sound each time a key on the operation panel or button
on the display is pressed
Select <On> (produce a tone)
or <Off> (not produce a tone).
<Invalid Entry
Tone>
Sound produced when an invalid key operation is performed, such as
when you enter a number outside the valid setting range
<Restock
Supplies Tone> Sound produced when a toner cartridge is almost empty
<Warning Tone> Sound produced when a paper jam or other error occurs
<Job Done
Tone>
Sound produced when an operation such as copying or scanning is
complete
<Energy Saver
Alert> Sound produced when the machine enters or exits sleep mode
<Original in
*
*
*
*
1
2
1
2
㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Feeder Detection
Tone>
Sound produced when an original is loaded in the feeder
Displayed only for MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw
Use / to set volume, tap <Apply>.
Tap and move the cursor all the way to the left to mute the sound.
End sound only for error
Tap <Only When Err.> <On> <Apply>.
*
3
㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01C
Entering Sleep Mode
The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power flow to the operation panel. If no
operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can save power simply by pressing on
the operation panel. You can also use the Auto Sleep Time setting to automatically put the machine into sleep mode if it remains idle for
a specified length of time.
When in sleep mode
When the machine enters sleep mode, lights up yellow green.
Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode
When the machine is in operation
When the [Processing/Data] indicator is lit up or blinking
When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning
When a paper jam occurs
When the receiver of the optional handset or an external telephone is off the hook
When the menu screen is displayed
When a job is waiting to be scanned to a USB memory device or to a computer
When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes enters sleep mode
when error messages are displayed.)
When the machine is communicating with an LDAP server, etc.
When the SSID/network key screen for Direct Connection is displayed. (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
When You Want to Set the Auto Sleep Timer
The factory default settings for the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode are listed below. We
recommend using the factory default settings to save the most power. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before
the machine enters auto sleep mode, follow the procedure below.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw: 10 minutes (setting range 10 to 60)
MF628Cw / MF623Cn: 20 minutes (setting range 20 to 60)
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Sleep Time> Set the amount of time that elapses before the machine
automatically enters sleep mode <Apply>
Exiting Sleep Mode
Press . You can also tap the display or press any key other than to exit sleep mode.
㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If the optional handset or an external telephone is connected, the machine exits sleep mode when you take the receiver
off the hook.
㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01E
Setting Auto Shutdown Time
By enabling this setting, you can set the machine to automatically shut down. The machine automatically turns OFF after the specified
period of idle time has elapsed since entering the sleep mode. You can cut electric power consumption at night and on holidays if you
forget to turn OFF the machine.
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Shutdown Time> Set the time period <Apply>
Before setting <Auto Shutdown Time>
When the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is enabled, the machine may automatically shut down even if you are operating the
machine from the Remote UI or from the Send Function Setting Tool. A malfunction may occur, particularly if the machine
shuts down while data is being imported. When you import data using the Remote UI or use the Send Function Setting Tool,
set <Auto Shutdown Time> to <0> (Off) in advance.
The default setting is 4 hours.
If any setting of the [Timer Settings] is changed from the Remote UI while the machine is in the sleep mode, the timer for
the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is reset to the beginning. The machine automatically shuts down after the specified
period of idle time has elapsed since the timer was reset.
㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01F
Copying
This chapter describes basic copy operations and various other useful functions, such as 2-sided copying and copying both sides of an ID
card onto one page.
Using Basic Operations
Basic Copy Operations
Canceling Copies
Selecting Copy Paper
Using Copy Settings to Suit Your Needs
Enlarging or Reducing Erasing Dark Borders and Frame
Lines (Erase Frame)
Collating Copies by Page
Selecting Document Type Adjusting Density Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Sharpness 2-Sided Copying (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Copying Multiple Documents onto
One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card
onto One Page
Simplifying Your Frequent Copy Operations
Changing Default Settings
Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings
㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01H
Basic Copy Operations
Place the document(s). Placing Documents
Press and tap <Copy>.
Enter the number of copies using the numeric keys.
Enter a quantity from 1 to 999.
Press to cancel the entered quantity.
Specify the copy settings as necessary.
Tap the item you want to set. Various Copy Settings
Press .
Copying starts.
If you want to cancel copying, tap <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Copies
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
The document is automatically scanned.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
Depending on the copy settings you made, the screen for selecting the document size and paper source are displayed
when copying multiple documents. Follow the procedure below.
1
2
3
4
5
㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
When the <Paper Size & Settings Mismatch> or <The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Do you want to print?>
message is shown in the display. When an Error Message Appears
You can check the copy history, such as when or how many copies have been made. Press <Copy/Print Job> <Copy
Job Log> Select the copy document you want to check.
When copying documents with text or images that extend to the edges of the page
The edges of the document might not be copied. For more information about the scan margins, see Scan Area.
If you always want to make copies with the same settings:
Changing Default Settings
If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed:
Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings
1Select the document size.
2Select the paper source that contains the paper you want to use.
If the screen is not displayed, proceed to step 3.
3Place the next document on the platen glass, and press .
Repeat this step until you finish scanning the entire document.
4Tap <Start Copying>.
㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01J
Selecting Copy Paper
Specify the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing out copies.
You must first specify the size and type of paper that is loaded in the paper source.
Specifying Paper Size and Type
Loading Paper
<Copy> <Paper> Select the paper source ( , , )
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
< >
Selects the paper loaded in the manual feed slot.
< >
Selects the paper loaded in the drawer.
<> (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Selects the paper loaded in the optional paper drawer.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations
㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01K
Canceling Copies
If you want to cancel copying immediately after pressing , tap <Cancel> on the screen or press on the operation panel. You can
also cancel copying after checking the copy status.
Tap <Cancel> on the Screen That is Displayed While Copying
Press to Cancel
If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed
Documents have been scanned and are waiting to be printed. Select the copy document to cancel.
Check the copy job status before canceling
<Copy/Print Job> <Job Status> Select the copy document on the <Copy/Print Job Status> screen <Cancel>
<Yes>
Copy details
The number of copies, settings, and other details are displayed. If you only want to check the details without canceling copying,
press to return to the copy main screen.
<Cancel>
Cancels copying.
㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01L
Various Copy Settings
A variety of settings are available to suit your needs, such as when you want to save paper or make your documents easier to read.
Enlarging or Reducing Selecting Document Type Adjusting Density
Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Sharpness 2-Sided Copying (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Copying Multiple Documents onto
One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card
onto One Page
Erasing Dark Borders and Frame
Lines (Erase Frame)
Collating Copies by Page
㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01R
Enlarging or Reducing
You can enlarge or reduce copies by using a preset copy ratio such as <A5->A4>, or by setting a custom
copy ratio in increments of 1%.
<Copy> <Copy Ratio> Select the copy ratio
<Custom Ratio>
Tap / or the numeric keys to enter the copy ratio, and tap <Apply>. You can set any copy ratio from 25% to 400% in 1%
increments.
Preset copy ratio
Select a copy ratio.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations
㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01S
Selecting Document Type
You can select the optical image quality for the copy depending on the document type, such as text-only
documents, documents with charts and graphs, or magazine photos.
<Copy> <Original Type> Select the document type
<Text/Photo/Map>
Suitable when copying documents that contain both text and photos, or documents that include detailed lines, such as maps. You
can also select whether to give priority to copy speed or image quality.
<Printed Image>
Suitable when copying documents that contain printed photos, such as magazines or pamphlets.
<Text>
Suitable when copying documents that only contain text.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations
<Text/Photo/Map (Speed)>
Priority is given to speed over image quality. This setting is effective only when selected for color copying.
<Text/Photo/Map (Quality)>
This setting gives priority to image quality over speed. You can also adjust the level of priority given to the quality of
the text or photos. Tap / to adjust the setting, and tap <Apply>.
㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01U
Adjusting Density
You can adjust the density of the copy if the text or images in a document are too light or dark. You can also
adjust the background to remove the background color when document pages are lightly colored or yellowing.
Adjust both the density and background when copying a document printed on thin paper, such as a newspaper, so that the
text and images on the opposite side of the page are not visible in the copy.
<Copy> <Density> Adjust the density <Apply>
<->
Decreases the density.
<+>
Increases the density.
Adjusting the background color
<Copy> <Density> <Background> <Background: Manual> Adjust the background color <Apply>
<->
Makes the background color lighter.
<+>
Makes the background color darker.
<Adj. by Color>
Adjust each color in the background.
<Adjust by Color> Select the color Adjust the density <Apply> <Apply>
㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01W
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjust the levels of yellow, magenta, cyan, or black.
<Copy> <Color Balance> Select the color Adjust the color level <Apply> <Apply>
<->
Makes the selected color lighter.
<+>
Makes the selected color darker.
<Fine Adjust>
Fine tune the colors by adjusting the levels of the 3 density areas for each color.
Example: If you want to make a copy with colors that more closely match the original
Example: If you want to make a copy with brighter colors than the original
<Fine Adjust> Select the color Select the density area Adjust the color level <Apply> <Apply>
<Apply>
㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01X
Adjusting Sharpness
You can adjust sharpness of the copied image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen blurred text and lines, or
decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of magazine photos.
<Copy> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness <Apply>
<->
Decreases the sharpness, resulting in a softer image.
Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos
<+>
Increases the image sharpness.
Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations
Adjusting Density
Adjusting Color Balance
㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-01Y
2-Sided Copying
You can copy two pages of a document on both sides of the paper. You can also copy a two-sided document
on both sides of the paper, or on two separate pages.
<2-Sided> may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. Paper
<2-Sided> is not available when using <ID Card Copy>.
<Copy> <2-Sided> Select the type of 2-sided copying
Types of 2-sided copying
The illustration below shows the types of 2-sided copying.
1-Sided->2-Sided 2-Sided->2-Sided 2-Sided->1-Sided
<Original/Finishing Type>
Specify if you want to change the binding, such as when copying book-type documents in calendar-type format.
1-Sided->2-Sided
2-Sided->2-Sided
If you want to copy portrait-oriented documents in calendar-type format (short-edge binding)
<Original/Finishing Type> <1-Sided->2-Sided> <Portrait> <Calendar Type>
If you want to copy landscape-oriented documents in book-type format (short-edge binding)
<Original/Finishing Type> <1-Sided->2-Sided> <Landscape> <Book Type>
㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
2-Sided->1-Sided
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)
If you want to create copies with a different binding type than the original
<Original/Finishing Type> <2-Sided->2-Sided> Select the original orientation Select the original binding
type Select the binding type for the finished copy, which is different from that of the original document
This setting enables you to align the direction of the output paper.
When a 2-sided document is in portrait-oriented calendar-type format (short-edge binding)
<Original/Finishing Type> <2-Sided->1-Sided> <Portrait> <Calendar Type>
When a 2-sided document is in landscape-oriented book-type format (short-edge binding)
<Original/Finishing Type> <2-Sided->1-Sided> <Landscape> <Book Type>
㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-020
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)
You can copy two or four documents onto a single sheet at a reduced size. This decreases the number of
pages, enabling you to save paper.
Using <2 on 1>/<4 on 1> reduces the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the screen). You can increase
or further reduce the copy ratio before pressing , but the edges of the document might not be copied if you increase it.
<2 on 1>/<4 on 1> is not available when using <Erase Frame> or <ID Card Copy>.
When you copy multiple documents onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.
<Copy> <N on 1> Select <2 on 1> or <4 on 1> Select the document size on the <Scan Size> On the <Output
Size> screen, select the paper source that contains the paper you want to use
<2 on 1>/<4 on 1>
Select <2 on 1> to copy two pages of documents onto a single sheet, or select <4 on 1> to copy four pages of documents onto a
single sheet.
<Select Layout>
Specify how to arrange the documents on the page.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations
2-Sided Copying (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
㻝㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-022
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page
You can use <ID Card Copy> to copy the front and back sides of a card onto the same side of a page. This
function is useful when copying a driver's license or ID card.
<ID Card Copy> is available with A4/Letter size paper or larger.
<Copy Ratio> is automatically set to <100%>.
<ID Card Copy> is not available when using <Erase Frame>, <2-Sided>, or <2 on 1>/<4 on 1>.
Place the card <ID Card Copy> Turn the card over
How to place the card
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations
㻝㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-023
Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines (Erase Frame)
When copying documents that are smaller than the output paper size, frame lines may appear around the
edges in the copied image. When copying facing pages from thick book, dark borders may appear. <Erase
Frame> enables you to erase these frame lines and dark borders.
The width of the frame to erase is increased or decreased relative to the <Copy Ratio> setting.
<Erase Frame> is not available when using <2 on 1>/<4 on 1> or <ID Card Copy>.
<Copy> <Erase Frame> <On> Specify the width of the frame to erase <Apply> Select the document size on
the <Scan Size> screen
Frame Width
Tap / or the numeric keys to enter the frame width (1 to 50 mm), and tap <Apply>.
Example: If you want to erase the dark borders and frame lines
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations
㻝㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-024
Collating Copies by Page
When preparing multiple copies of multi-page documents, set <Collate> to <On> to collate copies in
sequential page order. This function is useful when preparing handouts for meetings or presentations.
<Copy> <Collate> <On>
<Off>
The copies are grouped by page and not collated. For example, if you are making three copies of a five-page document, the
printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.
<On>
The copies are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are making three copies of a five-page
document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations
㻝㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-025
Configuring Copy Settings to Your Needs
The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If you register your
frequently used settings as default settings, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every time you make copies. In
addition, you can also register combinations of multiple copy settings and use them whenever you need them.
The machine comes pre-configured with factory default settings ( Setting Menu List). You can change and register the
default settings according to your needs.
Change the copy ratio to 95% and register it as the default setting. From now on, you
can make copies without changing the copy ratio. Changing Default Settings
Go to <Favorite Settings> and register the combination of <2-Sided> and <Collate>
turned <On>. You can then easily use this setting combination whenever you need it.
Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings
㻝㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-026
Changing Default Settings
The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If you change these
default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every
time you make copies.
<Menu> <Copy Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected
item <Apply>
Settings
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations
Various Copy Settings
Copy Settings
㻝㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-027
Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings
You can register up to four frequently used combinations of copy settings. By simply selecting a registered setting combination when it is
needed, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every time you make copies, such as if you frequently set the number
of copies to 5, set <Erase Frame> to <On>, and increase the sharpness when copying. You can also display settings as shortcut buttons
in the <Home> Screen.
Registering Favorite Settings
Recalling Favorite Settings
Press and tap <Copy>.
Tap <Favorite Settings> <Register/Edit>.
Select where to register the settings.
Change the values for the settings you want to register, and tap <Apply>. Various Copy Settings
To rename the registration destination, tap <Change Name>. Entering Text
Tap <Yes>.
Select whether to register the settings as a shortcut button.
Registering Favorite Settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻝㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If you select <Yes>, a message appears. Check the message and then tap <OK>. The registered setting combination is added to
the <Home> Screen as a shortcut button.
If the <Home> Screen is full and the shortcut button cannot be added, use <Home Screen Settings> to delete registered
buttons or blanks. Customizing the <Home> Screen
Registered settings are retained even when the machine is turned OFF.
To edit registered settings, select the setting combination to be edited in step 3 and then edit the settings.
If you want to delete a registered setting, tap <Copy> <Favorite Settings> <Delete> Select the Settings <Yes>
<Yes>.
Simply select the setting combination that suit your purpose from the favorite settings.
<Copy> <Favorite Settings> Select the setting combination to be recalled
Once you have recalled the setting combination, you can also change the copy settings as needed.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations
Recalling Favorite Settings
㻝㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-028
Faxing
This chapter describes fax settings, basic fax operations and various other useful functions to suit your needs, such as PC Fax to send
documents directly from computers, Address Book to specify destinations easily, and Forwarding to receive faxes even when you are out
of the office.
Fax functions are only available for MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw.
You need to complete some procedures before using fax functions. Configuring Initial Settings for Fax
Functions (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering in the Address Book
Using Basic Operations
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Canceling Sending Faxes
Receiving Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Specifying Scanning Settings
Adjusting Resolution Adjusting Density Adjusting Sharpness
Scanning 2-Sided
Documents (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw)
Specifying Destinations Simply and Quickly
Specifying from Address Book
(Fax)
Selecting Destinations Directly by
Entering Coded Dial Numbers
(Fax)
Specifying Previously Used
Destinations (Fax)
㻝㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specifying Destinations in an
LDAP Server (Fax)
Sending and Receiving According to Your Purposes
Making a Call before Sending
Faxes (Manual Sending)
Sending Faxes to Multiple
Destinations Simultaneously
(Sequential Broadcast)
Storing Received Faxes into
Memory (Memory Reception)
Forwarding Received Faxes Archiving Sent Faxes Receiving Fax Information
Services
Sending Faxes Directly from Your Computer
Sending Faxes from Your
Computer (PC Fax) (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Internet
Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Faxing with AirPrint
In Mac OS, AirPrint provides a simple way to send faxes without using a driver. Faxing with AirPrint (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
㻝㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-029
Configuring Initial Settings for Fax Functions
Follow steps 1 to 4 described below to configure the fax settings. First, determine which receive mode best suits your intended use, and
then follow the on-screen instructions to configure the settings. For more information about a particular step, click on the link to go to
the corresponding section.
Step 1 Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use
Step 2 Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name
Step 3 Selecting the Receive Mode
Step 4 Connecting the Telephone Line
㻝㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-02A
Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use
Before configuring the fax settings, determine which receive mode best suits your intended use.
Intended use Receive mode
Use fax
only/Never use
telephone
<Auto>
This setting is for when you want to use the machine exclusively for receiving faxes, and you do not want to
use the telephone or optional handset.
Mostly use
telephone/Almost
never use fax
<Manual>
Connect your telephone or handset to the machine. This setting is for when you mostly want to use the
telephone. You can receive incoming faxes manually.
Use both fax and
telephone Use answering
machine
<Answering Machine>
Connect your answering machine. Callers can record a message if they call while you
are away from the telephone. The machine automatically receives incoming faxes.
Use standard
telephone or optional
handset
<Fax/Tel Auto Switch>
Connect your telephone or handset. The machine automatically receives incoming
faxes, and the telephone rings for incoming calls.
Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or receive faxes properly.
You may be able to manually set a receive mode other than those described above, depending on your country or region.
Receiving Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Continue to Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name
LINKS
Receiving Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
»
㻝㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-02C
Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name
Register the fax number and unit name of your machine. This information is printed at the top of each page sent from the machine.
Press and tap <Menu>.
Tap <Fax Settings> <Fax Setup Guide>.
Tap <Set Up Now>.
Tap <Next>.
Enter the fax number using the numeric keys ( Entering Text ), and tap <Apply>.
Tap <Next>.
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻝㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-02E
Selecting the Receive Mode
Select the receive mode that suits your intended use beforehand ( Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use).
Tap <Next>.
The screen shown here is displayed after the unit name has been registered ( Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name).
Select the receive mode that suits your intended use.
Select the receive mode with tapping <Yes> or <No>.
You may be able to manually set a receive mode other than those described below, depending on your country or region.
Receiving Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
To set the receive mode to <Auto>
To set the receive mode to <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>
To set the receive mode to <Answering Machine>
To set the receive mode to <Manual>
Tap <Apply>.
If the machine is set to <Answering Machine>, tap <Next>.
Continue to Connecting the Telephone Line
1
2
3
»
㻝㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-02F
Connecting the Telephone Line
Connect the telephone line to the machine.
Tap <Next>.
One of the screens shown here is displayed after the receive mode has been set ( Selecting the Receive Mode).
Connect the telephone line to the machine.
Connect the telephone cable to the telephone line jack on the machine ( ) and the telephone line jack on the wall.
If you are using a telephone or answering machine, connect it to the external telephone jack ( ).
If you are using an optional handset, connect it to the handset jack ( ).
If you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set up the telephone to receive faxes manually.
Tap <Next> after the telephone line has been connected.
Notice for Connecting the Telephone Line
This product includes the Telephone Line Cord and Adapter to connect the telephone line. Depending on your country or
region, you may need to use the provided Adapter to connect the Telephone Line Cord to the wall telephone jack. If you
use the provided Adapter, follow the instructions below to connect correctly.
If you use provided Adapter, use the Telephone Line Cord with 6 contacts connector in the package with Adapter.
Do not connect the Telephone Line Cord with 2 contacts connector to Adapter. There is the case that this product or
connected telephone does not work correctly.
Adapter to use is different depending on your country or a region. Select the proper type of Adapter which you usually
use.
1
2
3
㻝㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Tap <Yes>.
Tap <OK>.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
When the machine is restarted, the telephone line type is automatically set.
If the machine does not automatically set the type of telephone line
Follow the procedure below to set the type of telephone line. If you are not sure of the type of phone line you are using, contact
your local telephone company. <Select Line Type> may not be available depending on the country where you are using the machine.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Select Line Type> <Manual> Select the type of telephone line
LINKS
Installation
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Receiving Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
4
5
6
㻝㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-02H
Sending Faxes
You need to complete some procedures before using fax functions. Configuring Initial Settings for Fax
Functions (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Place the document(s). Placing Documents
Press and tap <Fax>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Press .
If the destinations set by the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset the settings before
sending.
Enter the destination using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
If your machine is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), tap <R> before entering the destination. If <R> is not
available, you need to register the R-key settings. R-Key Setting
If you enter the wrong characters, press . (Press to delete each character one by one; press and hold to delete all the input
characters at once.)
Using the Address Book to quickly specify destinations. Specifying Registered Destinations
If a confirmation window appears
When <Confirm Entered Fax Number> is set to <On>, the input screen reappears so that you can confirm the destination
(Checking Destinations before Sending Documents). Enter the destination again.
Adding a destination
To enter a second or subsequent destination, tap <Destination> <Specify Using Numeric Keys>. You can specify up to 10
destinations.
To delete destinations
If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Tap <Destination> <Confirm/Edit>.
1
2
3
4
㻝㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To send overseas
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove>.
4Tap <Yes>.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations
Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap /to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a
destination you want to delete, and press .
Enter the international access code, the country code, the area code, and the fax number to specify the destination.
1Enter the international access code.
2Tap <Pause>.
<p> (pause) is inserted between numbers. In this case, 012 will be dialed first, then 4 seconds later, the next
number will be dialed.
Inputting pauses is optional; however, consecutive numbers that are input without pauses may not be
recognized correctly.
Pauses can be inserted continuously.
One pause inserts 4 seconds of waiting time. This time can be changed as necessary. Set Pause Time
3Enter the country code, the area code, and the fax number.
㻝㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
Tap the item you want to set. Various Fax Settings
Press (B&W) to start sending.
Scanning starts.
If you want to cancel sending, tap <Cancel> <Yes>.
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the faxes are sent.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
4Tap <Pause> to insert a pause at the end of the fax number as necessary.
The waiting time inserted here is fixed to 10 seconds. This time cannot be changed.
5Tap <Apply>.
Follow the procedures below.
1Select the document size.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to step 3.
2Place the next document on the platen glass, and press (B&W).
Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages.
3Tap <Start Sending>.
The faxes are sent.
5
6
㻝㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If you always want to send faxes with the same settings:
Changing Default Settings
If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed:
Registering Frequently Used Fax Settings
If you want to sound an alarm when the handset is off the hook:
Off-Hook Alarm
LINKS
Canceling Sending Faxes
Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents
㻝㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-02J
Specifying Registered Destinations
You can specify destinations by selecting them from the Address Book or coded dial numbers, as well as by using the numeric keys. To
use the Address Book or coded dial numbers, you need to register destinations beforehand. You can also specify previously used
destinations. If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can also specify destinations in the server.
Specifying from Address Book
(Fax)
Selecting Destinations Directly by
Entering Coded Dial Numbers
(Fax)
Specifying Previously Used
Destinations (Fax)
Specifying Destinations in an
LDAP Server (Fax)
TIPS for Enhancing Security
If you want to limit available destinations to ones from the Address Book, ones in an LDAP server, or previously specified
ones:
Limiting Available Destinations
If you want to disable specifying previously used destinations:
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Registering in the Address Book
Registering LDAP Servers
㻝㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-02K
Specifying from Address Book (Fax)
The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of registered destinations or by
searching by name for destinations with recipient names.
You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering in the Address Book
Press and tap <Address Book>.
You can also tap <Fax> <Destination> <Specify from Address Book>.
Tap / to select a tab.
<All>
Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book. For the marks beside the destinations, see the explanations below.
<>
Displays a list of destinations registered in Favorites.
<A-Z>/<0-9>/<ABC> to <YZ>
Displays destinations with recipient names whose first characters correspond to the characters of the selected tab.
<>
Displays destinations for faxes.
<>
Displays destinations for e-mails. To specify destinations using this tab, see Specifying from Address Book .
<>
Displays destinations for I-fax. To specify destinations using this tab, see Specifying from Address Book .
<>
Displays destinations for shared folders and FTP servers. To specify destinations using this tab, see Specifying from
Address Book .
<>
Displays a list of destinations registered in Group Dial.
Select a destination.
If you want to specify multiple destinations
Repeat the following steps. You can specify up to 300 destinations.
<Destination> <Specify from Address Book> Select a tab Select a destination.
1
2
3
㻝㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To specify any additional destinations with the numeric keys, tap <Destination> <Specify Using Numeric Keys>.
To delete destinations
If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)
1Tap <Destination> <Confirm/Edit>.
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove>.
If you specified Group Dial in step 2, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping <Destination> displays
destinations registered in the group.
4Tap <Yes>.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations
Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a
destination you want to delete, and press .
㻝㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-02L
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers (Fax)
Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address Book. You can specify an
address simply by entering its coded dial number.
To use coded dialing, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand. Registering Destinations in the
Address Book
Press and tap <Fax>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send.
Tap <Destination> <Specify from Coded Dial>.
Use the numeric keys to enter a three-digit number (001 to 281).
If you enter the wrong characters, press . (Press to delete each character one by one; press and hold to delete all the input
characters at once.)
If a confirmation screen appears
When <Coded Dial TX Confirmation> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the destination and the name for the
number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are shown.) Check the contents and if
everything is correct, and tap <On>. To specify a different destination, tap <Cancel> and re-enter the three-digit coded dial
number. Displaying Destinations in Address Book
If you want to specify multiple destinations
Repeat the following steps. You can specify up to 281 destinations.
<Destination> <Specify from Coded Dial> Enter a number.
To specify any additional destinations with the numeric keys, tap <Destination> <Specify Using Numeric Keys>.
To delete destinations
If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Tap <Destination> <Confirm/Edit>.
1
2
3
㻝㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove>.
If you specified Group Dial in step 2, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping <Number of Destinations>
displays destinations registered in the group.
4Tap <Yes>.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations
Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a
destination you want to delete, and press .
㻝㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-02S
Specifying Previously Used Destinations (Fax)
You can select a destination from among the past three destinations. When you specify a previously used
destination, the machine also sets the same fax settings such as density you used the last time you sent
documents to that destination.
When <Restrict Resending from Log> is set to <On>, you cannot use this feature. Disabling Use of Previously Used
Destinations
Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations, and disables this
feature. Limiting Available Destinations
The destinations in Manual Sending are not available for this feature. Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual
Sending)
When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specified are deleted.
Press and tap <Fax>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Select <Destination> <Recall Set.>.
Select a destination.
If you are using a sequential broadcast log, only the address specified for the first transmission is displayed, but all the
destinations are specified. Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)
.
The selected destination and the fax settings used at the time are specified. You can also change the settings before sending.
To delete destinations
If you used a sequential broadcast log, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Tap <Destination> <Confirm/Edit>.
1
2
3
㻝㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove>.
If you specified Group Dial in step 2, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping <Number of Destinations>
displays destinations registered in the group.
4Tap <Yes>.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations
Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a
destination you want to delete, and press .
㻝㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-02U
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (Fax)
If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can use the destinations registered in the server. To specify
destinations, access an LDAP server via the machine, and then search for a destination.
You need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand. Registering LDAP Servers
Press and tap <Fax>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Tap <Destination> <Specify from LDAP Server>.
Select the LDAP server you are using.
Select the search criteria.
Name, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for searching destinations.
Multiple search criteria can be specified at the same time.
Specify the search criteria using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
The following screen shows an example for when <Name> is selected in step 4 to search by personal name.
1
2
3
4
5
㻝㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Tapping <A/a/12> toggles the input modes (except for searching by fax number).
To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 4 and 5.
Tap <Search Method>.
Select the search method.
<Using All Conditions Below>
Searches and displays the destinations that meet all the search criteria specified in steps 4 and 5.
<Using Some Conditions Below>
All destinations meeting any of the search criteria specified in steps 4 and 5 are displayed as search results.
Tap <Start Search>.
The destinations meeting your search criteria are displayed.
If the authentication screen appears when you tap <Start Search>, enter the user name of the machine and the password
registered in the LDAP server, and tap <Apply>. Registering LDAP Servers
Select a destination, and tap <Apply>.
Up to 10 destinations can be specified.
To search for a destination using other search criteria, repeat steps 2 to 9.
The maximum number of destinations that you can specify when using the numeric keys in combination with an LDAP server is
10. For example, if seven destinations have been specified using the numeric keys, up to three destinations can be specified
using an LDAP server.
To delete destinations
If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Tap <Destination> <Confirm/Edit>.
6
7
8
9
㻝㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove>.
4Tap <Yes>.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations
Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a
destination you want to delete, and press .
㻝㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-02X
Adjusting Resolution
You can select the resolution suitable for your document type. The higher the resolution is, the clearer the
image becomes, but the longer it takes to send.
<Fax> <Resolution> Select the resolution
<200 x 100 dpi (Normal)>
Suitable for documents that contain text only.
<200 x 200 dpi (Fine)>
Suitable for documents that contain fine text.
<200 x 200 dpi (Photo)>
Suitable for documents that contain photographs.
<200 x 400 dpi (Superfine)>
Achieves an even finer resolution than Fine.
<400 x 400 dpi (Ultrafine)>
Achieves an even finer resolution than Superfine.
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
㻝㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-030
Adjusting Sharpness
You can adjust sharpness of the image before sending. Increase the sharpness to sharpen blurred text and
lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of magazine photos.
<Fax> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness <Apply>
<->
Decreases the sharpness, resulting in a softer image.
Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos
<+>
Increases the image sharpness.
Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Adjusting Density
㻝㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-031
Scanning 2-Sided Documents
The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of documents in the feeder.
Place the documents in the feeder; the machine cannot scan both sides of documents automatically when the documents are
placed on the platen glass or when the machine is set to Manual Sending.
<Fax> <2-Sided Original> Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type>
<Book Type>
Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.
<Calendar Type>
Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending)
㻝㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03Y
Configuring Fax Settings to Your Needs
The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If you register your
frequently used settings as default settings, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every time you send a fax. In
addition, you can also register combinations of multiple fax settings and use them whenever you need them.
The machine comes pre-configured with factory default settings ( Setting Menu List). You can change and register the
default settings according to your needs.
Increase the density and register it as the default setting. From now on, you can send
faxes without changing the density. Changing Default Settings
Register the combination of 2-sided scan and specified recipients in <Favorite
Settings>. You can then easily use this setting combination whenever you need it.
Registering Frequently Used Fax Settings
㻝㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-032
Changing Default Settings
The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If you change these
default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every
time you send faxes.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Change Default Settings> Tap the setting Change the default
value of the selected item <Apply>
Settings
Tap the item you want to set, and change the default value.
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Various Fax Settings
Fax Settings (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
㻝㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03X
Registering Frequently Used Fax Settings
You can register up to 18 frequently used combinations of fax settings. You can quickly display registered settings when needed,
eliminating the need to make involved settings every time, such as "making a scan of a two-sided original, sending it to 5 destinations,
and setting the sharpness." You can also display settings as shortcut buttons in the <Home> Screen.
Registering Favorite Settings
Recalling Favorite Settings
Press and tap <Fax>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Change the values for the settings you want to register. Various Fax Settings
To also include the destination in a favorite fax setting, enter the destination to be registered. Sending Faxes (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Tap <Favorite Settings> <Register>.
Check the message and tap <OK>.
Select where to register the settings.
Registering Favorite Settings
1
2
3
4
5
㻝㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Check the details of the settings to be registered, and tap <Apply>. Various Fax Settings
To change the value of a setting to be registered, tap the setting.
To rename the registration destination, tap <Change Name>. Entering Text
Select whether to register the settings as a shortcut button.
If you select <Yes>, a message appears. Check the message and then tap <OK>. The registered setting combination is added to
the <Home> Screen as a shortcut button.
If the <Home> Screen is full and the button cannot be added, use <Home Screen Settings> to delete registered buttons or
blanks. Customizing the <Home> Screen
Registered settings are saved even when the machine is turned OFF.
To edit or delete registered settings, go to <Fax> <Favorite Settings> <Edit/Delete> <Edit> or <Delete> and then
follow the steps below.
To edit a setting:
Select the setting to be edited Change the setting and tap <Apply> <Yes>.
To delete a setting:
Select the setting to be deleted tap <Yes>.
Destinations cannot be changed once the settings have been registered. To change a destination, delete the settings and then
register them again.
If you registered a destination that was specified from the Address Book and then delete the destination entry in the Address
Book, the destination is also deleted from the favorite fax settings.
Simply select the setting combination that suits your purpose from the favorite settings.
<Fax> <Favorite Settings> Select the setting combination to be recalled
Recalling Favorite Settings
6
7
㻝㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-033
Canceling Sending Faxes
If you want to cancel sending faxes immediately after pressing (B&W), tap <Cancel> on the display or press on the operation
panel. You can also cancel sending faxes after checking the fax status.
Tap <Cancel> on the screen during fax transmission
Press to cancel
If the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed
Documents have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel.
Check the transmission status before canceling
<TX Job> <Job Status> Select the document on the <TX Job Status> screen <Cancel> <Yes>
Fax details
The number of sending document, settings, and other details are displayed. If you only want to check the details without sending,
press to return to the fax main screen.
<Cancel>
Cancels sending.
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents
㻝㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-034
Receiving Faxes
This section describes the methods for receiving faxes and how to set up the machine to receive faxes. You need to complete some
procedures for using fax functions before specifying the receiving settings. Configuring Initial Settings for Fax
Functions (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
The machine can print received fax documents on A4 or Letter size paper. If received fax documents are printed on other
paper sizes, a portion of the page may not be printed or a page may be printed on two separate sheets of paper.
Methods for Receiving Faxes
The machine provides the following receiving methods. Select the method that best suits your needs and then set it up by following the
procedures in Setting Up the Machine to Receive Faxes.
<Auto>
Dedicated to receiving faxes
The machine receives faxes automatically. Even if someone makes a call to you, you cannot talk to the caller.
<Fax/Tel
Auto Switch>
When the call is a fax
The machine receives the fax automatically.
When the call is a telephone call
An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset to answer the call.
You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.
<Manual>
When the call is a fax
An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset. If you hear a beep, tap <Fax> <Start Receiving> to receive faxes.
When the call is a telephone call
An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset. If you do not hear a beep, start your conversation.
You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.
You can set the machine to automatically receive faxes when an incoming call rings within a specified
timeframe. Switch to Auto RX
<Answering
Machine>
When the call is a fax
After an incoming call rings, the machine receives the fax automatically.
When the call is a telephone call
The answering machine activates, enabling the caller to leave a message. If you pick up the handset before the
answering machine starts recording a message, you can talk with the caller.
You need to connect your answering machine to the machine beforehand.
Set the answering machine to answer after a few rings.
We recommend that you add approximately 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the message or set the
maximum recording time to 20 seconds.
<Net
Switch> The machine distinguishes between fax and telephone calls. This mode is only available for certain countries and
requires subscription to a network switch service.
You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.
Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or receive faxes properly.
If you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set the telephone to not receive faxes automatically.
If you pick up the telephone handset and hear a beep, the call is a fax. You can receive the fax just by using the telephone to
enter a specific ID number.
Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)
㻝㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Setting Up the Machine to Receive Faxes
Press and tap <Fax>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Tap <RX Mode>.
Select the receiving method.
When selecting <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>
If you want to print received documents on both sides of paper: Print on Both Sides
If you want to print information, such as reception date and time, at the bottom of received documents: RX Page Footer
If you want to continue printing even when the toner cartridge is low: Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is
Low
Specify the following three settings as necessary. When the setting is complete, tap <Apply>.
<Ring Start Time>
Enables you to specify the duration during which the machine determines whether an incoming call is a fax or a
telephone call. (Setting values: 5 to 30 seconds; default setting: 8 seconds)
<Incoming Ring Time>
Enables you to specify the duration during which an incoming call rings for a telephone call. (Setting values: 15 to 300
seconds; default setting: 22 seconds)
<After Ring>
Enables you to specify how the machine operates if you do not pick up the handset while an incoming call is ringing.
Select <End> to disconnect the call or <Receive> to receive an incoming fax. (Default setting: <Receive>)
1
2
3
㻝㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)
When you pick up the telephone and get a fax signal, you do not need to go to the machine to receive the fax. Just enter a specific ID
number (default setting: 25) with the telephone, and you can start receiving the fax.
When the telephone is not directly connected with the machine, the remote reception function is not available.
When an incoming call rings, pick up the telephone handset.
If you hear a beep, enter the ID number for Remote Reception with the telephone.
The ID number is set to 25 by default. You can change this number as necessary. Remote RX
Hang up the handset.
LINKS
Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents
1
2
3
㻝㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-035
Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes
In addition to the basic sending and receiving methods, there are a variety of other methods to suit your purposes.
Making a Call before Sending
Faxes (Manual Sending)
Sending Faxes to Multiple
Destinations Simultaneously
(Sequential Broadcast)
Storing Received Faxes into
Memory (Memory Reception)
Forwarding Received Faxes Archiving Sent Faxes Receiving Fax Information
Services
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Receiving Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents
㻝㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-036
Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending)
You can send faxes manually at the end of a phone conversation. When you hear a beep over the phone, it
means the recipient is trying to receive your faxes. Press (B&W) to send your faxes.
You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.
Place the document(s). Placing Documents
The machine cannot automatically scan both sides of the documents in Manual Sending.
When the document is placed on the platen glass, only one page can be sent.
Press and tap <Fax>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Press .
If the destinations set by the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset the settings before
sending.
Specify the scanning settings as necessary. Various Fax Settings
Dial the recipient's fax number.
Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive your faxes.
If you hear a beep, proceed to step 7.
Press (B&W), and hang up the handset.
LINKS
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Canceling Sending Faxes
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
㻝㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-037
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential
Broadcast)
You can send faxes to up to 310 destinations at once. Use the numeric keys or the Address Book to specify
multiple destinations. If your office has an LDAP server installed.
The maximum number of destinations that you can specify when using an LDAP server or the numeric keys is 10 respectively.
If you use the numeric keys in combination with an LDAP server, a total of 10 destinations can be specified. For example, if
seven destinations have been specified using the numeric keys, up to three destinations can be specified using an LDAP server.
When <Restrict Sequential Broadcast> is set to <Reject Sequential Broadcast>, you cannot use this feature. Prohibiting
Sequential Broadcasting (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering in the Address Book
Place the document(s). Placing Documents
Press and tap <Fax>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Press .
If the destinations set by the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset the settings before
sending.
Specify the destination.
To specify with the numeric keys, enter the fax number, and tap <Apply>. To specify any additional destinations, select
<Destination> <Specify Using Numeric Keys> before repeating the same procedure.
To specify from the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book (Fax).
Using Coded Dial Numbers, see Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers (Fax).
To specify from an LDAP server, see Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (Fax).
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
Tap the settings you want to specify. Various Fax Settings
*
*
*
1
2
3
4
5
㻝㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-038
Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)
You can store received faxes into memory, and then print them later. This feature can prevent unauthorized
persons from seeing confidential documents unintentionally.
Storing Documents into Memory
Printing Documents in Memory
Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory
The documents in memory can be also forwarded to a destination. Selecting a Document to Forward
To store received documents into memory, set <Memory Lock Settings> to <On>. You can also specify optional settings such as a
security setting that makes a password necessary to unlock the feature and a time setting that specifies a period of time during the day
in which received documents are stored in memory.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Memory Lock Settings> <On> Specify each setting
<Apply>
<Memory Lock PIN>
Enables you to register a password of up to seven digits. To register a password, use the numeric keys to enter a password, and
tap <Apply>. Enter the same numbers again for confirmation, and tap <Apply>. This password is necessary when you change the
memory reception settings or when you deactivate the Memory Reception feature to print all the stored documents. If you do not
want to register a password, just tap <Apply> without entering anything.
Passwords with only zeros, as in "00" or "0000000", are not allowed.
<Report Print>
Enables you to print RX Result reports every time documents are stored into memory. To print reports, tap <On>. You also need
to set <RX Result Report> to <On>. RX Result Report
<Memory Lock Time>
Specify a period of time during the day in which received documents are stored in memory. If you do not set a period of time, the
machine stores every document into memory when Memory Reception is turned on.
To print received documents in memory, set <Memory Lock Settings> to <Off>. All the documents in memory are printed.
You cannot select a specific document for printing.
If a time for the feature to deactivate has been specified, the documents are automatically printed at the specified time.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Memory Lock Settings> <Off>
Storing Documents into Memory
Printing Documents in Memory
㻝㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
You can check detailed information about the documents stored in memory, including sender fax numbers and number of pages sent,
and then delete unnecessary documents.
Press .
Tap <RX Job>.
Tap <Job Status>.
Select the document you want to check.
To delete the checked document
Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory
1Tap <Delete>.
2Tap <Yes>.
1
2
3
4
㻝㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-039
Forwarding Received Faxes
You can forward received documents to other destinations. You can select a document from among all the
documents received in memory for forwarding, or set the machine to automatically forward every received
document to specified destinations. Fax numbers as well as e-mail addresses, I-Fax, shared folders in
computers and FTP server can be specified as forwarding destinations.
Available destinations for forwarding are limited to the destinations registered in the Address Book. If no destinations are
registered, register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature.
Registering in the Address Book
If e-mail addresses, shared folders in computers, or FTP server are specified as forwarding destinations, the document is
converted to PDF format and sent. If I-Faxes are specified as forwarding destinations, the document is converted to TIFF
format and sent.
㻝㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03A
Selecting a Document to Forward
The machine forwards the document that you select from among all the documents received in memory. To use this feature, first activate
the Memory Reception feature. Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)
As long as the Memory Reception feature is not deactivated, the documents in memory are not deleted even after they are
forwarded; the same documents can be forwarded multiple times.
Press .
Tap <RX Job>.
Tap <Job Status>.
Select the document you want to forward.
Tap <Forward>.
Select the forwarding destination from the Address Book.
For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book (Fax).
The document is forwarded to the specified destination.
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻝㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03C
Forwarding All the Received Documents Automatically
The machine can forward all the received documents to specified destinations. Even if you are out of the office, you can receive fax
information anytime, anywhere.
Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically
Printing Documents to be Forwarded
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded
While the Forwarding feature is activated, all the documents to be received are automatically forwarded.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings> <Enable Forwarding Settings> <On> Select the forwarding
destination from the Address Book
For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book (Fax).
If you want to check the documents to be forwarded for yourself, you can set the machine to print the documents whenever they are
forwarded, or to print only the documents that failed to be forwarded.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings> <Print Images> Select <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>
<On>
Prints all the documents to be forwarded.
<Only When Error Occurs>
Prints only the documents that failed to be forwarded.
You can store documents that failed to be forwarded in memory, and print, resend, or delete them later.
Storing Documents that Failed to be Forwarded in Memory
Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically
Printing Documents to be Forwarded
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded
㻝㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings> <Store Images in Memory> <Only When Error Occurs>
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents Stored in Memory
Press .
Tap <Fax Forwarding Errors>.
Select the document you want to check.
To print the checked document
1Tap <Print/Forward>.
2Tap <Print>.
3Tap <Yes>.
1
2
3
㻝㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To resend the checked document
To delete the checked document
LINKS
Receiving Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents
1Tap <Print/Forward>.
2Tap <Forward>.
3Select the forwarding destination from the Address Book.
For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book (Fax).
1Tap <Delete>.
2Tap <Yes>.
㻝㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-042
Archiving Sent Faxes
In addition to the address specified when the fax is sent, you can also send faxed documents to a preset
storage address for archiving. This is useful for keeping a log of what has been sent. You can specify a fax
number, an e-mail address, a shared folder on the computer, an FTP server or an I-Fax as the storage
address.
Only destinations in the Address Book can be specified as a storage address. To use the Address Book, the destination must be
registered beforehand. Registering in the Address Book
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Communication Management Settings> <Archive TX Document>
<On> Select the archive destination from the Address Book
For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book (Fax).
㻝㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03E
Receiving Fax Information Services
Through fax information services, you can easily get a variety of helpful lifestyle and work information from
companies and organizations. This section describes a typical procedure for receiving these services.
Depending on the service, actual procedures may differ from the ones described below. Follow the procedures for the service
you are using.
Press and tap <Fax>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Tap <Hook>.
If an external telephone or the optional handset is connected to the machine, you can pick up the handset instead of tapping
<Hook>.
When you hear a dial tone, dial the information service.
When the recorded message of the information service answers, press .
This step is unnecessary if the machine is using a tone-dialing line.
Use the numeric keys to enter the service number assigned for the information you want to receive.
You can also use the keypad on the telephone to enter the information service number.
1
2
3
4
5
㻝㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03F
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents
The statuses and communication logs for sent and received fax and I-Fax documents can be checked separately for sending and
receiving. You can check detailed document information, including destinations and number of pages, an d you can delete unnecessary
documents.
When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the communication logs. Display Job Log
The destinations in Manual Sending cannot be checked because they are not displayed.
Press .
Tap <TX Job> or <RX Job>.
Check the statuses and communication logs for sent and received documents.
To check the statuses for sent and received documents
1Tap <Job Status>.
2Select the document whose status you want to check.
<TX Job Status>/<RX Job Status>
Displays a list of the documents that are being sent and received or are waiting to be processed.
<Details>
Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list. If you specified multiple destinations, the
number of specified destinations is displayed on the screen. To check the details of specified multiple destinations, tap
<Destination>. If you find an unnecessary document, tap <Cancel> or <Delete>, and tap <Yes>.
To check the communication logs for sent and received documents
1Tap <Job Log>.
1
2
3
㻝㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
2Select the document whose log you want to check.
<TX Job Log>/<RX Job Log>
Displays a list of the documents that were sent and received. <OK> is displayed when a document was sent or received
successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a document failed to be sent or received because it was canceled or there
was some error.
<Details>
Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list.
If the <Result> column shows a three-digit number
This number represents an error code. When an Error Code Appears
LINKS
TX Result Report
Communication Management Report
RX Result Report
㻝㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03J
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)
You can send fax documents created on your computer application directly from your computer. This feature eliminates the need to print
documents for faxing and saves paper. You need to complete some procedures, such as specifying the basic fax settings ( Configuring
Initial Settings for Fax Functions (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)) and referring to the MF Driver Installation Guide to install
the fax driver on your computer, before using this feature.
About the Fax Driver Help
Clicking [Help] on the fax driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen you can see information that is not in the e-
Manual, including information about driver features such as registering frequently used settings and how to set up those
features.
If you are a Mac OS user, see MF Driver Installation Guide for installing the fax driver and Fax Driver's Help for using fax
functions ( For Mac OS Users).
Depending on the operating system and the version of the fax driver you are using, the fax driver screens in this manual may
differ from your screens.
㻝㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03K
Sending PC Faxes
When <Allow Fax Driver TX> is set to <Off> on the machine, you cannot send faxes from computers. Prohibiting PC
Faxing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
You need to enable Department ID Management on the fax driver you are using if Department ID Management is enabled on
the machine. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen. Setting the Department ID Management
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the
application you are using.
Select the fax driver for your machine, and click [Print].
When Sending from the Windows Store app in Windows 8/Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen and use the procedure shown below.
Windows 8/Server 2012
[Devices] Your printer Tap or click [Print].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
[Devices] [Print] Your printer Tap or click [Print].
If you send faxes using this method, only a limited number of fax functions are available.
If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, move to the desktop
and proceed to step 3. This message appears when the machine is set to display the user name when sending a fax and similar
instances.
Specify the destination.
To specify only one destination
To specify multiple destinations at once
1Click the [Enter Destination] tab.
2Set the communication mode or fax number (or URI).
1
2
3
㻝㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If you need to specify a number to dial an outside line, select [Detailed Settings] [Add Outside Dialing Prefix to G3/IP Fax
Number] and enter the number in [Outside Dialing Prefix]. The specified number is added to the beginning of the fax number
when the machine dials.
To make it easier to specify destinations using the Address Book, see Using Registered Destinations.
Selecting [Store Sent Fax Information and Image] enables you to store the logs for sending documents and check detailed
information of a sent document along with its image, including destinations and number of pages. For more information, click
[Help] on the fax driver screen.
[Detailed Settings] in the print dialog box If you have selected [Confirm Fax Number/URI when Setting Destination] in the
dialog box that is displayed when [Security Settings] of the [Special] tab is clicked, also enter a number in [Confirm Fax
Number] or [Confirm URI]. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.
Attach a cover sheet to the document as necessary. Attaching Cover Sheets to PC Faxes
Click [Send] to send the document.
1Click the [Select Destination] tab.
2Click [Add Destination].
3Set the communication mode or fax number (or URI).
4Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add concurrent destinations.
4
㻝㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
5
㻝㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03L
Attaching Cover Sheets to PC Faxes
You can attach a cover sheet to the document you are sending. Select a cover sheet from three preset cover sheets in the fax driver, or
create your own custom cover sheets. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the
application you are using.
Select the fax driver for your machine, and click [Print].
Click the [Cover Sheet] button and specify each setting.
[Cover Sheet Attachment]
Select [Different Sheet to Each Destination] or [Same Sheet to All Destinations].
[Style]
Select a cover sheet from the three preset cover sheets (Template 1 to 3). The layout of the selected cover sheet is displayed
in the image on the left.
[Items to Include]
Displays items that are to be included on a cover sheet. To change the items to be included, click [Settings].
1
2
3
㻝㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Sender] tab
Select the sender items you want to include and enter the information.
[Destination] tab
Select the destination items you want to include and enter the information. Destination names, company names,
department names, and fax numbers specified in the [Select Destination]/[Enter Destination] tab ( Sending PC
Faxes) are included on the cover sheet.
[Logo] tab/[Signature] tab
Specify each setting. The following screen shows an example for when the [Logo] tab is selected.
With/without logos or signatures
Select [Print with Logo] or [Print with Signature] if you want to include logos or signatures on the cover sheet.
Have the bitmap files for logos or signatures ready beforehand.
Location of logos or signature files
Specify the location where logos or signatures files are saved. Click [Browse] to locate the file you are using for
logos or signatures.
Size and position of the specified logos or signatures
Adjust the size and position of the specified logos or signatures while checking the image displayed on the left.
㻝㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If you want to insert an attention note, select [Insert Attention Note] and select a note from the [Attention
Note] drop-down list.
Attention notes such as "Urgent" and "Confidential" are available. You can also enter characters directly in [Attention Note]
instead of selecting a note from the list.
You can also add comments in [Comment to Include].
Click [Preview] to check the contents of the cover sheet, and if everything is correct, click [OK].
To modify the contents, perform the steps from 3 again.
The specified cover sheet is attached to the fax when the fax is sent.
[Details] tab
[Include Number of Sheets to Send]
Select this check box if you want to include the number of sheets that you are going to send in the cover sheet
and specify the number of sheets in [Number of Sheets to Send]. The number of sheets to send is not counted
automatically. The value specified here is included in the cover sheet.
[Include Title]
Select this check box if you want to add a title to the cover sheet and enter the title in [Title].
4
5
㻝㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03R
Using Address Book for PC Faxes
Once you register frequently used destinations for PC faxes in the Address Book, you can easily specify
destinations whenever you send PC faxes. Also, Address Book data in CSV format created on applications such
as Microsoft Excel can be imported into the machine, or the Address Book data can be exported to a file for
use on other fax machines or applications.
You cannot use the Address Book if you do not have permission to access the folder where the Address Book is saved. Log on
as a user who has permission to access the folder, or change the save location of the Address Book. Changing Location to
Save Address Book Data
㻝㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03S
Registering Destinations
This section describes how to register destinations in the Address Book for PC faxes. You can select single destinations from among those
registered in the Address Book to make one group destination (Group Dial), which is useful when sending to multiple destinations at
once.
Registering Destinations
Registering Multiple Destinations as One Destination (Group Dial)
A total of 6,000 destinations can be registered: 3,000 for single destinations and 3,000 for group destinations.
You can select and combine registered group destinations and register them as separate group destinations.
You cannot use the Address Book if you do not have permission to access the folder where the Address Book is saved. Log on
as a user who has permission to access the folder, or change the save location of the Address Book. Changing Location to
Save Address Book Data
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click the fax driver icon for your machine and click [Printing preferences].
Click the [Select Destination] tab [Edit Address Book].
Click [Add Person].
Registering Destinations
1
2
3
4
㻝㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To change or delete registered destinations, select a destination from [Address Book], and click [Edit] or [Delete].
Specify each setting and click [OK].
Address
Enter the recipient name, company name, and department name.
[Notes]
Enter comments as necessary.
Fax Number
Enter the fax number(s). Hyphens can be inserted between numbers as necessary. If you want to add explanations of the uses
for the fax numbers, such as "Home" or "Office", enter them in [Description].
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click the fax driver icon for your machine and click [Printing preferences].
Registering Multiple Destinations as One Destination (Group Dial)
5
1
2
㻝㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click the [Select Destination] tab [Edit Address Book].
Click [Add Group].
To change or delete registered destinations, select a destination from [Address Book], and click [Edit] or [Delete].
Specify each setting and click [OK].
[Group Name]
Enter a group name such as "Sales Department 1."
[Show]
Select the type of the destinations to display in [Available Destinations], from which you can select the destinations to register
in Group Dial.
[Person]
Displays single destinations.
[Group]
Displays group destinations.
[All]
Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book.
[Available Destinations]
Select the destinations to register in Group Dial, and click [Add]. The selected destinations are displayed in [Current Group
Members].
To select multiple destinations, click the destinations while holding down [SHIFT] key or [CTRL] key.
3
4
5
㻝㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To delete a destination from [Current Group Members], select a destination and click [Delete].
[Notes]
Enter comments as necessary.
㻝㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03U
Using Registered Destinations
This section describes how to specify destinations registered in the Address Book. Registering Destinations
You cannot use the Address Book if you do not have permission to access the folder where the Address Book is saved. Log on
as a user who has permission to access the folder, or change the save location of the Address Book. Changing Location to
Save Address Book Data
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the
application you are using.
Select the fax driver icon for your machine, and click [Print].
Click the [Select Destination] tab Select the Address Book from [Address Book List].
Select a destination and click [Add to Destination List].
To specify multiple destinations, repeat step 4.
1
2
3
4
㻝㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
You can search for destinations with [Address List].
Clicking [Edit Address Book] allows you to edit the Address Book.
㻝㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-03W
Importing/Exporting Address Book Data from the Fax Driver
Address Book data in CSV format created on applications such as Microsoft Excel can be imported into the machine, or the Address Book
data can be exported to a file for use on other fax machines or applications. The machine supports two file formats: CSV (*.csv) files and
Canon Address Book files (*.abk).
Importing Address Book Data
Exporting Address Book Data
Changing Location to Save Address Book Data
You cannot use the Address Book if you do not have permission to access the folder where the Address Book is saved. Log on
as a user who has permission to access the folder, or change the save location of the Address Book. Changing Location to
Save Address Book Data
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click the fax driver icon for your machine and click [Printing preferences].
Click the [Select Destination] tab [Edit Address Book].
Click [Import].
Importing Address Book Data
1
2
3
4
㻝㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select the file to import and click [Open].
For a CSV file, specify the separators used in the file.
The destinations imported from the file are displayed in [Address Book].
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click the fax driver icon for your machine and click [Printing preferences].
Exporting Address Book Data
5
1
2
㻝㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click the [Select Destination] tab [Edit Address Book].
Click [Export].
If you have selected [Protect with Password when Exporting Address List] in the dialog box that is displayed when [Security
Settings] of the [Special] tab is clicked, a dialog box for entering a password is displayed when you click [Export]. For more
information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.
Specify the location to save the file, the file name, and the file format, and then click [Save].
For a CSV file, specify the separators used in the file.
3
4
5
㻝㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The Address Book data is exported to the specified location.
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click the fax driver icon for your machine and click [Printing preferences].
Click the [Select Destination] tab [Edit Address Book].
Click [Specify a Folder].
Changing Location to Save Address Book Data
1
2
3
4
㻝㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the location to save the Address Book data, and click [OK].
Save the Address Book data in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission.
If you want to create an Address Book, click [New], or if you want to copy the existing Address Book to the
specified folder, click [Copy].
The Address Book is created or copied.
If an Address Book already exists in the folder selected in step 4, the following message is displayed. If you want to use the
existing Address Book, click [Use as-is], and if you want to use the Address Book of the fax driver, click [Overwrite].
5
6
㻝㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-040
Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)
The Internet Fax (I-Fax) function allows you to send and receive faxes over the Internet. Originals are sent attached as TIFF images files
to e-mail. Since a telephone connection is not used, you can send faxes to distant locations and send documents with many pages
without worrying about communications charges. Some advance preparation is required, such as specifying the mail server
settings. Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-mail, Sending & Receiving I-Faxes)
㻝㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-041
Sending I-Faxes
To send a fax to a computer or another I-Fax-compatible device, specify an e-mail address instead of a fax number as the destination. If
you send an I-Fax to a computer, it is sent as an e-mail attachment in TIFF format. And in the same way as when you send e-mail to a
computer, you can specify multiple destinations and specify Cc and Bcc destinations.
Place the document(s). Placing Documents
Press and tap <Scan>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Tap <I-Fax>.
Enter the destination using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Tapping <A/a/12> toggles the input modes.
If you enter the wrong characters, press . (Press to delete each character one by one; press and hold to delete all the input
characters at once.)
To make it easier to specify destinations by using other methods, such as the Address Book, see Sending Using Registered
Destinations (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server) .
If the screen above is not displayed
You can only send to your own e-mail address. To send to other destinations, you must configure the send function
authentication settings so that e-mail transmission is not restricted. Contact your administrator for details. LDAP Server
Authentication .
Specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations, as necessary.
Tap <Destination>, select the method for specifying destinations and then specify the destination.
If you selected <Specify from LDAP Server> or <Specify Myself as Destination>, the destination is selected in the <To> field.
<Cc> and <Bcc> addresses can only be selected using <Specify from Address Book> or <Specify from Coded Dial>.
1
2
3
4
5
㻝㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
Tap the item you want to set.
<Scan Size> Specifying a Scanning Size
<Density> Adjusting Density
<Original Type> Selecting Document Type
<2-Sided Original>(MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw) Scanning 2-Sided Documents (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw /
MF724Cdw)
<Sharpness> Adjusting Sharpness
The file name of a scanned document is automatically assigned based on the following format: communication management
number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).tif.
Example of file names: To send only a one-page document on October 17, 2015 at 07:00:05 PM.
0045_151017190005_001.tif
You cannot specify file names yourself.
Specify the subject, body, and reply-to address for the e-mail as necessary.
The subject is set to "Attached Image" by default.
The body is not set by default. Enter it as necessary. Without the body text, only scanned documents are sent.
The reply-to address is not set by default. If you want to specify an e-mail reply-to address that is different than the machine's
e-mail address, specify the address from among those registered in the Address Book. If no destination is registered in the
Address Book, see Registering in the Address Book .
To specify subject/body
1Tap <Subject/Message>.
2Tap <Subject>
6
7
㻝㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To specify reply-to address
3Enter the subject using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Tapping <A/a/12> toggles the input modes.
4Tap <Message>.
5Enter the body using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Tapping <A/a/12> toggles the input modes.
6Tap <Apply>.
1Tap <Reply To>.
2Tap <Specify from Address Book>.
3Select a reply-to address from the Address Book.
For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book .
㻝㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Press (B&W) to start sending.
Scanning starts.
When the SMTP authentication screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password and then tap
<Apply>.
If you want to cancel sending, tap <Cancel> <Yes>.
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the I-Fax is sent.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
If a Send Error Occurs
Error notifications are sometimes sent to the e-mail address set to the machine. You can clear the mailbox on the server from the
Remote UI.
To clear the mailbox
When scanning is complete, follow the procedures below.
1If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass,
and press (B&W).
Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2Tap <Start Sending>.
The I-Fax is sent.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].
4Click [Clear] in [Clear Mail Box].
8
㻝㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If you always want to send using the same settings: Changing Default Settings
If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed: Registering Frequently Used Scan Settings (E-
mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
If you want to specify the I-Fax sender name: Register Unit Name (E-Mail/I-Fax)
LINKS
Canceling Sending Documents (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
Checking Log for Sent Documents (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
5Read the message that is displayed, and click [OK].
E-mail is deleted from the mailbox.
When the mailbox is cleared
Once [OK] is clicked in the message window, all e-mail in the server mailbox is deleted. If the machine does not
have a special e-mail account, you should first check whether any e-mail in the mailbox needs to be kept.
㻝㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-043
Receiving I-Faxes
When an I-Fax Arrives
When an I-Fax arrives, the [Processing/Data] indicator on the operation panel blinks. After the I-Fax is completely received, the
document is printed out automatically and the indicator goes out.
To cancel reception, press <RX Job> <Job Status> Select the document on the <RX Job Status> screen <Delete>
<Yes>
Receiving I-Faxes Manually
If you want to connect to the server before receiving I-Faxes automatically, or if you want to configure the machine so that it does not
receive I-Faxes automatically, use the method below to receive I-Faxes manually.
<RX Job> <Check I-Fax RX>
Connect to the server. If there is a document on the server, printing begins.
Printout Paper
Regardless of the received document size, incoming I-Faxes are printed at the size specified in <RX Print Size>. If paper of the size
specified in <RX Print Size> is not loaded in the paper drawer, an error occurs. RX Print Size
If you want to print received documents on both sides of paper: Print on Both Sides
If you want to specify the size of the printout paper: RX Print Size
LINKS
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents
㻝㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-044
Using the Machine as a Printer
There are many ways to use the machine as a printer. You can print documents on your computer by using the printer driver or print
image files from a USB memory device. Make full use of the print functions to suit your needs.
Printing from a Computer
You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver. Printing from a Computer
Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
You can print JPEG, TIFF and PDF files stored in a USB memory device by connecting it directly to the machine. Using this function, you
can print without using a computer. Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw Only
Printing from Mobile Devices
Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to print photos and web
pages. The machine also supports AirPrint and Google Cloud Print™.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
Printing with AirPrint
Using Google Cloud Print
*
*
㻝㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-045
Printing from a Computer
You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful settings on the printer
driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your documents in various ways. Before you can use this
function, you need to complete some procedures, such as installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see MF
Driver Installation Guide.
About the Printer Driver Help
Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed descriptions that
are not in the e-Manual.
If you are a Mac OS user, see MF Driver Installation Guide for installing the printer drivers and Printer Driver's Help for using
print functions ( For Mac OS Users).
Depending on the operating system and the type or version of the printer driver you are using, the printer driver screens in
this manual may differ from your screens.
If you are using the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw, you can use the PCL5c and PCL6 printer driver as well as the UFRII
LT printer driver. The available print settings vary depending on the printer driver. For more information, click [Help] on each
printer driver screen.
To Use the Optional Paper Drawer
If the optional paper drawer (drawer 2) is attached to the machine, perform the following operation on the printer driver.
To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder)Right-click your printer icon [Printer Properties] or
[Properties] [Device Settings] tab Select the [250 Sheet Drawer] check box [OK]
㻝㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
㻝㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-046
Printing a Document
This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.
Before printing, specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in the paper source.
Loading Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type
Ensure that the paper size and type selected in the printer driver match the paper size and type actually loaded.
By setting <Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing> to <On>, you can give priority to the printer driver paper size and type
settings, regardless of the paper actually loaded. However, driver settings that do not match the loaded paper size could cause
toner stains inside the machine and adversely affect the print results. Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the
application you are using.
Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
The screen that is displayed differs depending on the application you are using.
Specify the paper size.
[Page Size]
Select the size of a document made in the application.
[Output Size]
1
2
3
㻝㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select the size of paper on which the document will be actually printed. If the selected size differs from the one specified in
[Page Size], the document is printed enlarged/reduced automatically according to the selected size. Enlarging or
Reducing
Clickable UI
You can easily specify the page layout, binding position, etc. intuitively on the preview image. For more information, click
[Help] on the printer driver screen.
Click the [Paper Source] tab, and specify the paper source and paper type.
[Paper Source]
Select the paper source from which paper is fed.
Setting Value Paper Source
Auto The paper source is automatically selected according to the specified size and type of the paper to
print on and the settings configured in the machine.
Multi-Purpose
Tray Paper is fed from the Manual feed slot.
Drawer 1 Paper is fed from the paper drawer of the machine.
Drawer 2 Paper is fed from the optional paper drawer.
[Paper Type]
Specify the setting according to the type and basis weight of the paper to print on. Loading Paper
Specify other print settings as necessary. Various Print Settings
You can register the settings you specified in this step as a "profile" and use the profile whenever you print. You can eliminate
the need to specify the same settings every time you print. Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings
Click [OK].
4
5
6
㻝㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [Print] or [OK].
Printing starts. On some applications, a screen like shown below appears.
To cancel printing, click [Cancel] when the screen shown above is displayed. After the screen disappears or if the screen is not
displayed, you can cancel printing in other ways. Canceling Prints
When printing from the Windows Store app in Windows 8/Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen and use the procedure shown below. If you print using this method, only a
limited number of print settings are available.
Windows 8/Server 2012
[Devices] The printer you are using Tap or click [Print]
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
[Devices] [Print] The printer you are using Tap or click [Print]
If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to the desktop and
follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when printing via Secured Print and in some other
cases.
LINKS
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status
7
㻝㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-047
Canceling Prints
You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.
From a Computer
From the Operation Panel
You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.
Double-click the printer icon.
When the printer icon is not displayed
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder), right-click your printer icon, and click [See what's printing] (or
double-click the icon of the printer driver for the machine).
Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document] [Cancel].
Click [Yes].
Printing of the selected document is canceled.
Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
Canceling from the Remote UI
You can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI: Checking Current Status of Print Documents
Canceling from an application
On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].
From a Computer
1
2
3
㻝㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Cancel printing using or .
Press to Cancel
If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed
Tap the document to cancel.
Check the print job status before canceling
<Copy/Print Job> <Job Status> Select the document on the <Copy/Print Job Status> screen <Cancel>
<Yes>
Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
LINKS
Printing a Document
Checking the Printing Status and Log
From the Operation Panel
㻝㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-048
Checking the Printing Status and Log
You can check the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents.
Useful in the Following Cases
When your documents are not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the documents waiting to be
printed.
When you cannot find your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an error has occurred.
Press .
Tap <Copy/Print Job>.
Check the print statuses or logs.
To check the print statuses
1Tap <Job Status>.
2Tap the document whose status you want to check.
<Copy/Print Job Status>
Displays a list of the documents that are being processed, being copied, or are waiting to be processed.
<Details>
Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list.
To check the print logs
1Tap <Print Job Log>.
2Tap the document whose log you want to check.
1
2
3
㻝㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
<Print Job Log>
Displays a list of the documents that were printed. <OK> is displayed when a document was printed successfully, and
<Error> is displayed when a document failed to be printed because it was canceled or there was some error.
<Details>
Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list. The displayed document name or user name
may not reflect the actual document or user name.
If the <Result> column shows a three-digit number
This number represents an error code. When an Error Code Appears
LINKS
Printing a Document
Canceling Prints
㻝㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-049
Various Print Settings
There are a variety of settings to suit your needs, such as Enlarged/Reduced and 2-sided Printing.
Enlarging or Reducing Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided
Printing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw /
MF724Cdw)
Collating Printouts by Page
Printing Multiple Pages onto One
Sheet
Printing Posters Printing Booklet (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Printing Borders Printing Dates and Page Numbers Printing Watermarks
Setting Color Mode Printing Specific Pages onto
Different Paper
Selecting Document Type
Saving Toner Combining and Printing Multiple
Documents
㻝㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04A
Enlarging or Reducing
You can make enlarged or reduced printouts by using a preset print ratio, such as A5 to A4, or a custom print
ratio that you set in increments of 1%.
Setting Print Ratio by Specifying the Original Document and Paper Size (Preset Ratio)
The print ratio is automatically set based on the document and paper size you have specified.
[Basic Settings] tab Select the document size in [Page Size] Select the paper size in [Output Size] [OK]
Specifying Print Ratio in Increments of 1%
[Basic Settings] tab Select the [Manual Scaling] check box Enter the print ratio in [Scaling] [OK]
Depending on the selected paper size, you may not be able to set the optimum enlarging/reducing ratio. For example, there
may be large blank spaces on your printout, or portions of the document that are missing.
The enlarging/reducing settings on some applications have priority over those on the printer driver.
㻞㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04C
Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing
If you are using the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw, you can make both 1-sided and 2-sided printouts.
The default setting is [2-sided Printing]. Change the setting as necessary.
2-sided printing may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. Paper
[Basic Settings] tab Select [1-sided Printing] or [2-sided Printing] in [1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing] Select the
position to bind in [Binding Location] [OK]
[1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing]
Select [1-sided Printing] or [2-sided Printing].
For [Booklet Printing], see Printing Booklet (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw).
[Binding Location]
Specify the position to bind the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler. Printing orientation will be changed depending on
the specified binding position. To specify the margin width for the binding position, click [Gutter].
[Long Edge [Left]]
Prints images in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally when bound.
[Short Edge [Top]]
Prints images in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically when bound.
[Gutter]
Specify a binding margin.
㻞㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04E
Collating Printouts by Page
When printing copies of multi-page documents, select [Collate] to print complete sets in sequential page
order. This function is useful when preparing handouts for meetings or presentations.
[Basic Settings] tab Select [Collate] or [Group] in [Collate/Group] [OK]
[Collate/Group]
Specify the sorting method of the printouts when printing multiple-page documents.
[Collate]
The printouts are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are printing three copies of a five-
page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
[Group]
The printouts are not collated. For example, if you are printing three copies of a five-page document, the printouts will be
arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.
If you select [Off], whether the printouts are collated or not depends on the setting made on the application.
LINKS
Printing a Document
㻞㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04F
Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet
You can print multiple pages onto a single sheet. For example, you can print four or nine pages onto a single
sheet by using [4 on 1] or [9 on 1]. Use this function if you want to save paper or to view your document in
thumbnails.
To save more paper, combine this setting with 2-sided printing. Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
[Basic Settings] tab In [Page Layout], select the number of pages to print onto a single sheet In [Page Order], select
the page distribution layout [OK]
[Page Layout]
Select the number of pages to print onto a single sheet from [1 on 1] to [16 on 1]. For example, to print 16 pages onto a single
sheet, select [16 on 1].
For options such as [Poster [2 x 2]], see Printing Posters.
Printing may not be performed properly if you combine this setting with an application setting for collating printouts.
[Page Order]
Select a page distribution layout. For example, if you select [Across from Left], the first page is printed on the top left, and then
the rest of the pages are arranged rightward.
LINKS
Printing a Document
Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
㻞㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04H
Printing Posters
You can print one page of a document onto multiple pages. For example, if you make a one-page A4-size
document nine times larger, you will have a poster 3x3 A4 size sheets large after you print the document and
paste it together.
[Basic Settings] tab In [Page Layout], select the dimensions of your poster (for example, [Poster [2 x 2]]) [OK]
There are four size settings:[Poster [1 x 2]], [Poster [2 x 2]], [Poster [3 x 3]], and [Poster [4 x 4]].
Poster size settings cannot be selected when 2-sided printing is enabled. Select [1-sided Printing] in [1-sided/2-
sided/Booklet Printing], and then select a poster size setting.
Select the [Print Border] check box to add borders on your printouts. The borders are helpful if you want to paste the printouts
together or cut off the margins.
LINKS
Printing a Document
Enlarging or Reducing
㻞㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04J
Printing Booklet
You can print two pages of a document on both sides of paper and then fold your printed pages in half to
make a booklet. The printer driver controls the print order in such a way that the page numbers are correctly
arranged.
Booklet printing may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. The paper that is available for 2-sided printing is
also available for booklet printing. See Paper.
[Basic Settings] tab Select [Booklet Printing] in [1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing] Click [Booklet] to specify detailed
settings as necessary [OK] [OK]
[1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing]
Select [Booklet Printing].
For [1-sided Printing] and [2-sided Printing], see Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw /
MF724Cdw).
[Booklet]
The screen below is displayed.
[Booklet Printing Method]
[All Pages at Once]: Prints all of the pages at once as a single bundle so that you can make a booklet just by folding the
printed pages in half.
[Divide into Sets]: Prints as multiple bundles divided by the number of the pages specified on [Sheets per Set]. Bind each
bundle, and then combine them as one booklet. Select this option when the document has so many pages that you cannot
bind them all into a single booklet.
[Specify Booklet Gutter]
If you are using a stapler or other binding tools, specify the margin width for binding your booklet. Select the [Specify Booklet
Gutter] check box and specify the margin width in [Booklet Gutter].
㻞㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04K
Printing Borders
You can add borders, such as broken lines or double lines, in the margins of printouts.
[Page Setup] tab Click [Page Options] Select the border type in [Edging] [OK] [OK]
[Edging]
Select the border type.
Preview
Displays a preview with the selected border.
LINKS
Printing a Document
Printing Dates and Page Numbers
Printing Watermarks
㻞㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04L
Printing Dates and Page Numbers
You can print the information such as dates or page numbers, and you can specify where to print this
information on the document (upper-left, lower-right, etc.).
[Page Setup] tab Click [Page Options] Select the print position of the print date, user name or page number [OK]
[OK]
[Print Date]
Specify the position to print the print date.
[Print User Name]
Specify the position to print the user name (logon name) for the computer used to print the document.
[Print Page Number]
Specify the position to print the page number.
Changing the Print Format of Dates and Page Numbers
You can change formatting details such as font and font size when printing dates, logon names, or page numbers. Click
[Format Settings] on the Page Options screen shown above to specify the details.
LINKS
Printing a Document
Printing Borders
Printing Watermarks
㻞㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04R
Printing Watermarks
You can print watermarks such as "COPY" or "CONFIDENTIAL" over the document. You can create new
watermarks or use pre-registered watermarks.
[Page Setup] tab Select the [Watermark] check box Select a watermark from [Watermark Name] [OK]
[Watermark]/[Watermark Name]
Select the [Watermark] check box to display the list of the watermarks in the [Watermark Name] drop-down list. Select a
watermark from the menu.
[Edit Watermark]
Displays the screen to create or edit watermarks.
[Add]
Click to create a new watermark. Up to 50 watermarks can be registered.
[Name]
Enter the created watermark name.
[Attributes]/[Alignment]/[Print Style]
Click each tab to specify the text, color, or print position of the watermark. For more information, click [Help] on the
printer driver screen.
㻞㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04S
Setting Color Mode
You can select a color mode (color or black and white). If a document has pages in both color and black and
white, by specifying auto mode, color pages are printed in color, and black and white pages are printed in
black and white automatically.
[Basic Settings] tab Select the color mode in [Color Mode] [OK]
[Color Mode]
Select [Black and White] or [Color]. If you select [Auto [Color/B&W]], the color
mode is automatically switched page by page.
To Specify the Detailed Color Settings
You can also specify the detailed color settings such as color adjustment and color matching.
[Quality] tab Select the [Manual Color Settings] check box Click [Color Settings] Specify the color settings as
necessary [OK] [OK].
[Color Adjustment]
Adjust the tone, brightness, and contrast.
[Matching]
Specify the color matching settings (for example, you can adjust the settings so that the color tones on your printouts
will match the color tones displayed on your computer screen).
㻞㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04U
Printing Specific Pages onto Different Paper
You can print specific pages of a document, such as when you want to print the cover of a booklet on colored
paper. In this case, load colored paper for the cover in the manual feed slot and load plain paper for the body
pages in the paper drawer, and then specify the paper settings on the printer driver.
[Paper Source] tab Select the pages to print on different paper and the paper source loaded with the paper from [Paper
Selection] [OK]
[Paper Selection]
Specify which pages should be printed on different paper, and select which paper source should be used to feed paper for
each page.
[Same Paper for All Pages] Prints all of the pages on the same paper, and does not print any specific pages on
different paper. All the pages are printed on paper specified in [Paper Source].
[Different for First, Others,
and Last]
You can use different paper for the first page, body pages, and last page, respectively. For
example, you can specify the paper in the manual feed slot for [First Page], the paper in
the paper drawer for [Other Pages] (body pages), and the paper in the manual feed slot
for [Last Page]. Also, selecting [Paper Type] in [Select by] enables you to specify the
paper type used for printing rather than the paper source.
[Different for First, Second,
Others, and Last]
You can also specify the paper for the following page of the cover as well as specifying the
paper in [Different for First, Others, and Last]. Also, selecting [Paper Type] in [Select by]
enables you to specify the paper type used for printing rather than the paper source.
[Different for Cover and
Others]
Specify the settings for booklet printing ( Printing Booklet (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw /
MF724Cdw)). You can specify different paper for the cover and body pages, respectively.
For example, you can specify the paper in the manual feed slot for [Cover Page] and the
paper in the paper drawer for [Other Pages] (body pages).
[Transparency Cover
Sheets]
If you perform continuous printing on transparencies, the output transparencies may stick
together. To prevent this, print alternately on transparencies and paper in the order of
Transparency, Paper, Transparency, Paper, and so on. The paper that is inserted between
transparencies is called a "cover sheet." Make sure to specify both the paper source loaded
with transparencies and the one with cover sheets. Select the [Print on Cover Sheets]
check box to print on both transparencies and cover sheets in the order of placed
documents.
LINKS
Printing a Document
㻞㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04W
Selecting Document Type
You can specify the document type to ensure optimal image quality. There are different settings for photo
documents, documents that have charts or graphs, and documents that have design drawings with fine lines.
[Quality] tab Select the document type in [Objective] [OK]
[Objective]
Select an option that suits the document type or purpose of printing. For example, select [General] for general use, or select
[Vivid Photo] when you want to print photo images in optimal print quality.
[General]
A versatile option that is suitable when printing most documents.
[Publications]
Suitable when printing documents that have a mix of photo images, charts, and graphs.
[Graphics]
Suitable when printing documents that have charts or graphs.
[Vivid Photo]
Suitable when printing photo images.
[Designs [CAD]]
Suitable when printing design drawings that have many fine lines.
[High Definition Text]
Suitable when printing documents that have small characters.
To specify detailed settings for each item selected on [Objective], click [Advanced Settings]. For more information, click [Help]
on the printer driver screen.
LINKS
Printing a Document
㻞㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04X
Saving Toner
You can set the printer driver to print documents using less toner.
When the toner save setting is enabled, fine lines and portions with lighter print density may become blurred.
[Quality] tab Select the document type in [Objective] Click [Advanced Settings] Select [Toner Save] in the
[Advanced Settings] screen Select [On] from the drop-down list [OK] [OK]
[Objective] Selecting Document Type
Select the document type for which you want to enable the toner save setting.
[Advanced Settings]
A screen with settings is displayed. Click [Toner Save] and select [On] from the drop-down list on the bottom of the screen.
You can specify whether to enable the toner save setting for each document type. Specify the toner save setting for each
document type listed in [Objective].
In the [Advanced Settings] screen, you can specify various print settings other than toner save settings. For more information,
click [Help] on the printer driver screen.
LINKS
Printing a Document
㻞㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-04Y
Combining and Printing Multiple Documents
By using Canon PageComposer, you can combine multiple documents into one print job and print the job with
specified print settings. This function, for example, enables you to combine documents made with different
applications and print all of the pages in the same paper size.
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the
application you are using.
Select the printer driver for the machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
Select [Edit and Preview] in [Output Method].
Click [OK] on the [Information] pop-up screen.
Click [OK] at the bottom of the screen.
Click [Print] or [OK].
The Canon PageComposer starts. Printing does not start in this step.
Repeat steps 1 to 4 for the documents you want to combine.
1
2
3
4
㻞㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The documents are added to the Canon PageComposer.
From the [Document Name] list, select the documents to combine, and click .
To select multiple documents, click the documents while holding down [SHIFT] key or [CTRL] key.
Change the settings as necessary, and click [Combine].
The documents selected in step 6 are combined.
[Print Preview]
Displays a preview of the document to be printed.
[Document List]/[Print Settings]
Click the [Document List] tab to display the documents added in steps 1 to 4. You can remove documents by selecting them
in the list and clicking [Delete from List].
Click the [Print Settings] tab to display the screen for specifying print settings such as the number of copies or 1-sided/2-
sided printing. The settings specified here are applied to the whole print job.
5
6
7
㻞㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
For more information, click [Help] on the Canon PageComposer screen.
[Details]
Displays the print setting screen of the printer driver. There are fewer settings available than when using the ordinary printing
method.
On the [Document Name] list, select the combined-document print job you want to print, and click .
Printing starts.
For instructions on how to cancel printing, see Canceling Prints.
LINKS
Printing a Document
8
㻞㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-050
Configuring Printer Settings on the Machine
When you print a document from a computer, you can specify many print settings, such as the number of copies or color mode, in the
application you used to make the document or on the printer driver. However, the <Paper Size Override> setting described below can
only be specified on the machine.
<Paper Size Override>
Select whether to switch between printing on A4 and Letter size paper if one of these paper sizes is loaded but the other is not. For
example, if you are printing a Letter size document but only A4 paper is loaded in the machine, the machine will print your document on
A4 paper.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Paper Size Override> Select <Off> or <On>
<Off>
Does not perform paper size substitution. Printing stops and an error message is displayed when the machine runs out of the
paper that has been specified.
<On>
Performs paper size substitution. However, if no paper to substitute is loaded in any paper sources, the substitution cannot be
performed.
Other Printer Settings
There are other printer settings you can specify on the operation panel of the machine. These settings are applied only for PS/PCL
printing. Printer Settings
Priority of settings
When a particular setting can be specified either on the machine, or in an application or on the printer driver, the settings
made in the application or on the printer driver will override those specified on the machine.
LINKS
Printing a Document
Various Print Settings
㻞㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-051
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)
By setting a PIN to a document when printing from a computer, the document is held in the memory of the machine, and is not printed
until the correct PIN is entered on the operation panel of the machine. This function is called "Secure Print," and the document that is
protected by a PIN is called a "secured document." Using Secure Print keeps printouts of confidential documents from being left
unattended. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures. Preparing for Using Secure Print
㻞㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-052
Preparing for Using Secure Print
Make sure that Secure Print is enabled on the printer driver.
To perform the following procedure, log on to the computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
Click the [Device Settings] tab and make sure that the [Allow Use of Secured Print] check box is selected.
If the check box is selected, Secure Print is enabled.
If the check box is not selected, select it and click [OK].
LINKS
Printing via Secure Print
1
2
3
㻞㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-053
Printing via Secure Print
This section describes how to print a document from an application as a secured document. The first part of this section describes how to
send a secured document to the machine, and the second part of this section describes how to print the secured document on the
machine.
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine
Printing Out Secured Documents
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the
application you are using.
Select the printer driver for the machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
Select [Secured Print] in [Output Method].
Click [Yes] or [No] on the [Information] pop-up screen.
If you want to use the same user name and PIN every time, click [Yes]. To change the user name and PIN every time, click
[No].
If you selected [Yes]
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine
Enter the user name for [User Name] and PIN for [PIN], and click [OK].
The computer name (logon name) of your computer is displayed in [User Name]. if you want to change the user
name, enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for a new user name.
Enter the PIN of up to seven digits.
1
2
3
㻞㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the print settings, and click [OK].
Click the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], or [Quality] tabs to specify the print settings on each
screen as necessary. Various Print Settings
Click [Print] or [OK].
After the secured document is sent to the machine, it is held in the memory of the machine waiting to be printed.
If you selected [No] at step 3
Enter the [Document Name], [User Name], and [PIN] and click [OK].
The document name is automatically set based on the information from the application. If you want to change the
document name, enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for a new document name.
The computer name or logon name is displayed. If you want to change the user name, enter up to 32 alphanumeric
characters for a new user name.
Enter the PIN of up to seven digits. The entered PIN is displayed in symbols.
4
5
㻞㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
After you send the secured document to the machine, print it out within 30 minutes. After that, the secured document will be deleted
from the memory of the machine and can no longer be printed.
If secured documents are left unprinted, they occupy the memory and may prevent the machine from printing even ordinary
(not secured) documents. Make sure that you print your secured documents as soon as you can.
You can check how much memory is being used for secured documents.
<Device Status> <Secure Print Memory Usage>
You can change the valid time period for secured documents. Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents
Press and tap <Secure Print>.
You cannot proceed to the next step if the <Remote Scanner> screen shown below is displayed. In this case, press to
close the screen, and tap <Secure Print> again.
Select the secured document to print.
If the <Select User> screen is displayed
If secured documents from two or more users are being held in memory, the <Select User> screen is displayed prior to the
<Select File> screen. Select your user name.
Enter the PIN using numeric keys, and then tap <Apply>.
Printing starts.
If you want to cancel printing, tap <Cancel> <Yes>.
The machine at purchase is set to delete secured documents 30 minutes after receiving them unless they are printed, but you can
change this setting.
Printing Out Secured Documents
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents
1
2
3
㻞㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Press and tap <Menu>.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Secure Print Settings>.
Tap <On>.
Disabling Secure Print
Tap <Off>, and restart the machine.
Specify how long the machine holds secured documents, and tap <Apply>.
Tap / or the numeric keys to enter the time.
The secured document is erased from the memory of the machine when the time specified here elapses.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Preparing for Using Secure Print
Checking the Printing Status and Log
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻞㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-054
Configuring Print Settings to Your Needs
You can register combinations of settings as "Profiles" to suit your different printing needs. Also, you can register the settings that you
frequently use as the default setting. Once the default setting is set, the registered settings are automatically displayed on the printer
driver screen, and you can skip the operations to specify the print settings and print immediately.
Register the combination of the [2 on 1] and [2-sided Printing] settings as a "Profile",
and select this profile whenever you need it. Registering Combinations of
Frequently Used Print Settings
On the printer driver, set black and white printing as the default setting. From now on,
you will not have to change the color mode when printing. Changing Default
Settings
㻞㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-055
Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings
Specifying combinations of settings such as "1-sided landscape orientation on A4 size paper" every time you print may be time
consuming. If you register these frequently used combinations of print settings as "profiles," you can specify printing settings simply by
selecting one of these profiles from the list. This section describes how to register profiles and how to print using them.
Registering a Profile
Selecting a Profile
Change the settings that you want to register as a profile, and click [Add].
Click the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], or [Quality] tabs to specify the print settings on each
screen as necessary. Various Print Settings
Enter a profile name in [Name], select an icon, and then click [OK].
Enter comments on the profile in [Comment] as necessary.
Click [View Settings] to see the settings to register.
Editing a profile
By clicking [Edit] on the right side of [Add] on the screen shown in step 1, you can change the name, icon, or comment of the
profiles you have previously registered. You cannot edit the pre-registered profiles.
Select the profile that suits your needs, and click [OK].
Registering a Profile
Selecting a Profile
1
2
㻞㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-056
Changing Default Settings
The default settings are the settings that are first displayed whenever you open the print settings screen of the printer driver, but you
can change them. For example, if you want to print all documents, including color documents, in black and white, you can change the
default setting for color mode to [Black and White]. By changing the default settings, the setting is always [Black and White] whenever
you open the printer driver screen, and you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every time you make prints.
To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click your machine icon and click [Printing preferences].
Change the settings on the print setting screen, and click [OK].
Click the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], or [Quality] tabs to specify the print settings on each
screen as necessary. Various Print Settings
LINKS
Printing a Document
Various Print Settings
1
2
3
㻞㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-057
Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
You can print image files stored in a USB memory device by connecting it directly to the machine. Using this function, you can print
without using a computer.
Available File Formats
You can print the following types of image files.
JPEG (DCF/Exif 2.21 or earlier/JFIF)
TIFF (JPEG/MH/MR/MMR compression)
PDF (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
For JPEG and TIFF files, maximum printable data size per file is 50 MB.
For multi-page TIFF files, maximum data size is per page.
For PDF files, maximum printable data size per file is 2 GB.
Note that even some files smaller than the size described above may not be printed correctly.
Available USB Memory Devices
You can use USB memory devices with the following format styles.
FAT16 (memory capacity: up to 2 GB)
FAT32 (memory capacity: up to 32 GB)
Do not use non-standard USB memory devices. You may not be able to print the images properly in some USB memory
devices.
Do not connect anything other than a USB memory device. USB memory devices cannot be connected via a USB hub or an
extension cable.
Do not use USB memory devices with special functions such as built-in security functions.
The USB port on the front of the machine supports USB 2.0.
If a folder in a USB memory device has many files, scanning image files to print will take more time. Use your computer to
delete unnecessary files on your USB memory device or move them to a different folder.
Connect a USB memory device to the USB port (USB2.0).
Do not remove the USB memory device or shock or shake the device or the machine when data is being read or written. Also,
do not turn OFF the machine while the processing is in progress.
*
*
1
㻞㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Press and tap <Memory Media Print>.
Tap <Select File and Print>.
Index Print
You can print thumbnails of the image files (JPEG only) stored in a USB memory device. To print the images in thumbnails,
select <Index Print> on the screen, and proceed to the next step.
Select the file to print.
You can select multiple files.
To clear a selection, tap the file you have selected (marked as ).
To display the contents of a folder, select a folder, and tap. To return to the folder in the upper level, press .
Folders and files lower than the third directory are not displayed.
When you move to another folder, the previous file selections will be cleared.
To select all files
1Tap <All Items>.
2Tap <Select All>.
To clear all selections, tap <Clear All>.
3Tap <JPEG/TIFF> or <PDF>.
All JPEG/TIFF or PDF format files are selected.
2
3
4
㻞㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If you selected a file before you tap <All Items>, you can only select files of the same format.
To display previews
You can change the display method from <Details> (for file names and modification dates) to <Images> (for previews). By
previewing images, you can check the file content before you select a file to print.
Preview images are not displayed for PDF files.
You can specify either <Details> or <Images> as the default display method. Default Display Settings
To change the file sort order
You can change the sort order of the files in a USB memory device.
You can specify a sort setting such as <Name (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Ascending)> as the default setting for the file sort
1Tap <All Items>.
2Tap <Display Method>.
3Tap the display method.
<Details>
Displays file names and dates.
You can set whether to display abbreviated file names. File Name Display Format
<Images>
Displays previews.
Tap / or flick to switch the preview.
Tap to display a larger preview. Tap to return to the original preview size.
㻞㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
order. File Sort Default Settings
Tap <Apply>.
Specify the print settings as necessary.
Tap the item you want to set.
<Number of Copies>
1Tap <All Items>.
2Tap <Sort Files>.
3Tap the criteria for file sorting.
When you select <Date/Time (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Descending)>, files are sorted based on the
modification dates and time of the files.
Specify the number of copies from 1 to 99. Tap /or the numeric keys to enter a quantity, and tap <Apply>.
5
6
㻞㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
<Paper>
<N on 1>
<N on 1> is not available for printing TIFF files.
<2-Sided> (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
<Set JPEG/TIFF Details>
Select the paper to print on.
You can print two or four images onto a single sheet. Select <2 on 1> or <4 on 1>.
<2 on 1>
Prints two images onto a single sheet.
<4 on 1>
Prints four images onto a single sheet.
You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.
<Book Type>
Prints images in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally when bound.
<Calendar Type>
Prints images in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically when bound.
<2-Sided> may not be available with some sizes or types of paper. Paper
㻞㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the default settings of the USB Print function for JPEG and TIFF files.
<Print Date>
If you tap <On>, you can print the modification date of the file below each image.
Although <Print Date>is not available for Index Print, the modification date of the file is automatically printed below
each image.
<Print File Name>
If you tap <On>, you can print the file name below each image.
Although <Print File Name> is not available for Index Print, the file name is automatically printed below each image.
<Original Type>
You can select the type of original depending on the image to print. Select <Photo Priority> or <Text Priority>.
<Photo Priority>
Gives priority to printing photo images smoothly.
<Text Priority>
Gives priority to printing text clearly.
<Brightness>
You can adjust the brightness of printouts. Tap / to adjust the brightness, and tap <Apply>.
<->
Prints images darker.
<+>
Prints images brighter.
㻞㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
<Set PDF Details> (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
You can adjust the brightness of TIFF files only when they are JPEG-compressed.
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker areas of
an image) for optimal image quality. Tap <Gradation> or <Error Diffusion>.
<Gradation>
Prints images with fine gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth finish.
<Error Diffusion>
Prints images with small text or fine lines with a clear finish.
Specify the default settings of the USB Print function only for PDF files.
<Brightness>
This setting adjusts the brightness of the overall image. The settings can be set between 85% and 115% in increments of
5%. Tap / to adjust the brightness, and tap <Apply>.
<->
Prints images darker.
<+>
Prints images brighter.
<Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
This setting enlarges or reduces the original document to match the printable area of the paper size.
<Enlarge Print Area>
This setting specifies whether to enlarge the printable area on the paper.
㻞㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
<Off>
The area 1/5" (4 mm) from the top, bottom, left and right edges of the paper is not printable.
<On>
The printable area is enlarged to the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the paper.
If you select <On>, images on the edge of the paper may not print properly.
<Print Comments>
This setting specifies whether to print annotations in the PDF file.
<Password to Open Document>
You can print password protected PDF files by entering the password required to open them.
<Other>
<Halftones>
Specify the data processing method to reproduce halftones.
See Halftones for the description of the setting.
<Pure Black Text>
If the text object is black (R=G=B=0%, C=M=Y=100% or Bk=N%, C=M=Y=0% or Bk=100%), this setting specifies
whether the text is printed using black only.
See Pure Black Text for the description of the setting.
<Black Overprint>
This setting allows you to choose a specific way to print black text when printing black text over a color background or
graphics.
See Black Overprint for the description of the setting.
<RGB Source Profile>
Select the source profile for color matching to print RGB data, according to the monitor you are using.
See RGB Source Profile for the description of the setting.
<CMYK Simulation Profile>
This setting allows you to specify the simulation target to print the CMYK (Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK) data.
The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent CMYK color model based on the simulation target selected in
the CMYK Simulation Profile.
See CMYK Simulation Profile for the description of the setting.
<Use Grayscale Profile>
This setting allows you to define how device dependent gray data is processed.
See Use Grayscale Profile for the description of the setting.
<Output Profile>
This setting allows you to define the profile that is appropriate for the data you are going to print. It is applied to all
data in the print job, so make sure the selected profile is right for your job.
See Output Profile for the description of the setting.
<Matching Method>
㻞㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Press .
Printing starts.
If you want to cancel printing, tap <Cancel> <Yes>
Disconnect the USB memory device from the USB port (USB2.0).
1Press .
2Press .
3Tap <Device Status>.
4Tap <Remove Memory Media>.
Wait until the message <The memory media can be safely removed.> is displayed.
5Disconnect the USB memory device.
This setting allows you to specify a method of printing when the <RGB Source Profile> is applied. This machine
includes a color management system that provides the following color rendering styles.
See Matching Method for the description of the setting.
<RGB Pure Black Process>
This setting enables you to specify how black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B should be
processed when device dependent RGB data is converted into device dependent CMYK data using the <RGB Source
Profile> of the machine.
See RGB Pure Black Process for the description of the setting.
<CMYK Pure Black Process>
This setting enables you to specify how monochrome data (C=M=Y=0) should be printed when the device dependent
CMYK data is processed using the <CMYK Simulation Profile> of the machine.
See CMYK Pure Black Process for the description of the setting..
<Composite Overprint>
You can overprint device-dependent CMYK data as composite output.
All colors used for data are overlaid and printed on one plate so you can check the finished result without separating
the colors.
See Composite Overprint for the description of the setting.
<Advanced Smoothing>
Select how jagged outlines of text and graphics are smoothed. <Smooth 2> applies a stronger smoothing effect
than <Smooth 1>. You can apply the setting separately for text and graphics.
See Advanced Smoothing for the description of the setting.
<Grayscale Conversion>
You can select ways to convert color values to a grayscale value when you print color print data.
See Grayscale Conversion for the description of the setting.
<Print Quality>
<Density>(<Density (Fine Adjust)>)
This mode is not available if you set <Toner Save> to <On>.
This setting adjusts the print density.
See Density/Density (Fine Adjust) for the description of the setting.
<Toner Save>
Select whether to reduce toner consumption.
See Toner Save for the description of the setting.
<Special Smoothing Mode>
Select a smoothing mode to print documents with a smooth finish. If you are not satisfied with the printing results
of <Mode 1> (default), you can try printing again by using another.
See Special Smoothing Mode for the description of the setting.
<Line Control>
Select the data processing method to reproduce lines.
See Line Control for the description of the setting.
7
8
㻞㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-058
Changing Default USB Print Settings
The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If you change these
default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to specify the same settings every time
you make prints.
<Menu> <Memory Media Print Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting Change the default value
of the selected item <Apply>
Settings
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
LINKS
Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
Memory Media Print Settings
㻞㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-05F
Using the Machine as a Scanner
You can scan original documents by using the operation panel of the machine or an application on a computer. Whichever way you use,
the scanned documents are converted into electronic file formats such as PDFs. Use the scan function to convert large-volume paper
documents into files so that you can organize them easily.
To use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of software to a computer.
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner
If you are a Mac OS user, see MF Driver Installation Guide for installing the software and Canon Scanner Driver Guide for
using scan functions ( For Mac OS Users).
Depending on the operating system and the version of the scanner driver or applications you are using, the screens in this
manual may differ from your screens.
Scanning from the Machine
You can scan and save documents to your computer by using the operation panel of the machine. You can also save documents to a
USB memory device or send them as e-mail attachments.
Scanning from the Machine
Convenient Scanning with a Machine-Based Operation
Scanning from a Computer
You can scan documents placed on the machine from a computer. The scanned documents are saved to the computer. You can scan
using MF Scan Utility (included with the machine), or with other applications such as an image-processing or word-processing application.
Scanning from a Computer
Scanning from Mobile Devices
Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to scan documents set
on this machine. In Mac OS, you can also scan using AirPrint.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
Scanning with AirPrint
㻞㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-05H
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner
Make sure that the machine and your computer are connected and all software is installed. To connect via a wireless or wired LAN, you
must register this machine in MF Network Scanner Selector. Register by following the procedure below. This procedure is not required if
the machine and your computer are connected via USB.
The scan function is not available if the machine and your computer are connected in an IPv6 environment. Use IPv4 or a USB
connection.
Click in the system tray.
Select the check box for the machine, and click [OK].
Up to 10 scanners on a network can be registered on a computer.
1
2
㻞㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-05J
Scanning from the Machine
The sequence of "scanning a document and saving it to a computer" can only be done when scanning from
the machine. Scan while specifying what computer documents will be saved to; whether to scan documents in
color or black and white; whether to save documents as PDFs or JPEGs; and other settings.
Place the document(s). Placing Documents
Press and tap <Scan>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Tap <Computer>.
Select the destination computer.
This screen is not displayed if only a computer is connected to the machine via USB.
Up to 10 network-connected computers can be displayed.
Select the scan type.
Scan type Color Resolution File format
<Color Scan> Color 300 dpi JPEG/Exif
<Black & White PDF (searchable) / High
*2
1
2
3
4
5
㻞㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Scan> Black and white 300 dpi compression
<Custom 1> Color 300 dpi JPEG/Exif
<Custom 2> Color 300 dpi JPEG/Exif
Documents are scanned in black and white only, with no intermediate shades of gray.
A PDF format where characters on the document are scanned as text data and the text can be searched using a computer.
To change settings
You can change settings from MF Scan Utility. For more information, see [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
If you are a Mac user, see Canon Scanner Driver Guide. For Mac OS Users
Press .
Scanning starts.
To cancel, tap <Cancel> <Yes>.
You cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close the screen before scanning.
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the save destination folder is displayed on the computer.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
About the save destination folder
By default, the scanned data is saved to the My Documents folder. A subfolder named with the scanning date is created, and
the data is saved to that folder.
You can change the save destination from the MF Scan Utility. Refer to the MF Scan Utility help for details.
*1
*1
*2
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a file format).
1If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass,
and press .
Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2Tap <Finish>.
The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.
6
㻞㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Scan from the machine more easily
To always scan using the same settings:
Changing Default Settings
To register combinations of scan settings and display them when needed:
Registering Frequently Used Scan Settings (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
Other useful scanning functions
You can save scanned documents to a USB memory device or send them by e-mail or as I-Faxes. The documents can also be
saved to shared folders/FTP Server. You can accomplish these functions directly from the machine.
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
㻞㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-05L
Scanning from a Computer
There are two ways to scan from a computer: using MF Scan Utility and using an application such as an image-processing or word-
processing application.
When using the machine with a USB connection, exit sleep mode before scanning. Entering Sleep Mode
Scanning Using MF Scan Utility
MF Scan Utility is an application included with the machine that enables you to scan documents or images
to a computer. You can forward the scanned data to a specified application, or attach it to an e-mail
message. For more information, see [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
If you are a Mac user, see Canon Scanner Driver Guide. For Mac OS Users
Scanning Using an Application
You can scan images by using an application such as a word-processing or image-processing application,
and load the images directly into the application. You do not need to start another application to scan.
㻞㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-05U
Scanning Using an Application
You can scan documents from applications such as image-processing or word-processing software. The
scanned image is directly loaded in the application, allowing you to edit or process the image immediately.
The following procedure varies depending on the application.
The application must be compatible with TWAIN or WIA . For more information, see the instruction manual for your
application.
TWAIN is a standard for connecting image input devices, such as scanners, with computers. WIA is a function that is an integrated standard in
Windows.
Place the document(s). Placing Documents
The second or subsequent documents may not be scanned, or an error message may be displayed depending on the
application. In such a case, place and scan one document at a time.
When <Auto Online for Remote Scan> is set to <Off>, you must tap <Scan> <Remote Scanner> in the <Home> Screen to
bring the machine online. Auto Online for Remote Scan
From the application, select the start scan command.
The procedure for selecting the start scan command varies depending on the application. For more information, see the
instruction manual for your application.
Select the scanner driver for the machine.
Select ScanGear MF or WIA. If you select ScanGear MF, you can configure advanced scan settings.
Configure the scan settings as necessary.
For more information about ScanGear MF scan settings, see
Configuring Scan Settings in Simple Mode or
Configuring Scan Settings in Advanced Mode.
Click [Scan].
Scanning starts.
When scanning is complete, the scanned image is forwarded to an application.
LINKS
Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF
*
*
1
2
3
4
5
㻞㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-05W
Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF
ScanGear MF is a scanner driver included with the machine. You can use ScanGear MF as follows.
Starting from MF Scan Utility
When scanning from MF Scan Utility, you can call ScanGear MF, and configure advanced scan settings. Click [ScanGear] in MF Scan
Utility to start ScanGear MF. For more information, see [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
If you are a Mac OS user, see Canon Scanner Driver Guide. For Mac OS Users
Starting from an application
You can use ScanGear MF to import images into image-processing or word-processing software. Select ScanGear MF from the image
scanning commands. Scanning Using an Application
You can do the following by using ScanGear MF:
Previewing the image before scanning
Specifying the scanning area
Adjusting the detailed image quality
Configuring Scan Settings in Simple Mode
Configuring Scan Settings in Advanced Mode
㻞㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-05X
Configuring Scan Settings in Simple Mode
Simple Mode is a collection of basic scan settings in ScanGear MF designed for easy operation. In other words, Simple Mode is a digest
version of ScanGear MF. Configure settings in the order indicated from to on the screen, and click [Scan]. By doing so, you can
configure basic settings and scan.
Preview area
You can preview the document that is placed on the platen glass. If you click [Preview], a preview image is displayed in this area
and the cropping frame is displayed with a dotted line.
Toolbar
Control the image in the preview area.
(Auto Crop)
The cropping frame that fits the scanned image is automatically set. Each time you click the icon, the cropping frame is
reduced. You can move the frame, or change its size with your mouse.
Manually setting multiple scanning areas
You can manually add cropping frames. You can also specify cropping areas in the document so that each of them can be
scanned as separate images. Drag the cropping frames to specify the areas you want to scan. You can specify up to 10
areas. Click [Scan] to scan the areas in the cropping frames as separate images.
(Clear Crop Frame)
Clears the selected cropping frame.
(Left Rotate)/ (Right Rotate)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees to the left or right.
(Information)
Displays the current settings of the scanned image, such as the color mode and size of the scan area.
[Select Source]
Select the image type to scan documents. Available items vary depending on where you placed the document.
If you placed the document on the platen glass
[Photo (Color)] The photo document is scanned as a color image.
[Magazine
(Color)]
Print material, such as a magazine, is scanned as a color image. The color unevenness and moire that
occurs when scanning print images is reduced.
[Newspaper
(B&W)]
The text document or line drawing is scanned as a black and white image (in black and white only,
with no intermediate shades of gray).
[Document
(Grayscale)]
The text or photograph document is scanned as a grayscale image (in black and white with
intermediate shades of gray, similar to a black and white photograph).
If you placed the document in the feeder
㻞㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Document (Color) ADF] The document is scanned as a color image.
[Document (Grayscale)
ADF] The document is scanned as a grayscale image.
[Select Purpose]
Select a setting based on your intended use of the scanned image.
[Print (300dpi)] Select when printing the scanned image.
[Image Display (150dpi)] Select when displaying the scanned image on a computer.
[OCR (300dpi)] Select when using the scanned image with OCR (optical character recognition) software.
[Output Size]
Select the size of the scanned image when it is printed or displayed on a computer. For example, if you want to output an
image that is appropriate for printing on A4 paper, select [A4], and [Print (300dpi)] for [Select Purpose] ( ).
Click to switch between the portrait and landscape orientation. This button is not available when [Flexible] is selected.
If you select [Add/Delete], you can add new output size settings and delete the added sizes.
Select [Flexible] to change the ratio of width to height. Drag the area you want to scan on the preview image.
[Image Correction]
Select the [Fading Correction] check box to correct faded colors on an old photograph or other images into vivid colors. This
setting is available when a preview image is displayed and you select [Photo (Color)] or [Magazine (Color)] for [Select Source] (
).
LINKS
Configuring Scan Settings in Advanced Mode
Scanning Using an Application
㻞㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-05Y
Configuring Scan Settings in Advanced Mode
If you click the [Advanced Mode] tab on the ScanGear MF screen, you can make more advanced adjustments in the image quality than
you can in Simple Mode. You can also register adjusted settings as Favorite Settings. For more detailed information, click the icon next
to the topic.
Operating Preview Images
Specifying Settings for Documents and Color Mode
Specifying Resolution and Image Size
Adjusting Image Quality
Adjusting Brightness and Color
Specifying Other Settings
Registering Frequently Used Settings
If you place the document on the platen glass and click [Preview], a preview image is displayed. You can specify the area you want to
scan, and check the effects of image adjustments on the preview image.
Operating Preview Images
(Clear)
Clears the preview image.
(Crop)
Specifies the cropping area with the cropping frame. Click and drag the area you want to crop. The cropping area is
indicated with a dotted line. You can move the cropping frame or change its size with your mouse.
Setting multiple scanning areas
You can specify cropping areas in the document so that each of them can be scanned as separate images. Drag the
cropping frame to specify the areas you want to scan. You can specify up to 10 areas. Click [Scan] to scan the areas
in the cropping frames as separate images.
(Move the Image)
㻞㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the document input method (the platen glass or feeder), document size, color mode, and other settings.
Drags the image to move the visible part of the image when a preview image is enlarged.
(Zoom)
Enlarges the entire preview image. Left-click the image to zoom in. Right-click the enlarged image to zoom out. To
enlarge a part of the image to check the details, use [Zoom] ( ).
(Left Rotate)/ (Right Rotate)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees to the left or right.
(Information)
Displays the current settings of the scanned image, such as the color mode and size of the scan area.
(Auto Crop)
Automatically sets the cropping frame that fits the scanned document. Each time you click the icon, the cropping
frame is reduced.
(Clear Crop Frame)
Clears the selected cropping frame.
[Select All Crops]
Selects all of the cropping frames on the image.
[Zoom]
Enlarges the image in the cropping frame. The smaller the cropping frame, the larger the image is displayed. You can
check the details that are difficult to see with (). To return the image to its original size, click this button again.
Specifying Settings for Documents and Color Mode
[Original Input Method]
Select a setting based on whether you place your documents on the platen glass or in the feeder.
[Platen Glass] Select when placing documents on the platen glass.
[ADF (1-sided)] Select when placing 1-sided documents in the feeder.
[ADF (2-sided)]
(MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw /
MF724Cdw)
Select when placing 2-sided documents in the feeder.
[Input Size]
Specify the size of the scanning area. For normal cases, select the same size as the document. To specify the size
with values, select a unit, and enter the values for width and height. To lock the width to height ratio of the
image, click .
If you select [ADF (2-sided)] for [Original Input Method] ( ), you cannot specify the size by entering the
values.
The image size that can be scanned is limited on some applications.
If documents are placed in the feeder, set the orientation of the documents in [Orientation]. You can also set
[Binding Location] if 2-sided documents are placed in the feeder.
㻞㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the output resolution and output size.
[Color Mode]
Select the image type to scan documents.
[Black and
White]
The document is scanned as a black and white image (in black and white only, with no
intermediate shades of gray). You can change the threshold that separates text in the
document or the image into black and white with [Threshold] ( Adjusting Brightness and
Color).
[Grayscale] The document is scanned as a grayscale image (in black and white with intermediate shades of
gray, similar to a black and white photograph).
[Color] The document is scanned as a color image.
[Text Enhanced] The document is scanned as a black and white image optimized for processing by OCR (optical
character recognition) software.
Specifying Resolution and Image Size
[Output Resolution]
Select the resolution of the scanned image that suits your intended use. If documents are placed in the feeder, the
maximum resolution is 300 dpi.
About the output resolution
A resolution of 75 dpi is a rough guide for displaying the scanned image on a computer, and 300 dpi for printing or
creating a searchable PDF.
If you double the output resolution, the image file size increases by a factor of 4. If the file size is too large, a
memory shortage or other error may occur. Set the resolution to the minimum required for your intended use.
[Output Size]
Select the size of the scanned image when it is printed or displayed on a computer.
Click to switch between the portrait and landscape orientation. This button is not available when [Flexible] is
selected.
If you select [Add/Delete], you can add new output size settings and delete the added sizes.
㻞㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Configure settings for improving the image quality, such as correction of scratches or faded colors on a photograph. These settings are
available if you select [Color] or [Grayscale] for [Color Mode] ( Specifying Settings for Documents and Color Mode).
Configure color settings such as brightness, contrast, and color tone. The displayed items vary depending on the settings selected for
[Color Mode] ( Specifying Settings for Documents and Color Mode). When [Text Enhanced] is selected, you cannot configure these
settings.
Select [Flexible] to change the output size and the ratio of width to height. Drag the area you want to scan on the
preview image or enter values for width and height. If you specify the magnification percentage in the [%] entry
field on the right side of the width and height entry fields, the document is enlarged or reduced for scanning.
[Data Size]
Displays the data size of the image when it is scanned with the set [Output Resolution] and [Output Size].
Adjusting Image Quality
[Auto Tone]
Automatically adjusts the color tone of the image.
[Reduce Dust and Scratches]
Makes dust or scratches on the document less noticeable. [High] makes large scratches and dust less noticeable, but
may ruin details on the image.
[Fading Correction]
The setting is available if you select [Color] for [Color Mode]. Corrects faded colors on the document or enhances the
color saturation of dull-colored documents. [High] dramatically corrects the faded colors, but may change the color
tone of the entire image.
[Grain Correction]
Reduces graininess to create a smooth color tone when scanning photographs taken with high-speed film. [High]
dramatically reduces graininess, but may also reduce image sharpness or degrade image quality.
[Use Unsharp Mask]
Emphasizes the edges and lines in the image, creating a sharper appearance.
[Use Descreen]
Reduces the color unevenness and moire that occur when scanning printed images.
[Correct Black Text]
Emphasizes the outlines of black text.
Adjusting Brightness and Color
㻞㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
(Brightness/Contrast)
Adjusts the brightness and contrast (the difference between the light and dark parts) of the image. To adjust while
checking on a graph, click on the upper-right of the screen.
[Channel]
If you select [Color] for [Color Mode], you can adjust the [Red], [Green] and [Blue] color channels separately.
To adjust all three colors at the same time, select [Master]. You can combine the adjustments made in [Master]
and those made in the individual color channels.
If you select [Grayscale] for [Color Mode], only [Grayscale] is displayed.
[Brightness]
Slide or enter a value.
[Contrast]
Slide or enter a value. When contrast is reduced, the difference between the light and dark parts of the image
is reduced to create a softer appearance. When contrast is increased, the difference between the light and dark
parts is increased to create a bolder appearance.
(Histogram)
A histogram is a graph that shows the distribution of brightness in an image. You can adjust
the image while checking the preview image and histogram. Specify the part of the image you
want to make brightest (or darkest) in the preview image, so that the brightness balance of
the original image is automatically adjusted with the specified part being the average.
Likewise, you can also adjust the balance with the brightness of the medium tone being the
average.
[Channel]
If you select [Color] for [Color Mode], you can adjust the [Red], [Green] and [Blue] color channels separately.
To adjust all three colors at the same time, select [Master]. You can combine the adjustments made in [Master]
and those made in the individual color channels.
If you select [Grayscale] for [Color Mode], only [Grayscale] is displayed.
(Black-point Eyedropper)/ (Mid-point Eyedropper)/ (White-point Eyedropper)
Click the parts on the preview image (or cropping frame) you want to specify as the darkest, the medium, and
the brightest. Slide ,, or . Alternatively, you can enter a value.
(Gray Balance Eyedropper Tool)
Click a part on the preview image (or cropping frame) you want to render as an achromatic color, which is black,
grey, or white, each of which does not have color depth. Color tone on the rest of the image is adjusted with the
clicked part being the average. For example, if snow on a photograph image is bluish, click this part because you
essentially want to render this part as white. When you click this part, the snow is no longer bluish, and the
㻞㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
entire image is adjusted so that it comes closer to natural colors. Click different parts little by little while checking
the preview image to produce the optimum color tone.
(Tone Curve Settings)
The tone curve is a curved line that indicates the brightness and contrast levels of the image
before and after adjustment. Select a registered tone curve to adjust the brightness and
contrast levels of the image.
[Channel]
If you select [Color] for [Color Mode], you can adjust the [Red], [Green] and [Blue] color channels separately.
To adjust all three colors at the same time, select [Master]. You can combine the adjustments made in [Master]
and those made in the individual color channels.
If you select [Grayscale] for [Color Mode], only [Grayscale] is displayed.
[Select Tone Curve]
Select from the items listed below.
[No Correction] Performs no correction.
[Over Exposure] Lightens the entire image.
[Under
Exposure] Darkens the entire image.
[High Contrast] Emphasizes the difference between the light and dark parts of the image.
[Invert the
Negative/Positive
Image]
Inverts the light and dark parts of the image.
(Final Review)
The results of all adjustments made to the brightness, contrast ( ), histogram ( ), and tone
curve settings ( ) are displayed in a tone curve and as numerical values. Perform a final
check of the color settings.
(Threshold)
Adjust the threshold value for black and white images. You can enhance the appearance of
text or reduce the visibility of text or images printed on the reverse side of a semi-transparent
document, such as a newspaper. The setting is available if you select [Black and White] for
[Color Mode].
The threshold value is the boundary that separates whether a color is rendered as black or white. Colors
below a certain density level are rendered as white, and colors above a certain density level are rendered as
black.
[Threshold Level]
Slide or enter a value. To render more parts as black, slide to the right or enter a larger value.
Registering or Calling Settings
Call registered brightness or color settings for to and . Registering Frequently Used Settings
*
*
㻞㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [Preferences] to configure various settings, including the operation when scanning.
Specifying Other Settings
[Preview] Tab
Configure the preview and auto crop operations.
[Preview at the Start of ScanGear]
Select the preview operation when you start ScanGear MF.
[Automatically Execute Preview]
Scanning of the preview image starts automatically when you start ScanGear MF.
[Display Saved Preview Image]
Preview does not start automatically, and the most recently saved preview image is displayed.
[None]
Preview does not start automatically, and no preview image is displayed.
[Cropping Frame on Previewed Images]
Select how the cropping frame ( Operating Preview Images) is displayed on the preview image.
[Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images]
Auto Crop is performed based on the scanned document.
[Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images]
Auto Crop is not performed, and the most recently set cropping frame is displayed.
[None]
Auto Crop is not performed, and no cropping frame is displayed.
[Scan] Tab
Configure the settings that are applied when you scan a document by using an
application, and the settings for ScanGear MF operations.
[Scan without Using ScanGear's Window]
When you scan the document by using an OCR software or other application, the ScanGear MF screen may not be
displayed. In such a case, the document is scanned with the setting of the application applied. However, if the
application does not have the following settings, enable them here so that these settings are applied for scanning.
㻞㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Color Mode (Text and Table)]
If the application settings are specified to scan documents in color, those settings are replaced and
documents are scanned with the ScanGear MF color mode set to [Color Mode (Text and Table)].
[Text Enhanced]
If the application settings are specified to scan documents in black and white, those settings are replaced
and documents are scanned with the ScanGear MF color mode set to [Text Enhanced].
[Automatically Quit ScanGear after Scanning]
The [ScanGear MF] screen automatically closes after scanning is complete. The screen may automatically close
with some applications regardless of this setting.
[Color Settings] Tab
Configure advanced color and brightness settings, such as color matching and
gamma correction.
[Color Correction]
Select the color correction method.
[Recommended]
Color tone is vividly reproduced on a computer display. This setting is recommended for most color
corrections.
[Color Matching]
Color is adjusted so that the color tone on the display comes closer to that on the printed result. This
setting is available if you select [Color] for [Color Mode] ( Specifying Settings for Documents and Color
Mode).
If [Color Matching] is enabled, the [Fading Correction] ( Adjusting Image Quality) setting and the buttons for
brightness and color settings ( Adjusting Brightness and Color) are disabled.
[Always Execute the Auto Tone]
Color tone is automatically adjusted. The setting is available if you select [Color] or [Grayscale] for [Color Mode].
[Monitor Gamma]
You can display the document at the proper brightness level by specifying the gamma value of the computer
display that displays the scanned image. The setting is applied if you select [Color] or [Grayscale] for [Color
Mode].
[Scanner] Tab
Configure the temporary save destination of files, the playing of audio files, and
other settings.
[Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved]
Click [Browse] to change the folder to which an image is temporarily saved.
[Sound Settings]
You can specify the music or sounds that are played while the machine is scanning or when scanning is complete.
Click [Browse] to specify a file to be played. The following file formats (extensions) are supported:
MIDI files (.mid/.rmi/.midi)
Audio files (.wav/.aif/.aiff)
MP3 files (.mp3)
[Play Music During Scanning]
The specified sound file is played while scanning is being performed.
㻞㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
It is troublesome to configure the color mode, image quality, or other settings each time you scan. If you register frequently used
settings as Favorite Settings, you can scan simply call the registered settings when scanning.
The following settings cannot be registered in [Favorite Settings].
Widths and heights in [Input Settings] and [Output Settings]
On or off of the button (to lock the ratio of width to height) in [Input Settings]
The magnification percentage (%) in [Output Settings]
[Play Sound When Scanning is Completed]
The specified sound file is played when scanning is complete.
[Test Scanner]
You can check whether the scan function of the machine is working properly. When the [Scanner Diagnostics]
screen opens, click [Start].
Registering Frequently Used Settings
Place the document(s), and click [Preview].
Change the scan settings.
Select settings to register as necessary.
Select [Add/Delete] in [Favorite Settings].
The [Add/Delete Favorite Settings] screen is displayed.
[Add/Delete] is available when the preview image is displayed.
Enter a name into [Setting Name], and click [Add] [Save].
Enter a name for the settings to register. Use a name that is easy to find in the drop-down list.
1
2
3
4
㻞㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Calling registered Favorite Settings
Display a preview image, and select the registered setting in the drop-down list.
Registering the Brightness or Color Setting
To register only the brightness, contrast, histogram, tone curve, or threshold setting, follow the procedure below.
Place the document(s), and click [Preview].
Adjust the brightness or color. Adjusting Brightness and Color
Select settings to register as necessary.
Select [Add/Delete] in the drop-down list.
The [Add/Delete Tone Curve Settings] or [Add/Delete Threshold Settings] screen is displayed.
Enter a name into [Setting Name], and click [Add] [Save].
Enter a name for the settings to register. Use a name that is easy to find in the drop-down list.
Calling the registered setting
Display a preview image, and select the registered setting in the drop-down list.
1
2
3
4
㻞㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-060
Convenient Scanning with a Machine-Based Operation
The machine can convert original documents into electronic file formats such as PDF without using a computer. There are many
advantages to digitizing documents. A variety of useful settings are available to suit your needs.
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
One way this function can be used is by scanning documents directly onto a USB memory device and taking the USB memory device
to your meeting. You can then connect the USB memory device to a computer connected to a projector and project your documents
on a projector.
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
You can save scanned documents as JPEG images, PDF files or in other digital file formats and send them directly from the machine
as e-mail attachments. You can work more efficiently because this feature eliminates the need to use your computer to send scanned
documents. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as specifying the e-mail server settings.
For more information, see Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-mail, Sending & Receiving I-Faxes).
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder /FTP Server
You can save scanned documents as JPEG images, PDF files or in other digital file formats and store them in shared folders or an FTP
server on computers. This feature is helpful when digitalizing paper documents for sharing. Before you can use this function, you
need to complete some procedures, such as specifying the location for saving scanned documents. For more information, see
Configuring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders or Configuring the Machine for Scanning to FTP Server.
㻞㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-061
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
This section describes how to scan documents to save directly in a USB memory device connected to the machine. You can save scanned
documents as JPEG images, PDF files or in other digital file formats.
Available USB Memory Devices
You can use USB memory devices with the following format styles.
FAT16 (memory capacity: up to 2 GB)
FAT32 (memory capacity: up to 32 GB)
Do not use non-standard USB memory devices. You may not be able to save data properly in some USB memory devices.
Do not connect anything other than a USB memory device. USB memory devices cannot be connected via a USB hub or an
extension cable.
Do not use USB memory devices with special functions such as built-in security functions.
The USB port on the front of the machine supports USB 2.0.
If a folder in a USB memory device has many files, saving scanned data will take more time. Use your computer to delete
unnecessary files on your USB memory device or move them to a different folder.
Connect a USB memory device to the USB port (USB2.0).
Do not remove the USB memory device or shock or shake the device or the machine when data is being read or written. Also,
do not turn OFF the machine while the processing is in progress.
Place the document(s). Placing Documents
Press and tap <Scan>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send.
Tap <USB Memory>.
1
2
3
4
㻞㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the scan settings as necessary.
Select the settings. Specifying Detailed Settings
Press .
Scanning starts.
If you want to cancel scanning, tap <Cancel> <Yes>.
When placing documents in the feeder in step 2
When scanning is complete, the scanned data is saved in the USB memory device.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 2
How the folders to save scanned data and files are named
When scanning is complete, a folder is automatically created in the USB memory device to save the scanned data. Folders and
files are named as follows.
Folder
Name
The "SCAN_00" folder is created and up to 100 files are saved in the folder. The folders "SCAN_01" to "SCAN_99" are
then created when the current folder becomes full of 100 files.
File
Name
File names from "SCAN0000.XXX" to "SCAN9999.XXX" are given to the scanned data files ("XXX" is the extension for
the file format such as "JPG"). For the first two numerical digits, the same number is allotted as that of the folder
number in which the files are saved. For example, The fifth JPEG file stored in the "SCAN_01" folder is named
"SCAN0105.JPG".
Tap <Close>.
Disconnect the USB memory device from the USB port (USB2.0).
1Press .
2Press .
3Tap <Device Status>.
When scanning is complete, follow the procedures below (except if you selected JPEG as a file format in step 5).
1If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass,
and press .
Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2Tap <Finish>.
The scanned data is saved in the USB memory device.
5
6
7
8
㻞㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-062
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
You can specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations, just like you can when sending normal e-mails.
Place the document(s). Placing Documents
Press and tap <Scan>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send.
Tap <E-Mail>.
Enter the destination using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Tapping <A/a/12> toggles the input modes.
If you enter the wrong characters, press . (Press to delete each character one by one; press and hold to delete all the input
characters at once.)
To make it easier to specify destinations by using other methods, such as the Address Book, see Sending Using Registered
Destinations (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server) .
If the screen above is not displayed
You can only send to your own E-mail address. To send to other destinations, you must configure the send function
authentication settings so that E-mail transmission is not restricted. Contact your administrator for details. LDAP Server
Authentication .
Specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations, as necessary.
Tap <Destination>, and select the method for specifying destinations.
If you tap <Specify from LDAP Server> or <Specify Myself as Destination>, the destination is selected as the <To> destination.
To specify destinations for <Cc> and <Bcc>, you need to use the <Specify from Address Book> or <Specify from Coded Dial>.
1
2
3
4
5
㻞㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
Tap the settings. Specifying Detailed Settings
The file name of a scanned document is automatically assigned based on the following format: communication management
number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).file extension.
Example of file names: If a one-page document is converted into a PDF file and sent on October 17, 2015 at 07:00:05 P.M.
0045_151017190005_001.pdf
You cannot specify file names yourself.
Specify the subject, body, reply-to address, and priority for the e-mail as necessary.
The subject and the priority are set to "Attached Image" and "Standard" respectively by default.
The body is not set by default. Enter it as necessary. Without the body text, only scanned documents are sent.
The reply-to address is not set by default. If you want to display the reply-to address differently from that of the machine,
specify the address from among those registered in the Address Book. If no destination is registered in the Address Book,
see Registering in the Address Book .
To specify subject/body
1Tap <Subject/Message>.
2Tap <Subject>.
3Enter the subject using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Tapping <A/a/12> toggles the input modes.
4Tap <Message>.
6
7
㻞㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To specify reply-to address
To specify priority
5Enter the body using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Tapping <A/a/12> toggles the input modes.
6Tap <Apply>.
1Tap <Reply To>.
2Tap <Specify from Address Book>.
3Select a reply-to address from the Address Book.
For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book .
1Tap <Priority>.
㻞㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Press to start sending.
Scanning starts.
When the SMTP authentication screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password and then tap
<Apply>.
If you want to cancel sending, tap <Cancel> <Yes>.
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the e-mail is sent.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
If a Send Error Occurs
Error notifications are sometimes sent to the e-mail address set to the machine. You can clear the mailbox on the server from the
Remote UI.
To clear the mailbox
2Select a priority level.
When scanning is complete, follow the procedures below.
1If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass,
and press .
Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2Tap <Start Sending>.
The e-mail is sent.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].
8
㻞㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing Default Settings
If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed: Registering Frequently Used Scan Settings (E-
mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
If you want to specify the e-mail sender name: Register Unit Name (E-Mail/I-Fax)
4Click [Clear] in [Clear Mail Box].
5Read the message that is displayed, and click [OK].
E-mail is deleted from the mailbox.
When the mailbox is cleared
Once [OK] is clicked in the message window, all e-mail in the server mailbox is deleted. If the machine does not
have a special e-mail account, you should first check whether any e-mail in the mailbox needs to be kept.
㻞㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-063
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
Available destinations for shared folders are limited to the destinations registered in the Address Book. If no destinations are
registered, register destinations in the Address Book before scanning to shared folders.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
Place the document(s). Placing Documents
Press and tap <Scan>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send.
Tap <File>.
Select a destination from the Address Book.
For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book .
Selecting destinations directly by entering coded dial numbers. You can also specify previously used destinations. Selecting
Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers Specifying Previously Used Destinations
If the screen above is not displayed
You can only send to a shared folder or FTP server. To send to other destinations, you must configure the send function
authentication settings so that destinations are not restricted. Contact your administrator for details. LDAP Server
Authentication
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
Tap the settings. Specifying Detailed Settings
1
2
3
4
5
㻞㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The file name of a scanned document is automatically assigned based on the following format: communication management
number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).file extension name.
Example of file names: If a one-page document is converted into a PDF file and sent on October 17, 2015 at 07:00:05 P.M.
0045_151010191005_001.pdf
You cannot specify file names yourself.
Press to start scanning.
Scanning starts.
When the File Authentication screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password and then tap <Apply>.
If you want to cancel scanning, press <Yes>.
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the documents are scanned to the shared folder or FTP Server.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing Default Settings
If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed: Registering Frequently Used Scan Settings (E-
mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
LINKS
Canceling Sending Documents (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
Checking Log for Sent Documents (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
When scanning is complete, follow the procedures below (except if you selected JPEG as a file format in step 5).
1If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass,
and press .
Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages.
When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2Tap <Start Sending>.
The documents are scanned to the shared folder or FTP server.
6
㻞㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-064
Canceling Sending Documents (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
If you want to cancel sending documents immediately after pressing , tap <Cancel> on the display or press . You can also cancel
sending documents after checking the sending status.
Use <Cancel> to cancel
Press to cancel
If the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed
Documents have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel.
Check the transmission status before canceling
<TX Job> <Job Status> Select the document <Cancel> <Yes>
Details
The number of sending document, settings, and other details are displayed. If you only want to check the details without sending,
press to return to the Scan main screen.
<Cancel>
Cancels sending.
LINKS
㻞㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-065
Specifying Detailed Settings
This section describes the settings available when scanning documents. These settings include specifying the file format into which
documents are converted and adjusting density to improve the appearance of scanned documents as well as the basic settings such as
specifying the document orientation or scanning size.
Specifying a Scanning Size Selecting a File Format Adjusting Density
Specifying Orientation of Your
Document
Selecting Document Type Scanning 2-Sided
Documents (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Adjusting Sharpness Adjusting Balance between File
Size and Image Quality
Setting Gamma Values
㻞㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-066
Specifying a Scanning Size
You can specify the scanning size of your documents.
<Scan> Tap <USB Memory> or <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> to specify destinations. <Scan Size> Select the document
size
LINKS
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
Sending I-Faxes
㻞㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-067
Selecting a File Format
You can select the file format to which documents are scanned. Select from PDF/JPEG/TIFF. With PDF, you
can select from Compact PDF with a smaller data size or from OCR (optical character recognition) PDF
allowing text searching. <Set PDF Details> allows you to enhance your PDF security.
<Scan> Tap <USB Memory> or <E-Mail>/<File> to specify destinations <File Format> Select a file format
<PDF>
Converts a scanned document into a PDF file with no file size reduction.
<PDF (Compact)>
Converts a scanned document into a PDF file with a reduced file size than that of <PDF>.
<PDF (Compact/OCR)>
Converts a scanned document into a text searchable PDF file with a reduced file size than that of <PDF>. The PDF file includes
text data, extracted from the characters in the scanned document with OCR, enabling you to search the text using a computer.
<PDF (OCR)>
Converts a scanned document into a text searchable PDF file as <PDF (Compact/OCR)>, with no file size reduction.
<Set PDF Details>
Select to specify the settings for generating an encrypted PDF with a digital signature.
Only available for the MF729Cx with the optional Send PDF Security Feature Set enabled.
*
*
<Set PDF Details> Select the type of PDF format Specify the encryption and digital signature settings
<Apply>
Specifying encryption level
Select the encryption level suitable to your needs, and then set the encryption password that will be required to open
the PDF file. The encryption options are as follows:
<None>
The PDF file is not encrypted.
<Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES>
Generate a PDF file compatible with Adobe Acrobat/Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader 7.0 or later.
<Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>
Generate a PDF file compatible with Adobe Acrobat/Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader 9.0 or later.
<Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>
㻞㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
<JPEG>
The scanned document is converted into a JPEG file.
<TIFF>
The scanned document is converted into a TIFF file.
If you select JPEG in <File Format> and try to scan a document from the platen glass, you can only scan one page. To scan a
multiple-page document all at once, use the feeder. Each page of the document is saved as a separate file. If you select TIFF
or PDF, you can scan multiple-page documents either from the platen glass or from the feeder and the whole of the scanned
document is saved as one file.
<PDF (Compact)> and <PDF (Compact/OCR)> compress photos and illustrations on documents more than <PDF> and <PDF
(OCR)>. The file will be smaller, but the image quality of some documents or the number of documents that can be scanned
at once may be lower. If you select <PDF (Compact)> or <PDF (Compact/OCR)>, you can specify the compression level.
For the resolutions of each file format, see Specifications for Scanning to Shared Folders .
If you select <Set PDF Details>, you can specify the PDF options of encryption and digital signatures for <PDF (Compact)>,
<PDF>, <PDF (Compact/OCR)>, or <PDF (OCR)>.
In <PDF (Compact/OCR)> and <PDF (OCR)> you can configure the settings so that the machine automatically detects the
document direction during scanning based on the direction of the text read by the OCR function. OCR (Text Searchable)
Settings
Image Quality Settings for <PDF (Compact)> and <PDF (Compact/OCR)>
Generate a PDF file compatible with Adobe Acrobat/Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader 10 or later.
Only either <Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES> or <Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES> appears on the
display as an option for generating a 256-bit AES encrypted PDF. You can change the available encryption levels
according to your needs. 256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF
Adding a digital signature
To add a digital signature on the PDF file, select <Top Left>. As the signature, information such as the model name
and serial number of the machine is added on the PDF file.
To add a digital signature, prepare a key pair and a certificate. Generating Key Pairs
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <Output File Image Settings> <PDF (Compact) Image Quality Level> Select
the type of your documents Specify the settings
<Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or Photo Mode>
Select when scanning documents that contain photos.
<Image Level in Text Mode>
Select when scanning documents that only contain text.
<Data Size Priority>
The data size is highly compressed and reduced, but the image quality is low.
<Normal>
The compression ratio and the image quality are adjusted to an intermediate setting between <Data Size Priority> and
<Image Quality Priority>.
<Image Quality Priority>
The image quality improves, but the data compression ratio decreases and data size is large.
㻞㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-068
Adjusting Density
You can adjust the density of the scan if the text or images in a document are too light or dark.
<Scan> Tap <USB Memory> or <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> to specify destinations. <Density> Adjust the density
<Apply>
<->
Decreases the density.
<+>
Increases the density.
LINKS
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Sending I-Faxes
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
Adjusting Sharpness
㻞㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-069
Specifying Orientation of Your Document
You can specify portrait or landscape orientation.
<Scan> Tap <USB Memory> or <E-Mail>/<File> to specify destinations. <Original Type> Select the document type
<Portrait>
Select for documents with portrait orientation.
<Landscape>
Select for documents with landscape orientation.
LINKS
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
㻞㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06A
Selecting Document Type
You can select the image quality for the scan depending on the document type, such as text-only documents,
documents with charts and graphs, or magazine photos.
<Scan> Tap <USB Memory> or <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> to specify destinations. <Original Type> Select the
document type
<Text>
Suitable when scanning documents that only contain text.
<Text/Photo>
Suitable when scanning documents that contain both text and photos.
<Photo>
Suitable when scanning documents that contain printed photos, such as magazines or pamphlets.
LINKS
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Sending I-Faxes
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
㻞㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06C
Scanning 2-Sided Documents
The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of documents in the feeder.
The machine cannot scan both sides of documents automatically when the documents are placed on the platen glass.
<Scan> Tap <USB Memory> or <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> to specify destinations. <2-Sided Original> Select <Book
Type> or <Calendar Type>
<Book Type>
Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.
<Calendar Type>
Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.
LINKS
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Sending I-Faxes
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
㻞㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06E
Adjusting Sharpness
You can adjust sharpness of the image before sending. Increase the sharpness to sharpen blurred text and
lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of magazine photos.
<Scan> Tap <USB Memory> or <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> to specify destinations. <Sharpness> Adjust the
sharpness <Apply>
<->
Decreases the sharpness, resulting in a softer image.
Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos
<+>
Increases the image sharpness.
Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil
LINKS
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Sending I-Faxes
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
Adjusting Density
㻞㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06F
Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality
The scanned documents are converted into the specified file formats. At that time, you can specify the file
compression ratio. <Small: Memory Priority> makes the compression ratio higher than normal to create
smaller files with lower image quality. On the other hand, <Large: Image Quality Priority> makes the
compression ratio lower than normal larger files with higher image quality.
<Scan> Tap <USB Memory> or <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File> to specify destinations. Specify the setting
<Small: Memory Priority>
The data size is highly compressed and reduced, but the image quality becomes low.
<Standard>
The compression ratio and the image quality are adjusted to an intermediate setting between <Small: Memory Priority> and
<Large: Image Quality Priority>.
<Large: Image Quality Priority>
The image quality improves, but the data compression ratio decreased and data size becomes large.
LINKS
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Sending I-Faxes
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
Selecting a File Format
㻞㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06H
Setting Gamma Values
The scanned documents are converted into the specified file formats. At that time, you can specify the
gamma values to apply to the documents. You can specify the same gamma value as that of the monitor
which is to be used for viewing the converted files so the files are displayed with brightness true to the
original documents.
For the gamma value of a monitor display, see the instruction manual included with the display.
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <Output File Image Settings> <YCbCr TX Gamma Value> Select the gamma value
LINKS
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Sending I-Faxes
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
Selecting a File Format
㻞㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06J
Sending Using Registered Destinations (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP
Server)
You can specify destinations by selecting from the Address Book as well as by using the numeric keys. To use the Address Book, you
need to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. You can also specify previously used destinations. If your office has an
LDAP server installed, you can also specify destinations in the server.
Specifying from Address Book Selecting Destinations Directly by
Entering Coded Dial Numbers
Specifying Previously Used
Destinations
Specifying Destinations in an
LDAP Server (E-mail/I-Fax)
When specifying destinations for e-mails
You can specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations, just like you can when sending normal e-mails. These
destinations can be specified using the Address Book or an LDAP server. To specify destinations as Cc or Bcc addresses, you
need to use the Address Book.
When specifying destinations for shared folders and FTP Server
You cannot specify destinations using the numeric keys or an LDAP server. Furthermore, only one destinations can be specified
at a time.
TIPS for Enhancing Security
If you want to limit available destinations to ones from the Address Book, ones in an LDAP server, or previously specified
ones:
Limiting Available Destinations
If you want to disable specifying previously used destinations:
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Sending I-Faxes
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
Registering in the Address Book
Registering LDAP Servers
㻞㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06L
Specifying from Address Book
The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of registered destinations or by
searching by name for destinations with recipient names.
You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature.
Registering in the Address Book
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
Press and tap <Scan>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Select <E-Mail>, <I-Fax>, or <File>.
If you select <File>, proceed to step 4.
Tap <Destination> <Specify from Address Book>.
If the <Type> screen appears, select <To>, <Cc>, or <Bcc> as a destination type.
Select a tab using / .
<All>
Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book. For the marks beside the destinations, see the explanations below.
<>
Displays a list of destinations registered in Favorites.
<A-Z>/<0-9>/<ABC> to <YZ>
Displays destinations with recipient names whose first characters correspond to the characters of the selected tab.
1
2
3
4
㻞㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
< >
Displays destinations for faxes. To specify destinations using this tab, see Specifying from Address Book (Fax).
<>
Displays destinations for e-mails.
<>
Displays destinations for I-Faxes.
<>
Displays destinations for shared folders/FTP Server.
<>
Displays a list of destinations registered in Group Dial. This feature is not available when scanning documents to shared
folders/FTP Server.
Select a destination.
If you want to specify multiple destinations (e-mail/I-Fax)
Repeat steps 3 to 5. Up to 100 destinations can be specified.
To delete destinations (e-mail/I-Fax)
If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Tap <Destination> <Confirm/Edit>.
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove>.
If you specified destinations in Group Dial in step 2, <Number of Destinations> is displayed on the screen.
Selecting this item displays detailed destinations in Group Dial.
4Tap <Yes>.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations
Before selecting <Confirm/Edit> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a
destination you want to delete, and press .
5
㻞㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HY
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers
If you know the 3-digit number (coded dial number) assigned to the destination, you can specify the
destination by entering that number directly.
To use coded dialing, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
Press and tap <Scan>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Tap <Destination> <Specify from Coded Dial>.
If the <Type> screen appears, select <To>, <Cc>, or <Bcc> as a destination type.
Use the numeric keys to enter a three-digit number (001 to 281).
If you enter the wrong characters, press . (Press to delete each character one by one; press and hold to delete all the input
characters at once.)
If a confirmation screen appears
When <Coded Dial TX Confirmation> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the destination and the name for the
number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are shown.) Check the contents and if
everything is correct, tap <OK>. To specify a different destination, tap <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial
number. Displaying Destinations in Address Book
If you want to specify multiple destinations (e-mail/I-Fax)
Repeat steps 2 and 3. Up to 100 destinations can be specified.
To delete destinations (e-mail/I-Fax)
If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Tap <Destination> <Confirm/Edit>.
1
2
3
㻞㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Sending I-Faxes
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove>.
If you specified destinations in Group Dial in step 2, <Number of Destinations: > is displayed on the screen.
Selecting this item displays detailed destinations in Group Dial.
4Tap <Yes>.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations
Before selecting <Confirm/Edit> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a
destination you want to delete, and press .
㻞㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06R
Specifying Previously Used Destinations
You can select a destination from the three most previously used destinations. When you specify a previously
used destination, the machine also sets the same scan settings, such as density, used the last time you sent
documents to that destination.
When <Restrict Resending from Log> is set to <On>, you cannot use this feature. Disabling Use of Previously Used
Destinations
Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations, and disables this
feature. Limiting Available Destinations
When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specified are deleted.
Press and tap <Scan>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Tap <Destination> <Recall Set.>.
Select a destination.
The selected destination and its scan settings are specified. You can also change the settings before sending.
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Sending I-Faxes
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
1
2
3
㻞㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06S
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (E-mail/I-Fax)
If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can use the destinations registered in the server. To specify
destinations, access an LDAP server via the machine, and then search for a destination.
You need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand. Registering LDAP Servers
Press and tap <Scan>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Tap <Destination> <Specify from LDAP Server>.
Select the LDAP server you are using.
Select the search criteria.
Personal names, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and Organization Unit names are available criteria for
searching destinations. Multiple search criteria can be specified at the same time.
Specify the search criteria using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
The following screen shows an example for when <Name> is selected in step 4 to search by personal name.
1
2
3
4
5
㻞㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Tapping <A/a/12> toggles the input modes (except for searching by fax number).
To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 4 and 5.
Tap <Search Method>.
Specify the search method.
<Using All Conditions Below>
Searches and displays the destinations that meet all the search criteria specified in steps 4 and 5.
<Using Some Conditions Below>
All destinations meeting any of the search criteria specified in steps 4 and 5 are displayed as search results.
Tap <Start Search>.
The destinations meeting your search criteria are displayed.
If the authentication screen appears when you tap <Start Search>, enter the user name of the machine and the password
registered in the LDAP server, and tap <Apply>. Registering LDAP Servers
Select a destination, and tap <Apply>.
Up to 10 destinations can be specified.
To search for a destination using other search criteria, repeat steps 2 to 9.
If you have already specified a destination using the numeric keys, up to nine destinations can be specified using an LDAP
server.
You cannot specify the selected destinations as Cc or Bcc addresses.
To delete destinations
If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Tap <Destination> <Confirm/Edit>.
6
7
8
9
㻞㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Sending I-Faxes
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove>.
4Tap <Yes>.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations
Before selecting <Confirm/Edit> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a
destination you want to delete, and press .
㻞㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06Y
Configuring Scan Settings to Your Needs
The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If you register your
frequently used scan settings as default settings, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every time you make a scan.
In addition, you can also register combinations of destinations and scan settings and use them whenever you need them (e-mail/I-
Fax/shared folders/FTP server).
The machine comes pre-configured with factory default settings ( Setting Menu List). You can change and register the
default settings according to your needs.
Specify <PDF (Compact)> as the default file format, and register it as the default
setting. From now on, you will not have to change the file format when scanning.
Changing Default Settings
Specify the e-mail address of your client with <Color> and <JPEG> for scan settings,
and register the address and settings as a combination in <Favorite Settings>.You can
then easily use this setting combination whenever you need it. Registering
Frequently Used Scan Settings (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
㻟㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06U
Changing Default Settings
The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If you change these
default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every
time you scan.
USB memory
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <USB Memory Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting Change the
default value of the selected item <Apply>
Settings
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
E-mail
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <E-Mail Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting Change the default
value of the selected item <Apply>
Settings
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
I-Fax Settings
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <I-Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the
setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>
㻟㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Settings
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
File settings
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <File Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting Change the default
value of the selected item <Apply>
Settings
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
LINKS
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Sending I-Faxes
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
Specifying Detailed Settings
Scan Settings
㻟㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06X
Registering Frequently Used Scan Settings (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP
Server)
You can register up to 18 frequently used combinations of scan settings. Because registered settings can be displayed as needed, there is
no need for complicated procedures (e.g. setting the document type, specifying compact PDF as the file format and sending the file to all
internal staff) every time. You can also assign registered setting combinations to a shortcut button displayed on the <Home> Screen.
Registering Favorite Settings
Recalling Favorite Settings
Press and tap <Scan>.
When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication
server and press .Logging on to Authorized Send
Select <E-Mail>, <I-Fax>, or <File>.
Change the values for the settings you want to register. Specifying Detailed Settings
To also include the destination in a favorite scan setting, enter the destination to be registered. Sending Using Registered
Destinations (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
Tap <Favorite Settings> <Register>.
Check the message and tap <OK>.
Registering Favorite Settings
1
2
3
4
5
㻟㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select where to register the settings.
Check the details of the settings to be registered, and tap <Apply>. Specifying Detailed Settings
To change the value of a setting to be registered, tap the setting.
To rename the registration destination, tap <Change Name>. Entering Text
Select whether to register the settings as a shortcut button.
If you select <Yes>, a message appears. Check the message and then tap <OK>. The registered setting combination is added to
the <Home> Screen as a shortcut button.
If the <Home> Screen is full and the button cannot be added, use <Home Screen Settings> to delete registered buttons or
blanks. Customizing the <Home> Screen
Registered settings are retained even when the machine is turned OFF.
To edit or delete registered settings, go to <Scan> <Favorite Settings> <Edit/Delete> <Edit> or <Delete> and then
follow the steps below.
To edit a setting:
Select the setting to be edited Change the setting and tap <Apply> <Yes>.
To delete a setting:
Select the setting to be deleted tap <Yes>.
Destinations cannot be changed once the settings have been registered. To change a destination, delete the settings and then
6
7
8
㻟㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
register them again.
If you registered a destination that was specified from the Address Book and then delete the destination entry in the Address
Book, the destination is also deleted from the favorite scan settings.
Simply select the setting combination that suits your purpose from the favorite settings.
<Scan> <Favorite Settings> Select the setting combination to be recalled
Once you have recalled the settings, the setting combination, you can also change the scan settings as needed.
LINKS
Convenient Scanning with a Machine-Based Operation
Recalling Favorite Settings
㻟㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-06W
Checking Log for Sent Documents (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
The log for scanned documents sent directly from the machine can be checked in list format.
When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the logs for sent documents. Display Job Log
Press .
Tap <TX Job>.
Tap <Job Log>.
A list of the documents that were sent is displayed.
Tap the document whose detailed information you want to check.
Check the detailed information about the selected document.
LINKS
TX Result Report
Communication Management Report
1
2
3
4
5
㻟㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HC
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
Using the machine in combination with a mobile device such as a smartphone or tablet enables you to print or scan with ease. The
machine supports AirPrint, which allows for direct printing from an iPhone/iPad, and Google Cloud Print™, which enables you to print
while on the go. By utilizing these and various other functions, you can use the machine for a wide variety of purposes.
Using the Machine from a Smartphone/Tablet
To print or scan from a mobile device, you can use Canon Mobile Application conveniently. If your mobile device is NFC compatible, you
can print by simply touching the device to the machine. Further, you can connect to the machine without a wireless LAN router, and use
the "Remote UI" that allows you to remotely operate the machine and change machine's settings.
Printing/Scanning through Canon Mobile Application and Plug-in
Printing by Touching a Mobile Device to the Machine (NFC) (MF729Cx)
Making a Simple Wireless Connection Using Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw /
MF628Cw)
Using Remote UI from a Mobile Device
Using AirPrint
You can print, scan, or fax without using drivers by sending print data from Apple devices. Using AirPrint
Using Google Cloud Print
You can print without using a printer driver by using applications or services on computers or other mobile devices that support Google
Cloud Print. Using Google Cloud Print
This machine also supports Mopria™. Using Mopria™ allows you to print with printers from different manufacturers through the
same printer driver. This is convenient because you can print with common operations and common settings to various printer
models. For details about the models supporting Mopria™ and the system requirements, see http://www.mopria.org.
Viewing Mopria™ Settings
Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote UI) [Settings/Registration]
[Network Settings] [Mopria Settings] [Edit] Check that the [Use Mopria] check box is selected
[OK]
㻟㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
㻟㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HE
Printing/Scanning through Canon Mobile Application and Plug-in
You can print data stored in a smartphone/tablet connected to this machine, and send documents scanned with the machine to the
connected smartphone/tablet. For compatible operating systems, the detailed setting procedure and operating procedure, please see the
Canon website at: http://www.canon.com/.
㻟㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HF
Printing by Touching a Mobile Device to the Machine (NFC)
This machine supports the NFC (Near Field Communication) standards. By touching an NFC compatible mobile device to the NFC mark on
the operation panel of the machine, you can print photos and documents stored in that mobile device.
On where to touch the mobile device, see Operation Panel.
Setting the Mobile Device
Set the device so that its NFC function is enabled. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your mobile devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Install Canon Mobile Application on your mobile device. For more information, see the Canon website at: http://www.canon.com/.
Launch Canon Mobile Application.
Required Machine Setting
To print from NFC compatible devices, specify the following settings.
Set <Enable NFC> to <On>. Enable NFC
Set the IP address in IPv4 format. Setting IPv4 Address
You can download the application software for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.
If printing does not start, change the position where you touch the mobile device to the machine.
It may take some time before the connection is complete.
Proper operation may not be possible depending on the mobile device.
㻟㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HH
Making a Simple Wireless Connection Using Direct Connection (Access Point
Mode)
Even in an environment with no access points or wireless LAN routers, you can connect to the machine directly from your mobile device.
This enables you to print from your mobile device whenever you want to, without difficult connection settings.
You can use this machine as an access point. To do so, set <Enable Direct Connection> to <On> beforehand. Configuring the
Settings for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
<Direct Connection> Connect from the mobile device using the displayed SSID and network key. The Direct Connection
screen is displayed.
<Connect. Info.>
You can view the information on the Direct Connection being proceeding.
<Disconnect>
Stops the Direct Connection procedure.
While in Direct Connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on your mobile device.
Direct Connection is only possible as a one-to-one connection between the machine and a single mobile device. You cannot
connect 2 or more mobile devices to the machine at a time.
If wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and network key are
displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.
If while in communication by Direct Connection, a duration when there is no data transmission between the machine and the
mobile device lasts for some time, the communication may terminate.
The machine's SSID and network key are changed each time the Direct Connection procedure is started.
While in Direct Connection, sleep mode is not as effective at saving power.
When both <Enable Direct Connection> and <Enable NFC> are set to <On>, sleep mode is not as effective at saving power
even if not in Direct Connection.
Configuring the Settings for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw /
MF628Cw)
Enable NFC
If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may prevent proper
communication after using the direct connection.
Using NFC together with Access Point Mode
You can use NFC and Access Point Mode in combination. By simply touching your mobile device to the NFC mark on the
operation panel of the machine, you can read out the machine's SSID and network key automatically. Printing by
Touching a Mobile Device to the Machine (NFC) (MF729Cx)
Using the Machine in Direct Connection (in Access Point Mode)
㻟㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HJ
Using Remote UI from a Mobile Device
You can use the Remote UI from a Web browser installed on your mobile device. This allows you to check the machine's status and
specify machine's settings from your mobile device.
Supported Browsers
The browsers compatible with the Remote UI for mobile devices are the following.
For Android OS
Chrome
For iOS
Safari
Enter the IP address of the machine into the Web browser and start the Remote UI. Check the IP address set to the machine in advance
(Viewing Network Settings). If you have any questions, ask your Network Administrator.
Start the Web browser on your smartphone or tablet.
Enter "http://(the IP address of the machine)/" in the address field.
If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
Some items of the Remote UI are not displayed in its "Smartphone Version." If you want to check all items, see the "PC
Version."
LINKS
Using Remote UI
Starting Remote UI with a Mobile Device
1
2
㻟㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HK
Using AirPrint
You can print, scan, or fax without using drivers by sending print data from Apple devices.
Setting AirPrint
Configuring AirPrint Settings
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint
Functions of the AirPrint
Printing with AirPrint
Scanning with AirPrint
Faxing with AirPrint (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Troubleshooting
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying the machine. You
can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Depending on your Web browser, the procedure to start the Remote UI may be different. See the instruction manuals for the Web
browser you are using.
Click [Settings/Registration].
If you are using a mobile device, such as iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.
Click [Network Settings] [AirPrint Settings].
Configuring AirPrint Settings
1
2
3
㻟㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [Edit].
Specify the required settings, and click [OK].
[Use AirPrint]
Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.
[Printer Name]/[Location]/[Latitude]/[Longitude]
Enter the name and the installation location information to help you identify this machine when operating your Apple device. This
information is useful if you have more than one AirPrint printer.
If you change [Printer Name]
If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specified, you may be unable to print any more from the Mac that has been able
to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name> ( Configuring DNS) of IPv4 is also changed
automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac again.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint
4
5
6
㻟㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view information about
consumables, such as paper and toner cartridges. Further, you can configure security function settings ( Configuring IEEE 802.1X
Authentication).
Click [System Preferences] in the Dock on the desktop [Printers & Scanners].
Select your printer and click [Options & Supplies].
Click [Show Printer Webpage].
Log on to the Remote UI.
To change AirPrint settings, log on in System Manager Mode.
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, Mac OS, and Mac OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Trademarks
1
2
3
4
㻟㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HL
Printing with AirPrint
You do not necessarily need to use a computer for printing e-mails, photos, Web pages, and other documents. AirPrint enables you to
print directly from Apple devices such as iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch.
Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
Printing from Mac
System Requirements
To print with AirPrint, you need one of the following Apple devices.
iPad (all models)
iPhone (3GS or later)
iPod touch (3rd generation or later)
Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)
Mac OS X 10.9 or later when you use USB connection.
Network Environment
You need one of the following environments.
The Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN.
The Apple device and the machine are in Direct Connection.
The Mac and the machine are connected via USB.
When using USB connection
Set <Select OS for USB Connected PC> to <Mac OS>. Notify to Check Paper Settings
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Apple device.
For how to make sure whether the Apple device and the machine are connected via wired/wireless LAN, see "Getting Started."
Manuals Included with the Machine
For how to make sure whether the Apple device and the machine are in Direct Connection, see Making a Simple Wireless
Connection Using Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw).
From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.
From the drop-down list, tap [Print].
Select this machine from [Printer] in [Printer Options].
The printers connected to the network are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
[Printer Options] is not displayed on applications that do not support AirPrint. You cannot print by using those applications.
Specify the print settings as necessary.
The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
Tap [Print].
*
*
Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻟㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Printing starts.
Checking the print status
During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice tap [Print].
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Mac.
For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals Included with the Machine
Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
This operation is not necessary if the registration has already been performed for scanning or faxing.
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the
application you are using.
Select this machine in the print dialog box.
The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
Specify the print settings as necessary.
The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
Click [Print].
Printing starts.
Printing from Mac
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻟㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HR
Scanning with AirPrint
You can use AirPrint to transfer the data scanned by the machine directly to a Mac.
System Requirements
To scan with AirPrint, you need a Mac with Mac OS X 10.9 or later installed.
Network Environment
You need one of the following environments.
The Mac and the machine are connected to the same LAN.
The Mac and the machine are connected via USB.
When using USB connection
Set <Select OS for USB Connected PC> to <Mac OS>. Notify to Check Paper Settings
Required Machine Setting
Set <Use Network Link Scan> to <On>.
Configuring Network Link Scan Settings
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to the Mac.
For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals Included with the Machine
Add the machine to your Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
This operation is not necessary if the registration has already been performed for printing or faxing.
Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].
Click [Scan].
Click [Open Scanner].
The [Scanner] screen is displayed.
Configure the scan settings as necessary.
Click [Scan].
Scanning starts, and scanned data is displayed.
<Menu> <Network Settings> <TCP/IP Settings> <Use Network Link Scan> <On>
Scanning from the Mac
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
㻟㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
When <Auto Online for Remote Scan> is set to <Off>, first put the machine into online state by tapping <Scan> <Remote
Scanner> in this order from the <Home> Screen, then start the procedure for scanning. Remote UI Settings
You cannot scan while settings for printing, copying, or faxing are being made, or while the machine is performing an
operation whatsoever.
㻟㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HS
Faxing with AirPrint
AirPrint enables you to send faxes from a Mac in almost the same way as when you print from a Mac.
System Requirements
To send faxes with AirPrint, you need a Mac with Mac OS X 10.9 or later installed.
Network Environment
You need one of the following environments.
The Mac and the machine are connected to the same LAN.
The Mac and the machine are connected via USB.
When using USB connection
Set <Select OS for USB Connected PC> to <Mac OS>. Notify to Check Paper Settings
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to the Mac.
For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals Included with the Machine
Add the machine to your Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
This operation is not necessary if the registration has already been performed for printing or scanning.
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the
application you are using.
Select this machine in the print dialog box.
The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select the fax driver of this machine in this step.
Specify the destination.
Click [Fax].
Fax sending starts.
Faxing from Mac
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻟㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HU
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.
Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, first turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10 seconds and then
turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.
Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.
Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may take several
minutes before the machine is ready for communication.
Make sure that Bonjour on Apple devices is enabled. For details, see the instruction manual for the device, or contact your
manufacturer.
Make sure that the machine is configured to enable printing/scanning/faxing from a computer even when no department ID and
password are entered. Setting the Department ID Management for Printing or Faxing from the Computer
For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and the machine has sufficient toner cartridge remaining. Loading
Paper Replacing Toner Cartridges
For scanning, make sure that the machine's setting for Network Link Scan is <On>. Configuring Network Link Scan Settings
About fax problems, see Faxing/Telephone Problems (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw).
㻟㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HW
Using Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user who has a Google account to print from applications such as Google Docs™ or Gmail™
via a smartphone, tablet, or computer connected to the Internet. Unlike conventional printing from a computer, Google Cloud Print is a
new technology that enables you to print by connecting a printer directly to the Web. For example, if you want to print an e-mail or files
that are attached to an e-mail, you can print just by using Gmail for mobile. You will find your printouts when you go to the machine.
When registering the machine or when using Google Cloud Print to print documents, you must be able to connect the machine
to the Internet. You are also responsible for paying all Internet connection fees.
You may not be able to use this function in some countries or regions.
㻟㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0HX
Printing with Google Cloud Print
To print with Google Cloud Print, register the machine with Google Cloud Print.
Checking the Machine Settings
Changing Google Cloud Print Settings
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print
To use Google Cloud Print, a Google account is required. If you do not have one, access Google Web site to create your
account.
Before setting up Google Cloud Print, check the following:
Make sure that the machine is assigned an IPv4 address and connected to a computer over a network. Connecting to a Wired
LAN Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Make sure that the date and time and the time zone settings are correct. Date/Time Settings
If the Department ID Management is enabled, make sure that the machine is configured to enable printing from a computer even
when no Department ID and PIN are entered. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
Enable the Google Cloud Print function of the machine. You can also disable the Google Cloud Print function of the machine.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <Google Cloud Print Settings> <Enable Google Cloud Print>.
Tap <On> or <Off>.
Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print allows you to print from anywhere.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Checking the Machine Settings
Changing Google Cloud Print Settings
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print
1
2
3
4
1
2
㻟㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [Network Settings] [Google Cloud Print Settings].
Click [Register] in [Registration Status].
If [Register] is unavailable
You need to enable Google Cloud Print. Click [Edit], select the [Use Google Cloud Printing] check box, and click [OK].
To reregister the machine
To reregister the machine if the owner of the machine has changed or for other reasons, unregister the machine and register it
again.
Click the link of the URL displayed for [URL for Registration].
3
4
5
㻟㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Follow the on-screen instructions to register the machine.
To perform printing, start a Google Cloud Print compatible application such as Google Chrome™, Gmail, or
Google Docs on an information terminal device such as computer or smartphone.
Access the Google Cloud Print Web site for information about the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print.
Registering from a mobile device or Google Chrome
You can also register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the following
confirmation screen before completion of the registration. Tap <Yes> to complete the registration.
For the registration procedure, see the instruction manual for your mobile device or the Google Cloud Print Web site.
6
7
㻟㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-070
Network
The machine has been designed for flexibility of use across a variety of environments, and it includes advanced technologies in addition
to basic network features. Do not worry if you are not a network expert, because the machine has also been designed for convenience
and ease of use. Relax and proceed with the network setup one step at a time. Mobile devices can also be connected wirelessly and
directly to the machine without involved network settings or routing through an access point or wireless LAN router.
Connecting to a Computer/Viewing the Machine's Network Settings
Connecting to a Network Viewing Network Settings
Connecting Directly to Mobile Devices
Configuring the Settings for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Configuring or Preparing for Print/PC Fax/Scan Functions
Configuring the Machine for Printing or Faxing from
a Computer
Configuring Scan Settings (E-mail/I-Faxes/Shared
Folders/FTP Server)
Customizing the Machine for More Convenient Network Experience
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment
㻟㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-071
Connecting to a Network
When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to the selected
network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking devices. For specific IP address
settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party.
The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs at the same time.
The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.
For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact your
manufacturer.
Before You Start
Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.
Check your computer settings.
Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more information, see the instruction
manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the device manufacturers.
Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the network has not been set
up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the network, even if you perform the rest of the
procedure below.
Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the communication method (half-
duplex/full-duplex) or the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) ( Configuring Ethernet Settings).
For more information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
To check the MAC address of the machine.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw /
MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication.
Select wired or wireless LAN.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.
Proceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.
Connecting to a Wired LAN
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
㻟㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-072
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
After you decide on wired or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN using the operation
panel. Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to <Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you will need to uninstall MF Drivers
installed on your computer and then reinstall them. See the MF Driver Installation Guide for details.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>.
Tap <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>.
LINKS
Connecting to a Network
Connecting to a Wired LAN
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
1
2
3
4
㻟㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-073
Connecting to a Wired LAN
Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.
Connect a LAN cable.
Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable.
Push the connector in until it clicks into place.
Wait approximately 2 minutes.
While you wait, the IP address is set automatically.
You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses
LINKS
Connecting to a Network
1
2
㻟㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-074
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
Wireless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is equipped with Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS), configuring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking devices do not support automatic
configuration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in detail, you need to manually set up the connection.
Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the network.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS
Manually Setting Up Connection
Risk of information leak
Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an unsecured
network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in wireless communication can
go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.
Wireless LAN security
The wireless LAN security that is supported by the machine is listed below. For the wireless security compatibility of your
wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP
WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Required devices for wireless LAN connection
The machine does not come with a wireless router. Have the router ready as necessary.
The wireless router must conform to IEEE 802.11b/g/n and be able to communicate in 2.4 GHz frequency band. For more
information, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
When using WPS, two modes are available: push button mode and PIN code mode.
Push Button Mode
Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on your networking
device. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
PIN Code Mode
Some WPS routers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in the instruction
manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code. Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code
Mode
Setting Up Connection Using WPS
㻟㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required information.
Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID and network key ( Checking
the SSID and Network Key).
Selecting a Wireless Router
Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as possible. Setting
Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
Manually Entering the Setup Information
If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the SSID and network
key to set up the connection. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
LINKS
Connecting to a Network
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Manually Setting Up Connection
㻟㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-075
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.
How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Wireless LAN Settings>.
If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
Tap <WPS Push Button Mode>.
Tap <Yes>.
A PIN code is generated.
Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.
The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after tapping <Yes> in step 6.
Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer. See the instruction
manuals for your networking device for help.
If an error message is displayed during setup
Tap <Close> and return to step 5.
Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
㻟㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi indicator lights up.
Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal.
Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Reducing power consumption
You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router. Power Save
Mode
If the IP address of the machine has changed
In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the connection is
maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
㻟㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-076
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to the networking
device.
How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.
From a Computer
Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a WPS PIN code.
For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.
From the Operation Panel
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Wireless LAN Settings>.
If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
Tap <WPS PIN Code Mode>.
Tap <Yes>.
A PIN code is generated.
From a Computer
Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.
Register the PIN code on the setup screen displayed in step 1.
The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after tapping <Yes> in step 7.
If an error message is displayed during setup
Tap <Close> and return to step 6.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
㻟㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
From the Operation Panel
Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi indicator lights up.
Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal.
Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Reducing power consumption
You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router. Power Save
Mode
If the IP address of the machine has changed
In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the connection is
maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
9
㻟㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-077
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
You can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the machine. For the
network key, enter a WEP key or TKIP. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the required setup information, including
the SSID and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key).
Security settings
If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to <Open System> or
the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to select <Shared Key> for WEP
authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up the connection using the manual entry method
(Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings).
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Wireless LAN Settings>.
If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
Tap <SSID Settings>.
Tap <Select Access Point>.
The machine starts searching for available wireless routers.
If <Cannot find the access point.> is displayed
See When an Error Message Appears.
Select a wireless LAN router.
Tap the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down.
To view details of security settings
Tap <Details> and select the wireless LAN router. To return to the original screen, tap <Close> twice, and then press .
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
㻟㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If your wireless router is not found
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. Installation/Settings Problems
Enter the network key that you have written down.
Enter the network key using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Entering Text
WEP WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
Tap <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
Tap <Close>, check whether the network key is correct, and return to step 5.
Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi indicator lights up.
Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal.
Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Reducing power consumption
You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router. Power Save
Mode
8
9
10
㻟㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If the IP address of the machine has changed
In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the connection is
maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
㻟㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-078
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using the other procedures, manually
enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed settings, check and write down the required
information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security protocols ( Checking the SSID and Network Key).
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Wireless LAN Settings>.
If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
Select <SSID Settings> <Enter Manually>.
Enter the SSID that you have written down.
Enter the SSID using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Entering Text
Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.
If you do not need to specify the security settings, tap <None>.
Using WEP
1Tap <WEP>.
2Select an authentication method.
<Open System>
Sets open system authentication, which is also called "open authentication."
<Shared Key>
Uses the WEP key as a password.
When <Open System> is selected
When connecting to a wireless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key
authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the setting to
<Shared Key> and retries the connection.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
㻟㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
Tap <Yes>.
3Tap <Edit WEP Key>.
4Select the WEP key(1 to 4) you want to edit.
Up to four WEP keys can be registered.
5Enter the network key that you have written down.
Enter the network key using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Entering Text
6Tap <Select WEP Key>.
7Tap the WEP key you have edited.
1Tap <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.
2Select an encryption method.
<Auto>
Sets the machine to automatically select AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.
<AES-CCMP>
Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.
3Enter the network key that you have written down.
Enter the network key using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Entering Text
8
㻟㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If an error message is displayed during setup
Tap <Close>, check whether the specified settings are correct, and return to step 5.
Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi indicator lights up.
Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal.
Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Reducing power consumption
You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router. Power Save
Mode
If the IP address of the machine has changed
In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the connection is
maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
9
㻟㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-079
Checking the SSID and Network Key
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router. The SSID and
network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the necessary information before setting
up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
SSID A name given for identifying a specific wireless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include "access
point name" and "network name."
Network Key
A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other terms used
for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase," and "preshared key
(PSK)."
Wireless Security Protocols
(Authentication/Encryption)
When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to specify
security settings. Check the following information:
Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)
Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)
Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Checking the SSID and Network Key from a Computer
The SSID or the network key may have been changed. If you do not know the SSID or the network key, you can check them by using
the Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant included with the provided DVD-ROM. The Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant can be
used on a computer connected to a wireless LAN.
If you are a Mac OS user
The provided DVD-ROM that comes with the machine does not contain the Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant for Mac OS.
It is available from the following Canon Web site:http://www.canon.com/
Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
Click [Start Software Programs].
If the above screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen.
If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
Click [Start] for [Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant].
1
2
3
㻟㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Read the License Agreement and click [Yes] to agree.
Check the information displayed for the wireless router.
Write down the necessary information. If you do not know what information is necessary, write down all the information that is
displayed.
If wireless routers are not found
Click [Refresh]. If nothing happens, check that the settings are correctly configured on the computer and the wireless router.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
4
5
㻟㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07A
Setting IP Addresses
Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are available: IPv4 and IPv6.
Configure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you need to properly configure the IPv4 address
settings.
㻟㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07C
Setting IPv4 Address
The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP addressing protocol, such as
DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of
the LAN cable are firmly inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN). You can test the network
connection if necessary.
Setting IPv4 Address
Testing the Network Connection
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.
Configure IP address settings.
<Auto Acquire>
Select to automatically assign an IP address via DHCP protocol. When <Auto Acquire: On> is displayed, automatic addressing is
enabled.
<Manually Acquire>
Select to configure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this option, <Auto Acquire>
must be set to <Off>.
<Check Settings>
Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.
Automatically assigning an IP address
1Select <Auto Acquire> <Select Protocol>.
2Tap <DHCP>.
If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address
Tap <Off>. If you tap <DHCP> when these services are unavailable, the machine will waste time and communications
resources searching the network for these services.
Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.
Setting IPv4 Address
1
2
3
4
㻟㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
3
If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.
4Tap <Apply>.
IP addresses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.
Manually entering an IP address
1Check that <Auto Acquire> is set to <Off>.
If <On> is displayed, tap <Auto Acquire>, and set both <Select Protocol> and <Auto IP> to <Off>.
2Tap <Manually Acquire>.
3Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).
Specify the settings in the following order: <IP Address> <Subnet Mask> <Gateway Address>.
Enter each setting using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Checking whether the settings are correct
Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( Starting Remote UI). If a computer is not
available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel ( Testing the Network Connection).
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <PING Command>.
Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and tap <Apply>.
If a proper connection has been established, the result is displayed as shown above.
Testing the Network Connection
5
1
2
3
4
㻟㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07E
Setting IPv6 Addresses
The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be configured via the Remote UI. Before setting IPv6 addresses,
check the IPv4 address settings ( Viewing IPv4 Settings). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use
IPv6 addresses. Note that the scan function that uses the scanner driver or MF Scan Utility is not available in
an IPv6 environment. The machine can use up to nine of the following IPv6 addresses:
Type
Maximum
number
available
Description
Link-local
address 1
An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with
devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the
machine is enabled.
Manual address 1An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prefix length and
default router address.
Stateless
address 6
An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the
network prefix that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the
machine is restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address 1An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
1
2
3
4
㻟㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select the [Use IPv6] check box and configure the required settings.
[Use IPv6]
Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.
[Stateless Address]
Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.
[Use Manual Address]
When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prefix length, and default
router address in the corresponding text boxes.
[IP Address]
Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.
[Prefix Length]
Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.
[Default Router Address]
Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be
entered.
[Use DHCPv6]
Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Checking whether the settings are correct
Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the machine.
Starting Remote UI
5
6
7
㻟㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07F
Viewing Network Settings
Viewing IPv4 Settings
Viewing IPv6 Settings
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
The IP address is not correctly configured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".
Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP address is correctly
configured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine starts communicating. Setting a
Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
You can print a list of the current network settings. User Data List/System Manager Data List
<Network Information> <IPv4> Select the setting to view Check the settings
<Network Information> <IPv6> Select the setting to view Check the settings
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
Viewing IPv4 Settings
Viewing IPv6 Settings
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN
1
2
㻟㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Wireless LAN Settings>.
If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
Tap <Connection Information>.
Select the setting to view.
Viewing WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information
1Tap <Security Settings>.
2Confirm and tap the current security setting.
If the security settings are not configured, <None> is displayed.
3Select the setting to view.
WEP WPA/WPA2-PSK
<Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from . Press <Network Information>
<Network Connection Method> <Connect. Info.> and select the setting to view.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Setting IPv4 Address
Setting IPv6 Addresses
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw /
MF628Cw)
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻟㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0H9
Configuring the Settings for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)
Connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly and directly without routing through a wireless LAN router (or access point). For how
to print with Direct Connection, see Making a Simple Wireless Connection Using Direct Connection (Access Point
Mode) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw).
Setting <Enable Direct Connection> to <On> prevents use of a wired LAN or any wireless LAN other than Direct Connection.
While in Direct Connection, sleep mode is not as effective at saving power.
When both <Enable Direct Connection> and <Enable NFC> are set to <On>, sleep mode is not as effective at saving power
even if not in Direct Connection. Enable NFC
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Enable Direct Connection>.
Tap <On>.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
1
2
3
4
5
㻟㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07H
Configuring the Machine for Printing or Faxing from a Computer
When using the machine as a network printer or a PC-to-fax machine, you can configure the protocols and ports used for printing and
create a print server for the machine. Before configuring the machine for printing or faxing from a computer, perform the basic setup
procedures. For more information, see MF Driver Installation Guide.
Printing protocols are rules for delivering document data created on a computer to the machine, and can be selected according
to the printing purpose or the network environment.
Ports are gateways for passing document data from a computer to the printer. Incorrect port settings are often the cause
when documents cannot be printed from a network computer.
㻟㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07J
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
Configure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer. The protocols supported by the machine
include LPD, RAW, and WSD (Web Services on Devices).
To change protocols' port numbers, see Changing Port Numbers.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Configure printing protocols.
Configuring LPD or RAW
1Click [Edit] in [LPD Settings] or [RAW Settings].
2Configure the settings as necessary.
1
2
3
4
㻟㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Use LPD Printing]
Select the check box to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.
[Use RAW Printing]
Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.
[RX Timeout]
Set a value between 1 and 60 (minutes) as the restart wait time for data reception. If data reception does not resume
within the set time, printing is canceled.
3Click [OK].
Configuring WSD
1Click [Edit] in [WSD Settings].
2Configure the settings as necessary.
[Use WSD Printing]
Select the check box to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.
[Use WSD Browsing]
Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is automatically
selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.
[Use WSD Scanning]
Available for Windows Vista/7/8, WSD scanning enables you to scan documents to a computer without installing the
scanner driver. Select the check box to scan documents via WSD. When not using WSD scanning, clear the check box.
[Use Computer Scanning]
Select the check box to use WSD scanning by operating the machine with the operation panel. This check box can only be
selected when the [Use WSD Scanning] check box is selected. To perform scanning, tap <Scan> and specify a WSD-
connected computer as a scan destination. ( Scanning from the Machine).
[Use Multicast Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is cleared, the
machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are flowing on the network.
Click [OK].
㻟㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
3
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
LPD, RAW, and WSD, settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
LPD Settings
RAW Settings
WSD Settings
Setting up WSD network devices on Windows Vista/7/8
The WSD printer and scanner can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder)
click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions. For more information about how to install MF
Drivers for the WSD network printer, see MF Driver Installation Guide.
LINKS
Configuring Printer Ports
5
㻟㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07K
Configuring Printer Ports
Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via the Windows
printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an incorrect port number or port type
may have been specified. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the document data cannot reach the machine. To fix this
type of problem, configure the printer port settings on the computer.
To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
Click the [Ports] tab and configure the required settings.
Adding a port
If the IP address of the machine has been changed, add a new port. Adding a port is also an effective solution when an incorrect
port type was selected in the Windows printer folder during the printer driver installation.
1Click [Add Port].
2Select [Canon MFNP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
1
2
3
㻟㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Changing the port type or number
If the printing protocols ( Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions) or port numbers ( Changing Port Numbers)
have been changed on the machine, the corresponding settings on the computer must also be configured. This change is only
available for LPR or RAW ports.
Click [Close].
3Click [Auto Detect], select the machine when it is detected, and click [Next].
If the machine is not detected
Click [Refresh]. If the problem persists, click [IP address] or [MAC address], enter the IP address or MAC address
of the machine Viewing Network Settings, and then click [Next].
4Click [Add] [Finish].
5Click [Close].
1Click [Configure Port].
2Click the [LPR] or [RAW] radio button in [Protocol Type], change the number in the [Port Number] text
box as necessary, and then click [OK].
4
㻟㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07L
Setting Up Print Server
With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also enables each computer to install
MF Drivers over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers on each computer by using the provided DVD-ROM. To
set up a computer on the network as a print server, configure the settings for sharing the printer.
To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit architecture (32-bit or
64-bit) of the print server and client computers.
When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.
To carry out Department ID Management when using a print server
Canon Driver Information Assist Service must be added during the printer driver installation. Refer to the MF Driver Installation
Guide for details.
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the machine.
When [Change Sharing Options] is displayed
Click [Change Sharing Options]. If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
1
2
3
㻟㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Install additional drivers as necessary.
This operation is required if you want to install MF Drivers in other computers running a different bit architecture via the print
server.
Click [OK].
Installing MF Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server
1Click [Additional Drivers].
2Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].
Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.
Print server Select the check box for
32-bit operating
systems [x64]
64-bit operating
systems
Windows Server 2003
[Windows Server 2003] under [Version]
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012
[x86] under [Processor]
If you do not know whether your Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012 is a 32-bit or 64-bit operating
system, see Checking the Bit Architecture.
3Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder that
contains MF Drivers, and then click [OK].
If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system, select [DRIVERS] [x64] [Driver] folders on the provided
DVD-ROM.
If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [DRIVERS] [32bit] [Driver] folders on the provided
DVD-ROM.
4Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.
Locate the shared printer in the print server. Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
4
5
1
㻟㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07R
Configuring Scan Settings (E-mail/I-Faxes/Shared Folders/FTP Server)
To send scanned originals directly by e-mail or I-Fax or save them to shared folders or FTP server, you need to configure the network.
The Send Function Setting Tool, an application that is included with the machine, will assist you with the required setup. Set the
necessary configuration depending on your purpose and network environment.
Scanning to E-mail or I-Fax
Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-mail, Sending & Receiving I-Faxes)
Scanning to Shared Folders
Configuring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders
Saving to FTP Server
Configuring the Machine for Scanning to FTP Server
LINKS
Specifications for E-mail Sending
Specifications for Scanning to Shared Folders
㻟㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07S
Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-mail, Sending & Receiving I-Faxes)
Before configuring the machine for scanning to e-mail, check the setup flow shown below.
Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Connecting to a Wired LAN
Make sure that you have the following information:
The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings
An e-mail address to be registered as a destination.
Information about the e-mail server, including the SMTP server name, port numbers, whether
authentication is required, and the user name and password for authentication.
For more information about the e-mail server settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network
Administrator.
Make sure that the computer meets the following system requirements for the Send Setting
Tool(sending e-mail):
Operating system
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012
Web browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or later
Display
SVGA monitor (with at least 800 x 600 pixel screen resolution) that supports at least 256 colors
Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.
Disabling HTTP Communication
Disabling Remote UI
Set the machine configuration.
Sending e-mail
Configuring Basic E-mail Settings
Sending & Receiving I-Fax
Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
㻟㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07U
Configuring Basic E-mail Settings
The Send Function Setting Tool helps you configure the e-mail settings. With this tool, you can also register e-mail addresses to the
Address Book.
More detailed settings can be specified by using the Remote UI instead of the Send Function Setting Tool ( Configuring E-
mail/I-Fax Communication Settings). The Send Function Setting Tool is helpful for users who want to complete the setup
easily.
Start the Send Function Setting Tool.
Using a Web browser
Enter "http://(the IP address of the machine)/sendsupport_login.html" in the address field of a Web browser, and press the
[ENTER] key.
Using the provided DVD-ROM
1Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
2Click [Start Software Programs].
If the above screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen.
If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
3Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].
4Click [Next].
If you want to view Send Setting Guide, click [How to Set].
1
㻟㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If the screen below appears
Click [Yes].
5Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].
If the machine is not displayed in [Device List]
Click [Search Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the machine, and then
click [OK].
6Confirm the settings and click [OK].
Click [Start].
If the logon screen is displayed, enter the appropriate ID and PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and then click [Logon].
Click [Send to E-mail Settings].
2
3
㻟㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book, and click [OK].
Setting a PIN for Address Book
Specify the required settings.
[Registration]
[Favorites Number]
With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register an e-mail address into <Favorites> in the Address Book. Select a
number from the drop-down list.
[Name for Favorites Number]
Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in the
Address Book.
[Send Destination Settings]
[Destination E-mail Address]
Enter the e-mail address that you want to send your scanned documents to.
[SMTP Server Settings]
[SMTP Server]
Enter the SMTP server name.
[SMTP Authentication]
Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the authentication settings of the SMTP server. When [Set] is selected,
enter the user name in the [User Name] text box and password in the [Password] text box.
Authentication methods for sending e-mails
To prevent e-mail transmissions by unauthorized users, the machine supports SMTP authentication (SMTP AUTH) and POP
before SMTP. For more information about the required authentication method, contact your Internet service provider or Network
Administrator.
POP before SMTP authentication can only be configured by using the Remote UI. Configuring E-mail/I-Fax
Communication Settings
Click [Next].
Confirm the settings and click [Register].
4
5
6
㻟㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Additional settings may be required depending on the network you are using. For more information, contact your Internet service
provider or Network Administrator.
To enable SSL for e-mailing, see Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings.
To change port numbers, see Changing Port Numbers.
LINKS
Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-mail, Sending & Receiving I-Faxes)
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Registering in the Address Book
7
㻟㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07W
Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
Use the Remote UI to configure the detailed send and receive settings, such as the settings for using the machine to send and receive I-
Faxes and the settings for POP authentication and encryption before you send e-mail or I-Faxes. Contact your provider or network
administrator for the required settings.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].
Click [Edit].
Specify the required settings.
1
2
3
4
5
㻟㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[SMTP Server]
Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name (or IP address) for sending e-mail and I-Faxes.
[E-Mail Address]
Enter up to 120 characters for the e-mail address that you want to use for the machine.
[POP Server]
Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name or IP address for sending e-mail and I-Faxes.
[User Name]
Enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters as the user name for the specified e-mail account when a POP3 server is used.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password when a POP3 server is used, select this check box and enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters in
[Password].
Specify the settings required for I-Fax reception
Setting up authentication before sending and encrypted communication with the server
Configuring authentication for sending prevents unauthorized users from sending e-mail and I-Faxes. Communication with the
server can be encrypted.
[POP RX]
Select the check box to receive I-Faxes.
[POP Interval]
This sets the interval (in minutes) used for automatically connecting to the POP3 server. If there are any I-Fax
documents on the server, they are automatically received and printed.
To disable automatic reception
Set [POP Interval] to [0]. When [0] is set, you receive I-Faxes manually. Receiving I-Faxes Manually
[Use POP Authentication Before Sending]
㻟㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Depending on the network you are using, you may need to change the SMTP or POP3 port setting ( Changing Port
Numbers). For more information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
LINKS
Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-mail, Sending & Receiving I-Faxes)
Configuring Basic E-mail Settings
Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine
Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)
To use the POP3 server for authentication, select the check box.
[Use APOP Authentication]
Select the check box to use APOP to encrypt the password during the authentication process.
[Use SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)]
To enable authentication on the SMTP server, select the check box and enter up to 64 characters in the [User Name]
text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To specify or change the password, enter up to 32 characters in the [Password] text box.
[Use SSL for SMTP]
Select the check box to use SSL for encrypting communication with the SMTP server. Select the check box for [Verify
Certificate] or [Add CN to Verification Items] depending on your needs.
[Use SSL for POP]
Select this check box to encrypt communication with the POP server using SSL. Select the [Verify Certificate] and [Add
CN to Verification Items] check boxes as required.
6
7
㻟㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07X
Configuring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders
Before configuring the machine for scanning to shared folders, check the setup flow shown below.
Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Connecting to a Wired LAN
Make sure that you have the following information:
The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings
The name of the computer where the shared folder is located. Viewing the Computer Name
Path to and the name of the shared folder (If access restrictions are set to the folder, the user name and
password information is also needed).
For instructions on how to create a new shared folder, see Send Setting Guide (included with the provided
DVD-ROM).
Make sure that the computer meets the following system requirements for the Send Function
Setting Tool:
Operating system
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012
Web browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or later
Display
SVGA monitor (with at least 800 x 600 pixel screen resolution) that supports at least 256 colors
Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.
Disabling HTTP Communication
Disabling Remote UI
Set the machine configuration. Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location
㻟㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-07Y
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location
The feature of scanning to shared folders is also called "Scan to SMB" because the feature uses Server Message Block (SMB), a
Windows-specific technology. SMB is a protocol for sharing resources, such as files and printers, with more than one device in a network
(Configuring SMB ). To configure the machine for saving your scanned documents into a shared folder in the network via SMB,
specify the location of the shared folder from a computer by using the Send Function Setting Tool.
You can also use the Remote UI to specify the location of the shared folder by registering the folder to the Address Book. The
Send Function Setting Tool is helpful for users who want to complete the setup easily.
Start the Send Function Setting Tool.
Using a Web browser
Enter "http://(the IP address of the machine)/sendsupport_login.html" in the address field of a Web browser, and press the
[ENTER] key.
Using the provided DVD-ROM
1Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
2Click [Start Software Programs].
If the above screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen.
If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
3Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].
4Click [Next].
If you want to view Send Setting Guide, click [How to Set].
1
㻟㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If the screen below appears
Click [Yes].
5Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].
If the machine is not displayed in [Device List]
Click [Search Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the machine, and then
click [OK].
6Confirm the settings and click [OK].
Click [Start].
If the logon screen is displayed, enter the appropriate ID and PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and then click [Logon].
Click [Store to Shared Folder Settings].
2
3
㻟㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book, and click [OK].
Setting a PIN for Address Book
Specify the required settings.
[Registration]
[Favorites Number]
With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register a shared folder for saving scanned documents into <Favorites> in the
Address Book. Select a number from the drop-down list.
[Name for Favorites Number]
Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in the
Address Book.
[Store Destination Settings]
[Protocol]
The protocol that is used for sending scanned documents to a shared folder is displayed.
[Computer Name of Store Destination]
Enter the name or the IP address of the computer where the shared folder is located.
[Shared Folder Name on Store Destination Computer]
Enter the name of (or path to) the shared folder. For example, if the shared folder is a subfolder named "share" and is
contained in the [Public] folder in drive C (path: C:\users\public\share), enter "users\public\share."
[Status of Settings for Shared Folder]
4
㻟㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Access Restriction to Shared Folder]
Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the access restrictions set to the shared folder. When [Set] is selected,
enter the user name in the [Registered User Name] text box and password in the [Password to Access] text box.
Click [Next].
Confirm the settings and click [Register].
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Configuring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders
Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
5
6
7
㻟㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08C
Configuring the Machine for Scanning to FTP Server
Before configuring the machine for scanning to FTP Server, check the setup flow shown below.
Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Connecting to a Wired LAN
Make sure that you have the following information:
The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings
FTP server name.
Path to the FTP server and folder name.
User name, password (only if set).
If the path, folder name, user name, password, etc. for the FTP server are unknown,contact you Network
Administrator.
Check whether you need to use PASV mode.
If a firewall is installed between the machine and the FTP server, you must set PASV mode.
Configuring FTP PASV mode
Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.
Disabling HTTP Communication
Disabling Remote UI
Register the FTP server address.
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
㻟㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08E
Configuring FTP PASV mode
PASV is an FTP communication mode used for file transfer. To connect to an FTP server through a firewall,
you must use PASV mode. First check that the PASV mode is set on the FTP server.
Whether PASV mode is used for FTP depends on your network environment and the settings on the FTP server to which data
is being sent. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Click [Edit] in [FTP PASV Mode Settings].
1
2
3
4
㻟㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select the [Use FTP PASV Mode] check box and click [OK].
[Use FTP PASV Mode]
Select the check box to use PASV mode. If you are not using PASV mode, leave the check box clear.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
5
6
㻟㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-080
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment
The configuration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to be compatible with as
many network configurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies. Consult your Network Administrator and set a
configuration to suit your network environment.
㻟㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-081
Configuring Ethernet Settings
Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set the communication
mode (half-duplex/full-duplex) and the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX). In general, the machine can
be used without changing the defaults ( Ethernet Driver Settings), but you can change these settings to
suit your network environment.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <Ethernet Driver Settings> <Auto Detect>.
Select whether to configure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.
Configuring Ethernet settings automatically
Tap <On>. The machine detects and automatically sets the communication mode and the Ethernet type that can be used.
Configuring Ethernet settings manually
1Tap <Off>.
2Select the communication mode.
Tap <Communication Mode> tap <Half Duplex> or <Full Duplex>.
<Half Duplex>
Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a networking device using
half duplex.
<Full Duplex>
Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.
3Select the Ethernet type.
Tap <Ethernet Type> tap <10BASE-T> or <100BASE-TX>.
4Tap <Apply>.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
1
2
3
4
5
㻟㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-082
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of data into which
the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each network. Change the settings of
the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <TCP/IP Settings> <MTU Size>.
Select the MTU.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Configuring Ethernet Settings
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
1
2
3
4
5
㻟㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-083
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a mechanism to
prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to define the role of each switch port. However, communication may still be
disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network devices are connected, or if you add a new
device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the network.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>.
Enter the wait time in seconds, and tap <Apply>.
Use / or the numeric keys to enter the time.
LINKS
Configuring Ethernet Settings
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
1
2
3
4
㻟㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-084
Configuring DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP address.
Configure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for configuring DNS are different for IPv4
and IPv6.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Configure DNS settings.
Configuring IPv4 DNS
1Click [Edit] in [IPv4 Settings].
2Configure IPv4 DNS settings.
1
2
3
4
㻟㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.
[Host Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS server.
[Domain Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as "example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is changed. When
specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP address without using
DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire Host Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP server.
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 6 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 15 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
[Acquire WINS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 44 to obtain a WINS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire SMTP Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 69 to obtain an SMTP server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire POP Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 70 to obtain a POP3 server address from the DHCP server.
3Click [OK].
㻟㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Configuring IPv6 DNS
1Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
2Configure IPv6 DNS settings.
The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to configure the settings. Setting IPv6 Addresses
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be
entered.
[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
[Host Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS server.
[Domain Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as "example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is changed. To specify
the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the check box for [Register Manual Address],
[Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in
hours in the [DNS Dynamic Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP address without using
DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.
[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the check box and enter
the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 23 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 24 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
3Click [OK].
㻟㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
DNS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen. IPv4 Settings IPv6 Settings
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address
Setting IPv6 Addresses
Viewing Network Settings
5
㻟㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-085
Configuring SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as files and printers, with more than
one device in a network. The machine uses SMB to store scanned documents into a shared folder. Depending
on your network, you may have to set the NetBIOS name and workgroup name.
NetBIOS Name
In a Windows network that uses NetBIOS, NetBIOS names are used for identifying network-connected computers as well as for file
sharing and other network services. Most computers use the computer name as the NetBIOS name.
Workgroup Name
Workgroup name is a name for grouping multiple computers so that basic network functions, such as file sharing, become available in
a Windows network. Specify the workgroup name to identify the group that the machine belongs to.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [SMB Settings].
Click [Edit].
1
2
3
4
㻟㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the required settings and click [OK].
[NetBIOS Name]
Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the NetBIOS name of the machine.
[Workgroup Name]
Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the name of the workgroup that the machine belongs to.
NetBIOS names or workgroup names that start with an asterisk ( ) cannot be registered to a WINS server.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Configuring WINS
*
5
6
㻟㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-086
Configuring WINS
Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that associates a NetBIOS name (a computer or printer name in an
SMB network) with an IP address. To enable WINS, the WINS server must be specified.
In order to specify WINS server settings, NetBIOS name and workgroup name are required to be set. Configuring SMB
The function is not available in an IPv6 network.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Click [Edit] in [WINS Settings].
Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, specify the required settings, and click [OK].
1
2
3
4
5
㻟㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[WINS Resolution]
Select the check box to use WINS for name resolution. When not using WINS, clear the check box.
[WINS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of the WINS server.
If the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address overrides the IP address entered
in the [WINS Server Address] text box.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
WINS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen. WINS Settings
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address
6
㻟㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-087
Registering LDAP Servers
If an LDAP server is implemented in the network, you can search the server for fax numbers or e-mail
addresses, and then specify them as destinations or register them in the Address Book. Note also that if send
function authentication ( LDAP Server Authentication ) is enabled, you must register the server used for
authentication. You can register a maximum of five LDAP servers each for searching and for authentication to
the machine. Register LDAP servers via the Remote UI.
LDAP servers that are supported by the machine are Windows Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012 Active Directory.
The machine communicates with LDAP servers using LDAPv3.
UTF-8 is the supported character encoding used when the text data is transmitted between the machine and an LDAP server.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [LDAP Server Settings].
Click [Register New Server] for [LDAP Server (For Search)] or [LDAP Server (For Authentication)].
LDAP server registration is separated, with registration either for searching or for authentication. To use an LDAP server for
searching for fax and e-mail destinations, register if for searching, and to use it for authenticating sending of e-mail or faxes,
register it for authenticating.
1
2
3
4
㻟㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To edit registered server information
Click a text link under [Server Name] for the edit screen.
To delete registered server information
Click [Delete] on the right of the server name you want to delete click [OK].
Register the LDAP server.
Register the server used for searches
Register the server for searching for fax, e-mail destinations.
[Server Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for identifying the LDAP server.
[Server Address]
Enter the IP address of the LDAP server or enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the server
(example: ldap.example.com).
[Server Address] and DNS
To prevent errors from occurring when searching for destinations, make sure to check the following:
If the host name is entered for [Server Address], make sure that a DNS server is available in the network.
If the IP address is entered for [Server Address], check whether the DNS server supports only forward lookup. If
the server supports only forward lookup, select [Do Not Use] or [Use] for [Login Information]. If you select [Use
(Security Authentication)], make sure that the DNS server supports reverse lookup.
[Position to Start Search]
Specify the node in the directory information tree (DIT) that you want to start search from. Leaving the text box blank
sets the machine to start search from an arbitrary node selected automatically.
Depending on the type of characters used, up to 120 characters can be entered.
When specifying the node, enter "DC=", followed by a host name (a dot-delimited character string in the Active
Directory domain name), and separate each of the entries with a comma. If the domain name is
"john.example.com", for example, enter "DC=john,DC=example,DC=com."
[Port Number]
Enter the port number used for communicating with the LDAP server.
5
㻟㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Registering the authentication server
If the use of the fax and scan functions is restricted, register the server used for authentication.
[Search Timeout]
Specify how long the machine searches. Enter between 30 and 300 seconds.
[Login Information]
Select [Do Not Use], [Use], or [Use (Security Authentication)] depending on the type of authentication implemented by
the LDAP server. When [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected, the user name and password must be
specified.
[Do Not Use] Select not to authenticate the machine using the login information.
[Use] Select to authenticate the machine using the login information.
[Use (Security
Authentication)]
Select to use data obtained by Kerberos, a network authentication protocol, for the
authentication password. If this setting is selected, the clock of the machine needs to be
synchronized with that of the LDAP server.
[Display Authentication Screen When Searching]
Select the check box to require the user to enter the user name and password when a search is requested. If the [Use
Same Authentication Information as When Send Operation Started] check box is selected, the user name and
password used for authentication when sending faxes or scans are also used here. If the check box is cleared,
authentication is carried out using the information entered in [User Name] and [Password].
[Use Same Authentication Information as When Send Operation Started]
Set whether the authentication information when the fax or scan function was used is also used when searching. This
check box is normally displayed selected; however, it is only valid when the [Display Authentication Screen When
Searching] check box is selected.
[User Name]
Enter the user name of the machine that was registered to the LDAP server. Depending on the type of characters
used, up to 120 characters can be entered.
When [Use] is selected for [Login Information], enter the user name in the form "(domain name)\(user name)"
(example: domain1\user1).
When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected, enter the user name only (example: user1).
No entry is required when the [Display Authentication Screen When Searching] check box is selected.
[Set/Change Password]
To specify or change the password, select the check box and enter up to 24 characters in the [Password] text box.
[Domain Name]
When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters for
the directory tree name in Active Directory (example: example.com).
[Server Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for identifying the LDAP server.
[Server Address]
Enter the IP address of the LDAP server or enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the server
(example: ldap.example.com).
[Server Address] and DNS
To prevent errors from occurring when searching for destinations, make sure to check the following:
If the host name is entered for [Server Address], make sure that a DNS server is available in the network.
㻟㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [OK].
LINKS
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (Fax)
Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (E-mail/I-Fax)
Configuring SNTP
LDAP Server Authentication
If the IP address is entered for [Server Address], check whether the DNS server supports only forward lookup. If
the server supports only forward lookup, select [Use] for [Login Information]. If you select [Use (Security
Authentication)], make sure that the DNS server supports reverse lookup.
[Position to Start Search]
Specify the node in the directory information tree (DIT) that you want to start search from. Leaving the text box blank
sets the machine to start search from an arbitrary node selected automatically.
Depending on the type of characters used, up to 120 characters can be entered.
When specifying the node, enter "DC=", followed by a host name (a dot-delimited character string in the Active
Directory domain name), and separate each of the entries with a comma. If the domain name is
"john.example.com", for example, enter "DC=john,DC=example,DC=com."
[Use SSL]
Select this check box to encrypt communication with the LDAP server using SSL.
This is enabled only when [Use] is selected in [Login Information].
[Port Number]
Enter the port number used for communicating with the LDAP server.
[Authentication/Attribute Acquisition Timeout]
Specify how long authentication and attribute acquisition can continue in a range from 15 to 150 seconds.
[User Name Attribute]
Enter the attribute name, to be compared with a user name entered during authentication, of up to 64 alphanumeric
characters (Example: "sAMAccountName").
Not required if [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected in [login information].
[E-Mail Address Attribute]
Enter the attribute name, to be used for obtaining an e-mail address from the authentication server, of up to 64
alphanumeric characters (Example: "mail").
[Login Information]
Select [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] depending on the type of authentication implemented by the LDAP
server.
[Use] Select to authenticate the machine using the System Manager ID.
[Use (Security
Authentication)]
Select to use data obtained by Kerberos, a network authentication protocol, for the
authentication password. If this setting is selected, the clock of the machine needs to be
synchronized with that of the LDAP server.
[Use System Manager ID]
If [Use] is selected in [Login Information], this specifies whether authentication using the system manager ID is used.
To use the system manager ID, select the check box and specify the user name and password for used for
authentication. If you deselect this check box, login is anonymous (no user name).
[User Name]
Enter the user name of the machine that was registered to the LDAP server in the form "(domain name)\(user name)"
(example: domain1\user1). Depending on the type of characters used, up to 120 characters can be entered.
[Set/Change Password]
To specify or change the password, select the check box and enter up to 24 characters in the [Password] text box.
[Domain Name]
When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters for
the directory tree name in Active Directory (example: example.com).
6
㻟㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-088
Configuring SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the
network. The protocol is typically used for synchronizing the machine and a server, such as when the machine
needs to access an LDAP server with the security authentication that was enabled. The time is adjusted based
on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before configuring SNTP
(Date/Time Settings). SNTP settings can be specified via the Remote UI.
The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Click [Edit] in [SNTP Settings].
1
2
3
4
㻠㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use SNTP]
Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.
[NTP Server Name]
Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host name (or FQDN) of
up to 255 alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).
[Polling Interval]
Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next. Specify an interval from 1 to 48 hours.
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server
You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings]
[TCP/IP Settings] and then clicking [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings] that appears. If a proper connection has been
established, the result is displayed as shown below. Note that this operation does not adjust the system clock.
LINKS
Registering LDAP Servers
5
6
7
㻠㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-089
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a network by using
Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced SNMPv3. You can check the status of the
machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI. You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the
same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your network environment and the purpose of use.
SNMPv1
SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to define the scope of SNMP communication. Because this information is exposed to the
network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use
SNMPv3.
SNMPv3
With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features. Note that SSL must be
enabled for the Remote UI before configuring SNMPv3 ( Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI).
The machine does not support the trap notification feature of SNMP.
To change the port number of SNMP, see Changing Port Numbers.
SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to configure, monitor, and control the
machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your management software.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].
1
2
3
㻠㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [Edit].
Specify SNMPv1 settings.
If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.
[Use SNMPv1]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box is selected.
[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]
Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear the check box.
[Community Name]
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.
[MIB Access Permission]
For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Use Dedicated Community]
4
5
㻠㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software, such as iW
Management Console. Select the check box to use Dedicated Community. If you do not need to use Dedicated Community, clear
the check box.
Specify SNMPv3 settings.
If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.
[Use SNMPv3]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box is selected.
[Enable User]
Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings, clear the
corresponding check box.
[User Name]
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[MIB Access Permission]
Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Security Settings]
Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] for the desired
combination of authentication and encryption settings.
[Authentication Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] for [Security Settings] for the algorithm that
corresponds to your environment.
[Encryption Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication On/Encryption On] for [Security Settings] for the algorithm that corresponds to your environment.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter between 6 and 16 alphanumeric characters for the password in the
[Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For confirmation, enter the same password in the [Confirm] text
box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.
[Context Name 1]/[Context Name 2]/[Context Name 3]
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the context name. Up to three context names can be registered.
Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.
With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be monitored and obtained
regularly from a computer on the network.
[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]
Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP. To disable monitoring
of the printer management information, clear the check box.
Click [OK].
6
7
8
㻠㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Disabling both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
If both versions of SNMP are disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine
information via the printer driver.
Using the operation panel
You can enable or disable the SNMP settings from <Menu>. SNMP Settings
Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to [Read Only]. MIB
access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write]
(full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the
machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.
LINKS
Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI
9
㻠㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08A
Configuring Settings for Device Management Software
You can facilitate the collection and management of various information about networked devices by implementing device management
software, such as iW Management Console , into the network. Information such as device settings, Address Books, and error logs is
retrieved and distributed via the server computer. If the machine is connected to such a network, the device management software
searches the network for the machine by using protocols such as Service Location Protocol (SLP) to gather information from the machine.
This section describes the procedures of the SLP settings and settings for communication between the machine and plug-ins for iW
Management Console. These settings can be specified via Remote UI.
For more information about iW Management Console, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Configuring SLP Communication with Device Management Software
Configuring Settings for iW Management Console Plug-ins
To use iW Management Console plug-ins
You need to enable dedicated setting and SNMP setting (either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3) to communicate with an iW Management
Console plug-in.
Device Settings Management On/Off
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
*
*
Configuring SLP Communication with Device Management Software
1
2
3
㻠㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify SLP settings.
Specifying multicast device discovery
Notifying a device management software of the power status of the machine
1Click [Edit] in [Multicast Discovery Settings].
2Select the [Respond to Discovery] check box and specify the required settings.
[Respond to Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to respond to device management software multicast discovery packets
and enable monitoring by device management software.
[Scope Name]
To include the machine into a specific scope, enter up to 32 characters for the scope name.
3Click [OK].
To change the port number for multicast discovery, see Changing Port Numbers.
4
㻠㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
You can specify the settings to enable communication between the machine and the following plug-ins, which are used to manage the
Address Book and the setting values of the machine.
iW Management Console Address Book Management Plug-in
iW Management Console Device Configuration Management Plug-in
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
1Click [Edit] in [Sleep Mode Notification Settings].
2Select the [Notify] check box and specify the required settings.
[Notify]
Select the check box to notify a device management software of the power status of the machine. When [Notify]
is selected, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep mode and reduce the
total power consumption.
[Port Number]
Change the port number for this function according to the network environment.
[Number of Routers to Traverse]
Specify how many routers the notification packets can pass. Enter a number from 0 to 254.
[Notification Interval]
Specify how often the machine notifies a device management software of its power status. Enter a number in
seconds from 60 to 65535.
3Click [OK].
Configuring Settings for iW Management Console Plug-ins
5
1
2
㻠㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08F
Security
Confidential information is handled by information devices everywhere, including computers and printers, and any of these devices may
become a target for malicious third parties at anytime. Attackers may directly gain unauthorized access to your devices, or indirectly take
advantage of negligence or improper use. Either way, you may incur unanticipated losses when your confidential information is leaked.
To counter these risks, the machine is equipped with a variety of security functions. Set the necessary configuration depending on your
network environment.
You can configure the best security system by building an environment that inhibits access to printers on your in-house
network via the Internet and using such environment together with the machine's security features. Preventing
Unauthorized Access
Establishing the Basics of Information Security
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access
Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse
Restricting the Machine's
Functions
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw
/ MF724Cdw)
Implementing Robust Security Features
Implementing Robust Security Features
㻠㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08H
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access
Prevent unauthorized third parties from accessing and using the machine. You can implement multiple security measures, such as
managing user access privileges, using firewalls, and changing port numbers.
㻠㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0H7
Preventing Unauthorized Access
This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is a must-read for
all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines connected to the network. In recent
years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a variety of useful functions, such as printing from a
computer, operating from a computer using the remote function, and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it
is essential to take security measures to reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become
more exposed to threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary
settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network.
Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network
Assigning a Private IP Address
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
Specifying the SSL Encrypted Communication
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine
An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is used for the
communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication within a local area network, such as
a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed
via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if
a private IP address is assigned, your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users
on your local area network, such as a LAN in the company.
Global IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area network
Private IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area network
Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to confirm the IP address, assigned to the
printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is found in one of the following ranges.
Ranges for Private IP addresses
From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
For information on how to confirm the IP address, see Setting IPv4 Address.
If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment to reduce the risk
of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a firewall that prevents access from the external networks. If
you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.
A firewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/intrusions to a local
area network. You can use a firewall on your network environment to block access from the external network that appears to be
dangerous, by restricting communication from specified IP address of the external network. The function installed to a Canon
printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP address filter. For information on how to set up an IP address filter, see
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules.
Assigning a Private IP Address
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
Specifying the SSL Encrypted Communication
㻠㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
For information on the SSL Encrypted Communication, see Implementing Robust Security Features, and on the procedures to
specify, see Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI.
If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to information stored in
the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to protect various type of
information by setting PIN.
Setting PIN to Each Function
Setting PIN for Using Remote UI
For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN.
Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings
For more information, see Setting the System Manager ID.
Address Book PIN
For more information on setting a PIN, see Setting a PIN for Address Book.
Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on the other security
measures, see Security and take necessary security measures for preventing unauthorized access to suit your environment.
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine
㻠㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08J
Setting Access Privileges
Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine. Access privileges are set
separately for system administrators, general users, and the Remote UI. When privileges are set, the user must enter an ID and PIN to
print or change settings.
Department ID accounts are divided into two types: System Manager ID, which is intended exclusively for Administrators, and
Department ID for general users. System Manager ID is an account with full access privileges. The use of functions can be restricted for
user Department IDs, such as by restricting color copying for one Department ID and faxing for another, allowing several different user
Department IDs, which makes it possible to flexibly manage the machine's security. And by setting a Remote UI Access PIN, you can
restrict use of the Remote UI.
System Manager ID
System Manager ID is an account with full access privileges. If you specify a System Manager ID, you need to log on to the machine
using the System Manager ID information in order to access <Network Settings> or <System Management Settings>. Set the System
Manager ID when you need different access privilege levels for Administrators and general users. Only one System Manager ID can
be registered.
Setting the System Manager ID
Department ID (Department ID Management)
You can specify access privileges for a user (or group of users) by registering a Department ID. You can register multiple Department
IDs. If a user tries to operate the machine when Department IDs are enabled, a logon screen is displayed, and the user must enter
their own Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Information for each Department ID can be viewed, such as how many pages
have been copied, printed, or scanned in black and white or color.
Setting the Department ID Management
Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI.
Setting a Remote UI PIN
㻠㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08K
Setting the System Manager ID
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI. You can also set a PIN for the System
Manager ID. If this ID is enabled, you can access <Network Settings> and <System Management Settings> only when the System
Manager ID and PIN have been entered correctly. The System Manager ID settings information is critical to the security of the machine,
so make sure that only Administrators know the System Manager ID and PIN.
On the MF729Cx, by default, the System Manager ID and PIN are "7654321". It is recommended that you change this setting
for higher security.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the System Manager ID has already been set
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <System Manager Information Settings> <System Manager ID and PIN>.
Specify the System Manager ID and PIN.
Specify the <System Manager ID>, and then specify the <System Manager PIN>.
Enter a number of up to seven digits using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
When <PIN (Confirm)> is displayed, enter the PIN once again to confirm.
You cannot register an ID or PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000".
To cancel the System Manager ID and PIN settings, clear the information you entered in and tap <Apply> with the fields
blank.
Setting the System Manager Name
1Tap <System Manager Name>.
2Enter up to 32 characters for the System Manager Name, and tap <Apply>. Entering Text
1
2
3
4
㻠㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Configuring settings via the Remote UI
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registration] [System Management] [Edit] and
specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.
By using the Remote UI, you can register a variety of information, including contact information, Administrator comments, the
installation location of the machine, as well as to the settings that you can register by using the operation panel. The
registered information can be viewed on the [Device Information] page of the Remote UI. Checking System Manager
Information
If PIN is forgotten
Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Logging on to the machine
If you try to access <Network Settings> or <System Management Settings> when only the
System Manager ID is enabled, the following logon screen is displayed:
You must also enter the System Manager ID and PIN to log on using the Remote UI in System
Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges
Setting the Department ID Management
㻠㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08L
Setting the Department ID Management
You can control access to the machine by using multiple IDs for multiple users or groups. If a user tries to operate the machine when
Department ID Management is enabled, a logon screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own Department ID and PIN to use
the machine. When Department ID Management is enabled, usage of functions, such as color copying and black and white scanning, is
recorded for each Department ID. To configure Department ID Management, register department IDs as necessary and then enable
Department ID Management function. Additional settings are required if you want to enable Department ID Management for operations
from a computer, such as printing and PC faxing.
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN
Enabling the Department ID Management
Setting the Department ID Management for Printing or Faxing from the Computer
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
Register a Department ID and set a PIN for it. You can also disable functions, such as black and white copying and color printing, for
each Department ID. Up to 300 Department IDs can be registered.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Department ID Management] and register or edit Department IDs.
Registering a Department ID
1Click [Register New Department].
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN
1
2
3
㻠㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
2Specify the required settings and click [OK].
[Department ID]
Enter a number of up to seven digits for the Department ID.
[Set PIN]
To set a PIN, select the check box and enter a number of up to seven digits both in the [PIN] and [Confirm] text boxes.
[Restrict Functions]
Select the check box for the function that you want to disable for the Department ID.
If the [Scan] check box is selected, the Save to USB Memory Device, Send E-mail, and Save to Shared Folder or FTP
Server functions are all restricted. You can also restrict other methods that scan documents by importing them to a
computer, but in that case you cannot block access for each Department ID( Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is
Unknown).
Editing the settings of the registered Department ID
1Click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] to edit.
2Change the settings as necessary and click [OK].
Deleting a Department ID
Click [Delete] on the right of the Department ID you want to delete click [OK].
[Department ID Page Total]
You can check the total numbers of pages copied, printed, scanned, or faxed for each Department ID.
If you want to return the counts to zero, click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] and click [Clear Count]
[OK]. If you want to return the counts of all Department IDs to zero, click [Clear All Counts] [OK].
Using control cards
When the optional Copy Card Reader-F1 is attached to the machine, 300 sequential numbers are registered automatically.
Do not edit or delete the department IDs. The control cards that correspond to the edited or deleted department IDs will be
unavailable.
After you register as many Department IDs as necessary, enable Department ID Management.
Enabling the Department ID Management
㻠㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Department ID Management] [Edit].
Select the [Department ID Management] check box and click [OK].
[Department ID Management]
Select the check box to enable Department ID Management. If you do not want to use Department ID Management, clear the
check box.
For information on the [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs]/[Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs]/[Allow Black & White Copy
Jobs] check boxes, see Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown.
Using the operation panel
You can also switch Department ID Management On/Off from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen. Department ID
Management On/Off
Logging on to the machine
When you try to operate the machine when Department ID Management is enabled, the following
logon screen is displayed:
1
2
3
4
㻠㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If you want to enable Department ID Management for printing and faxing from a computer, you need to specify settings by using the
drivers you already installed on the computer. Specify the Department ID and PIN as necessary.
To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click your printer or fax icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
Click the [Device Settings] tab and specify the required settings.
1Select the [Use Department ID Management] check box and click [Settings] on the right of it.
For the fax driver, also select the [Allow PIN Setting] check box to enable the PIN setting.
2Specify the settings as necessary and click [OK].
Setting the Department ID Management for Printing or Faxing from the Computer
1
2
3
㻠㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Allow PIN Setting]
Select the check box to enable the PIN setting.
[Department ID]
Enter a number of up to seven digits for the Department ID.
[PIN]
Enter a number of up to seven digits for the PIN if it is set for the Department ID.
[Verify]
Click to verify that the correct ID and PIN are entered. This function is not available if the machine and the computer are
connected via a USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices) port.
[Confirm Department ID/PIN When Printing]/[Confirm Department ID/PIN when Sending Fax]
Select the check box to display the [Confirm Department ID/PIN] pop-up screen each time you print or fax from a
computer.
[Authenticate Department ID/PIN at Device]
Select the check box if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD port.
3Click [OK].
Logging on to the machine
When you try to print or fax from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled,
the following pop-up screen is displayed (unless the [Confirm Department ID/PIN When
Printing]/[Confirm Department ID/PIN when Sending Fax] check box is cleared):
If you do not change the default settings, any user can print from a computer, scan (via <Computer> and <Remote Scanner>), send a
PC fax from a computer, or make black and white copies without entering an ID and PIN even when Department ID Management is
enabled for the machine. You can change the default settings so that the machine cannot be used for these functions without a correct
ID and PIN.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Department ID Management] [Edit].
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
1
2
3
㻠㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Clear the check boxes as necessary and click [OK].
[Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs]
In order to print or fax from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled, you need to enter the correct ID and PIN
(Setting the Department ID Management for Printing or Faxing from the Computer). However if the check box is
selected for this setting, you can print or fax without entering the ID and PIN. Clear the check box to require entering a correct ID
and PIN.
[Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs]
If the check box is selected, you can select <Computer> or <Remote Scanner> on the main screen and scan documents into a
computer anytime. If the check box is cleared, you cannot scan documents into a computer if Department ID Management is
enabled. It is not possible to restrict scanning of documents into a computer for individual department IDs.
[Allow Black & White Copy Jobs]
If the check box is selected when Department ID Management is enabled, you can copy in black and white without entering the
correct ID and PIN. Clear the check box to require entering an ID and PIN.
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges
Setting the System Manager ID
4
㻠㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0H8
Setting a Remote UI PIN
You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.
When Department ID Management is enabled, setting here is not required. Setting the Department ID Management
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].
Click [Edit].
Select the [Use Remote UI Access PIN] check box and set the PIN.
1
2
3
4
5
㻠㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Use Remote UI Access PIN]
If you select this check box, you must enter a PIN to access the Remote UI.
[Set/Change PIN]
To set a PIN, select the check box and enter a number of up to seven digits both in the [PIN] and [Confirm] text boxes.
Click [OK].
If PIN is forgotten
Set a new Remote UI Access PIN in the settings menu on the operation panel. Remote UI Settings
If Remote UI settings are initialized
The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN. Initializing Menu
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges
Setting the System Manager ID
6
㻠㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09R
LDAP Server Authentication
If your system has an LDAP server installed, you can ensure that LDAP server authentication is carried out when the send function is
used. This enables you to prevent unauthorized use by third parties and information disclosure. Once the authorization settings are
enabled, the Authorized Send screen appears when the fax or scan function is used and operation can only continue if it is correctly
authorized by the LDAP server. Use the settings described here to configure LDAP server authentication. For more information on
registering the server to be used for authentication, see Registering LDAP Servers .
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Security Settings] [Authentication Settings for Send Function].
Click [Edit].
Select the [Display Authentication Screen When Sending Operation Starts] check box and select whether a
confirmation screen is displayed at logout.
1
2
3
4
5
㻠㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Display Authentication Screen When Sending Operation Starts]
Select this check box to display the Authorized Send logon screen when the fax or scan function is used (LDAP server
authentication).
[Display Confirmation Screen When Logging Out]
Select this check box to display a screen that allows you to selectively log out when you are logged on for both Authorized Send
and Department ID Management. If you clear this check box, no selection screen is displayed when you log out and you are
logged out from both Authorized Send and Department ID Management.
Configure the settings for sending e-mail/I-Faxes.
[E-Mail Sending]
Specify whether the sending of e-mail and I-Faxes is blocked.
[Do Not Allow] Blocks outgoing e-mail and I-Faxes. <E-Mail>/<I-Fax> in the scan function can no longer be selected.
[Allow] Permits outgoing e-mail and I-Faxes.
[Only Allow
Sending to
Myself]
Blocks all outgoing e-mail and I-Faxes other than those to users with authorized e-mail addresses. The e-
mail addresses of authorized users must be registered on the LDAP server.
[Authentication Method]
When [Allow] or [Only Allow Sending to Myself] is selected in [E-Mail Sending], this allows you to specify whether an
authentication screen is shown on the SMTP server when e-mail is sent.
[Display the
authentication
screen using the
same user
name as when
the sending
operation
started]
Displays the authentication screen showing the same user name and password entered in the Authorized
Send logon screen.
[Display the
authentication
screen without
any
authentication
information]
Displays the authentication screen with the user name and password fields blank.
[Use device-
specific
authentication
information and No authentication screen is displayed when e-mail or I-Faxes are sent. Authorization on the SMTP server
6
㻠㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
do not display
the
authentication
screen]
is carried out using the user name and password set in [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings] Configuring E-mail/I-
Fax Communication Settings.
[Specify Authentication User Destination as Sender]
Select this check box when the e-mail address of an authorized user will be set as the sender. The e-mail addresses of authorized
users must be registered on the LDAP server. If you clear this check box, the e-mail address set in the [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings] is
set as the sender.
Configure the file transfer settings (for saving to shared folders or an FTP server).
[File Sending]
Set whether to allow saving to shared folders and file servers.
[Do Not Allow] Blocks saving to shared folders or FTP servers. <File> in the scan function can no longer be used.
[Allow] Saving to shared folders or FTP servers is not blocked.
[Only Allow
Sending to
Myself or
Specified
Folder]
Blocks saving to all shared folders or FTP servers other than specified folders. The data is saved to folders
registered on the LDAP server or to the folder specified in [Specify Destination Folder].
When [Allow] is specified in [File Sending]
[Authentication Method]
Allows you to specify whether an authentication screen is shown on the server when sending.
[Display the
authentication
screen using the
same
authentication
information as
when the
sending
operation
started]
Displays the authentication screen showing the same user name and password entered in the
Authorized Send logon screen.
[Display the
authentication
screen without
any
authentication
information]
Displays the authentication screen with the user name and password fields blank.
[Use the
authentication
information from
the address book
and do not
No authentication screen is displayed when e-mail or I-Faxes are sent. Authentication is carried
out on the server using the user name and password set in the Address Book.
7
㻠㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
When [Only Allow Sending to Myself or Specified Folder] is specified in [File Sending]
Configure the settings for sending faxes.
[Fax Sending]
Select whether to allow sending faxes.
[Do Not Allow] Restricts fax transmissions.
[Allow] Does not restrict fax transmissions.
Click [OK].
LINKS
Registering LDAP Servers
display the
authentication
screen]
[Authentication Method]
Allows you to specify whether an authentication screen is shown on the server when sending.
[Use the same
authentication
information as
when the
sending
operation
started]
Carries out authorization on the server using the user name and password entered in the
Authorized Send logon screen. Selecting the [Display Authentication Screen] check box displays
the authentication screen with this user name and password already entered when you send the
data.
[Display the
authentication
screen without
any
authentication
information]
Displays the authentication screen with the user name and password fields blank.
[Specify Destination Folder]
Selecting this check box allows you to specify the folder where the data is saved. If the check box is not selected, the
save destination is set based on authorized user information registered on the LDAP server.
[Host Name] Enter a host name for the shared folder or FTP server up to 120 characters in length.
[Folder Path]
Enter a path name for the save destination folder up to 120 characters in length (excluding the
host name). When the [Add User Name] check box is selected, the user name and path used for
LDAP authentication are added.
8
9
㻠㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08R
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are connected to a
network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet filter, a feature that restricts communication to devices with
specified IP addresses or MAC addresses.
㻠㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08S
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules
You can either limit communication to only devices with specified IP addresses, or block devices with specified IP addresses but permit
other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.
Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specified for both IPv4 and IPv6.
The packet filters described in this section control communications over TCP, UDP, and ICMP.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Security Settings] [IP Address Filter].
Click [Edit] for the filter type that you want to use.
[IPv4 Address: Outbound Filter]
1
2
3
4
㻠㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv4 addresses.
[IPv4 Address: Inbound Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv4 addresses.
[IPv6 Address: Outbound Filter]
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv6 addresses.
[IPv6 Address: Inbound Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv6 addresses.
Specify the settings for packet filtering.
Select the default policy to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then specify IP addresses
for exceptions.
1Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from devices whose
IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications with other devices are
prohibited.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from devices whose IP
addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications with other devices are
permitted.
2Specify address exceptions.
Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].
Check for entry errors
If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI, in which case you
need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>. IPv4 Address Filter IPv6 Address Filter
Entry form for IP addresses
Description Example
Entering a single
address
IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods. 192.168.0.10
IPv6:
Delimit alphanumeric characters with colons. fe80::10
Specifying a
range of
addresses
Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-
192.168.0.20
Specifying a
range of
addresses with a
Enter the address, followed by a slash and a number indicating the
prefix length.
192.168.0.32/27
fe80::1234/64
5
㻠㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
prefix
When [Reject] is selected for an outbound filter
Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be filtered.
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
Select an IP address and click [Delete].
3Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
You can also enable or disable IP address filtering from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen. IPv4 Address Filter IPv6
Address Filter
LINKS
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules
6
㻠㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08U
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules
You can limit communication to only devices with specified MAC addresses, or block devices with specified MAC addresses but permit
other communications. Up to 32 MAC addresses can be specified.
This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Security Settings] [MAC Address Filter].
Click [Edit] for a filter type.
[Outbound Filter]
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.
[Inbound Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.
1
2
3
4
㻠㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the settings for packet filtering.
Select the precondition (default policy) to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then specify
MAC addresses for exceptions.
1Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject other devices to communicate with the machine.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from devices whose
MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications with other devices are
prohibited.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from devices whose
MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications with other devices are
permitted.
2Specify address exceptions.
Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].
You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.
Check for entry errors
If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the Remote UI, in which
case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>. MAC Address Filter
When [Reject] is selected for an outbound filter
Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be filtered.
Deleting a MAC address from exceptions
Select a MAC address and click [Delete].
3Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
5
6
㻠㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08W
Changing Port Numbers
Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other devices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for major protocols, but
devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are well-known. To enhance security, your
Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has been changed, the new number must be shared with the
communicating devices, such as computers and servers. Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.
To change the port number for proxy server, see Setting a Proxy.
To change the port number for LDAP server, see Registering LDAP Servers .
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <TCP/IP Settings> <Port Number Settings>.
Select a port.
Learning more about the ports
<LPD>/<RAW>/<WSD Multicast Discovery> Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
<HTTP> Disabling HTTP Communication
<POP3>/<SMTP> Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
<SNMP> Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
<Multicast Discovery> Configuring Settings for Device Management Software
Enter the port number using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Configuring Printer Ports
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻠㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08X
Setting a Proxy
A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other devices, especially when
communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The client devices connect to the outside network
through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of
traffic between in-house and outside networks but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced
security. When you use Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy,
make sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and password for
authentication.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Click [Edit] in [Proxy Settings].
Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
1
2
3
4
5
㻠㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Use Proxy]
Select the check box to use the specified proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.
[HTTP Proxy Server Address]
Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.
[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]
Change the port number as necessary. Enter a number between 1 and 65535.
[Use Proxy within Same Domain]
Select this check box to also use the specified proxy server for communication with devices in the same domain.
[Use Proxy Authentication]
To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the user name
in the [User Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and enter up to 24
alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.
Click [OK].
LINKS
Using Google Cloud Print
6
㻠㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-08Y
Restricting the Machine's Functions
Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes, the machine can be
set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions
Restricting USB Functions
Restricting USB Functions
Disabling HTTP Communication and Remote Management
Disabling HTTP Communication
Disabling Remote UI
㻠㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-090
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions
Some cases of information leakage can be prevented by limiting the available fax and e-mail destinations to those registered in the
Address Book or LDAP servers, or by setting a PIN for the Address Book so that unauthorized users cannot add or edit Address Book
entries. You can also avoid sending documents to unintended recipients if the machine is set to ask you to enter the fax number twice
for confirmation.
㻠㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-091
Setting a PIN for Address Book
The Address Book can be set to require users to enter a PIN in order to add new entries to the Address Book
or edit existing entries. Setting a PIN to the Address Book can reduce the risk of documents being sent to
unintended recipients because changes to the Address Book can only be made by users who know the PIN.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <Restrict TX Function> <Address Book PIN>.
Set the PIN for editing the Address Book.
Enter a number of up to seven digits using numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
When <PIN (Confirm)> is displayed, enter the PIN once again to confirm.
You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000".
To cancel the PIN setting, clear the information entered in and tap <Apply> with the fields blank.
In addition to setting the Address Book PIN, you can further enhance security by performing the following operations:
Restricting the addition of new destinations, see Limiting Available Destinations.
Disabling the PC fax function, see Prohibiting PC Faxing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw).
LINKS
Registering in the Address Book
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
Configuring Basic E-mail Settings
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location
1
2
3
4
㻠㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-092
Limiting Available Destinations
By limiting fax numbers that can be specified when sending documents to those already registered in the
Address Book, those previously used, or those searchable from the LDAP servers, you can reduce the
possibility of specifying incorrect destinations and prevent users from leaking information. When this function
is enabled, the machine prohibits users from entering destinations using the numeric keys, adding new entries
to the Address Book, and editing the existing Address Book entries.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <Restrict TX Function> <Restrict New Destinations>.
Tap <On>.
<Off>
Cancels the restriction on new destinations. Fax numbers and e-mail addresses can be specified by using any method.
<On>
Restricts input so that the only addresses that can be specified are those registered in the Address Book, those previously used,
or those that can be found on the LDAP server.
This function does not limit the available destinations for PC faxing. Prohibiting PC Faxing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw /
MF628Cw)
LINKS
Setting a PIN for Address Book
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
1
2
3
4
㻠㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-093
Prohibiting PC Faxing
You can prohibit users from PC faxing (faxing from a computer).
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Fax Settings>.
Select <TX Function Settings> <Allow Fax Driver TX>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Off>.
<Off>
Disables PC faxing.
<On>
Enables PC faxing.
LINKS
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Setting the Department ID Management for Printing or Faxing from the Computer
Setting a PIN for Address Book
Limiting Available Destinations
1
2
3
4
㻠㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-094
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations
Prohibits the specification of destinations from the transmission records. Using this restriction prevents destinations being selected from
the transmission records for "Send Fax", "Scan and Send as E-mail" and "Scan and Save to Shared Folder or FTP Server".
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <Restrict TX Function> <Restrict Resending from Log>.
Tap <On>.
<Off>
Enables use of previously used destinations.
<On>
Disables use of previously used destinations.
LINKS
Limiting Available Destinations
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Specifying Previously Used Destinations (Fax)
Specifying Previously Used Destinations
1
2
3
4
㻠㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-095
Checking Destinations before Sending Documents
By entering the fax number twice, you can reduce the risk of faxing to the wrong number due to input mistakes. Use features described
in this section if you send confidential documents.
Displaying the Screen for Confirming the Fax Number (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Displaying Destinations in Address Book
You can set the machine to ask users to enter the fax number twice when it is entered by using the numeric keys. This way, you can
reduce the risk of faxing to the wrong number due to input mistakes.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Fax Settings>.
Select <TX Function Settings> <Confirm Entered Fax Number>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <On>.
<Off>
Does not display the screen for confirming the fax number.
<On>
Displays the screen for confirming the fax number.
When using coded dial numbers to specify destinations, you need to remember whose destination (or what group) is registered in what
coded dial number. If you do not remember all these numbers perfectly, you may send your documents to unintended destinations. You
can avoid sending data to unintended recipients by configuring the machine to display the details of the coded dial number you
selected/entered as a sending destination before you send documents to that destination.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <Restrict TX Function> <Coded Dial TX Confirmation>.
Tap <On>.
Displaying the Screen for Confirming the Fax Number (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Displaying Destinations in Address Book
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
㻠㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-096
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting
Sequential broadcasting is a feature that sends faxes to multiple recipients in succession. This feature can be disabled if preferred.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Fax Settings>.
Tap <Restrict TX Function> <Restrict Sequential Broadcast>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <Confirm Sequential Broadcast> or <Reject Sequential Broadcast>.
<Off>
Enables sequential broadcasting.
<Confirm Sequential Broadcast>
Displays the confirmation screen when sending a fax via sequential broadcasting.
<Reject Sequential Broadcast>
Disables sequential broadcasting.
LINKS
Limiting Available Destinations
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)
1
2
3
4
㻠㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-097
Restricting USB Functions
USB is a convenient way of connecting peripheral devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source of information
leakage if it is not properly managed. Be especially careful when handling USB memory devices. This section describes how to restrict
connection via the USB port of the machine and how to prohibit use of USB memory devices.
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer
Restricting the Scan to USB Function
Restricting the USB Print Function
You can disable the computer connection USB port located on the back side of the machine. If this port is disabled, the machine cannot
communicate with a computer via USB. This setting does not affect the front USB port, which is for attaching USB memory devices.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Use as USB Device>.
Tap <Off>.
<Off>
Disables the computer connection USB port located on the back side of the machine.
<On>
Enables the computer connection USB port located on the back side of the machine.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
You can disable storing data into a USB memory device. USB memory devices are connected into the USB port on the front side of the
machine.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Store to USB Memory>.
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer
Restricting the Scan to USB Function
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
㻠㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Tap <Off>.
<Off>
Prohibits data from being stored into a USB memory device. Scanned data cannot be stored into the USB memory device.
<On>
Permits data being stored into a USB memory device.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
You can disable printing data from a USB memory device. The data in the USB memory device cannot be printed.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Memory Media Print On/Off>.
Tap <Off>.
<Off>
Disables the function to read the data from a USB memory device. The data in the USB memory device cannot be printed.
<On>
Enables the function to print the data stored in a USB memory device.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
Restricting the USB Print Function
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
㻠㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-098
Disabling HTTP Communication
HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you are using a USB
connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party intrusions via the unused HTTP port.
Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing with Google Cloud
Print.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <Network Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Select <TCP/IP Settings> <Use HTTP>.
Tap <Off>.
<Off>
Disables HTTP communication.
<On>
Enables HTTP communication.
LINKS
Using Remote UI
Changing Port Numbers
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
Using Google Cloud Print
1
2
3
4
㻠㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-099
Disabling Remote UI
The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specified by using a Web browser on a computer. To use the Remote UI,
the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a computer via USB, or if you do not
need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the risk of having your machine controlled remotely over
the network by malicious third parties.
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Remote UI Settings> <Use Remote UI>.
Tap <Off>.
<Off>
Disables the Remote UI.
<On>
Enables the Remote UI.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Using Remote UI
Disabling HTTP Communication
1
2
3
4
5
㻠㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09A
Implementing Robust Security Features
Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sniffing, spoofing, and tampering of data
as it flows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these attacks, the machine supports the following
features to enhance security and secrecy.
SSL Encrypted Communication
SSL is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web browser or an e-mail
application. SSL enables secure network communication when you access the machine from a computer via the Remote UI.
Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI
IPSec Communication
While SSL only encrypts data used on a specific application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application, IPSec encrypts the
whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system than SSL. Configuring IPSec
Settings
IEEE 802.1X Authentication
IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively managing user
authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in
order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS
server, which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN
switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client
device. Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
LINKS
Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
㻠㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09C
Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI
You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). SSL is
a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. SSL must be enabled when the Remote UI is used for specifying
settings for IPSec (Pre-Shared Key Method), IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/PEAP), or SNMPv3. To use SSL for the Remote UI, you
need to set a key pair and enable the SSL function. Generate or install the key pair for SSL before enabling SSL ( Configuring
Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates).
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Click [Key and Certificate] in [SSL Settings].
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key pair you want to use.
1
2
3
4
5
㻠㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Viewing details of a certificate
You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text link under [Key Name], or
the certificate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
Enable SSL for the Remote UI.
1Click [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].
2Click [Edit].
3Select the [Use SSL] check box and click [OK].
Restart the machine.
6
7
㻠㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
You can also enable or disable SSL encrypted communication from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen. Use SSL
Starting the Remote UI with SSL
If you try to start the Remote UI when SSL is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the security certificate. In
this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address field, and then proceed to display the Remote UI screen.
Starting Remote UI
Enabling SSL for e-mailing/I-Faxing
If the SMTP server and the POP3 server support SSL, you can enable SSL for communication with these servers
(Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings). For more information about the SMTP server and the POP3 server,
contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
LINKS
Generating Key Pairs
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
Configuring IPSec Settings
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
Registering LDAP Servers
㻠㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09E
Configuring IPSec Settings
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec or IPsec) is a protocol suite for encrypting data transported over a network, including Internet networks.
While SSL only encrypts data used on a specific application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application, IPSec encrypts either whole
IP packets or the payloads of IP packets, offering a more versatile security system. The IPSec of the machine works in transport mode,
in which the payloads of IP packets are encrypted. With this feature, the machine can connect directly to a computer that is in the same
virtual private network (VPN). Check the system requirements and set the necessary configuration on the computer before you configure
the machine.
System Requirements
IPSec functional restrictions
IPSec supports communication to a unicast address (or a single device).
The machine cannot use both IPSec and DHCPv6 at the same time.
IPSec is unavailable in networks in which NAT or IP masquerade is implemented.
Using IPSec with IP address filter
IP address filter settings are applied before the IPSec policies. Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules
IPSec that is supported by the machine conforms to RFC2401, RFC2402, RFC2406, and RFC4305.
Operating system Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012
Connection mode Transport mode
Key exchange
protocol
IKEv1 (main mode)
Authentication method Pre-shared key
Digital signature
Hash algorithm
(and key length)
HMAC-SHA1-96
HMAC-SHA2 (256 bits or 384 bits)
Encryption algorithm
(and key length)
3DES-CBC
AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256
bits)
Key exchange algorithm/group (and key length)
Diffie-Hellman (DH)
Group 1 (768 bits)
Group 2 (1024 bits)
Group 14 (2048 bits)
ESP
Hash algorithm HMAC-SHA1-96
Encryption algorithm
(and key length)
3DES-CBC
AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256
bits)
Hash algorithm/encryption algorithm (and key
length)
AES-GCM (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256
bits)
AH Hash algorithm HMAC-SHA1-96
㻠㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Before using IPSec for encrypted communication, you need to register security policies (SP). A security policy consists of the groups of
settings described below. Up to 10 policies can be registered. After registering policies, specify the order in which they are applied.
Selector
Selector defines conditions for IP packets to apply IPSec communication. Selectable conditions include IP addresses and port
numbers of the machine and the devices to communicate with.
IKE
IKE configures the IKEv1 that is used for key exchange protocol. Note that instructions vary depending on the authentication method
selected.
[Pre-Shared Key Method]
A key of up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be shared with the other devices. Enable SSL for the Remote UI before specifying this
authentication method ( Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI).
[Digital Signature Method]
The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures. Generate or install the key
pair beforehand ( Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates).
AH/ESP
Specify the settings for AH/ESP, which is added to packets during IPSec communication. AH and ESP can be used at the same time.
You can also select whether or not to enable PFS for tighter security.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Security Settings] [IPSec Settings].
Click [Edit].
Configuring IPSec Settings
1
2
3
4
㻠㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select the [Use IPSec] check box and click [OK].
If you want the machine to only receive packets that match one of the security policies that you define in the steps below, clear
the [Receive Non-Policy Packets] check box.
Click [Register New Policy].
Specify the Policy Settings.
1In the [Policy Name] text box, enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for a name that is used for identifying
the policy.
2Select the [Enable Policy] check box.
Specify the Selector Settings.
5
6
7
8
㻠㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Local Address]
Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the machine to apply the policy.
[All IP
Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[IPv4 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from the IPv4 address of the machine.
[IPv6 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address of the machine.
[Remote Address]
Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the other devices to apply the policy.
[All IP
Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[All IPv4
Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv4 addresses of the other devices.
[All IPv6
Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv6 addresses of the other devices.
[IPv4 Manual
Settings]
Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec. Enter the IPv4
address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[IPv6 Manual
Settings]
Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec. Enter the IPv6
address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[Addresses to Set Manually]
If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Remote Address], enter the IP address to apply the policy.
You can also enter a range of addresses by inserting a hyphen between the addresses.
Entering IP addresses
Description Example
Entering a single
address
IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods. 192.168.0.10
IPv6:
Delimit alphanumeric characters with colons. fe80::10
Specifying a
range of
addresses
Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
[Subnet Settings]
When manually specifying IPv4 address, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the subnet mask using
periods to delimit numbers (example:"255.255.255.240").
[Prefix Length]
Specifying the range of IPv6 addresses manually also allows you to specify the range using prefixes. Enter a range between 0 and
128 as the prefix length.
㻠㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Local Port]/[Remote Port]
If you want to create separate policies for each protocol, such as HTTP or SMTP, enter the appropriate port number for the
protocol to determine whether to use IPSec.
IPSec is not applied to the following packets
Loopback, multicast, and broadcast packets
IKE packets (using UDP on port 500)
ICMPv6 neighbor solicitation and neighbor advertisement packets
Specify the IKE Settings.
[IKE Mode]
The mode used for the key exchange protocol is displayed. The machine supports the main mode, not the aggressive mode.
[Authentication Method]
Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] or [Digital Signature Method] for the method used when authenticating the machine. You need to
enable SSL for the Remote UI before selecting [Pre-Shared Key Method] ( Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the
Remote UI). You need to generate or install a key pair before selecting [Digital Signature Method] ( Configuring Settings for
Key Pairs and Digital Certificates).
[Valid for]
Specify how long a session lasts for IKE SA (ISAKMP SA). Enter the time in minutes.
[Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group]
Select an algorithm from the drop-down list. Each algorithm is used in the key exchange.
[Authentication] Select the hash algorithm.
[Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm.
[DH Group] Select the Diffie-Hellman group, which determines the key strength.
Using a pre-shared key for authentication
1Click the [Pre-Shared Key Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Shared Key
Settings].
2Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the pre-shared key and click [OK].
3Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
Using a key pair and preinstalled CA certificates for authentication
Click the [Digital Signature Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Key and
9
㻠㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
1Certificate].
2Click [Register Default Key] on the right of a key pair you want to use.
Viewing details of a key pair or certificate
You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text link under [Key
Name], or the certificate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
3Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
Specify the IPSec Network Settings.
[Use PFS]
Select the check box to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for IPSec session keys. Enabling PFS enhances the security while
increasing the load on the communication. Make sure that PFS is also enabled for the other devices.
[Specify by Time]/[Specify by Size]
Set the conditions for terminating a session for IPSec SA. IPSec SA is used as a communication tunnel. Select either or both of the
check boxes as necessary. If both check boxes are selected, the IPSec SA session is terminated when either of the conditions has
been satisfied.
[Specify by
Time] Enter a time in minutes to specify how long a session lasts.
[Specify by
Size] Enter a size in megabytes to specify how much data can be transported in a session.
[Select Algorithm]
Select the [ESP], [ESP (AES-GCM)], or [AH (SHA1)] check box(es) depending on the IPSec header and the algorithm used. AES-
GCM is an algorithm for both authentication and encryption. If [ESP] is selected, also select algorithms for authentication and
encryption from the [ESP Authentication] and [ESP Encryption] drop-down lists.
[ESP
Authentication]
To enable the ESP authentication, select [SHA1] for the hash algorithm. Select [Do Not Use] if you want
to disable the ESP authentication.
[ESP
Encryption]
Select the encryption algorithm for ESP. You can select [NULL] if you do not want to specify the
algorithm, or select [Do Not Use] if you want to disable the ESP encryption.
[Connection Mode]
The connection mode of IPSec is displayed. The machine supports transport mode, in which the payloads of IP packets are
encrypted. Tunnel mode, in which whole IP packets (headers and payloads) are encapsulated is not available.
Click [OK].
If you need to register an additional security policy, return to step 6.
10
11
㻠㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Arrange the order of policies listed under [Registered IPSec Policies].
Policies are applied from one at the highest position to the lowest. Click [Up] or [Down] to move a policy up or down the order.
Editing a policy
Click the corresponding text link under [Policy Name] for the edit screen.
Deleting a policy
Click [Delete] on the right of the policy name you want to delete click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
You can also enable or disable IPSec communication from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen. Use IPSec
LINKS
Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
IPSec Policy List
12
13
㻠㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09F
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server (authentication
server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a device tries to connect to the
802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.
Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication to the network depending
on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.
Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key pair or CA certificate before configuring
IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates).
TLS
The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certificates. A key pair issued by a
certification authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when authenticating the machine). For the server authentication,
a CA certificate installed via the Remote UI can be used in addition to a CA certificate preinstalled in the machine. The TLS method
cannot be used with TTLS or PEAP at the same time.
TTLS
This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certificate for the server
authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used with PEAP at the same time. Enable SSL
for the Remote UI before configuring this authentication method ( Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI).
PEAP
The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MS-CHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol. Enable SSL for the Remote
UI before configuring this authentication method ( Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI).
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].
1
2
3
㻠㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [Edit].
Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, enter the login name in the [Login Name] text box, and specify the
required settings.
[Use IEEE 802.1X]
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
[Login Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.
Setting TLS
1Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certificate].
2Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key pair you want to use for the client authentication.
4
5
㻠㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Viewing details of a key pair or certificate
You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text link under [Key
Name], or the certificate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
Setting TTLS/PEAP
1Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
Internal protocol for TTLS
You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP. If you want to use PAP, click the [PAP] radio button.
2Click [Change User Name/Password].
To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check box. Select the
check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.
3Set the user name/password and click [OK].
㻠㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[User Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the new password
both in the [Password] and [Confirm] text boxes.
Click [OK].
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen. IEEE 802.1X Settings
LINKS
Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
6
7
㻠㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09H
Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
In order to encrypt communication with a remote device, an encryption key must be sent and received over an unsecured network
beforehand. This problem is solved by public-key cryptography. Public-key cryptography ensures secure communication by protecting
important and valuable information from attacks, such as sniffing, spoofing, and tampering of data as it flows over a network.
Key Pair
A key pair consists of a public key and a secret key, both of which are required for encrypting or decrypting data.
Because data that has been encrypted with one of the key pair cannot be returned to its original data form without
the other, public-key cryptography ensures secure communication of data over the network. Up to four key pairs can
be generated to the machine ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates). For SSL encrypted
communication, a key pair can be generated for the machine ( Generating Key Pairs).
CA Certificate
Digital certificates including CA certificates are similar to other forms of identification, such as driver's licenses. A
digital certificate contains a digital signature, which enables the machine to detect any spoofing or tampering of data.
It is extremely difficult for third parties to abuse digital certificates. A digital certificate that contains a public key of a
certification authority (CA) is referred to as a CA certificate. CA certificates are used for verifying the device the
machine is communicating with for features such as printing with Google Cloud Print or IEEE 802.1X authentication.
Up to 67 CA certificates can be registered, including the 62 certificates that are preinstalled in the machine ( Using
CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates).
Device Signature Key and Certificate (MF729Cx)
A device signature key and certificate are digital certification to show that a document was scanned from the
machine. The machine generates this certification by itself. The certification can be appended when a scanned original
is converted to PDF format ( Generating a Device Signature Key (MF729Cx)). It cannot be used with SSL
encrypted communication or IPsec digital signature.
An optional Send PDF Security Feature Set is required.
Key and Certificate Requirements
The certificate contained in a key pair generated with the machine conforms to X.509v3. If you install a key pair or a CA certificate from
a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:
Format Key pair: PKCS#12
CA certificate: X.509v1 or X.509v3, DER (encoded binary)
File extension Key pair: ".p12" or ".pfx"
CA certificate: ".cer"
Public key algorithm
(and key length) RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, or 4096 bits)
Certificate signature algorithm SHA1-RSA, SHA256-RSA, SHA384-RSA , SHA512-RSA , MD5-RSA, or MD2-RSA
Certificate thumbprint algorithm SHA1
Requirements for the certificate contained in a key pair are pursuant to CA certificates.
SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.
The machine does not support use of a certificate revocation list (CRL).
*1
*2 *2
*1
*2
㻠㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09J
Generating Key Pairs
A key pair can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). You can
use SSL when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Up to four key pairs can be generated to the machine. Self-signed certificates
are used with key pairs generated in "Network Communication". With a "Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)", you can apply for a
CA-issued digital certificate for the key pair generated by the machine.
Generate Network Communication Key
Generate Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certificate Settings].
Click [Generate Key].
Generate Network Communication Key
1
2
3
4
㻠㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Deleting a registered key pair
Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].
A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[SSL]" or "[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed
under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it.
Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].
Specify settings for the key and certificate.
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
RSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger the number for the key
length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.
[512-bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for [Signature Algorithm].
[Certificate Settings]
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the date from which the certificate is valid between 01/01/2000 and 31/12/2037.
[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the date to which the certificate is valid between 01/01/2000 and 31/12/2037. A date earlier than [Validity Start Date
(YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list. You can also click the
[Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US" for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. "Common Name" is often
abbreviated as "CN."
5
6
㻠㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [OK].
Keys for network communication may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate.
After a key pair is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certificate Settings].
Click [Generate Key].
Deleting a registered key pair
Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].
A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[SSL]" or "[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed
under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it.
Select [Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].
Generate Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
7
1
2
3
4
5
㻠㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify settings for the key and certificate.
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
RSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger the number for the key
length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.
[512-bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for [Signature Algorithm].
[Certificate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list. You can also click the
[Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US" for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. "Common Name" is often
abbreviated as "CN."
Click [OK].
Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR) may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate.
Click [Store in File].
A dialog box for storing the file appears. Choose where to store the file and click [Save].
6
7
8
㻠㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR) file is stored on the computer.
Attach the stored file and submit the application to the certification authority.
Registering the CA-issued Digital Certificate
You cannot use the key pair generated by the Certificate Signing Request (CSR) until the certificate is registered. Once the certification
authority has issued the digital certificate, register it using the procedure below.
Start the Remote UI and log on in Administrator mode.
Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certificate Settings].
Click [Key Name] or [Certificate] for the certificate to be registered.
Click [Register Certificate].
9
1
2
3
4
5
㻠㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09K
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
Key pairs and digital certificates can be obtained from a certification authority (CA) for use with the machine. You can store and then
register these files by using the Remote UI. Make sure that the key pair and the certificate satisfy the requirements of the machine
(Key and Certificate Requirements). Up to 62 key pairs and 67 CA certificates (including the four preinstalled certificates) can be
registered.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certificate Settings] or [CA Certificate Settings] (for CA certificates).
Click [Key and Certificate Settings] to install a key pair, or [CA Certificate Settings] to install a CA certificate.
Click [Register Key and Certificate] or [Register CA Certificate].
Deleting a registered key pair or CA certificate
Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair or CA certificate you want to delete click [OK]. You cannot delete the preinstalled
1
2
3
4
㻠㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
CA certificates.
A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[SSL]" or "[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed
under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it. The preinstalled CA certificate
cannot be deleted.
Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certificates
Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certificate you want to disable. To enable the certificate again, click [Enable]
on the right of the certificate.
Click [Install].
Deleting a key pair or CA certificate
Click [Delete] on the right of the file you want to delete, and then click [OK].
Click [Browse], specify the file to install, and click [Start Installation].
The key pair or CA certificate is installed in the machine.
Register the key pair or CA certificate.
Registering a key pair
1Click [Register] on the right of the key pair you want to register.
2Enter the name of the key pair and password, and then click [OK].
[Key Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the name of the key pair to be registered.
[Password]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the file to be registered.
Registering a CA certificate
5
6
7
㻠㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09S
Generating a Device Signature Key
You can generate a device signature key and certificate that show a document was scanned on the machine. The certificate is appended
when an original is scanned and converted into a PDF file.
A device signature key is generated only once, and cannot be deleted.
An optional Send PDF Security Feature Set is required.
The device signature key and certificate are valid for five years. Renew them when required.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certificate Settings].
Click [Generate Key].
1
2
3
4
㻠㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select the [Device Signature] check box, and click [OK].
The device signature key is generated.
Renewing the Device Signature Key
1Click [Update] at the right of Device Signature Key.
2Click [OK].
5
㻠㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09L
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
Once key pairs and CA certificates are registered, you can view their detailed information or verify them for validity and signature.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certificate Settings] (for key pairs) or [CA Certificate Settings] (for CA
certificates).
Click the icon for the key pair or certificate that you want to verify.
Certificate details can be viewed on this screen.
Click [Verify Certificate].
1
2
3
4
5
㻠㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09U
Using Remote UI
Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the status of the machine.
You can also make some settings such as registering the Address Book. You can do this without leaving your desk, making system
management easier.
Functions of the Remote UI
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
Saving/Loading Registered Data
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
Basics of the Remote UI
Starting Remote UI
Remote UI Screens
System Requirements
The following environment is required to use the Remote UI. In addition, set the Web browser to enable Cookies.
Windows
Windows Vista/7/8
Microsoft Internet Explorer 9.0 or later
Mac
Mac OS X 10.5.8 or later (except for Classic environment)
Safari 5.0.6 or later
㻠㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09W
Starting Remote UI
To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI. Check the IP
address set to the machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings). If you have any questions, ask your Network Administrator.
Start the Web browser.
Enter "http://(the IP address of the machine)/" in the address field, and press the [ENTER] key.
If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
If a security alert is displayed
A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Enabling SSL Encrypted
Communication for the Remote UI). When certificate settings or SSL settings have no errors, continue browsing the Web
site.
Log on to the Remote UI.
When the Department ID Management is disabled
Select [System Manager Mode] or [General User Mode].
[System Manager Mode]
You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the appropriate ID in [System Manager ID] and PIN in
[System Manager PIN] ( Setting the System Manager ID). If [System Manager ID] is not set, you do not need to input
anything.
[General User Mode]
You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. If you wish to delete
your print documents, enter the user name of the documents in [User Name]. The user name is automatically set to print
documents based on information such as your computer name or computer logon name.
[Remote UI Access PIN]
If [Remote UI Access PIN] is set, enter the PIN. ( Setting a Remote UI PIN)
When the Department ID Management is enabled
Enter the appropriate ID in [Department ID] and PIN in [PIN] ( Setting the Department ID Management).
Click [Log In].
1
2
3
㻠㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09X
Remote UI Screens
This section describes the typical screens of the Remote UI.
Portal Page (main page)
[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page
[Settings/Registration] Page
[Address Book] Page
[Log Out]
Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.
[Mail to System Manager]
Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specified in [System Manager Information] under [System
Management].
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Device Basic Information
Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the Error Information page
will be displayed.
Consumables Information
Displays paper information and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.
Support Link
Displays the support link specified in [Device Information] under [System Management].
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Displays the status of the current print documents and history of print, copy, send, and received documents. You can also check
the status of the machine.
[Settings/Registration]
Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged on in System Manager Mode, you can change the settings items and
save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
[Address Book]
Displays the coded dial numbers and the Favorites list registered in the Address Book. You can also register or edit the Address
Book when you have logged on in System Manager Mode. Registering Address Book from Remote UI
Portal Page (main page)
[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page
㻠㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Click an item, and the content is displayed in the right page. Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is currently displayed.
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Click an item, the content is displayed in the right page. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is currently displayed.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
System Management Settings
You can only set [System Management Settings] when you have logged on in System Manager Mode.
When you have logged on in General User Mode, only [System Management] will be displayed.
[Settings/Registration] Page
㻠㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[To Portal]
Displays Portal Page (main page).
[Favorites]
Displays the list of the Favorites. Registering in the Address Book
[Coded Dial]
Displays the list of the coded dial numbers. Registering in the Address Book
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is currently displayed.
List Number
Specifies the range of coded dial numbers displayed on the page. You cannot display List Number in Favorites.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
Registering/Editing the Address Book
You can register or edit the Address Book when you have logged on in System Manager Mode.
[Address Book] Page
㻠㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-09Y
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status
Checking Current Status of Print Documents
Checking History of Documents
Checking Error Information
Checking Consumables
Checking Device Specifications
Checking System Manager Information
Checking Print Total Counter
The document file name displays only 32 characters. The printed application name may be added to the file name.
The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status]
You can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].
Regardless of the Department ID Management setting, all the print documents currently printing and waiting to be printed
will be listed.
If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only be displayed on the
documents that you printed.
Click [Job Number] on the paused documents and secure documents to display detailed information. You can check the
user name and the page count of the printed document.
The history of print, copy, sending faxes/e-mails (TX), or receiving faxes (RX) is displayed.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Log]
Checking Current Status of Print Documents
Checking History of Documents
㻠㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on Portal Page (main
page). Portal Page (main page)
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Error Information]
Paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed. You can also click [Check
Consumables Details] in the Portal Page (main page) to display this page.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Consumables]
The maximum print speed and the Secure Print memory capacity and device configuration are displayed.
Checking Error Information
Checking Consumables
Checking Device Specifications
㻠㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device Features]
Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. This information is set in [System Management] on the
[Settings/Registration] page. System Management Settings
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device Information]
The total number of pages that have been printed by the copy, print, and fax functions is displayed.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Check Counter]
Checking System Manager Information
Checking Print Total Counter
㻠㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0A0
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the machine, but some
settings can only be set using the Remote UI.
Some settings require you to first log on in System Manager Mode before you can change them.
Start the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click the menu item you want to set.
For more information about the settings menu, see each item below
Menu items Referents
Preferences
Paper Settings Specifying Paper Size and Type
Display
Settings Preferences
Timer Settings Timer Settings
Sound Volume
Control Adjusting the Volume
Function Settings
Common
Settings Common Settings
Copy Settings Copy Settings
1
2
3
㻠㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Fax Settings Fax Settings (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Scan Settings Scan Settings
Memory Media
Print Settings Memory Media Print Settings
Printer Settings Printer Settings
Output Report
Settings Printing Reports and Lists
Favorite
Settings
Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings
Registering Frequently Used Fax Settings
Registering Frequently Used Scan Settings (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared Folder/FTP Server)
System Management Settings
System
Management System Management Settings
Department ID
Management Setting the Department ID Management
Network
Settings Network
Security
Settings Security
Import/Export Saving/Loading Registered Data
Initialize
Setting
Information Initializing Menu
LINKS
Remote UI Screens
㻠㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0A1
Saving/Loading Registered Data
Address Book or menu options data that has been registered in the machine can be saved in your computer (export). Data that is saved
on your computer can also be registered in the machine (import). You can easily copy the destinations in the Address Book to multiple
machines. To use these features, it is required that you have logged on in System Manager Mode.
Depending on the model, you cannot import the Address Book that exported from the machine. If using the same model, you can import/export menu
options and other data except the Address Book.
Saving Settings Data
Loading Settings Data
Do not turn OFF the machine until the import or export process is complete
It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may result in damage
to data or the machine.
Do not operate the machine during the export/import process
Before exporting/importing, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently processing.
Settings that cannot be imported/exported
Settings Location
<Current
Date/Time
Settings>
<Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings>
<Forwarding
Settings> <Fax Settings>
<Fax Setup
Guide> <Fax Settings>
[Context
Settings] [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings] [SNMPv3 Settings]
[Department ID
Page Total] [Settings/Registration] [Department ID Management]
[Key and
Certificate
Settings] [Settings/Registration] [Security Settings]
[CA Certificate
Settings]
<Remote UI
Settings> <System Management Settings>
Import/export using the operation panel
Using USB memory, settings can be imported and exported from the settings menu on the operation panel. Using a USB
Memory Device to Export/Import Registered Data
*
*
㻠㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0A2
Saving Settings Data
You can export data such as Address Book entries and machine settings and save them on a computer. It is recommended that you
regularly back up important settings.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Import/Export] [Export].
Select the settings to export.
[Address Book]
To export Address Book data, select the check box.
[Address Book PIN]
If the Address Book is code-protected, enter the code for the Address Book. Setting a PIN for Address Book
[Settings/Registration]
1
2
3
4
㻠㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select this check box to export the machine's settings.
[Encryption Password]
Enter an encryption password up of up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Enter the same password in [Confirm]. To export the
data, you must set an encryption password.
The password is required when exported data is imported.
Click [Start Exporting].
Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where the exported setting data is saved.
The setting data will be saved.
LINKS
Remote UI Screens
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
Registering in the Address Book
Setting Menu List
Address Book List
5
6
㻠㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0A3
Loading Settings Data
Load (import) data that was exported from the machine. You can also import settings from another machine if it is the same model as
your machine.
Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI
Click [Settings/Registration].
Click [Import/Export] [Import].
Select the settings to be imported.
[File Path]
Click [Browse] and select the file.
[Decryption Password]
Enter the password set when the settings were exported.
[Address Book]
To import Address Book data, select the check box.
Importing Address Book data will overwrite the Address Book entries currently registered on the machine.
[Address Book PIN]
If the Address Book is code protected, enter the code for the Address Book. Setting a PIN for Address Book
1
2
3
4
㻠㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Settings/Registration]
Select this check box to import the machine's settings.
Click [Start Importing].
Click [OK].
The selected settings data is loaded into the machine.
Click [OK].
If the [Settings/Registration] check box is selected in step 4, the machine automatically restarts.
LINKS
Remote UI Screens
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
Registering in the Address Book
Setting Menu List
Address Book List
5
6
7
㻠㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0A4
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
You can register or edit the Address Book of the machine by using the computer. Set the shared folder or FTP server address here.
You can change the settings only when you have logged on in System Manager Mode.
Start the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI
Click [Address Book].
If the enter PIN page is displayed
The Address Book is protected by a PIN. Enter the [PIN] and click [OK].
Click [Coded Dial].
You can also register destinations in Favorites. In this case, click [Favorites] instead of [Coded Dial]. Registering in the
Address Book
Click the text link under [Number], [Type], or [Name] for an item named "Not Registered."
You can edit a registered item by clicking the corresponding text link under [Number], [Type] or [Name].
You can delete a registered item by clicking the corresponding [Delete] button.
Select [Destination Type to Register] and click [OK].
1
2
3
4
㻠㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To store the shared folder or FTP server address, select [File].
Specify the required settings. Registering in the Address Book
To register the shared folder or FTP server address
[Name]
Enter the name for the destination.
[Protocol]
Select the protocol for the destination.
[Windows (SMB)] Select when using a shared folder.
[FTP] Select when using a FTP server.
[Host Name]
To use a shared folder, enter a path to the shared folder up to 120 characters including the computer name or IP
address (e.g. "\\swan\share" or "\\192.168.2.100\share").
To use an FTP server, enter an IP address up to 120 characters (e.g. "\\192.168.2.100\share").
Using a DNS server
You can also enter the host name (or FQDN) instead of the computer name or IP address (e.g.
"\\swan.organization.company.com\share").
[Folder Path]
Enter the location of the folder to which the data will be sent (up to 120 characters).
5
6
㻠㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [OK].
LINKS
Remote UI Screens
Saving/Loading Registered Data
Address Book List
[User Name]
Enter the user name set for the shared folder or FTP server (up to 32 characters).
[Set Password]
To set a password for the shared folder or FTP server, select this check box and enter a [Password] of up to 32
characters.
Ensure that the same display language is selected on both the computer and the Remote UI.
[Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly or may not be referenceable.
7
㻡㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0A6
Network Settings
All the settings about the network are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger ( ).
Asterisks ( )
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw.
Settings marked with " " cannot be imported or exported.
Select Wired/Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN Settings
Enable Direct Connection
TCP/IP Settings
SNMP Settings
Dedicated Port Settings
Waiting Time for Connection at Startup
Ethernet Driver Settings
IEEE 802.1X Settings
Device Settings Management On/Off
Initialize Network Settings
When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when switching the machine
from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using the following <Wireless LAN Settings>).
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the setting for saving
power consumption.
WPS Push Button Mode
Select to automatically configure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router. Setting Up Connection
Using WPS Push Button Mode
WPS PIN Code Mode
Select to configure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router. Setting Up Connection Using WPS
PIN Code Mode
SSID Settings
Select to configure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by inputting manually from
the operation panel.
Select Access Point
*
*1
*2
Select Wired/Wireless LAN *1
Wireless LAN Settings *1
㻡㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list. You must manually
enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK. Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
Enter Manually
Select to configure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify authentication and
encryption settings in detail. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
Security Settings
None
WEP
Open System
Select WEP Key: 1/2/3/4
Edit WEP Key
Shared Key
Select WEP Key: 1/2/3/4
Edit WEP Key
WPA/WPA2-PSK
Auto
AES-CCMP
Power Save Mode
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
Off
On
Connection Information
Select to view the current wireless LAN settings. Viewing Network Settings
MAC Address
Wireless LAN Status
Latest Error Information
Channel
SSID Settings
Security Settings
Power Save Mode
Set whether to connect directly. By enabling this function, connecting directly with the machine is possible even in an environment
without an access point or wireless LAN router. Configuring the Settings for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Off
On
Setting <Enable Direct Connection> to <On> prevents use of a wired LAN or any wireless LAN other than Direct
Connection.
Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Wireless LAN Settings> Read the displayed message <OK> <Power
Save Mode> Select <Off> or <On>
Enable Direct Connection *1*2
TCP/IP Settings
㻡㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
IPv4 Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
IP Address Settings
Configure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP network. Setting
IPv4 Address
Auto Acquire
Select Protocol
Off
DHCP
Auto IP
Off
On
Manually Acquire
IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0
Check Settings
Auto Acquire
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
PING Command
Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network. Testing the Network Connection
DNS Settings
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions. Configuring DNS
DNS Server Settings
Primary DNS Server: 0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server: 0.0.0.0
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings
Host Name
Domain Name
DNS Dynamic Update Settings
Off
On
DNS Dynamic Update Interval
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
mDNS Settings
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Configuring DNS
Off
On
mDNS Name
DHCP Option Settings
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the DNS server address or
the domain name. Configuring DNS
Acquire Host Name
Off
On
DNS Dynamic Update
Off
On
Acquire DNS Server Address
Off
On
Acquire Domain Name
Off
On
Acquire WINS Server Address
Off
㻡㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
On
Acquire SMTP Server Address
Off
On
Acquire POP Server Address
Off
On
IPv6 Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.
Use IPv6
Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine. You can also view the current settings. Setting IPv6 Addresses
Off
On
Check Settings
Link-Local Address
Prefix Length
Stateless Address Settings
Enable or disable stateless addresses. Setting IPv6 Addresses
Off
On
Check Settings
Stateless Address
Prefix Length
Use DHCPv6
Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6. Setting IPv6 Addresses
Off
On
Check Settings
Stateful Address
Prefix Length
DNS Settings
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions. Configuring DNS
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings
Use IPv4 Host/Domain
Off
Host Name
Domain Name
On
DNS Dynamic Update Settings
Off
On
Register Manual Address
Off
On
Register Stateful Address
Off
On
Register Stateless Address
Off
On
DNS Dynamic Update Interval
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
mDNS Settings
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Configuring DNS
Off
On
㻡㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4
Off
mDNS Name
On
DHCP Option Settings
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the DNS server address or
the domain name. Configuring DNS
Acquire DNS Server Address
Off
On
Acquire Domain Name
Off
On
WINS Settings
Specify settings for Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), which provides a NetBIOS name for IP address resolutions in a mixed
network environment of NetBIOS and TCP/IP. Configuring WINS
WINS Resolution
Off
On
WINS Server Address: 0.0.0.0
LPD Settings
Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system. You can also set the
reception timeout period after which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted. Configuring Printing Protocols and
WSD Functions
LPD Print Settings
Off
On
RX Timeout
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
RAW Settings
Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specific printing protocol. You can also set the reception timeout period after which printing is
canceled if print data reception is interrupted. Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
RAW Print Settings
Off
On
RX Timeout
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
WSD Settings
Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer or scanner by using the WSD protocol that is available
on Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012. Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
WSD Print Settings
Use WSD Print
Off
On
Use WSD Browsing
Off
On
WSD Scan Settings
Use WSD Scan
Off
On
Use Computer Scan
Off
On
Use Multicast Discovery
㻡㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Off
On
Use FTP PASV Mode
Specify whether to use PASV mode for FTP. If you are connecting to an FTP server through a firewall, you must select PASV mode.
Configuring FTP PASV mode
Off
On
Use HTTP
Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote UI, WSD printing, or
printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication
Off
On
IPP Print Settings
Forward data to the machine and configure print settings via the Internet.
Use IPP Printing
Off
On
Use SSL
Off
On
Use Network Link Scan
Set to <On> if scanning with AirPrint. Always be sure to set to <On> if scanning with AirPrint. Using AirPrint
Off
On
Port Number Settings
Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment. Changing Port Numbers
LPD
1 to 515 to 65535
RAW
1 to 9100 to 65535
WSD Multicast Discovery
1 to 3702 to 65535
HTTP
1 to 80 to 65535
Multicast Discovery
1 to 427 to 65535
POP3
1 to 110 to 65535
SMTP
1 to 25 to 65535
<Menu> <Network Settings> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP Print Settings> Select <Off> or <On>
㻡㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
FTP
1 to 21 to 65535
SNMP
1 to 161 to 65535
MTU Size
Select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives. Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
1300
1400
1500
Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software. Monitoring and
Controlling the Machine with SNMP
SNMPv1 Settings
Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to Management Information
Base(MIB) objects.
Off
On
SNMPv3 Settings
Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is enabled.
Off
On
Acquire Printer Management Information from Host
Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running SNMP-compatible software.
Off
On
SNMP Settings
<Menu> <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv1 Settings> Select <Off> or <On> Restart
the machine
<Menu> <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv3 Settings> Select <Off> or <On> Restart
the machine
<Menu> <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <Acquire Printer Management Information from Host>
㻡㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing, faxing, or scanning uses MF Scan Utility and when
browsing or specifying the machine settings over the network.
Off
On
Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment. Setting a Wait Time for
Connecting to a Network
0 to 300 (sec.)
Select the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) and the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/full-duplex). You can also view
the MAC address for wired LAN.
MAC Address
Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device. Viewing the MAC Address for
Wired LAN
Auto Detect
Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type. Configuring Ethernet
Settings
Off
Communication Mode
Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Ethernet Type
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
On
Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication. Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
Off
Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
Dedicated Port Settings
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Dedicated Port Settings> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
Waiting Time for Connection at Startup
Ethernet Driver Settings
IEEE 802.1X Settings *2
㻡㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
On
Specify whether to use device management software such as iW Management Console to manage machine data such as settings and
Address Book destinations. For detailed information on iW Management Console, contact your nearest Canon dealer.
Off
On
Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults. Initialize Menu
<Menu> <Network Settings> <IEEE 802.1X Settings> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
Device Settings Management On/Off
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Device Settings Management On/Off> Select <Off> or <On>
Initialize Network Settings
㻡㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0A7
Preferences
All the settings about the display and English Keyboard Layout are listed with short descriptions. Default
settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks ( )
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw.
Settings marked with " " cannot be imported or exported.
Settings marked with " " have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.
Display Settings
English Keyboard Layout
Default Screen after Startup/Restoration
By default, the <Home> Screen is displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when the Auto Reset function is
performed. Specify the setting to change the default screen and display the main screen of a different function.
Home
Copy
Fax
Scan
Memory Media Print
Home Screen Button Display Settings
Configure the settings for the buttons displayed in the <Home> Screen. You can select the settings that will be displayed as shortcut
buttons, rearrange the order in which the buttons appear, and insert or remove spaces. Customizing the <Home> Screen
Select Button to Display
Favorite Copy Settings
Favorite Fax Settings
Favorite Scan Settings
Set Display Order
Insert and Delete Blank
Brightness
Adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine.
Five Levels
*
*1
*2
*3
Display Settings
*1
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Default Screen after Startup/Restoration> Select a
function to display the desired screen
*2
㻡㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Invert Screen Colors
Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is hard to view even after the brightness was adjusted in
<Brightness>.
Off
On
Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch
Select the unit of measurement.
Millimeter
Inch
Message Display Time
Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.
1 to 2 to 5 (sec.)
Scrolling Speed
Adjust the speed for scrolling the screen by selecting from three levels.
Slow
Standard
Fast
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Brightness> Tap / to adjust the brightness
<Apply>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Invert Screen Colors> Select <Off> or <On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch> Select <Millimeter> or
<Inch>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Message Display Time> Enter a number for the interval
<Apply>
㻡㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Cursor Movement Type
Configure how the cursor moves after a character is entered on the screen. Select <Auto> to automatically move the cursor to the
right of the entered character after approximately 1 second. Select <Manual> to manually move the cursor to the right of the
entered character.
Auto
Manual
Language
Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.
English , Japanese, French, Spanish, German, Italian, Dutch, Finnish, Portuguese, Norwegian, Swedish, Danish, Slovene, Czech,
Hungarian, Russian, Turkish, Greek, Estonian, Romanian, Slovak, Croatian, Bulgarian, Catalan, Polish, Chinese (Simplified),
Chinese (Traditional), Korean, Latvian, Lithuanian, Arabic
Remote UI Language
Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens.
English , Japanese, French, Spanish, German, Italian, Dutch, Finnish, Portuguese, Norwegian, Swedish, Danish, Czech, Hungarian,
Russian, Turkish, Polish, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Korean
Specify the layout of an USB keyboard if connected to the machine.
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Scrolling Speed> Select the speed
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Cursor Movement Type> Select <Auto> or <Manual>
*3
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Language> Select a language <Yes>
*3
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Remote UI Language> Select a language
English Keyboard Layout
㻡㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
USA Layout
UK Layout
<Menu> <Preferences> <English Keyboard Layout> Select <USA Layout> or <UK Layout>
㻡㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0A8
Timer Settings
All the settings about the timer are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
().
Asterisks ( )
Settings marked with " " may be unavailable or have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.
Settings marked with " " cannot be imported or exported.
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF724Cdw / MF623Cn.
Date/Time Settings
Auto Reset Time
Function After Auto Reset
Auto Sleep Time
Auto Offline Time
Auto Shutdown Time
Specify date and time settings, including the date format and the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting. The date and time that are
printed on each fax document, report, and list are determined by these settings.
Date Format
Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).
YYYY MM/DD
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM YYYY
Time Format
Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.
12 Hour (AM/PM)
24 Hour
*
*1
*2
*3
Date/Time Settings
*1
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Date Format> Select the date format
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Format> Select the display setting
㻡㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Current Date/Time Settings
Set the current date and time. Tap / to move the cursor, and / to specify the date and time or switch between
<AM>/<PM>.
Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed, the current date and
time are also changed accordingly.
The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect.
Time Zone
Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also changed
accordingly.
(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West to (UTC) Coordinated Universal Time to (UTC+14:00) Christmas Island
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and time. The correct
UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
Daylight Saving Time Settings
Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving
time is in effect.
Off
On
Start: Month, Week, Day
End: Month, Week, Day
*2
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Current Date/Time Settings> Set the date and time
<Apply>
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Zone> Select a time zone
*1
㻡㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If a key is not pressed for a specified period of time, the screen and the settings are initialized to display the default screen (Auto
Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. Select <0> to disable the Auto Reset function. The Auto Reset is not
performed in the following cases:
The setting menu is displayed.
The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents or sending or receiving faxes.
An error message is displayed and the Error indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the error does not prevent
the user from continuing to use a function.)
0 (Auto Reset is disabled.)
1 to 2 to 9 (min.)
The screen displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in <Function After Auto Reset>.
Select whether to return the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. If <Default Function> is selected, the main
screen of the function selected in <Default Screen after Startup/Restoration> is displayed ( Default Screen after
Startup/Restoration). If <Selected Function> is selected, the display returns to the main screen of the function that was selected.
Default Function
Selected Function
If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specified period of time, the machine enters sleep mode to
save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed. Auto Sleep is not performed when
the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight Saving Time Settings> Select a month and
day <Apply>
Auto Reset Time
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Reset Time> Set the Auto Reset time <Apply>
Function After Auto Reset
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Function After Auto Reset> Select <Default Function> or <Selected
Function>
Auto Sleep Time
㻡㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
10 to 60 (min.)
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
20 to 60 (min.)
If a key has not been pressed for a specified period of time after the screen below is displayed (the machine is set online for scanning),
the machine automatically becomes offline. Specify the time period at which the machine becomes offline. You can also set the machine
to remain online.
0 (The machine remains online.)
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
Set a timer to automatically shut down the machine after the specified period of idle time has elapsed since the machine entered the
sleep mode. Setting Auto Shutdown Time (MF724Cdw / MF623Cn)
0 (Auto Shutdown is disabled.)
1 to 4 to 8 (hr.)
Auto Offline Time
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Offline Time> Set the time period <Apply>
Auto Shutdown Time *3
㻡㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0A9
Common Settings
All the settings about the operation of the paper drawer and the paper feed method are listed with short
descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks ( )
Settings marked with " " are only available when the optional paper drawer (drawer 2) is attached.
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw.
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw.
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF724Cdw /MF623Cn.
Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Switch Paper Feed Method
Enable or disable the automatic drawer selection feature for the paper sources. If automatic drawer selection is set to <On> when
printing documents, the machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with the appropriate paper size. Also, when the
paper runs out, this setting enables continuous printing by switching from one paper source to another that is loaded with the same
paper size. You can select a function, such as copy or print, to enable this feature.
Copy
Multi-Purpose Tray
Off
On
Drawer 1
Off
On
Drawer 2
Off
On
Printer
Drawer 1
Off
On
Drawer 2
Off
On
Receive/Fax
Multi-Purpose Tray
Off
On
Drawer 1
Off
On
Drawer 2
Off
On
Receive
Multi-Purpose Tray
Off
On
Drawer 1
Off
On
Drawer 2
Off
On
Other
Multi-Purpose Tray
*
*1
*2
*3
*4
Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
*1
*1
*2
*1
*4
*1
㻡㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Off
On
Drawer 1
Off
On
Drawer 2
Off
On
Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. To print on paper with logos, you need to change how the paper
loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are performing 1- or 2-sided printing. However, if you change the setting
to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load the paper face down for both 1- and 2-sided printing. For more information, see Loading
Preprinted Paper.
Multi-Purpose Tray
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
Drawer 1
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
Drawer 2
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
*1
<Menu> <Common Settings> <Drawer Auto Selection On/Off> Select the function Select the paper
source Select <Off> or <On> <Apply>
Functions
Select the function for which you want to configure automatic drawer selection.
Select <Other> for functions such as printing reports and lists and printing images from a USB memory device.
Paper Sources
Select the paper source for which you want to enable.
<Multi-Purpose Tray> is not displayed if <Printer> was selected on the previous screen ( ). Automatic drawer
selection is always enabled for printing on paper fed from the manual feed slot.
Switch of the settings
Select <On> to enable automatic drawer selection for the paper source you selected on the previous screen ( ).
Make sure to select <On> for <Drawer 1> or <Drawer 2>. If <Off> is selected for both drawers, you cannot finish
the configuration.
Switch Paper Feed Method *3
*1
<Menu> <Common Settings> <Switch Paper Feed Method> Select the paper source Select <Speed
Priority> or <Print Side Priority>
㻡㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Paper Sources
Select the paper source that you want to change the setting for.
<Speed Priority>
When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you perform 1-
sided and 2-sided printing.
We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.
<Print Side Priority>
To print on a specific side of paper, you do not need to flip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2-sided
printing is selected.
If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper source that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided printing
(Paper), <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper source instead. In this case, you need to load the paper in
the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected ( Loading Preprinted Paper).
1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.
㻡㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AA
Copy Settings
All the settings about the copy are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
Asterisks ( )
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw.
Settings marked with " " are only available when the optional paper drawer (drawer 2) is attached.
Change Default Settings
Initialize Default Settings
You can change the factory default settings about copy. The selected settings are used as the default settings of the copy function.
Changing Default Settings
Number of Copies
1 to 999
Density
Nine Levels
Original Type
Text/Photo/Map (Speed)
Text/Photo/Map
Text/Photo/Map (Quality)
Printed Image
Text
2-Sided
Off
1-Sided->2-Sided
2-Sided->2-Sided
2-Sided->1-Sided
Copy Ratio
Custom Ratio
100% (1:1)
400% (Max)
200%
141% A5->A4
70% A4->A5
50%
25% (Min)
Paper
Multi-Purpose Tray
Drawer 1
Drawer 2
N on 1
Off
2 on 1
4 on 1
ID Card Copy
Select Layout
Collate
Off
On
Erase Frame
Off
On
*
*1
*2
Change Default Settings
*1
*2
㻡㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Sharpness
Seven Levels
Color Balance
Yellow: 17 Levels
Magenta: 17 Levels
Cyan: 17 Levels
Black: 17 Levels
Fine Adjust
Yellow
High: 17 Levels
Medium: 17 Levels
Low: 17 Levels
Magenta
High: 17 Levels
Medium: 17 Levels
Low: 17 Levels
Cyan
High: 17 Levels
Medium: 17 Levels
Low: 17 Levels
Black
High: 17 Levels
Medium: 17 Levels
Low: 17 Levels
Select this option to restore the default copy settings.
Initialize Default Settings
<Menu> <Copy Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>
㻡㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AC
Fax Settings
All the settings about the fax are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
Asterisks ( )
Settings marked with " " may be unavailable or vary or have the different default depending on the country where you are
using the machine.
Settings marked with " " cannot be imported or exported.
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw.
Basic Settings
TX Function Settings
RX Function Settings
RX Print Settings
Forwarding Settings
Fax Setup Guide
Specify the basic settings for using the machine as a fax device.
Register Unit Telephone Number
Register the fax number for the machine. Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name
Select Line Type
Select the telephone line type used for fax transmission. Connecting the Telephone Line
Pulse
Tone
Off-Hook Alarm
Select whether the machine makes an alert sound when the handset of a telephone or the optional handset connected to the machine
is not properly set on the cradle. You can also adjust the volume of the alert sound.
0 to 3
Communication Management Settings
Configure the settings for the transmission start speed when faxes are sent and received, and for archiving documents that have
*
*1
*2
*3
Basic Settings
*1
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Off-Hook Alarm> Select the volume of the alert sound
<Apply>
㻡㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
been sent.
TX Start Speed
Adjust the communication start speed in descending order from "33600 bps." This adjustment should be made when it takes a
long time to start sending a fax due to a poor telephone line connection.
33600 bps
14400 bps
9600 bps
7200 bps
4800 bps
2400 bps
RX Start Speed
Adjust the communication start speed in descending order from "33600 bps." This adjustment should be made when it takes a
long time to start receiving a fax due to a poor telephone line connection.
33600 bps
14400 bps
9600 bps
7200 bps
4800 bps
2400 bps
R-Key Setting
If your machine is connected through a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), it is necessary to set the access method. You can set the
PBX type to <Prefix> or <Hooking>. If you register the outside line access number to the R-key, you can easily access the
outside line.
PSTN
PBX
Prefix
Hooking
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Communication Management Settings> <TX Start Speed>
Select a communication start speed
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Communication Management Settings> <RX Start Speed>
Select a communication start speed
*1
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Communication Management Settings> <R-Key Setting>
<PBX> Select <Prefix> or <Hooking> Enter the outside line access number if you select <Prefix>
<Apply>
<PBX>
㻡㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Archive TX Document
In addition to the destination specified when the fax is sent, you can specify whether faxed documents are also sent to a preset
storage address for archiving. Archiving Sent Faxes
Off
On
Specify settings for sending faxes.
Change Default Settings
Specify settings used for sending faxes. The selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning documents.
Changing Default Settings
Resolution
200 x 100 dpi (Normal)
200 x 200 dpi (Fine)
200 x 200 dpi (Photo)
200 x 400 dpi (Superfine)
400 x 400 dpi (Ultrafine)
Density
Nine Levels
2-Sided Original
Off
Book Type
Calendar Type
Sharpness
Seven Levels
Register Unit Name (Fax)
Register the name of a company or person. Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name
The registered name is sent as sender information to the destination. TX Terminal ID
ECM TX
Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce errors on received
faxes, see ECM RX.
Off
On
ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error checks are performed on both the
sending and receiving devices.
Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions.
It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error checks and corrections are
performed while the data is transmitted.
Select the type of PBX you are using. If you select <Prefix>, register the prefix code on the next screen
<Code>
Enter the prefix code using the numeric keys, tap <Pause>, and then tap <Apply>. If you do not insert a pause, the
prefix code is not registered.
*2
TX Function Settings
*3
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <ECM TX> <On>
㻡㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Set Pause Time
For example, when you make calls by dialing "0 - (pause) - (telephone number)", 0 is dialed first and then a few seconds later, the
telephone number. When sending faxes overseas, you need to specify destinations by dialing "(international access code) - (country
code) - (area code) - (fax number)" but consecutive numbers that are input without pauses may not be recognized correctly. In this
case, try adding a pause after the international access code or the fax number. If the code or the number is still not recognized
correctly, change the duration of the pause. For instructions on how to enter a pause, see step 3 on Sending Faxes (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF628Cw).
1 to 4 to 15 (sec.)
Auto Redial
Specify settings for Auto Redial, a function that automatically redials the fax number after several minutes if the first attempt fails
because the line is busy. You can specify how many times the machine redials and the interval between redials.
Off
On
Number of Times to Redial
1 to 2 to 10 (times)
Redial Interval
2 to 99 (min.)
Redial When Error Occurs
Off
On
TX Terminal ID
Specify settings for adding the sender information, including the fax number and the name of the machine, to the fax header. The
recipient can check who sent the fax by looking at the added information.
*1
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Set Pause Time> Specify the duration of pause
<Apply>
*1
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Auto Redial> <On> Specify the settings
<Apply>
<Number of Times to Redial >
Specifies how many times the machine redials. Tap / or the numeric keys to enter a number, and tap <Apply>.
<Redial Interval>
Specifies the interval between redials. Tap / or the numeric keys to enter a number for the interval, and tap
<Apply>.
<Redial When Error Occurs>
When set to <On>, specifies to redial when a transmission error occurs.
㻡㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Off
On
Print Position
Inside Image Area
Outside Image Area
Mark Number as
FAX
TEL
Check Dial Tone Before Sending
Select whether to check the dial tone before a fax number is dialed.
Off
On
Allow Fax Driver TX
Enable or disable PC faxing (sending faxes from a computer). Prohibiting PC Faxing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Off
On
Confirm Entered Fax Number
Select whether to display the details of an entered coded dial number when it is selected as a destination. Displaying the Screen
for Confirming the Fax Number (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Off
On
Restrict Sequential Broadcast
Select whether to prohibit sequential broadcasting, a feature that sends faxes to multiple destinations in succession. Prohibiting
Sequential Broadcasting (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <TX Terminal ID> <On> Specify the settings
<Apply>
<Print Position>
Specifies the position to print the terminal ID information in the sent fax. Select <Inside Image Area> to print the
information inside the image area, or <Outside Image Area> to print the information outside the image area.
<Mark Number as>
Adds the "FAX" or "TEL" mark in front of the fax number registered for the machine ( Registering the Fax Number
and Unit Name). Select <TEL> to indicate that the notified number is a telephone number.
*1
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Check Dial Tone Before Sending> <On>
㻡㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Off
Confirm Sequential Broadcast
Reject Sequential Broadcast
Initialize Default Settings
Select this option to restore the default fax transmission settings.
Specify settings for receiving faxes.
ECM RX
Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce errors on sent faxes,
see ECM TX.
Off
On
ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error check is performed on both the sending
and receiving devices.
Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions.
It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error check and corrections are
performed while the data is transmitted.
Incoming Ring
Specify settings for sounding a ring to notify you of incoming faxes. This feature is only available when <Auto> or <Fax/Tel Auto
Switch> is selected for the receive mode. Specify how many times the incoming call rings when the machine receives a fax call. You
can also disable the settings to prevent the incoming call from ringing.
Off
On
1 to 2 to 99 (times)
If you use this feature in the <Auto> mode, you need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>
RX Function Settings
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <ECM RX> <On>
*1
㻡㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Remote RX
Specify settings for receiving a fax by operating a telephone that is connected to the machine (Remote Reception). When a fax is
sent to the machine, you can receive it just by picking up the handset of the telephone and entering a specific ID number by using
the telephone. This feature can save you the trouble of going all the way to the machine. For instructions on how to use Remote
Reception, see Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception).
Off
On
00 to 25 to 99
Switch to Auto RX
Specify settings for automatically receiving a fax after the machine has rung for a specified time period. This feature is only available
when <Manual> is selected for the receive mode. By using this feature, faxes can be received even when no one is available to pick
up the handset.
Off
On
1 to 15 to 99 (sec.)
Memory Lock Settings
Select whether to store received faxes without immediately printing them. Stored fax documents can be printed at any time by
changing the setting to <Off>. Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)
Off
On
Memory Lock PIN
Report Print
Off
On
Memory Lock Time
Off
On
Memory Lock Start Time
Memory Lock End Time
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Incoming Ring> <On> Specify how many times
the incoming call rings <Apply>
*1
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Remote RX> <On> Specify the ID number for
receiving a fax <Apply>
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Switch to Auto RX> <On> Specify how long the
incoming call rings <Apply>
RX Print Settings
㻡㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify settings for printing received faxes.
Print on Both Sides
Specify settings for printing received faxes on both sides of paper.
Off
On
Reduce RX Size
Specify settings for reducing the image size of a received document. You can select an automatic reduction ratio that reduces the
received document to size of the loaded paper. You can also select a ratio from a list.
Off
On
Ratio
Auto
97%
95%
90%
75%
Direction
Vertical/Horizontal
Vertical Only
RX Page Footer
Select whether to print information, including date and time of reception and page numbers, on the bottom of received faxes.
Off
On
*3
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings> <Print on Both Sides> <On>
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings> <Reduce RX Size> <On> Specify the settings
<Apply>
<Ratio>
<Auto> reduces the image by a ratio that is based on the size of the loaded paper. <97%>, <95%>, <90%>, or
<75%> reduce the image by the corresponding ratio.
<Direction>
Select <Vertical/Horizontal> to reduce the image both vertically and horizontally. Select <Vertical Only> to reduce
only vertically.
㻡㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is Low
The machine continues printing even if the amount remaining in a toner cartridge is low. If this function is set to <Off> and faxes are
received when the amount remaining in a toner cartridge is low, the machine holds them in memory instead of printing.
Off
On
When this function is enabled, faxes may fade or blur. Because received documents are not stored in memory, you need to
ask the sender to resend the document.
Specify settings for forwarding faxes.
Enable Forwarding Settings
Select whether to forward all the received fax documents to a specified destination. In addition to a fax number, you can also specify
an e-mail address or a shared folder in a computer, etc. as the forwarding destination. Forwarding All the Received Documents
Automatically
Off
On
Print Images
Select whether to print forwarded fax documents. You can set the machine to print forwarded documents only when an error occurs.
Printing Documents to be Forwarded
Off
On
Only When Error Occurs
Store Images in Memory
Select whether to store fax documents in memory when they are not successfully forwarded. You can resend or print the documents
later as necessary. Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded
Off
Only When Error Occurs
Select to display on-screen instructions for specifying settings, including the fax number and the telephone line type. Configuring
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings> <RX Page Footer> <On>
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings> <Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is Low>
<Off>
Forwarding Settings
*2
Fax Setup Guide *2
㻡㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AE
Scan Settings
All the settings about the scan are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
Asterisks ( )
Settings marked with " " are enabled only when an optional Send PDF Security Feature Set is registered.
Settings marked with " " is available at a time, depending on the PDF encryption setting. 256-bit AES Settings for
Encrypted PDF
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw.
USB Memory Settings
E-Mail Settings
I-Fax Settings
File Settings
Register Unit Name (E-Mail/I-Fax)
Output File Image Settings
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings
256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF
You can change and register the settings used when data is saved to a USB memory device.
Change Default Settings
Specify settings used for saving scanned documents to a USB memory device. The selected settings are used as the default settings
when scanning documents. Changing Default Settings
Scan Size
A4
A5
File Format
PDF
PDF (Compact)
PDF (Compact/OCR)
PDF (OCR)
Set PDF Details
PDF
Encryption Level: None , Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES ,Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
PDF (Compact)
Encryption Level: None , Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES , Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
PDF (Compact/OCR)
Encryption Level: None , Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES , Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
PDF (OCR)
Encryption Level: None ,Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES , Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
JPEG
TIFF
Density
Nine Levels
*
*1
*2
*3
USB Memory Settings
*1
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
㻡㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Original Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
2-Sided Original
Off
Book Type
Calendar Type
Sharpness
Seven Levels
Data Size
Small: Memory Priority
Standard
Large: Image Quality Priority
Initialize Default Settings
Select this option to restore the default settings for saving data to a USB memory device.
Specify settings used for scanning documents to send as e-mails.
Change Default Settings
Specify settings used for scanning documents to send as e-mails. The selected settings are used as the default settings when
scanning documents. Changing Default Settings
Scan Size
A4
A5
File Format
PDF
PDF (Compact)
PDF (Compact/OCR)
PDF (OCR)
Set PDF Details
PDF
Encryption Level: None , Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES ,Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
PDF (Compact)
Encryption Level: None , Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES , Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
PDF (Compact/OCR)
Encryption Level: None , Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES , Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
PDF (OCR)
Encryption Level: None ,Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES , Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
JPEG
TIFF
Density
Nine Levels
Original Orientation
*3
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <USB Memory Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>
E-Mail Settings
*1
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
㻡㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Portrait
Landscape
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
2-Sided Original
Off
Book Type
Calendar Type
Sharpness
Seven Levels
Data Size
Small: Memory Priority
Standard
Large: Image Quality Priority
Subject/Message
Subject
Attached Image
Message
Reply To
None
Specify from Address Book
Priority
Low
Standard
High
Initialize Default Settings
Select this option to restore the default e-mail transmission settings.
Specify the basic settings for using the machine as a I-Fax device.
TX Function Settings
You can change and register the settings used for sending I-Faxes.
Change Default Settings
Specify settings used for sending I-Fax. The selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning documents.
Changing Default Settings
Scan Size
A4
A5
Density
Nine Levels
Original Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
*3
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <E-Mail Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>
I-Fax Settings
㻡㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
2-Sided Original
Off
Book Type
Calendar Type
Sharpness
Seven Levels
Subject/Message
Subject
Attached Image
Message
Reply To
None
Specify from Address Book
TX Terminal ID
Information such as the date and time of transmission and the e-mail address of the machine (sender information) can be added
as a header in transmitted documents. This information tells the recipient when the I-Fax was sent and who sent it.
Off
On
Print Position
Inside Image Area
Outside Image Area
Initialize Default Settings
Select this option to restore the default I-Fax transmission settings.
RX Print Settings
Specify settings for printing received I-Faxes.
Print on Both Sides
Specify settings for printing received I-Faxes on both sides of paper.
Off
On
RX Print Size
Specify the paper size to be used for printing.
*3
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <I-Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <TX Terminal ID> <On>
<Print Position> Select <Inside Image Area> or <Outside Image Area> <Apply>
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <I-Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Initialize Default Settings>
<Yes>
*3
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <I-Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings> <Print on Both Sides> <On>
㻡㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
A4
LGL
LTR
OFICIO
Brazil-OFICIO
Mexico-OFICIO
Government-LTR
Government-LGL
FOOLSCAP
AUS-FOOLSCAP
India-LGL
You can change and register the settings used when documents are saved to a shared folder or FTP server.
Change Default Settings
You can change the default settings used when documents are saved to a shared folder or FTP server. The selected settings are used
as the default settings when scanning. Changing Default Settings
Scan Size
A4
A5
File Format
PDF
PDF (Compact)
PDF (Compact/OCR)
PDF (OCR)
Set PDF Details
PDF
Encryption Level: None , Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES ,Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
PDF (Compact)
Encryption Level: None , Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES , Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
PDF (Compact/OCR)
Encryption Level: None , Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES , Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
PDF (OCR)
Encryption Level: None ,Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES , Acrobat 10.0 or
Equivalent/256-bit AES
Digital Signatures: None , Top Left
JPEG
TIFF
Density
Nine Levels
Original Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
2-Sided Original
Off
Book Type
Calendar Type
Sharpness
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <I-Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings> <RX Print Size> Select the paper
size
File Settings
*1
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*3
㻡㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Seven Levels
Data Size
Small: Memory Priority
Standard
Large: Image Quality Priority
Initialize Default Settings
You can change and register the settings used when documents are saved to a shared folder or FTP server.
Register the sender name for e-mails and I-Faxes. The registered name is displayed in e-mails, along with the e-mail address. If the
sender name is not registered, only the e-mail address is displayed.
Specify settings for the gamma value and file compression ratio for converting scanned documents into files.
YCbCr TX Gamma Value
Select the gamma value used when converting scanned color documents into the specified file format. You can specify the same
gamma value as that of the monitor which is to be used for viewing the converted files. The files are displayed with brightness that
is true to the original documents. Setting Gamma Values
Gamma 1.0
Gamma 1.4
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.2
PDF (Compact) Image Quality Level
Adjust the balance between data size and image quality to suit the type of document you are scanning when converting scanned
documents into PDF (Compact) files. <Data Size Priority> makes the compression ratio higher than normal to create smaller files with
lower image quality. On the other hand, <Image Quality Priority> makes the compression ratio lower than normal to create larger
files with higher image quality. Selecting a File Format
Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or Photo Mode
Data Size Priority
Normal
Image Quality Priority
Image Level in Text Mode
Data Size Priority
Normal
Image Quality Priority
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <File Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>
Register Unit Name (E-Mail/I-Fax)
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <Register Unit Name (E-Mail/I-Fax)> Enter the sender name <Apply>
Output File Image Settings
㻡㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To run OCR (Optical Character Recognition) on a text document to create a "searchable PDF", specify whether the machine determines
the document's text direction and detects the document direction.
Smart Scan
Off
On
Specify the encryption level when encrypting PDFs with 256-bit AES. The encryption level specified here is then selectable as a level for
specifying encryption as a PDF Details.
Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent
Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <OCR (Text Searchable) Settings> <Smart Scan> Select <Off> or <On>
256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF *1
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF> Select <Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent>
or <Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent>
㻡㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AF
Memory Media Print Settings
All the settings are about the memory media print listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked
with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks ( )
Settings marked with " " are only available when the optional paper drawer (drawer 2) is attached.
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw.
Change Default Settings
Default Display Settings
File Sort Default Settings
File Name Display Format
Initialize Default Settings
Specify the USB Print settings. The selected settings are used as the default settings of the USB Print function. Changing Default
USB Print Settings
Number of Copies
1 to 99
Paper
Multi-Purpose Tray
Drawer 1
Drawer 2
N on 1
Off
2 on 1
4 on 1
2-Sided
Off
Book Type
Calendar Type
Set JPEG/TIFF Details
Print Date
Off
On
Print File Name
Off
On
Original Type
Photo Priority
Text Priority
Brightness
Five Levels
Halftones
Gradation
Error Diffusion
Set PDF Details
Brightness
Seven Levels
Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size
Off
On
Enlarge Print Area
Off
On
Print Comments
*
*1
*2
Change Default Settings
*1
*2
*2
㻡㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Off
Auto
Password to Open Document
Other
Halftones
Error Diffusion: Off /On
Pure Black Text
Off
On
Black Overprint
Off
On
RGB Source Profile
sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
None
CMYK Simulation Profile
JapanColor(Canon)
U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)
Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)
None
Use Grayscale Profile
Off
On
Output Profile
Normal
Photo
TR Normal
TR Photo
Matching Method
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
RGB Pure Black Process
Off
On
CMYK Pure Black Process
Off
On
Composite Overprint
Off
On
Advanced Smoothing
Advanced Smoothing: Off/Smooth 1 /Smooth 2
Apply to Graphics: Off /On
Apply to Text: Off/On
Grayscale Conversion
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
Print Quality
Density
Density: 17 levels
Fine Adjust
High: 17 levels
Medium: 17 levels
Low: 17 levels
Toner Save
Off
On
Special Smoothing Mode
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Line Control
Resolution Priority
Gradation Priority
Select whether to display a list of file names or thumbnails for previewing when accessing files in a USB memory device.
Details
Images
Default Display Settings
㻡㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select whether to display files in a USB memory device in ascending or descending order of file name or date.
Name (Ascending)
Name (Descending)
Date/Time (Ascending)
Date/Time (Descending)
Select whether to display short or long text for file names that are stored in a USB memory device.
Short File Name
Long File Name
<Menu> <Memory Media Print Settings> <Default Display Settings> Select <Details> or <Images>
<Details>
Displays file names and dates in list form.
<Images>
Displays thumbnails for previewing.
File Sort Default Settings
<Menu> <Memory Media Print Settings> <File Sort Default Settings> Select the order of files that are
displayed
File Name Display Format
<Menu> <Memory Media Print Settings> <File Name Display Format> Select <Short File Name> or
<Long File Name>
<Short File Name>
Shortens a file name to as few as eight characters. To distinguish files that have similar names, numbers such as " 1"
or " 2" are added at the end of the file names.
<Long File Name>
~
~
㻡㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select to return the Memory Media Print Settings to the factory defaults.
Displays a file name up to 20 characters.
The number of characters described above does not include the characters in file extensions, such as ".jpg".
Initialize Default Settings
<Menu> <Memory Media Print Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>
㻡㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AH
Printer Settings
All the settings about the printer are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
().
Asterisks ( )
Settings marked with " " are only available when the optional paper drawer (drawer 2) is attached.
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw.
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx.
Priority of settings
Settings that are specified in an application or on the printer driver will override those specified on the machine. The settings
described in this section are especially useful if you are printing on an operating system such as UNIX on which the printer
drivers for the machine are not available.
Availability of settings
All the printer settings described in this section, except for <Paper Size Override> ( Paper Size Override), are only
available for PCL printing. Specifying these settings is unnecessary, for example, when you print using the UFRII LT printer
driver.
Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing
Copies
2-Sided Printing
Default Paper
Paper Size Override
Print Quality
Layout
Auto Error Skip
Timeout
Personality
Color Mode
Gradation Settings
Compressed Image Output
PCL
PS
If set to <On>, settings in the printer driver for paper size and type take priority over the machine's settings when printing. Settings can
be configured individually for the paper drawer and manual feed slot. An error message can be set to display if the loaded paper size or
type are different from that set in the printer driver.
Multi-Purpose Tray
Off
On
Force Output
Display Error
Drawer 1
Off
On
Force Output
Display Error
Drawer 2
Off
On
Force Output
Display Error
*
*1
*2
*3
Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing
*1
㻡㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Set the number of copies to print.
1 to 99 (Copies)
Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.
Off
On
Select the default setting for the size and type of the paper to print on.
<Default Paper Size> and <Default Paper Type> cannot be specified separately. Specify the paper size in the <Default
Paper Size> screen, and then specify the paper type in the <Default Paper Type> screen.
Default Paper Size
Select the default setting for the size of the paper to print on.
A4
A5
B5
LTR
LGL
STMT
EXEC
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing> Select the paper source from
which paper is preferentially loaded <On> Select <Force Output> or <Display Error>
Copies *2
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Copies> Set the number of copies to print <Apply>
2-Sided Printing *2
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <2-Sided Printing> Select <Off> or <On>
Default Paper *2
㻡㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
No. 10 (COM10)
Monarch
DL
ISO-C5
Default Paper Type
Select the default setting for the type of the paper to print on.
Plain 1 (60-74 g/m²)
Plain 2 (70-84 g/m²)
Plain 3 (75-90 g/m²)
Recycled
Color
Heavy 1 (86-119 g/m²)
Heavy 2 (120-128 g/m²)
Heavy 3 (129-163 g/m²)
Coated 1 (100-110 g/m²)
Coated 2 (120-130 g/m²)
Coated 3 (155-165 g/m²)
Coated 4 (210-220 g/m²)
Transparency
Labels
Envelope
If you select an envelope (<No. 10 (COM10)>, <Monarch>, <DL>, or <ISO-C5>) as the paper size in <Default Paper
Size>, only <Envelope> is available as a paper type.
Select whether to switch between printing on A4 and LTR size paper if one of these paper sizes is loaded but the other is not.
Configuring Printer Settings on the Machine
Off
On
Specify the print quality such as toner density and image data processing methods.
Density
Specify the print density for each toner color. As the value gets bigger, the density becomes darker.
Yellow
17 Levels
Magenta
17 Levels
Cyan
17 Levels
Black
17 Levels
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Default Paper> Select the paper size Select the paper type
Paper Size Override
Print Quality *2
㻡㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The settings specified for <Density> are disabled when <Toner Save> is enabled.
Density (Fine Adjust)
Adjust the toner density for each toner color. You can adjust the density separately for darker areas (<High>), medium areas
(<Medium>), and lighter areas (<Low>).
Yellow
High
17 Levels
Medium
17 Levels
Low
17 Levels
Magenta
High
17 Levels
Medium
17 Levels
Low
17 Levels
Cyan
High
17 Levels
Medium
17 Levels
Low
17 Levels
Black
High
17 Levels
Medium
17 Levels
Low
17 Levels
Toner Save
Select whether to reduce toner consumption.
Off
On
When this setting is enabled, fine lines and portions with lighter print density may become blurred.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Density> Select the toner color Specify the toner
density <Apply> <Apply>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Density> <Density (Fine Adjust)> Select the toner color
Select <High>, <Medium>, or <Low> Specify the toner density Tap <Apply> repeatedly until <Settings
applied.> is displayed.
㻡㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Gradation
Select the data processing method to reproduce gradations. Select <High 2> if you want to print in better quality than when selecting
<High 1>.
High 1
High 2
Special Smoothing Mode
Select a smoothing mode to print documents with a smooth finish. If you are not satisfied with the printing results of <Mode 1>
(default), you can try printing again by using another.
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner Save> Select <Off> or <On>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Gradation Select <High 1> or <High 2>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Special Smoothing Mode> Select the smoothing mode
<Mode 1>
Prints the edges of dark colored text, lines, and graphics smoothly. This setting is recommended for most types of
printing.
<Mode 2>
Prints both edges and interior halftones of graphics smoothly.
<Mode 3>
Prints dark colored text and lines on halftone backgrounds smoothly.
<Mode 4>
Prints the edges of objects (text, lines, graphics and photographic images) smoothly.
<Mode 5>
Prints images and halftones evenly.
㻡㻠㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Line Control
Select the data processing method to reproduce lines.
Resolution Priority
Gradation Priority
Specify the page layout settings such as binding position and margin values.
Binding Location
Select the binding position of the paper (along the long edge or the short edge). For 2-sided printing, image orientation is
automatically arranged to produce the correct layout. in the illustrations below represent margins.
When the binding position is on the long edge of the paper:
When the binding position is on the short edge of the paper:
Long Edge
Short Edge
<Mode 6>
Prints entire objects smoothly.
When <Error Diffusion> is enabled for <Halftones> ( Halftones), <Mode 1>, <Mode 2>, <Mode 3>, and
<Mode 4> apply the same effect on printouts as <Mode 6> does.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Line Control> Select <Resolution Priority> or <Gradation
Priority>
<Resolution Priority>
Image processing is performed that upholds the same resolution as text for lines.
<Gradation Priority>
Image processing is performed that upholds the same color and gradation as graphics for lines.
Layout *2
㻡㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
You cannot create a binding margin with this setting alone. Use this setting in combination with the <Gutter> setting to set
the binding margin for the selected binding position.
Gutter
Specify the binding margin to apply to the binding position selected in the <Binding Location> setting.
-50.0 to ±0 to +50.0 (mm)
If this setting moves any of the print data outside the printable area, the portion outside the printable area will not be
printed.
Offset Short Edge (Front)
Specify the print position by setting the offset value for the short edge on the front side of the paper. Increasing the value moves
the print position to the right. Decreasing the value moves the print position to the left.
-50.0 to ±0 to +50.0 (mm)
If this setting moves any of the print data outside the printable area, the portion outside the printable area will not be
printed.
You can specify this setting in combination with the <Offset Long Edge (Front)>, <Offset Short Edge (Back)>, and <Offset
Long Edge (Back)>. By specifying all four settings, for example, the print position is shifted as shown in the illustration
below.
If the offset settings are specified in combination with the <Gutter> setting, the specified values are added together.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Binding Location> Select <Long Edge> or <Short Edge>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Gutter> Specify the binding margin <Apply>
㻡㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Offset Long Edge (Front)
Specify the print position by setting the offset value for the long edge on the front side of the paper. Increasing the value moves the
print position downward. Decreasing the value moves the print position upward.
-50.0 to ±0 to +50.0 (mm)
If this setting moves any of the print data outside the printable area, the portion outside the printable area will not be
printed.
Offset Short Edge (Back)
Specify the print position by setting the offset value for the short edge on the back side of the paper. Increasing the value moves
the print position to the right. Decreasing the value moves the print position to the left.
-50.0 to ±0 to +50.0 (mm)
If this setting moves any of the print data outside the printable area, the portion outside the printable area will not be
printed.
Offset Long Edge (Back)
Specify the print position by setting the offset value for the long edge on the back side of the paper. Increasing the value moves the
print position downward. Decreasing the value moves the print position upward.
-50.0 to ±0 to +50.0 (mm)
If this setting moves any of the print data outside the printable area, the portion outside the printable area will not be
printed.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Offset Short Edge (Front)> Specify the offset value <Apply>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Offset Long Edge (Front)> Specify the offset value <Apply>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Offset Short Edge (Back)> Specify the offset value <Apply>
㻡㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select whether to automatically perform error skip to bypass errors and continue printing when an error occurs with the print data. If
<Off> is selected, you can perform error skip by using the operation panel.
Off
On
Error skip bypasses errors in print data, so the document may not be printed correctly.
You can manually perform error skip.
<Copy/Print Job> <Job Status> Select the document containing errors <Skip Error>
Set the time period after which the machine deletes incomplete print data from memory. The machine deletes incomplete print data
because it may have some errors and prevent the machine from printing the next document.
5 to 15 to 300 (sec.)
Provide the machine with enough time to receive all the print data from the computer, especially when printing large
amounts of data. If you specify a time period that is too short, the machine may not receive all the print data in time for
printing.
This setting enables the machine to process data received from the host computer in the specified data format. Setting the Personality
mode to <Auto> makes the machine determine the type of data received from the host on a job-by-job basis. If you are printing from
applications on a computer, we recommend that you use <Auto>.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Offset Long Edge (Back)> Specify the offset value <Apply>
Auto Error Skip *2
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Auto Error Skip> Select <Off> or <On>
Timeout *2
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Timeout> Set the time period <Apply>
Personality *2
㻡㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Auto
PS
PCL
Select whether to print in color or in black and white. If <Auto (Color/B&W)> is selected, the machine automatically switches the color
mode, printing color pages in color, and black and white pages in black and white.
Auto (Color/B&W)
Color
Black and White
Specify this setting to improve the smoothness of the gradations of graphics and photographic images. Select <Smooth 1> to improve
the smoothness moderately. Select <Smooth 2> to apply a stronger smoothing effect than <Smooth 1>. You can specify this setting
separately for graphics and images.
Gradation
Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
Apply to Graphics
Off
On
Apply to Images
Off
On
Specify how print data should be treated when it is too large to be held in the memory of the machine. The machine can either print the
data in lower image quality (<Output>) or cancel printing and display an error message (<Display Error>).
Output
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Personality> Select the Personality mode
Color Mode *2
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Color Mode> Select the color mode
Gradation Settings *2
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Gradation Settings> Specify the gradation settings
Compressed Image Output *2
㻡㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Display Error
Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
Paper Save
Select whether to save paper by not outputting blank pages in documents. By selecting <On>, the machine will not output blank
pages. To output all your document data when printing, including any blank pages that you have inserted in your document, tap
<Off>.
Off
On
Orientation
Select <Portrait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.
Portrait
Landscape
Font Number
Specify the font to use by selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font samples from the
operation panel. PCL Font List (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
MF729Cx
0 to 104
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
0 to 54
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Compressed Image Output> Select <Output> or <Display Error>
PCL *2
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Paper Save> Select <Off> or <On>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Orientation> Select <Portrait> or <Landscape>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Font Number> Select the font number <Apply>
㻡㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Point Size
Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 increments. You can specify this setting only when a proportionally-spaced scalable font
is selected in <Font Number>.
4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 (point)
Pitch
Set the font pitch, or cpi (characters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only when a fixed-pitch
scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in <Font Number>.
0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 (cpi)
Form Lines
Set the number of lines printed on one page from 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according to the settings specified
in <Default Paper Size> and <Orientation>.
5 to 64 to 128 (lines)
Character Code
Select the character code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specified setting is ignored when the
character code is controlled by the font specified in <Font Number>.
MF729Cx
ARABIC8
DESKTOP
GREEK8
HEBREW7
HEBREW8
ISO4
ISO6
ISO11
ISO15
ISO17
ISO21
ISO60
PC8
PC850
PC851
PC852
PC862
PC864
PC866
PC8DN
PC8GRK
PC8TK
PC1004
PIFONT
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Point Size> Specify the point size <Apply>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Pitch> Specify the pitch value <Apply>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Form Lines> Specify the number of lines <Apply>
㻡㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
ISO69
ISOCYR
ISOGRK
ISOHEB
ISOL1
ISOL2
ISOL5
ISOL6
LEGAL
MATH8
MCTEXT
MSPUBL
PC775
PSMATH
PSTEXT
ROMAN8
VNINTL
VNMATH
VNUS
WIN30
WINARB
WINBALT
WINCYR
WINGRK
WINL1
WINL2
WINL5
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
DESKTOP
ISO11
ISO15
ISO17
ISO21
ISO4
ISO6
ISO60
ISO69
ISOL1
ISOL2
ISOL5
ISOL6
LEGAL
MATH8
MCTEXT
MSPUBL
PC1004
PC775
PC8
PC850
PC852
PC8DN
PC8TK
PIFONT
PSMATH
PSTEXT
ROMAN8
VNINTL
VNMATH
VNUS
WIN30
WINBALT
WINL1
WINL2
WINL5
Custom Paper
Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension> and <Y dimension>.
Off
On
Unit of Measure
Select the unit of measurement to use to set a custom paper size.
Millimeters
Inches
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Character Code> Select the character code
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Custom Paper> Select <Off> or <On>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Unit of Measure> Select <Millimeters> or <Inches>
㻡㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
X dimension
Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.
77 to 215 (mm)
Y dimension
Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.
127 to 355 (mm)
Append CR to LF
Select whether to append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If <Yes> is selected, the print
position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If <No> is selected, the print position moves
to the next line, just under the received LF code.
Yes
No
Enlarge A4 Print Width
Select whether to expand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of LTR size.
Off
On
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <X dimension> Specify the dimension <Apply>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Y dimension> Specify the dimension <Apply>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Append CR to LF> Select <Yes> or <No>
㻡㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Halftones
Specify the data processing method to reproduce halftones. You can select whether to use <Error Diffusion>, and you can also select
<Resolution> or <Gradation> separately for text, graphics, and images.
Error Diffusion
Off
On
Resolution/Gradation
Text
Resolution
Gradation
Graphics
Resolution
Gradation
Image
Resolution
Gradation
RGB Source Profile
Select the source profile for color matching to print RGB data, according to the monitor you are using. If you are using an sRGB-
compatible computer display, and select <sRGB>, the tone of printouts will be close to how they appear on your computer display.
Select <Gamma 1.5>, <Gamma 1.8>, or <Gamma 2.4> to adjust the gamma value as necessary. As the value gets bigger, the
printout becomes darker. You can specify the setting separately for text, graphics, and images.
Text
sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
Graphics
sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
Image
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Enlarge A4 Print Width> Select <Off> or <On>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Halftones> Specify the halftones settings
<Error Diffusion>
Prints small text and fine lines with a clear finish. If this setting is set to <On>, <Resolution> and <Gradation>
settings that are specified for <Text>, <Graphics>, and <Image> are disabled.
<Resolution>/<Gradation>
<Resolution>
Prints text and thin lines with clear edges.
<Gradation>
Prints gradations such as those in graphics or photographic images with a smooth finish.
㻡㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
This setting is enabled only when <CMS> is selected in <CMS (Matching)/Gamma>.
Output Profile
Select the output profile for color matching. It is recommended that you use the default <Normal> setting for printing text or graphic
data, and the <Photo> setting for printing photographic images.
Text
Normal
Photo
Graphics
Normal
Photo
Image
Normal
Photo
This setting is enabled only when <CMS> is selected in <CMS (Matching)/Gamma>.
Matching Method
Select the color matching method to match the color of the printouts to that displayed on the computer display. You can specify the
setting separately for text, graphics, and images.
Text
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
Graphics
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
Image
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <RGB Source Profile> Select <Text>, <Graphics>, or <Image>
Select the source profile
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Output Profile> Select <Text>, <Graphics>, or <Image> Select
<Normal> or <Photo>
㻡㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
This setting is enabled only when <CMS> is selected in <CMS (Matching)/Gamma>.
Gray Compensation
Select whether to print gray (black and white) data using only the black toner. You can specify the setting separately for text,
graphics, and images.
Text
Off
On
Graphics
Off
On
Image
Off
On
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Matching Method> Select <Text>, <Graphics>, or <Image>
Select the matching method
<Perceptual>
Performs color matching suitable for printing photographic images when <Photo> for the <Output Profile> setting has
also been selected.
<Saturation>
Performs color matching for printing vivid graphics such as illustrations and diagrams.
<Colorimetric>
Performs color matching to minimize the differences in color between originals such as color samples or logos and
printouts.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Gray Compensation> Select <Text>, <Graphics>, or <Image>
Select <Off> or <On>
㻡㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
CMS (Matching) Selection
You can set the machine or a computer (printer driver) to perform color matching. If <Printer> is selected, the machine performs
color matching, and if <Host> is selected, the computer or printer driver performs it.
Printer
Host
CMS (Matching)/Gamma
Select the processing method for print data. You can select to perform color matching or to perform gamma correction. You can
specify the setting separately for text, graphics, and images.
Text
Gamma
CMS
Graphics
Gamma
CMS
Image
Gamma
CMS
Gamma Correction
Set the gamma correction value to match the brightness of the printouts to that of the original data. If the printout looks darker or
brighter than original, change the gamma correction value. As the value gets bigger, the printout becomes darker. You can apply the
setting separately for text, graphics, and images.
Text
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.2
Graphics
<Off>
Prints gray (black and white) data by using the yellow, magenta, cyan, and black toner. Gradation reproducibility of
dark areas improves in comparison to <On>.
<On>
Prints gray (black and white) data by using only the black toner and reduces toner bleeding.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <CMS (Matching) Selection> Select <Printer> or <Host>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <CMS (Matching)/Gamma> Select <Text>, <Graphics>, or
<Image> Select <Gamma> or <CMS>
㻡㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.2
Image
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.2
This setting is enabled only when <Gamma> is selected in <CMS (Matching)/Gamma>.
Advanced Smoothing
Select how jagged outlines of text and graphics are smoothed. <Smooth 2> applies a stronger smoothing effect than <Smooth 1>.
You can apply the setting separately for text and graphics.
Advanced Smoothing
Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
Apply to Graphics
Off
On
Apply to Text
Off
On
BarDIMM
This setting enables you to print bar codes supported by the Barcode Printing Kit. If <Enable> is selected, the machine will generate
bar codes when it receives bar code commands from the host computer. If <Disable> is selected, bar codes will not be generated,
even if bar code commands are sent from the host computer.
Enable
Disable
To enable the BarDIMM menu, it is necessary to activate the Barcode Printing Kit. When you are not printing bar codes,
make sure to disable the BarDIMM menu. Otherwise, the processing speed of regular print jobs may be reduced.
The default setting is <Disable>. If you activate the Barcode Printing Kit, it changes to <Enable>.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Gamma Correction> Select <Text>, <Graphics>, or <Image>
Set the gamma value
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Advanced Smoothing> Specify the smoothing setting
*3
㻡㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
FreeScape
Specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to be used for bar code commands when the host computer does not support the standard
Escape Code.
Off
~
"
#
$
/
\
?
{
}
|
This setting is available only when <BarDIMM> is enabled.
Specify the PS printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
Job Timeout
This setting enables you to specify the amount of time before a job times out. If a job has not finished within the set time limit, the
job automatically cancels.
0 to 3600 (sec.)
Print PS Errors
This setting determines whether an error page is printed when an error is encountered.
Off
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <BarDIMM> Select <Enable> or <Disable>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <FreeScape> Select an escape code
PS *2
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Job Timeout> Specify the seconds for job timeout <Apply>
㻡㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
On
Pure Black Text
If the text object is black (R=G=B=0%, C=M=Y=100% or Bk=N%, C=M=Y=0% or Bk=100%), this setting specifies whether the text
is printed using black only.
Off
On
Depending on the data to be printed, <Toner Save> may not be applied even if <On> is selected.
If <On> is selected for <Toner Save>, very light or finely detailed images may not be printed clearly.
Black Overprint
Where a black text object is printed on a color background or overlaps graphics, this setting specifies that black text is overprinted
onto the background. This enables you to prevent the problem of white knockout in the background behind printed black text objects.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Print PS Errors> Select <Off> or <On>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Pure Black Text> Select <Off> or <On>
<Off>
The black text is printed using CMYK toners based on the selected Output Profile setting. For some jobs, it is
preferable to turn this option <Off>.
<On>
Black colors generated by applications are printed using only 100% black toner. This means that the color toner will
not be misaligned since only one toner color (black) is used.
㻡㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Off
On
This setting is only applied, and has an effect on, pure black if <Pure Black Text> is set to <On>.
RGB Source Profile
Select the source profile for color matching to print RGB data, according to the monitor you are using.
sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
None
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Black Overprint> Select <Off> or <On>
<Off>
The background color behind the black text is knocked out (left blank) and the black text is then printed into the
knocked out area.
<On>
When this setting is used together with <Pure Black Text>, the color background is printed first, after which black text
is printed in 100% Bk on top of the background.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <RGB Source Profile> Select the source profile
<sRGB>
This setting specifies the industry standard definition for generic Windows computer monitors. If you are using an
sRGB compatible monitor, you can print out colors close to how they appear on your monitor.
㻡㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
CMYK Simulation Profile
This setting allows you to specify the simulation target to print the CMYK (Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK) data.
The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent CMYK color model based on the simulation target selected in the CMYK
Simulation Profile.
JapanColor(Canon)
U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)
Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)
None
You may not be able to use all the profiles that are available. If color data is printed in gray using a downloaded profile,
check the downloaded profile for compatibility.
If the machine receives data with a device independent (CIE based) color space definition, it is color processed with the
specified settings. Therefore <CMYK Simulation Profile> is not applied by the machine.
When a setting other than <None> is selected, and the machine receives a device dependent color space definition that is
color processed by the host computer, <CMYK Simulation Profile> is also applied by the machine.
When <None> is selected, areas of dark color may be blotchy depending on the data.
Use Grayscale Profile
This setting allows you to define how device dependent gray data is processed.
<Gamma 1.5>, <Gamma 1.8>, and <Gamma 2.4>
These settings enable you to select the gamma correct level of the RGB data.
<None>
When this setting is selected, device dependent RGB data is converted into CMYK without applying the RGB profile.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <CMYK Simulation Profile> Select the CMYK simulation profile
<JapanColor(Canon)>
This setting uses the JapanColor profile. This is for obtaining a printout closely matching the printing standard in
Japan.
<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
This setting uses the U.S. Web Coated profile. This is for obtaining a printout closely matching the printing standard in
the USA.
<Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
This setting uses the Euro Standard profile. This is for obtaining a printout closely matching the printing standard in
Europe.
<None>
When this setting is selected, device dependent CMYK data is printed as is without applying the CMYK profile.
㻡㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Off
On
Output Profile
This setting allows you to define the profile that is appropriate for the data you are going to print. It is applied to all data in the print
job, so make sure the selected profile is right for your job.
Normal
Photo
TR Normal
TR Photo
If <None> is selected for <RGB Source Profile> or <CMYK Simulation Profile> and the machine receives a device
dependent color space definition that is color processed by the host computer, this setting is not applied.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Use Grayscale Profile> Select <Off> or <On>
<Off>
Device dependent gray data is reproduced using black (K) toner only.
<On>
Device dependent gray data is converted into CMYK data using the "Grayscale Profile" of the machine. The data may
be reproduced using only the black (K) toner, depending upon the <Pure Black Text> process or <Output Profile>.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Output Profile> Select the output profile
<Normal>
This setting prints the colors closely matching the ones displayed on your monitor.
<Photo>
This setting prints colors close to photographic prints.
<TR Normal>
This setting prints the colors closely matching the ones displayed on your monitor, and also reduces toner bleeding of
text and fine lines.
<TR Photo>
This setting prints colors close to photographic prints, and also reduces toner bleeding of text and fine lines.
㻡㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Matching Method
This setting allows you to specify a method of printing when the <RGB Source Profile> is applied. This machine includes a color
management system that provides the following color rendering styles.
Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
If <None> is selected for the <RGB Source Profile> or <CMYK Simulation Profile>, and the machine receives a device
dependent color space definition that is color processed by the host computer, a Matching Method setting is not applied.
RGB Pure Black Process
This setting enables you to specify how black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B should be processed when device
dependent RGB data is converted into device dependent CMYK data using the <RGB Source Profile> of the machine.
Off
On
If you can see gradations or jagged lines in the printouts of black or gray data, select <Off> in RGB Pure Black Process
and select <Photo> for <Output Profile>.
In combination with certain settings, black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B may be printed using the
black (K) toner only, even if <Off> is selected. The following are examples.
When <On> is selected for <Pure Black Text>
When <None> is selected for <RGB Source Profile>
When <TR Normal> or <TR Photo> is selected for <Output Profile>
When [Use 100% GCR Profile] in the printer driver is selected
If <None> is selected for <RGB Source Profile>, the RGB Pure Black Process setting is not applied.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Matching Method> Select the matching method
<Perceptual>
This setting produces the best results for photographic or bitmapped images.
<Saturation>
This setting is best suited for printing illustrations and diagrams used in business presentations.
<Colorimetric>
This setting provides a close match to the RGB color value of the machine's printing range.
㻡㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
CMYK Pure Black Process
This setting enables you to specify how monochrome data (C=M=Y=0) should be printed when the device dependent CMYK data is
processed using the <CMYK Simulation Profile> of the machine.
Off
On
In combination with certain settings, monochrome data (C=M=Y=0) may be printed using the black (K) toner only, even if
<Off> is selected. The following are examples:
When <On> is selected for <Pure Black Text>
When <None> is selected for <CMYK Simulation Profile>
When <TR Normal> or <TR Photo> is selected for <Output Profile>
When [Use 100% GCR Profile] in the printer driver is selected
If <None> is selected for <CMYK Simulation Profile>, the CMYK Pure Black Process setting is not applied.
Halftones
Specify the data processing method to reproduce halftones. You can select whether to use <Error Diffusion>, and you can also select
<Resolution> or <Gradation> separately for text, graphics, and images.
Error Diffusion
Off
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <RGB Pure Black Process> Select <Off> or <On>
<Off>
Black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B is printed using CMYK toners based on the selected
<Output Profile> setting.
<On>
Black and gray data with the equivalent ratio of R to G to B is printed using the black (K) toner only, regardless of the
selected <Output Profile> setting.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <CMYK Pure Black Process> Select <Off> or <On>
<Off>
Monochrome data (C=M=Y=0) is printed using CMYK toners based on the selected <Output Profile> setting.
<On>
Monochrome data (C=M=Y=0) is printed using the black (K) toner only, regardless of the selected <Output Profile>
setting.
㻡㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
On
Resolution/Gradation
Text
Resolution
Gradation
Graphics
Resolution
Gradation
Image
Resolution
Gradation
Brightness
This setting adjusts the brightness of the overall image. The settings can be set between 85% and 115% in increments of 5%.
Selecting 85% makes the image brighter, and selecting 115% makes it darker.
85 to 100 to 115 (%)
This function is only available if <Toner Save> is set to <Off>.
Composite Overprint
You can overprint device-dependent CMYK data as composite output.
All colors used for data are overlaid and printed on one plate so you can check the finished result without separating the colors.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Halftones> Specify the halftones settings
<Error Diffusion>
Prints small text and fine lines with a clear finish. If this setting is set to <On>, <Resolution> and <Gradation>
settings that are specified for <Text>, <Graphics>, and <Image> are disabled.
<Resolution>/<Gradation>
<Resolution>
Prints text and thin lines with clear edges.
<Gradation>
Prints gradations such as those in graphics or photographic images with a smooth finish.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Brightness> Specify the brightness <Apply>
㻡㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Off
On
This setting is only available for data having the overprint attribute set.
This setting does not apply overprinting to spot colors.
If a setting other than <None> is selected for <CMYK Simulation Profile>, overprinting is not applied. (See CMYK
Simulation Profile)
Advanced Smoothing
Select how jagged outlines of text and graphics are smoothed. You can apply the setting separately for text and graphics.
Advanced Smoothing
Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
Apply to Graphics
Off
On
Apply to Text
Off
On
This setting allows you to apply smoothing to graphics data and text data. Smoothing is not applied to image data.
<Apply to Graphics> and <Apply to Text> can only be selected when <Smooth 1> or <Smooth 2> is selected for
Advanced Smoothing.
Settings for <Apply to Graphics> and <Apply to Text> on the display will be effective only if [Printer Default] is set for
Advanced Smoothing in the printer driver.
The results of Advanced Smoothing may differ depending on the characters and graphics patterns.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Composite Overprint> Select <Off> or <On>
㻡㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Grayscale Conversion
You can select ways to convert color values to a grayscale value when you print color print data.
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
This setting is invalid for black-and-white data.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Advanced Smoothing> Specify the smoothing setting
<Smooth 2> performs a higher level of smoothing than <Smooth 1>. If <Smooth 1> is selected and the results are
still not printed smoothly, select <Smooth 2>.
By switching the on/off for <Apply to Graphics> and <Apply to Text>, you can select whether to apply smoothing to
graphics or text data.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Grayscale Conversion> Specify the grayscale conversion
<sRGB>
Lets you to calculate the grayscale value by the color conversion method based on sRGB.
<NTSC>
Lets you to calculate the grayscale value by the color conversion method based on NTSC.
<Uniform RGB>
Counts the average value of the Red, Green, and Blue values as the grayscale value.
㻡㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AJ
Adjustment/Maintenance
All the settings about adjustment and maintenance are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are
marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks ( )
Settings marked with an asterisk ( ) are only available when the optional paper drawer (drawer 2) is attached.
Auto Adjust Gradation
Auto Correction Settings
Correct Print Color Mismatch
Display Timing for Cartridge Preparation Notification
Black Text Processing for Color
Special Processing
Clean Fixing Assembly
Clean ITB
Clean Feeder
Adjust the gradation, density, and color in copies or printouts. Correcting the Gradation
Full Adjust
Quick Adjust
Adjust Copy Image
Select whether to automatically perform a quick gradation adjustment or color shift correction after the machine is turned ON.
Auto Adjust Image Regularly
Select when to make an automatic quick gradation adjustment. If <On> is selected, quick adjustment is automatically made after the
machine is turned ON. If <Off> is selected, a quick adjustment is made when the first printing is completed after the machine is
turned ON. You can also perform this adjustment manually ( Quick Adjust).
Off
On
Correct Print Color Mismatch When Main Power is ON
Select whether to automatically perform the Correct Print Color Mismatch function after the machine is turned ON. You can also
*
*
Auto Adjust Gradation
Auto Correction Settings
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Auto Correction Settings> <Auto Adjust Image Regularly> Select
<Off> or <On>
㻡㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
perform this adjustment manually ( Correcting "Print Color Mismatch").
Off
On
Use this function if color shift has blurred the image. Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"
Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.
Auto
Custom
1 to 20 to 99 (%)
Adjust the threshold value to determine whether to print black text in color documents by using only black toner or by using a mixture of
black and color toners. You can set values for the feeder and the platen glass separately. Adjusting Values for Text Color
Reproducibility in Color Documents
Feeder
Seven Levels
Platen Glass
Seven Levels
If the print results on special types of paper are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the printouts.
Special Paper Processing
When printing on the back side of printed paper, rough paper, or envelopes, the print results may be improved by adjusting the
following settings.
Manual Back Side Settings (for 2-Sided Only)
If printouts on the back side of printed paper are too light, select <On>. You can specify this setting separately for each paper
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Auto Correction Settings> <Correct Print Color Mismatch When
Main Power is ON> Select <Off> or <On>
Correct Print Color Mismatch
Display Timing for Cartridge Preparation Notification
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Display Timing for Cartridge Preparation Notification> <Custom>
Enter toner level <Apply>
Black Text Processing for Color
Special Processing
㻡㻣㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
source.
Multi-Purpose Tray
Off
On
Drawer 1
Off
On
Drawer 2
Off
On
Rough Paper Settings
When printing on rough paper, especially when color images are printed too light, select <On>. You can specify the settings
separately for each paper source.
Multi-Purpose Tray
Off
On
Drawer 1
Off
On
Drawer 2
Off
On
Envelope Cling Prevention
If envelope flaps cling to the envelope bodies when printing, select <On>.
Off
On
*
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Manual Back
Side Settings (for 2-Sided Only)> Select the paper source <On>
*
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Rough Paper
Settings> Select the paper source <On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Envelope Cling
Prevention> <On>
㻡㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Envelope Switch
Adjust this setting if envelope printouts are light, or envelopes do not feed smoothly.
Envelope 1
Envelope 2
Special Mode P
If the printed paper curls, select <On>.
Off
On
Clean the fixing unit after a toner cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on printouts. Fixing Unit
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Paper Processing> <Envelope
Switch> Select <Envelope 1> or <Envelope 2>
<Envelope 1>
Prints on envelopes with normal fixing power.
<Envelope 2>
Prints on envelopes with fixing power stronger than <Envelope 1>.
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Mode P> <On>
Clean Fixing Assembly
㻡㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AK
System Management Settings
All the settings about System Management Settings are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are
marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks ( )
Settings marked with " " cannot be imported or exported.
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx.
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw.
Settings marked with " " are only available for the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw.
Network Settings
Enable NFC
System Manager Information Settings
Device Information Settings
Department ID Management On/Off
Security Settings
Select Country/Region
Remote UI Settings
Auto Online for Remote Scan
Restrict TX Function
Display Job Log
Use as USB Device
Store to USB Memory
Memory Media Print On/Off
Enable Product Extended Survey Program
Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)
Enable Canon Mobile Scanning
Google Cloud Print Settings
Notify to Check Paper Settings
Import/Export of Settings
Secure Print Settings
Select OS for USB Connected PC
PDL Selection (Plug and Play)
Update Firmware
Register License
Initialize Key and Certificate
Initialize Address Book
Initialize Menu
See Network Settings.
Select whether to allow printing by touching an NFC-capable mobile device to the NFC mark on the machine's operation panel.
Off
On
*
*1
*2
*3
*4
Network Settings
Enable NFC *1*2
㻡㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Specify the ID or PIN exclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network Settings> and <System Management
Settings>. ID is <System Manager ID> and PIN is <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name of an Administrator.
Setting the System Manager ID
System Manager ID and PIN
Enter a number of up to seven digits for the System Manager ID and PIN.
System Manager ID
System Manager PIN
System Manager Name
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.
Device Name
Location
Select whether to use the Department ID Management, a feature that uses IDs as user accounts to specify access privileges and
maintain information on how the machine is used. Setting the Department ID Management
Off
On
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Enable NFC> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
System Manager Information Settings
Device Information Settings
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Device Information Settings> Select <Device Name> or
<Location> Enter <Device Name> or <Location> ( Entering Text) <Apply>
Department ID Management On/Off
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Department ID Management On/Off> Select <Off> or <On>
㻡㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Enable or disable settings for encrypted communication via SSL or IPSec, as well as settings for IP address or MAC address packet
filtering.
Use SSL
Select whether to use SSL encrypted communication. Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI
Off
On
Use IPSec
Select whether to perform encrypted communication by establishing a virtual private network (VPN) via IPSec. Configuring IPSec
Settings
Off
On
IPv4 Address Filter
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified IPv4 addresses. Specifying IP
Addresses for Firewall Rules
Outbound Filter
Off
On
Inbound Filter
Off
On
Security Settings
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Use SSL> Select <Off> or <On>
Restart the machine
*1
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Use IPSec> Select <Off> or <On>
Restart the machine
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv4 Address Filter> Select <Outbound
Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
㻡㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
IPv6 Address Filter
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified IPv6 addresses. Specifying IP
Addresses for Firewall Rules
Outbound Filter
Off
On
Inbound Filter
Off
On
MAC Address Filter
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified MAC addresses. Specifying MAC
Addresses for Firewall Rules
Outbound Filter
Off
On
Inbound Filter
Off
On
Specify the country or region where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting selected at initial power-
on.
Austria (AT)
Belarus (BY)
Belgium (BE)
Czech Republic (CZ)
Denmark (DK)
Egypt (EG)
Finland (FI)
France (FR)
Germany (DE)
Greece (GR)
Hungary (HU)
Ireland (IE)
Italy (IT)
Jordan (JO)
Luxembourg (LU)
Netherlands (NL)
Norway (NO)
Poland (PL)
Portugal (PT)
Russia (RU)
Saudi Arabia (SA)
Slovenia (SI)
South Africa (ZA)
Spain (ES)
Sweden (SE)
Switzerland (CH)
Ukraine (UA)
Great Britain (GB)
Other
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv6 Address Filter> Select <Outbound
Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <MAC Address Filter> Select <Outbound
Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
Select Country/Region *1
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Select Country/Region> Select a country or region
㻡㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Configure settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to configure machine settings from a Web browser.
Use Remote UI
Select whether to use the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to configure machine settings from a Web browser.
Disabling Remote UI
Off
On
Remote UI Access Security Settings
Set whether a PIN is required for accessing the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a common PIN. Setting a
Remote UI PIN
Off
On
Remote UI Access PIN
When scanning from the computer, use this to specify whether to automatically go online for remote scanning (scan standby mode)
without using the operation panel.
Off
On
Configure restrictions on various methods for assigning destinations when sending E-mail, I-Faxes, etc.
Address Book PIN
Specify a PIN and require entering it to add new entries to or edit existing entries in the Address Book. Setting a PIN for
Address Book
Remote UI Settings *1
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI Access Security Settings>
<On> Enter PIN PIN (Confirm) <Apply>
Auto Online for Remote Scan *1
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Auto Online for Remote Scan> Select <Off> or <On>
Restrict TX Function
㻡㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Restrict New Destinations
Select whether to limit the fax numbers and e-mail/I-Fax addresses that can be specified as destinations to those already registered
in the Address Book. Limiting Available Destinations
Off
On
Restrict Resending from Log
Select whether to prevent a destination from being selected from the sent job logs. Disabling Use of Previously Used
Destinations
Off
On
Coded Dial TX Confirmation
Select whether to display the details of an entered coded dial number when it is selected as a destination. Displaying
Destinations in Address Book
Off
On
Select whether to display the copying, printing, faxing, and scanning logs on the display of the machine and in the Communication
Management Report.
Off
On
Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer. Restricting the USB Connection with a
Computer
Off
On
Select whether to permit storing scanned documents into a USB memory device. Restricting the Scan to USB Function
MF729Cx
Off
On
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Off
Display Job Log
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Display Job Log> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the
machine
Use as USB Device
Store to USB Memory
㻡㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
On
Select whether to permit printing data from a USB memory device when it is attached to the machine. Restricting the USB Print
Function
MF729Cx
Off
On
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Off
On
Enable or disable the Product Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).
Off
On
Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI or Toner Status for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner cartridges. Also set
whether to use Toner Status.
Display Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)
Off
On
Toner Status Settings
Off
On
Displ. Consmbls. Purchase Btn.
Off
On
Memory Media Print On/Off
Enable Product Extended Survey Program
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Enable Product Extended Survey Program> Select <Off> or
<On> Restart the machine
Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)>
Specify the settings
㻡㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select whether to allow scanning from a mobile device using the Canon Mobile Scanning application.
Off
On
Enable or disable Google Cloud Print. Printing with Google Cloud Print
Enable Google Cloud Print
Off
On
Google Cloud Print Registration Status
Specify whether to display a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading the paper drawer into the machine.
Off
On
You can use a USB memory device to import and export Address Book destinations and other types of settings data. Using a USB
Memory Device to Export/Import Registered Data
Import
Export
<Display Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>
Select <Off> to prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges from being displayed in the
Remote UI.
<Toner Status Settings>
If you do not want to use Toner Status, select <Off>. To prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner
cartridges from being displayed in Toner Status, select <On> and then <Off>.
Enable Canon Mobile Scanning
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Enable Canon Mobile Scanning> Select <Off> or <On>
Restart the machine
Google Cloud Print Settings *1
Notify to Check Paper Settings
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Notify to Check Paper Settings> Select <Off> or <On>
Restart the machine
Import/Export of Settings *1
㻡㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Enable or disable Secure Print. Printing via Secure Print
Off
On
Secure Print Deletion Time
10 to 30 to 240 (min.)
Select the OS of the PC connecting to the machine via USB.
Mac OS
Windows
Other
Be sure to match the machine settings to the OS of the PC. If not matched, the PC will not correctly recognize the
machine.
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language when it is
connected to a computer by using Plug and Play. See the MF Driver Installation Guide for details.
Network
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language when it is
detected over the network.
FAX
UFRII LT
UFRII LT (V4)
PCL5
PCL6
PS
USB
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language when it is
connected to a computer via USB.
FAX
UFRII LT
UFRII LT (V4)
PCL5
PCL6
PS
Secure Print Settings *3
Select OS for USB Connected PC
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Select OS for USB Connected PC> Select the OS Restart
the machine
PDL Selection (Plug and Play)
*1
*4
*3
*3
*3
*4
*3
*3
*3
㻡㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
<FAX> is displayed if <Select OS for USB Connected PC> is set to <Mac OS>.
Select how to install the firmware update according to the environment of the machine.
<Via PC>
Select to manually install the firmware update available on the Canon Web site yourself. For instructions on how to install the
update, see the instruction manual available on the Web site. When the machine uses a wireless LAN, update with <Via PC>
below or use a USB cable to connect.
<Via Internet>
Select to automatically install the firmware update without using a computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to perform the
update. The machine must be connected to the Internet.
<Version Information>
Select to check details for the current firmware.
Via PC
Via Internet
Version Information
Enter a license key for enabling option functions. License Registration (MF729Cx)
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)> Select <Network> or <USB>
Select a page description language Restart the machine
<FAX>
Detects and connects the machine as a fax device.
<UFRII LT>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer.
<UFRII LT (V4)>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specification (XPS).
<PCL5>
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL5 printer.
<PCL6>
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.
<PS>
Detects and connects the machine as a PS printer.
Update Firmware *1
Register License *1*2
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Register License> <OK> Enter Register License Code
<Register> <Close> Restart the machine
㻡㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Select to restore [Key and Certificate Settings] and [CA Certificate Settings] to the factory defaults. Initializing Key and Certificate
Select to restore the Address Book settings to the factory defaults. Initializing Address Book
Select to restore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once, or you can restore
individual settings separately. Initializing Menu
Preferences
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
Scan Settings
Memory Media Print Settings
Printer Settings
System Management Settings
Initialize All
System Management Settings
Select to restore the System Management Settings to the factory defaults. You can restore all the System Management Settings at
once. Initializing Menu
Network Settings
Enable NFC
System Manager Information Settings
Device Information Settings
Department ID Management On/Off
Security Settings
Remote UI Settings
Auto Online for Remote Scan
Restrict TX Function
Register LDAP Server
Authentication Settings for Send Function
Display Job Log
Use as USB Device
Store to USB Memory
Memory Media Print On/Off
Enable Product Extended Survey Program
Information for Purchasing Consumables
Enable Canon Mobile Scanning
Google Cloud Print Settings
Notify to Check Paper Settings
Secure Print Settings
Select OS for USB Connected PC
PDL Selection (Plug and Play)
Initialize All
Initialize Key and Certificate *1
Initialize Address Book *1
Initialize Menu *1
*4
*2
*1
*3
㻡㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AR
Troubleshooting
When a problem occurs, check this chapter to find out solutions before contacting Canon.
Paper Jams
If a document or paper jams, see Clearing Jams to remove the jammed paper.
A Message or Error Code Appears
If the screen displays a message or error code (three digits), see the following sections.
When an Error Message Appears
When an Error Code Appears
Common Problems
If you suspect that the machine is malfunctioning, see the following sections before contacting Canon.
Common Problems
Installation/Settings Problems
Copying Problems
Printing Problems
Faxing/Telephone Problems (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Printing Results are Not Satisfactory
If printing results are not satisfactory, see When You Cannot Print Properly.
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
If a problem persists, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved to find out where to contact.
㻡㻥㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AS
Clearing Jams
If a paper jams, <Paper jammed.> is displayed on the screen. Tap <Next> to display simple solutions. If it is difficult to understand the
procedures on the display, see the following sections to clear jams.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
<Open the feeder cover.>
Document Jams in the Feeder (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
<Open the front cover.>
Paper Jams in the Front Side
<Remove paper from MP tray.>
Paper Jams in the Manual Feed Slot (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
<Pull out Drawer 1.>
<Pull out Drawer 2.>
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer
<Open the back cover.>
Paper Jams in the Back Side
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
<Open the feeder cover.>
Document Jams in the Feeder (MF628Cw / MF623Cn)
<Lift the control panel.>
Paper Jams in the Front and Back Sides
<Pull out the drawer.> <Open the paper cover.>
Paper Jams in the Manual Feed Slot (MF628Cw / MF623Cn)
<Pull out the drawer.> <Remove the jammed paper.>
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer
When removing the jammed paper, do not turn OFF the machine
Turning OFF the machine deletes the data that is being printed. Be especially careful when receiving fax documents.
If paper tears
Remove all the paper fragments to prevent them from becoming jammed.
If paper jams repeatedly
Tap the paper stack on a flat surface to even the edges of the paper before loading it into the machine.
Check that the paper is appropriate for the machine. Paper
Check that no jammed paper fragments remain in the machine.
Do not forcibly remove the jammed document or paper from the machine
Forcibly removing the paper may damage parts. If you are not able to remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer or the Canon help line. When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
If there are documents placed in the feeder, remove them first. Then, follow the procedure below.
Remove the jammed document from the feeder cover.
Document Jams in the Feeder (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
1
㻡㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
1Open the feeder cover.
2Move the lever to unlock.
3Gently pull out the document.
Remove the jammed document from the inner cover inside the feeder.
1Hold the green knob, and open the inner cover.
2Gently pull out the document.
3Close the inner cover.
Return the lever back in place, and close the feeder cover.
Open the front cover.
Paper Jams in the Front Side
2
3
1
㻡㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Lift the operation panel.
Gently pull out the paper.
Lower the operation panel and the front cover.
If there is paper loaded in the tray, remove it first. Do not forcibly remove jammed paper from the machine. If the jammed paper
cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
Remove the jammed paper in the tray.
1Gently pull out the paper.
2Close the tray.
Remove the jammed paper inside the tray.
1Pull out the paper drawer.
Paper Jams in the Manual Feed Slot (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
2
3
4
1
2
㻡㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage the paper
drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2Hold the green knobs, and push down the part shown in the figure.
3Gently pull out the paper.
Do not touch the rubber pad
Touching it may deteriorate print quality.
Hold the green knobs, and return the part shown in the figure back in place.
Return the part shown in the figure back in place until it clicks.
Set the paper drawer.
When the screen shown below is displayed, tap <Yes>.
Pull out the paper drawer.
Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage the paper drawer by
dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer
3
4
5
1
㻡㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Gently pull out the paper.
When the optional paper drawer (drawer 2) is attached, gently pull out the paper in the same way.
Set the paper drawer.
When the screen shown below is displayed, tap <Yes>.
Open the rear cover.
Pull down the green knob toward you, and gently pull out the paper.
Gently pull out the paper.
Hold the green knobs, and firmly close the duplex unit ( ) until it clicks.
Paper Jams in the Back Side
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
㻡㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Gently pull out the paper.
Close the rear cover.
If there are documents placed in the feeder, remove them first. Then, follow the procedure below.
Open the feeder cover.
Gently pull out the document.
Close the feeder cover.
Lift the operation panel.
Document Jams in the Feeder (MF628Cw / MF623Cn)
Paper Jams in the Front and Back Sides
5
6
1
2
3
1
㻡㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Gently pull out the paper.
Lower the operation panel.
Open the rear cover.
Gently pull out the paper.
Close the rear cover.
Pull out the paper drawer.
Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage the paper drawer by
dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
Open the cover.
Paper Jams in the Manual Feed Slot (MF628Cw / MF623Cn)
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
㻡㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Hold the green knobs, and push down the part shown in the figure.
Gently pull out the paper.
Hold the green knobs, return the part shown in the figure back in place, and close the cover.
Return the part shown in the figure back in place until it clicks.
Set the paper drawer.
When the screen shown below is displayed, tap <Yes>.
LINKS
Notify to Check Paper Settings
3
4
5
6
7
㻡㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AU
When an Error Message Appears
If you cannot send a fax or the memory is full, or you encounter operation problems, a message appears on the display. Find out more
information about messages in the following list.
Black & White copying is restricted. Do you want to make copies in Color?
Black and white copying is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Select <Yes> and log on with a Department ID for which black and white copying is not disabled. For the Department
ID and PIN, contact your Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management
Black & White printing is restricted. Do you want to print in Color?
Black and white printing is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Select <Yes>to print in color.
To print in black and white, select <No> and log in using a Department ID for which black and white printing is not
restricted. Contact your Administrator for the Department ID and PIN.
Setting the Department ID Management
Black cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
Replacement of the toner cartridge is recommended.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
Cannot analyze the authentication server certificate.
The authentication server certificate may be invalid, or the certificate may be in a format that the printer does
not support.
Check the authentication server certificate.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
Cannot change the destination type of destinations registered to a group.
A selected destination could not be edited because it was registered to Group Dial.
To change the type of destination that is registered to Group Dial, first delete the registered destination from Group
Dial. Next, change the destination type, and then register the destination to Group Dial again.
㻡㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Cannot find the access point.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, a wireless router could not be detected within a specific
period of time.
Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
An SSID or network key of a wireless router was entered manually, but the entry was incorrect.
Check the SSID and network key, and enter the correct ones again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
A wireless router could not be detected due to setting problems of the network to be connected.
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems
If the problem persists, check the security settings of the wireless router.
Cannot print RX data.
A received document cannot be printed due to the following:
A cover is open.
There is no paper loaded.
The paper or document is jammed.
The toner cartridges is consumed.
An error has occurred.
Check whether the problems above are occurring. If messages including causes and solutions appear on the display,
check the contents.
Cannot receive the fax. Make sure the fax was sent correctly by the sender.
The recipient's machine did not respond within 35 seconds.
Ask the sender to send the fax again. If you hear a beep, select <Start Receiving> to receive the fax.
Receiving Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Cannot send because more than one destination is specified.
Sending a fax to multiple destinations is disabled.
To specify multiple destinations, you need to set <Restrict Sequential Broadcast> to <Off> or <Confirm Sequential
Broadcast>. For more information, contact your Administrator.
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Cannot specify a group.
㻢㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Group Dial was specified as a destination after tapping <Hook>.
Once you tap <Hook>, you cannot specify destinations in Group Dial. Tap <End> on the <Specify the destination.>
screen, and specify destinations to send fax documents without tapping <Hook>.
Cannot use Google Cloud Print. Server authentication failed.
Cloud Print could not perform server authentication, or could not acquire information for registration.
Check whether the date and time settings are correctly specified.
Date/Time Settings
Cannot use Google Cloud Print. Server communication error.
Cloud Print is unavailable due to an error.
Check whether the machine is correctly connected to a wireless LAN or wired LAN.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Connecting to a Wired LAN
A port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a firewall or other protection. Check whether the 5222 port is
available with your computer.
If a proxy server is used on the network, check whether the proxy settings on the machine and the server are correct.
For details, contact your Network Administrator.
Setting a Proxy
Cannot use these settings. Sending to the specified destination is restricted.
The machine is set up so that the user currently logged in cannot send to the addresses registered in the
selected <Favorite Settings>.
Change the send restrictions for the logged in user.
Setting the Department ID Management
Cart. comm. error. Use of non-Canon cart. not covered by warranty. Amount in cart. cannot be displ.
correctly.
A toner cartridge may not be installed correctly or may be faulty.
Re-install the toner cartridge. If re-installing the toner cartridge fails to clear the error message, the toner cartridge
may be faulty. Contact the store where you purchased the toner cartridge or consult the Canon Customer Help Center.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
The toner cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.
Only genuine Canon toner cartridges should be used as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables
Change the authentication password.
㻢㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The password has expired.
Set a new password.
Check the authentication settings.
The authentication method set on the machine does not match the authentication method set on the RADIUS
server.
Check that the same authentication method is set on this machine and the RADIUS server, and set the correct
authentication method.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
Cleaning failed.
Paper jammed during cleaning.
Remove the jammed paper, set paper correctly, and perform cleaning again.
Clearing Jams
Feeder
Fixing Unit
The amount remaining in toner cartridges required for cleaning the fixing unit is insufficient.
Cleaning requires sufficient toner cartridge remaining. Replace the toner cartridge, and perform the cleaning again.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
Color copying is restricted. Do you want to make copies in Black & White?
Color copying is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Select <Yes> to copy in black and white.
To copy in color, select <No> and log in using a Department ID for which color copying is not restricted. Contact your
Administrator for the Department ID and PIN. Setting the Department ID Management
Color printing is restricted. Do you want to print in Black & White?
Color printing is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Select <Yes>to print in black and white.
To print in color, select <No> and log in using a Department ID for which color printing is not restricted. Contact your
Administrator for the Department ID and PIN. Setting the Department ID Management
Connection failed. Check the PSK settings.
The network key (PSK) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
Check the network key (PSK) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
㻢㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Checking the SSID and Network Key
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
If the problem persists even after checking the network key, check whether the machine is properly installed and ready
to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems
Copying is restricted.
Copying is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Log on with a Department ID for which copying is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact your
Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management
Correction failed.
Appropriate paper that is required for correction is not loaded in a paper drawer.
Load plain or recycled A4 or Letter size paper into the paper drawer.
Full Adjust
Adjust Copy Image
An adjustment image that is required for correction is not placed on the platen glass correctly.
Place the adjustment image on the platen glass with the print side face down and the black stripe toward the back side
of the machine.
Full Adjust
Adjust Copy Image
Paper jammed during correction.
Remove the jammed paper, and perform correction again.
Clearing Jams
The amount remaining in toner cartridges required for correction is insufficient.
Corrections require sufficient toner cartridge remaining. Replace the toner cartridge, and perform correction again.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
The transfer belt inside the machine is dirty.
Perform automatic cleaning of the transfer belt.
Transfer Belt
Could not connect using Access Point Mode.
Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error.
Wait a few moments and try again. If you still cannot connect, try switching the machine off briefly.
Configuring the Settings for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw /
MF628Cw)
Could not connect using the wireless LAN. Turn the main power OFF and ON, then configure the settings
again.
㻢㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
A connection failed due to an error while setting wireless LAN connection.
Restart the machine and set again.
If the problem persists even after restarting the machine, check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to
connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems
If the problem persists even after checking the wireless LAN connection, check the security settings of the wireless
router.
Could not connect using WPS. Wait a moment, then configure the settings again.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, the connection failed due to an error.
Wait for a while, and set again. If the problem persists, check whether the wireless router supports WPS.
If WPS is supported:
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems
If WPS is not supported:
Set using another connecting method.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Could not connect. The maximum number of devices that can connect to the access point has been
reached.
The machine attempted to connect to a wireless LAN router to which the maximum number of devices were
already connected.
Decrease the number of devices (clients) that are connected to the wireless LAN router. For information on the
maximum number of devices that can connect, see the instruction manual for the wireless LAN router or contact the
manufacturer.
Could not perform Open System authentication. Check the WEP settings.
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Open System>, but that of a wireless router is set to
"Shared Key."
Connect again by manually changing the WEP authentication method to <Shared Key>.
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
The MAC address of the machine is rejected because the MAC address filter is set at a wireless router.
Set the wireless router to permit the MAC address of the machine and your computer. For more information about how
to set, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer. To check the MAC
address of the machine, tap <Menu> <Network Settings> <Wireless LAN Settings> <Connection Information>.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN
Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
㻢㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to <Open
System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For more
information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your
manufacturer.
End of Toner Cart. Lifetime
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
Select one of the settings on the display.
To display the replacement method, select <Display Recovery Steps> on the screen.
If you select <Continue Printing (Quality Not Guaranteed)>, you can continue printing, but the machine may
malfunction.
If the yellow, magenta, or cyan toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime and you select <Only
Continue Black & White Printing>, you can continue black and white printing only.
Faxing is restricted.
Faxing is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Log on with a Department ID for which faxing is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact your
Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management
Magenta cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
Replacement of the toner cartridge is recommended.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
Memory full. Check error info. using the Status Monitor key.
The memory became full of print data that could not be printed due to errors.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
Cancel printing of the documents with errors.
Canceling Prints
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
㻢㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Cancel printing of the documents with errors or print the documents by selecting <Skip Error>.
Canceling Prints
Memory Media Print is restricted.
The function that prints files in a USB memory device is disabled.
Set <Memory Media Print On/Off> to <On>.
Restricting the USB Print Function
No Paper
Paper is not loaded in the paper drawer or the manual feed slot.
Load the paper.
Loading Paper
Paper on which reports or lists can be printed is not loaded.
Reports or lists can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its size. Also, set the
paper type to <Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Plain 3>, <Recycled>, <Color>, or <Thin> depending on the loaded paper.
Loading Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type
Paper on which received documents can be printed is not loaded.
Received documents can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its size. Also, set
the paper type to <Plain 1>, <Plain 2>, <Plain 3>, <Recycled>, <Color>, or <Thin> depending on the loaded paper.
Loading Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type
If you print received documents on paper other than A4 or LTR size, some portions of the image may be missing or
the image may be divided and printed onto several sheets.
No reply from the destination.
A network cable may be disconnected, or there may be a problem in a switch.
Check the status of the network cables and switches.
No response from the host.
The machine is not connected to a network correctly.
Check the machine and network settings, and connect again.
Connecting to a Network
Paper jammed.
㻢㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Paper jams.
Remove the jammed paper or document, and print again (Printing may resume automatically).
Clearing Jams
Paper Size & Settings Mismatch
The paper size setting on the operation panel does not match the loaded paper size.
Match the paper size setting specified in <Paper Settings> and the size of the paper that is actually loaded.
To use the loaded paper
Change the setting of <Paper Settings> to match the loaded paper size.
Specifying Paper Size and Type
If printing from a computer, check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded paper size.
To load paper without changing the settings
Load the paper with the size that is set to <Paper Settings>.
Loading Paper
Check that the paper guides in the paper drawer are set in the correct position.
Loading Paper
Prepare the black cartridge.
The amount remaining in toner cartridges is running low.
Have a new toner cartridge ready.
Consumables
When copying or printing, you can continue printing.
If the machine is receiving a fax, or automatic report output is set, received faxes and reports will be stored in
the machine so that they do not appear faded after they are printed. To avoid prints that do not appear clear or
vibrant, set <Continue Print. When Cart. Low> to <Off>. Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is
Low
Prepare the cyan toner cartridge.
The amount remaining in toner cartridges is running low.
Have a new toner cartridge ready.
Consumables
Prepare the magenta cartridge.
The amount remaining in toner cartridges is running low.
Have a new toner cartridge ready.
㻢㻜㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Consumables
Prepare the yellow cartridge.
The amount remaining in toner cartridges is running low.
Have a new toner cartridge ready.
Consumables
Printing is restricted.
Printing is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Log on with a Department ID for which printing is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact your
Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management
Remote scanning is restricted.
Scanning that is operated by using a computer is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode, display the edit screen of the corresponding Department ID, and
select the [Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] check box.
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
Remove tabs/pieces of tape from the toner cartridge.
The sealing tape on the toner cartridges is still attached.
Remove the sealing tape.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
Scanning is restricted.
Scanning is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Log on with a Department ID for which scanning is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact your
Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management
Set the correct authentication information.
㻢㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The client authentication information (key pair and certificate, user name and password, or CA certificate) is
not set correctly.
Check the specified authentication method and authentication information (key pair and certificate, user name and
password, and CA certificate).
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
Set the information necessary for authentication.
The IEEE 802.1X authentication has not been configured correctly.
Configure the IEEE 802.1X correctly from the Remote UI.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
Specifying and registering new destinations is restricted.
Only destinations that are registered in the Address Book can be specified to send a fax or e-mail.
To enter a new destination with the operation panel, or add or edit it in the Address Book, you need to set <Restrict
New Destinations> to <Off>. For more information, contact your Administrator.
Limiting Available Destinations
The authentication server certificate has expired.
The server certificate sent from the RADIUS server has expired.
Check the valid period of the server certificate on the RADIUS server.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
The authentication server certificate is incorrect.
There is no CA certificate registered in the printer that is compatible with the authentication server certificate.
Check that there is a CA certificate registered in the printer that is compatible with the authentication server certificate.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
The computer is restricted.
Scanning that is operated on the operation panel is disabled in the Department ID Management.
Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode, display the edit screen of the corresponding Department ID, and
select the [Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] check box.
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
㻢㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The cyan cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
Replacement of the toner cartridge is recommended.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
The image cannot be recognized.
The image you selected could not be previewed when you were selecting files to print in a USB memory device.
Images with the "?" icon cannot be previewed. JPEG or TIFF images can be previewed, but some of the images may
not be able to be displayed.
Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
The memory is full.
A fax could not be sent or received, or a document could not be scanned due to insufficient memory space.
If a sending or printing job is queued, wait until the job is completed.
If a received document is stored to memory, print or delete it.
Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)
If sending a document with many pages, divide it into multiple sections.
If sending a fax, reduce the resolution to scan the document.
Adjusting Resolution
If scanning, change the file format to reduce its file size.
Selecting a File Format
A scanned document could not be stored to memory media due to insufficient memory space.
Delete unnecessary data to free space in the memory media, or connect different memory media.
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
The memory is full. Enter the original type settings again.
A document could not be scanned because memory became full during copying.
Set <Original Type> to <Original Type: Text/Photo/Map (Speed)>, and copy.
Selecting Document Type
The memory is full. Process secure print jobs.
Memory became full of secured documents that were not printed.
Print the secured documents that are stored in memory.
Printing via Secure Print
㻢㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Do you want to print?
A document could not be scanned due to insufficient memory space.
Select whether to print the pages that were scanned or cancel the job.
Copy the document in two or more parts.
Not all of the pages could be scanned during sorting and copying.
Select whether to print the pages that were scanned or cancel the job.
If this is a copy job, either copy the document in two or more parts or change the <Original Type> setting to
<Text/Photo/Map> and then copy the document.
Selecting Document Type
The number of entered characters is incorrect or invalid characters are used.
The network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of a wireless router is not entered correctly.
Check the network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again. For
more information about how to check the network key, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Checking the SSID and Network Key
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
The USB memory is restricted.
The function that stores a scanned document to a USB memory device is disabled.
Set <Store to USB Memory> to <On>.
Restricting the Scan to USB Function
The WEP key is not set correctly. Check the WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to <Open
System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For more
information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your
manufacturer.
Use of non-Canon cartridges is not covered by warranty. The amount in the cartridge cannot be displ.
correctly.
㻢㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The toner cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.
Only genuine Canon toner cartridges should be used as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables
Use Remote UI to set the information necessary for authentication.
The IEEE 802.1X settings are incorrect.
Check whether [Login Name] is set correctly.
Check whether the [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], or [Use PEAP] check box is selected.
If using TLS, check whether a key pair is registered.
If using TTLS or PEAP, check whether a user name and password are set correctly.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
Yellow cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
Replacement of the toner cartridge is recommended.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
㻢㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AW
When an Error Code Appears
If printing is not successful or you cannot send or receive a fax or scanned document, or another error occurs, that error appears on a
report or a message on the <Status Monitor> screen as a three-digit number (error code). Check the following to find out causes and
solutions for each error code. For how to print an error report and information in the report, see Printing Reports and Lists.
＃001
A document jams in the feeder.
Remove the jammed document.
Document Jams in the Feeder (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Document Jams in the Feeder (MF628Cw / MF623Cn)
＃003
A fax could not be sent or received due to its large data size.
When sending a fax: Reduce the resolution, and scan the document.
Adjusting Resolution
When receiving a fax: Ask the sender to divide the document into multiple sections or reduce the resolution before
sending.
＃005
A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine did not respond within 35 seconds.
When the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to check the
machine status. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number.
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
＃012
A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine ran out of paper.
Ask the recipient to reload the paper.
㻢㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
＃018
A fax could not be sent since the recipient's machine did not respond because the line was busy or for other
reasons.
When the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to check the
machine status. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number.
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
＃022
Sending of a fax from a computer is disabled.
To send a fax from a computer, you need to set <Allow Fax Driver TX> to <On>. For more information, contact your
Administrator.
Prohibiting PC Faxing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
A fax could not be forwarded because the specified destination was deleted from the Address Book.
Register the forwarding destination again. If the documents that failed to be forwarded remain in memory, you can
forward it again.
Registering in the Address Book
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded
＃037
Memory is full.
If a sending or printing job is queued, wait until the job is completed.
If a received document is stored to memory, print or delete it.
Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)
If sending a document with many pages, divide it into multiple sections.
If sending a fax, reduce the resolution to scan the document.
Adjusting Resolution
＃099
Printing, sending, or receiving was canceled.
When you cancel an operation, this error code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print, send, or receive documents
again as necessary.
＃401
A scanned document could not be stored to a USB memory device due to insufficient memory space.
Delete unnecessary data to free space in the USB memory device or connect a different USB memory device.
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
㻢㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
＃406
A scanned document could not be stored to a USB memory device due to an error.
Remove the USB memory device, and connect it again.
Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory
Reduce the number of documents to scan.
＃408
Write failed because the memory media was removed while it was being written to.
Check that the memory media has not been removed and then write the data again.
Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
Images could not be transferred correctly due to an error that occurred during image transfer to the memory
media.
Check the status of the memory media and try again.
Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
The connected memory media is using an unsupported format.
Check that the memory media is using a format supported by this machine (FAT16 or FAT32).
Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
＃701
Authentication failed because an incorrect Department ID or PIN was entered when the Department ID
Management was activated.
Enter the correct Department ID and PIN.
Continuing operating without entering a Department ID was attempted even though unknown-ID jobs
(functions that permit operations without a Department ID and PIN) were disabled in the Department ID
Management.
Enable unknown-ID jobs in System Manager Mode in Remote UI.
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
＃703
Data could not be written because the memory space that was allocated for images was full when sending an e-
mail/I-Fax or storing to a shared folder.
If another sending document is queued, wait for a while until it is completed, and send again.
Divide the document into multiple sections before sending.
Delete the documents that are stored in memory.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
＃751
㻢㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The server has not been started up or a network connection has been cut.
(Failure to connect to the destination is sometimes caused by a disconnection en route.)
Check the destination.
Check the network status.
Viewing Network Settings
The IP address was not set correctly.
Check <TCP/IP Settings>.
Setting IP Addresses
Data transmission failed because Windows is referencing a shared folder (SMB).
When the transfer of incoming fax data to the shared folder (SMB) fails due to an error, load the printed incoming
data and send it to the transfer destination.
＃752
An e-mail/I-Fax could not be sent because an incorrect SMTP server name was set.
Check the SMTP server name, and correct the setting.
Configuring Basic E-mail Settings
Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
An e-mail/I-Fax could not be sent because an incorrect domain name was set.
Check the domain name, and correct the setting.
Configuring DNS
An e-mail/I-Fax could not be sent because the machine was not connected to a network correctly.
Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems
＃753
Scanned data could not be sent as e-mail or I-Fax nor stored in the shared folder or FTP server because the LAN
cable is disconnected.
Check whether the LAN cable is connected correctly.
Connecting to a Wired LAN
＃755
Scanned data could not be sent as e-mail or I-Fax nor stored in the shared folder or FTP server because TCP/IP
was not working correctly.
Check <TCP/IP Settings>, and set correctly.
Network Settings
An IP address is not set.
Set the IP address correctly.
Setting IP Addresses
The machine cannot communicate with devices on a network immediately after the machine starts up because
the waiting time for the start of the communication is set.
The machine cannot start communicating immediately after it is turned ON. Wait until the set time for <Waiting Time
for Connection at Startup> passes after turning ON the machine, and send again.
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
㻢㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
＃766
The certificate used for sending a signed PDF document has expired.
Update the certificate or use a certificate that has not expired.
Check that the <Date/Time Settings> are correct.
Timer Settings
＃801
When communicating with an SMTP server to send an e-mail/I-Fax, a timeout error occurred from the server.
Check whether SMTP is running on the network correctly.
Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems
When communicating with the SMTP server, an error returned from the server.
Check whether the SMTP server is set correctly.
A destination is not set correctly.
Check whether the destination is set correctly.
When storing a scanned document into the shared folder/FTP Server, an error occurred from the folder.
Check whether the shared folder and the computer that has the shared folder are running correctly.
The incorrect folder name or password was specified when sending to the file server.
Check the destination settings.
＃802
The SMTP server name is not set correctly.
Set the SMTP server name correctly.
Configuring Basic E-mail Settings
Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
＃804
No access privileges to access the shared folder are granted.
Check whether the user name and password that are registered to the destination are consistent with the user account
(user name and password) that is registered to the shared folder. For more information about shared folders, see Send
Setting Guide (included with the provided DVD-ROM). For more information about how to register destinations, see
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location or Registering Address Book from Remote UI .
The incorrect folder name was specified when sending to the shared folder.
Check the destination settings.
㻢㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
＃806
When storing data to a shared folder, an incorrect user name or password was specified.
Register the user account (the same user name and password) that is registered to a computer to the destination of
the Address Book.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
When sending an e-mail/I-Fax, an incorrect destination was specified.
Enter the correct e-mail address, and send the message again. If the destination that was registered in the Address
Book was used, check whether the e-mail address is correct.
Registering in the Address Book
＃808
An error/timeout occurred on the FTP server.
Check the FTP server settings.
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
＃810
When communicating with the POP server to send an e-mail/I-Fax, an error returned from the server.
Check whether the POP server is set correctly.
Check whether your mail server and network are running correctly. For more information, contact your Network
Administrator.
＃812
The password that is used for POP authentication is not set correctly.
Enter the password that is used for POP authentication correctly. If you are unsure of the POP password, check the
documents about the settings that are provided by your Internet service provider, or contact your Network
Administrator.
＃813
The logon name that is used for POP authentication is not set correctly.
Enter the logon name that is used for POP authentication correctly.
＃818
㻢㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
The received data is in a file format that the machine cannot print.
Contact the other party and ask them to resend the data in a different file format.
＃819
The received data is not supported (incorrect MIME information).
Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then resend the data.
＃820
The received data is not supported (incorrect BASE64 or uuencode information).
Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then resend the data.
＃821
The received data is not supported (a TIFF analysis error occurred).
Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then resend the data.
＃822
An image file in a USB memory device could not be printed because the format of the image file is not
supported.
Check the supported file formats and save the file again.
Printing from USB Memory (USB Print)
＃827
The received data is not supported (includes unsupported MIME information).
Contact the other party and ask them to check the settings and then resend the data.
＃829
The received data is 1,000 pages or more long.
The machine deletes the data for page 1,000 onwards and either prints the first 999 pages or holds them in memory.
Get the sender to resend page 1,000 onwards.
㻢㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
＃839
A user name and password that are used for SMTP authentication are not set correctly.
Set the user name and password correctly.
Configuring Basic E-mail Settings
Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
＃841
When sending an e-mail, an encryption algorithm that is common to the mail server is not present.
Clear the [Use SSL] check box for both SMTP and POP servers.
Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
Add the common encryption algorithm to the mail server settings.
＃844
SSL encrypted communication to a POP server failed when sending an e-mail with POP before SMTP.
Check the SSL encrypted communication settings in the POP server.
Clear the [Use SSL] check box for the POP server. If the problem persists, clear the [Use POP Authentication Before
Sending] check box, and set the communication setting to a setting other than POP before SMTP.
Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
When verifying an SSL server certificate to communicate to the POP server, a verification error occurred.
Check that the CA certificate that signed the SSL server certificate on the POP server side is registered to the machine
by using the Remote UI.
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
Check that the SSL server certificate on the POP server side is valid.
Check that the SSL server certificate is not a self-signed certificate.
＃846
An e-mail could not be sent due to a POP authentication failure.
Check the setting, and try again.
Configuring E-mail/I-Fax Communication Settings
＃852
The machine turns OFF for some reason.
Check whether the power plug is inserted into an outlet firmly.
㻢㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
＃853
A document could not be printed because its data size exceeded the machine's upper processing capability.
The machine may not be able to print documents with many pages. Reduce the number of pages per printing, or print
when no print job is queued or no document is being printed. If you are still unable to print, check the document data
for any defects.
Printing was canceled from the computer.
If you cancel an operation when the print data is being sent to the machine from a computer, this error code is
displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print again as necessary.
A secured document that was left unprinted was deleted.
If the secured document is not printed within a specific period of time (30 minutes by default), it is deleted from
memory. Send the secured document again, and print it within the period.
Printing via Secure Print
Printing using Secure Print was attempted when Secure Print was restricted.
When <Secure Print Settings> is set to <Off>, you cannot use Secure Print. Set the setting to <On> and print again.
Printing via Secure Print
Print without using Secure Print.
Printing a Document
You tried to print a file that is either corrupted or not supported.
Check the file and try again.
Printing a Document
＃861
A document could not be printed because a printer driver that was not intended for this machine was used.
Print again by using the printer driver for this machine.
Printing a Document
A document could not be printed due to a defect in its data.
Check the document data for any defects.
＃863
An error occurred when printing from a computer.
Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON. After the restart is complete, try printing
again.
＃995
A document waiting to be sent was canceled.
Send the document again as necessary.
㻢㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AX
Common Problems
If you encounter problems when using the machine, check the items in this section before contacting us. If the problems persist, contact
your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Is the machine turned ON? Is the power cord connected?
If the machine is turned ON but does not respond, turn it OFF, check whether the power cord is connected correctly, and turn it
back ON. For information on connecting the power cord, see Getting Started.
Manuals Included with the Machine
Are the phone cord, LAN cable and USB cable connected correctly?
Check whether these cables are connected correctly. Use care not to mistake the phone cord's port for the other cables' ports.
Connecting the Telephone Line
Parts and Their Functions
Is sleep mode activated?
If you leave the machine unattended for a specific period of time, it enters sleep mode for power conservation, not allowing you
to operate it.
To cancel sleep mode, press .
Is any message displayed on the screen?
If a problem occurs, a message is displayed.
When an Error Message Appears
If a problem persists even after checking
Click the link that corresponds to the problem.
Installation/Settings Problems
Copying Problems
Printing Problems
Faxing/Telephone Problems (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Check the Following
㻢㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0AY
Installation/Settings Problems
See Common Problems also.
Icons in the description
Problem with the wireless LAN connection
Problem with the wired LAN connection
Problem with the USB connection
The machine cannot be connected to a computer via a wireless LAN, a wired LAN and a USB cable at the same time.
All three connection types cannot be used at the same time. The following can be used at the same time: a USB cable and a
wired LAN, or a USB cable and a wireless LAN.
Remote UI is not displayed.
Are <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> set to <On>?
Disabling HTTP Communication
Disabling Remote UI
If the machine is connected to a wired LAN, check that the cable is connected firmly and the IP address is set correctly, and
then start the Remote UI again.
Connecting to a Wired LAN
Viewing Network Settings
If the machine is connected to a wireless LAN, check that the settings are specified correctly, and then start the Remote UI
again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key
Viewing Network Settings
A connection to a network cannot be established.
The IP address may not be set correctly. Set the IP address again.
Setting IP Addresses
When you connect the machine to a computer via wireless LAN, check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to
connect to the network.
When the machine cannot connect to the wireless LAN
You are unsure of the set IP address.
Viewing Network Settings
The connection method cannot be switched between a wired LAN and a wireless LAN.
Did you select a wired LAN or a wireless LAN on the operation panel on the machine as well? This selection is required to have
the machine switch to your selection.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
A fax cannot be sent or received on an optical fiber line.
The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical fiber line or IP phone line, the machine may not work
correctly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a case, contact the provider of the optical fiber
line or IP phone.
You are unsure of the SSID or the network key of the wireless router to be connected. The SSID is not displayed on the
screen.
Check whether the SSID can be found on the wireless router or package box.
Check the SSID or the network key of the wireless router by using Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant.
Checking the SSID and Network Key
The SSID of the wireless router to be connected is not displayed in the access point list.
Check whether the SSID is correct.
Checking the SSID and Network Key
If the SSID of the wireless router is hidden (using a stealth mode ), set the SSID to be visible on the wireless router.
A mode that disables the SSID auto-detection of other devices.
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
*
*
㻢㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
When the machine cannot connect to the wireless LAN
The machine dials up to an unintended connection destination (if a dialup router is connected to a network).
If a dialup router does not need to pass broadcast packets, set the dialup router so that the broadcast packets will not pass. If
the dialup router needs to pass broadcast packets, check whether the settings are correct.
If a DNS server is located in an external network, set the IP address to be connected, not the host name, even if connecting to
the devices that are on the network that is connected to the machine.
If a DNS server is located on a network that is connected to the machine and the information about the devices that are
connected to an external network is registered to the DNS server, check whether the settings are correct.
The PC cannot correctly recognize the machine.
When using the machine with a USB connection, be sure to match the machine settings to the OS of the PC.
Select OS for USB Connected PC
When the machine cannot connect to the wireless LAN
Check the status of your computer.
Have the settings of the computer and the wireless router been completed?
Are the cables of the wireless router (including the power cord and LAN cable) correctly plugged in?
Is the wireless router turned on?
If the problem persists even after checking the above:
Turn off the devices, and then turn them on again.
Wait for a while, and try again to connect to the network.
Check whether the machine is turned ON.
If the machine is turned ON, turn it OFF, and then turn it back ON.
Check the installation site of the machine and the wireless router.
Is the machine too far from the wireless router?
Are there any obstacles such as walls between the machine and the wireless router?
Are there any appliances such as microwave ovens or digital cordless phones that emit radio waves near the
machine?
Perform one of the following settings again.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
When you need to manually set up the connection
If the wireless router is set as described below, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection
(Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings).
ANY connection refusal is activated.
The WEP key that was automatically generated (hexadecimal) is selected.
A function in which the wireless router refuses the connection if the SSID on the device to be connected is set to "ANY" or is blank.
*
*
㻢㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
When you need to change the settings of the wireless router
If the wireless router is set as described below, change the settings of the router.
The MAC address packet filtering is set.
When only IEEE 802.11n is used for the wireless communication, WEP is selected or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set
to TKIP.
The stealth mode is activated.
㻢㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0C1
Printing Problems
See Common Problems also.
Printing results are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls.
When You Cannot Print Properly
You cannot print.
See the MF Driver Installation Guide and check that the printer driver is installed correctly on your computer.
Printing seems to be slow.
Print or delete data in memory.
Printing Documents in Memory
Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory
Disabling Secure Print is recommended if you are not using it.
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents
When the free space in memory is running low, the processing speed of the machine becomes slow, just as a computer does. There is nothing
abnormal.
You cannot print with Google Cloud Print.
Using Google Cloud Print
*
*
㻢㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0C2
Faxing/Telephone Problems
See Common Problems also.
A fax cannot be sent.
Is an external phone line busy? Wait until the line becomes free.
Has an error occurred? Print and check a Communication Management Report.
Communication Management Report
Is a telephone line set correctly?
Connecting the Telephone Line
When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number.
Sending Faxes (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
A fax cannot be sent with a destination in the history specified.
Did you turn OFF the machine? If so, the stored history was deleted.
Did you set <Restrict New Destinations> to <On>? If so, the history before you set was deleted.
Did you set <Restrict Resending from Log> to <On>? If so, the destinations in the history cannot be specified.
A fax cannot be sent on an optical fiber line.
The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical fiber line or IP phone line, the machine may not work
correctly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a case, contact the provider of the optical fiber
line or IP phone.
The results of a sent fax are not satisfactory.
Clean the platen glass or feeder. If cleaning does not improve the results, the recipient's fax machine may be a cause.
Platen Glass
Feeder
The results of received fax are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls.
When You Cannot Print Properly
Telephone and fax cannot be switched automatically.
Check that the receive mode is set to <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>, <Answering Machine>, or <Net Switch>.
Selecting the Receive Mode
Free space in memory may be running low. Print or delete data in memory.
Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory
Printing Documents in Memory
A fax cannot be received automatically.
Check that the receive mode is set to <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>, <Auto>, <Answering Machine>, or <Net Switch>.
Selecting the Receive Mode
Free space in memory may be running low. Print or delete data in memory.
Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory
Printing Documents in Memory
A fax cannot be received on an optical fiber line.
The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical fiber line or IP phone line, the machine may not work
correctly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a case, contact the provider of the optical fiber
line or IP phone.
Sending Problems
Receiving Problems
㻢㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0C3
When You Cannot Print Properly
If printing results are not satisfactory, or paper creases or curls, try the following solutions. If the problems persist, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Smudge Marks Appear on the
Bottom Edge of Printouts
Streaks Appear on Printouts White Streaks Appear
Toner Smudges and Splatters
Appear
Printouts Are Faded A Portion of the Page Is Not
Printed
Print Density Is Uneven Printouts Become Lightly Colored Paper Creases
Paper Curls Printouts Are Skewed Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More
Sheets Are Fed Together
㻢㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0C4
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory
Dirt inside the machine may affect printing results. Perform care and cleaning to the machine first.
Cleaning the Machine
Smudge Marks Appear on the Bottom Edge of Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check the supported paper types and replace with an appropriate type.
Paper
Loading Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type
Do you print data without margins?
This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the edge of
paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make sure to have margins
around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Streaks Appear on Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper
Loading Paper
White Streaks Appear
Is the toner cartridges consumed?
Check how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
㻢㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper
Loading Paper
Is the toner cartridges consumed?
Check how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
Does the paper size specified in the driver match actual paper used?
To have the machine display an error before data is printed on a different paper size, set <Prioritize Driver Settings
When Printing> to <Off>.
Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing
Printouts Are Faded
Is the toner cartridges consumed?
Check how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings properly.
Paper
Loading Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type
Are the printouts faded when you print on envelopes?
Selecting <Envelope 2> for <Envelope Switch> may solve the problem.
Special Processing
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed
Do you print data without margins?
㻢㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the edge of
paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make sure to have margins
around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Print Density Is Uneven
Is the toner cartridges consumed?
Check how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
Printouts Become Lightly Colored
Does the document have background color, is it stained, or are you copying a document such as a newspaper
that is printed on thin paper so that text or images on the other side are visible through the paper?
Check the document and then adjust the density to the correct settings.
Adjusting Density
Is the toner cartridges consumed?
Check how much the amount remaining in toner cartridges is left, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
㻢㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0C5
Paper Creases or Curls
Paper Creases
Is paper loaded correctly?
If paper is not loaded below the load limit line or is loaded obliquely, it may crease.
Loading Paper
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper
Paper Curls
Are you using appropriate paper?
Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings properly.
Paper
Loading Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type
If the use of the appropriate paper does not solve the problem, set <Special Mode P> to <On>.
Special Processing
㻢㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0C6
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly
Printouts Are Skewed
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, the printouts are skewed.
Loading Paper
Is the paper source the manual feed slot?
Load the paper into the paper drawer.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
Are you printing on curled envelopes?
Uncurl the envelopes, and print again.
Loading Envelopes
If the envelopes are not fed properly even after you have uncurled them, selecting <Envelope 2> for <Envelope
Switch> may solve the problem.
Special Processing
Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together
Is paper loaded correctly?
Fan the paper stack thoroughly so that paper is not stuck together.
Check whether paper is loaded correctly.
Loading Paper
Check whether the number of sheets of paper loaded is appropriate and whether the appropriate paper is used.
Paper
Loading Paper
Check whether mixed sizes and types of paper are loaded together.
㻢㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0C7
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon
help line.
Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself
If you disassemble or repair the machine yourself, it may not be covered by warranty.
When Contacting Canon
When contacting us, have the following information ready:
Product name (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw / MF623Cn)
Dealer where you purchased the machine
Details about your problem (such as what you did and what happened as a result)
Serial number (eight alphanumeric characters long, found on the label on the back side of the machine)
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Checking the serial number from ( )
Press ( ), and tap <Check Device Configuration>.
Checking the serial number from the operation panel
Press Tap <Device Status> <Serial Number>.
㻢㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0C8
Maintenance
This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and initialize settings.
Basic Cleaning Cleaning the Machine
The machine becomes dirty, see Exterior.
Smudge marks appear on originals or printouts, see Platen Glass or Feeder .
Streaks appear on printouts, see Fixing Unit.
Print quality deteriorates, see Transfer Belt.
Replacing Toner Cartridges
If you want to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, see Replacing Toner
Cartridges.
How to replace toner cartridges, see How to Replace Toner Cartridges.
Relocating the Machine
Relocating the machine for maintenance or an office move, see Relocating the Machine.
Managing Print Quality Maintaining and Improving Print Quality
Shades of colors on printouts are different from originals, see Correcting the Gradation or Adjusting Values for Text Color
Reproducibility in Color Documents.
Color mismatch occurs, see Correcting "Print Color Mismatch" or Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility in Color
Documents.
Printing Reports and Lists
Print out reports describing transmission results, or a list of Address Book information, see Printing Reports and
Lists.
Checking the Total Pages Printed by the Machine
If you want to check the total page number of printouts, see Viewing the Counter Value.
Exporting/Importing Registered Data
Exporting the Address Book or menu options data from the machine to a USB memory device, or importing it to the machine from a USB
memory device, see Using a USB Memory Device to Export/Import Registered Data.
Initializing Settings
If you want to restore the settings, see Initializing Settings.
㻢㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0C9
Cleaning the Machine
Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily. Carefully read the
safety instructions before you start cleaning. Maintenance and Inspections
Where to Clean
Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots
Exterior
Rollers inside the feeder
Feeder
Internal fixing unit and transfer belt
Fixing Unit
Transfer Belt
Platen glass and the underside of the feeder
Platen Glass
㻢㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CA
Exterior
Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good condition.
Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were received by using the
Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending and
receiving faxes are not deleted.
Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.
Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.
To locate the ventilation slots, see Front Side and Back Side.
Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.
Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
1
2
3
4
㻢㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CC
Platen Glass
Regularly wipe off the dust from the platen glass and the underside of the feeder to prevent smudges to be printed on documents or
printouts.
Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were received by using the
Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending and
receiving faxes are not deleted.
Open the feeder.
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder.
Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
In addition to the platen glass and underside of the feeder, make sure to clean and wipe the white strip of plate ( ) and the
transparent plastic area ( ) too.
When wiping the transparent plastic area ( ), take care not to bend the plastic.
Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.
Gently close the feeder.
Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻢㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CE
Feeder
Graphite powder or dust on the rollers inside the feeder may cause smudges to appear on printouts. If this occurs, clean the feeder. If
smudges still appear after you clean the feeder, run automatic feeder cleaning.
Cleaning the feeder
Automatic feeder cleaning
Turn off the machine and unplug it from the power outlet.
Turning the printer off erases any queued print data. Data such as documents received and held in memory, documents waiting
to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending or receiving faxes are not deleted.
Open the feeder cover.
Wipe the rollers in the feeder.
Wipe the rollers with a cloth that has been moistened with water and wrung out. Then wipe with a dry cloth.
Close the feeder cover.
Plug the machine back into the power outlet and switch it on.
Automatic feeder cleaning uses paper loaded in the feeder. Set 10 sheets of plain A4 or US Letter size paper in the feeder before
starting automatic cleaning. Placing Documents
Press and tap <Menu>.
Tap <Adjustment/Maintenance>.
Tap <Clean Feeder>.
Cleaning the feeder
Automatic feeder cleaning
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
㻢㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Tap <Start>.
Cleaning starts. When the <Finished.> message is displayed approximately 1 minute later, press to return to the <Home>
Screen.
4
㻢㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CF
Fixing Unit
Dirt may adhere to the fixing units inside the machine and cause black streaks to appear on printouts. To clean the fixing unit, perform
the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the fixing unit when the machine has documents waiting to be printed. To clean the
fixing unit, you need plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set the paper in the paper drawer or manual feed slot ( Loading Paper in the
Paper Drawer Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot) before performing the following procedure.
Cleaning consumes the toner cartridge. Make sure that there is sufficient toner cartridge remaining beforehand. Checking
the Amount Remaining in the Toner Cartridges
Press and tap <Menu>.
Tap <Adjustment/Maintenance>.
Tap <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
Tap <Start>.
Cleaning starts. When the <Finished.> message is displayed approximately 1 minute later, press to return to the <Home>
Screen.
1
2
3
4
5
㻢㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CH
Transfer Belt
Dirt may adhere to the transfer belt inside the machine and cause the print quality to deteriorate. To clean the transfer belt, perform the
following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the transfer belt when the machine has documents waiting to be printed.
Press and tap <Menu>.
Tap <Adjustment/Maintenance>.
Tap <Clean ITB>.
Tap <Start>.
Cleaning starts. When the <Finished.> message is displayed approximately 1 to 2 minutes later, press to return to the
<Home> Screen.
1
2
3
4
㻢㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CJ
Replacing Toner Cartridges
The machine displays a message when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low. Note that the print quality may suffer if you
continue printing without resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges on the display.
When a Message Appear
If Printouts are Poor in Quality
Checking the Amount Remaining in the Toner Cartridges
When a Message Appear
The message that is displayed depends on the amount of remaining toner cartridge. Depending on which message is displayed, you will
need to make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge ready or replace the toner cartridge. How to Replace Toner
Cartridges Consumables
Where "XXXX" appears in the descriptions below, the toner cartridge colors black, yellow, magenta, or cyan appear in the
actual messages.
<Prepare the XXXX cartridge.>
This message notifies you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge
ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print a large job.
When this message is displayed
When copying or printing, you can continue printing the document.
If the <Prepare the black cartridge.> message is displayed when the machine is receiving a fax or automatic report output is
set, received faxes and reports will be stored in the machine so that they do not appear faded after they are printed. To avoid
prints that do not appear clear or vibrant, set <Continue Print. When Cart. Low> to <Off>. Continue Printing When
Amount in Cartridge Is Low
Specify when this message is displayed
You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers this message. Display
Timing for Cartridge Preparation Notification
<End of Toner Cart. Lifetime>
This message, which appears with the toner cartridge color(s), notifies you that a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
It is recommended that you replace the cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be
guaranteed.
<Display Recovery Steps>
Displays the procedure for replacing a toner cartridge.
<Continue Printing (Quality Not Guaranteed)>
You can continue printing, but the machine may malfunction.
<Only Continue Black & White Printing>
You can continue printing in black and white even if a yellow, magenta, or cyan cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
㻢㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
If Printouts are Poor in Quality
If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is consumed. Replace the nearly empty toner
cartridge even if no message is displayed.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
White streaks appear Partially faded Uneven density
Toner smudges and splatters appear Blank space of originals becomes grayish in printouts
Checking the Amount Remaining in the Toner Cartridges
Use the procedure below to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. It is particularly important to check whether you need
to have a new toner cartridge ready before starting a large print job.
<Device Status> <Amount Remaining in Cartridge> Checking the amount remaining in the toner cartridges
Amount Remaining in Cartridge
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the toner
runs out.
The displayed amount remaining in a toner cartridge can be used only as a guide and may differ from the actual amount.
LINKS
Consumables
㻢㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CK
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
Read the precautions in Maintenance and Inspections and Consumables before replacing the toner cartridges.
Open the front cover.
Pull out the cartridge tray.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Pull the toner cartridge straight up and out of the machine.
Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the protective bag.
Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge,
and then place it on a flat surface.
In this step, do not remove the drum protective cover ( ).
Pull the sealing tape straight out.
The full length of the sealing tape is approximately 50 cm.
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻢㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
When pulling out the sealing tape
If the sealing tape remains inside the toner cartridge, the quality of printouts, including faxes, may deteriorate. Also note that it
will not be possible to reprint a fax because the fax function automatically deletes data once it is printed.
Do not pull out the sealing tape at an angle or sideways. If the tape breaks, you may not be able to pull it out completely.
If the sealing tape becomes stuck when pulling it out, keep pulling until it is completely removed.
Remove the drum protective cover.
Install the toner cartridge.
Each toner cartridge color has its own slot in the toner cartridge tray, and this tray is indicated with a corresponding color label (
). Place the toner cartridge into the slot that corresponds to its color.
Make sure that the drum avoids contact with the frame of the toner cartridge tray because the bottom surface of the cartridge is
exposed.
Push the toner cartridge tray back in, and close the front cover.
Immediately after the front cover is closed, the quick adjustment ( Quick Adjust) starts. To perform adjustment for higher
quality, perform full adjustment ( Full Adjust).
7
8
9
㻢㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CL
Relocating the Machine
The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedures below when moving the machine to avoid injury, and also make sure to read
the safety precautions before you begin. Important Safety Instructions
Turn OFF the machine and computer.
When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were received by using the
Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending and
receiving faxes are not deleted.
Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the illustration below.
Whether the cables with " " are connected depends on your environment.
If a optional handset is mounted on the machine, remove the handset from its mounting.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
Power plug
Power cord
LAN cable
USB cable
USB keyboard
Telephone cable
External telephone
Handset
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridges. How to Replace Toner
Cartridges
Pull out the paper drawer.
Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage the paper drawer by
dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
Close all the open covers, and move the machine to a new location.
The machine is heavy ( Machine Specifications). Make sure to move the machine with two or more people.
Hold the lift handles, and lift up the machine. If you are using the MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw and you have attached
the optional paper drawer, leave the optional paper drawer on the floor and move it after moving the main unit of the machine.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1
2
3
4
5
㻢㻠㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CR
Maintaining and Improving Print Quality
If the printing results are not satisfactory such as low image quality, poor reproducibility, or print color mismatch, try the adjustments
below.
Auto Adjust Gradation
If the density or brightness of colors in printouts and originals are different, perform <Auto Adjust Gradation> to improve color
reproducibility. There are three types of adjustments: <Full Adjust>, <Quick Adjust>, and <Adjust Copy Image>. Correcting the
Gradation
Correct Print Color Mismatch
If the colors in printouts become blurry, perform <Correct Print Color Mismatch>. This problem may be caused by a color mismatch.
Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"
Black Text Processing for Color
You can specify which cartridges to use to print black text in color printouts. Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility in
Color Documents
㻢㻡㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CS
Correcting the Gradation
Gradation refers to the dark to light continuum of shades of a color. The more shades in the gradations of colors that are printed, the
more natural printouts seem. If color reproducibility becomes poor and the density and brightness of printouts differs markedly from the
originals, perform the appropriate auto adjustment. If the amount remaining in a toner cartridge is low, it is recommended that you
replace toner cartridges ( Checking the Amount Remaining in the Toner Cartridges). There are three types of adjustments: Full
Adjust,Quick Adjust, and Adjust Copy Image.
Fewer shades in the gradations More shades in the gradations
Adjustments may not be performed effectively if there is not sufficient toner cartridge remaining.
This adjustment optimizes reproducibility for color printing. When the machine performs full adjustment, it obtains information to
optimize color reproducibility. The machine maintains this information until the next time you perform full adjustment. For making full
adjustment, an adjustment image will be printed twice and scanned twice. Note that you cannot perform this adjustment while
performing some functions, including, scanning, and printing.
This adjustment is not available when <Only Continue Black & White Printing> is selected on the screen displaying the
message <End of Toner Cart. Lifetime>.
Press and tap <Menu>.
Tap <Adjustment/Maintenance>.
Tap <Auto Adjust Gradation> <Full Adjust>.
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and tap <OK>.
Confirm the procedure, and tap <Start>.
Adjustment starts. In approximately 1 to 2 minutes, an adjustment image is printed.
Open the feeder after the screen displayed during printing disappears.
Place the adjustment image on the platen glass with the print side face down.
Full Adjust
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻢㻡㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Place the adjustment image so that the black stripe is toward the back side of the machine.
Gently close the feeder.
Press (Color).
The adjustment image is scanned and adjustment starts. In approximately 30 seconds, the second adjustment image is printed.
Open the feeder, remove the first adjustment image, and then place the second adjustment image on the
platen glass with the print side face down.
Place the adjustment image so that the black stripe is toward the back side of the machine.
Gently close the feeder.
Press (Color).
The adjustment image is scanned and adjustment starts. In approximately 1 to 2 minutes, the adjustment is finished.
Open the feeder, and remove the second adjustment image.
Gently close the feeder.
If the <Correction failed.> message is displayed
Did you load plain or recycled A4 or Letter size paper into the paper drawer?
Did you place the adjustment image with the print side face down, with the black stripe toward the back side of the machine?
Has a paper jam occurred?
Clearing Jams
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge required for correction sufficient? If the amount remaining in a toner cartridge is
low, it is recommended that you replace toner cartridges.
Checking the Amount Remaining in the Toner Cartridges
Is the transfer belt inside the machine dirty?
Transfer Belt
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
㻢㻡㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
This adjustment maintains the optimized status that was acquired by <Full Adjust>. Note that you cannot perform this adjustment while
performing some functions, including, scanning, and printing. If the result of this adjustment is not satisfactory, perform <Full Adjust>.
This adjustment may be automatically performed after you replace a toner cartridge.
This adjustment is not available when <Only Continue Black & White Printing> is selected on the screen displaying the
message <End of Toner Cart. Lifetime>.
Press and tap <Menu>.
Tap <Adjustment/Maintenance>.
Tap <Auto Adjust Gradation> <Quick Adjust>.
Tap <Start>.
Adjustment starts. In approximately 1 to 2 minutes, the adjustment is finished.
You can set the machine to perform this adjustment automatically after the power is turned ON. Auto Correction Settings
This adjustment improves the result of copies and printing from a USB memory device. For correcting copy images, an adjustment image
will be printed and scanned. Note that you cannot perform this adjustment while performing some functions, including, scanning, and
printing.
This adjustment is not available when <Only Continue Black & White Printing> is selected on the screen displaying the
message <End of Toner Cart. Lifetime>.
Press and tap <Menu>.
Tap <Adjustment/Maintenance>.
Tap <Auto Adjust Gradation> <Adjust Copy Image>.
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and tap <OK>.
Quick Adjust
Adjust Copy Image
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
㻢㻡㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Confirm the procedure, and tap <Start>.
Adjustment starts. In approximately 1 minute, an adjustment image is printed.
Open the feeder after the screen displayed during printing disappears.
Place the adjustment image on the platen glass with the print side face down.
Place the adjustment image so that the black stripe is toward the back side of the machine.
Gently close the feeder.
Press (Color).
The adjustment image is scanned and adjustment starts. In approximately 1 to 2 minutes, the adjustment is finished.
Open the feeder, and remove the adjustment image.
Gently close the feeder.
If the <Correction failed.> message is displayed
Did you load plain or recycled A4 or Letter size paper into the paper drawer?
Did you place the adjustment image with the print side face down, with the black stripe toward the back side of the machine?
Has a paper jam occurred?
Clearing Jams
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge required for correction sufficient? If the amount remaining in a toner cartridge is
low, it is recommended that you replace toner cartridges.
Checking the Amount Remaining in the Toner Cartridges
Is the transfer belt inside the machine dirty?
Transfer Belt
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
㻢㻡㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CU
Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"
Print color mismatch refers to a shift in the positions of colors that may occur when printing one image with multiple toner cartridges.
Print color mismatch can cause printouts to appear blurry. If print color mismatch occurs, perform the following procedure. This
adjustment is sometimes performed automatically, such as when toner cartridges are replaced.
When color shifts occur When color shifts do not occur
This adjustment is not available when <Only Continue Black & White Printing> is selected on the screen displaying the
message <End of Toner Cart. Lifetime>.
Press and tap <Menu>.
Tap <Adjustment/Maintenance>.
Tap <Correct Print Color Mismatch>.
Tap <Start>.
Adjustment starts.
You can set the machine to perform this adjustment automatically after the power is turned ON. Auto Correction Settings
1
2
3
4
㻢㻡㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CW
Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility in Color Documents
If copy results of black or blackish text are not satisfactory, you can improve the color reproducibility with this adjustment. This
adjustment value can be set independently in the feeder and platen glass.
The settings are applied to color copies when <Original Type> is set to <Text/Photo/Map> or <Text> ( Selecting Document
Type).
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Black Text Processing for Color> Select <Feeder> or <Platen Glass> Adjust
the value <Apply>
<Color Text>
Makes black or blackish text in a copy match more closely with the original.
<Black Text>
Enhances the clarity of black text.
㻢㻡㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CX
Printing Reports and Lists
You can check fax results and the machine settings by printing reports and lists.
TX Result Report
You can check the logs of sent documents. TX Result Report
Communication Management Report
You can check the logs of sent and received documents. Communication Management Report
RX Result Report
You can check the logs of received fax documents. RX Result Report
Department ID Management Report
You can check the total volume of printouts for each <Department ID>. Department ID Management Report
Address Book List
You can check the list of destinations registered in the Address Book. Address Book List
User Data List/System Manager Data List
You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List) as well as the content that has been registered in the machine. User
Data List/System Manager Data List
IPSec Policy List
You can check the list of policy names and the content of the IPSec settings that are registered in the machine. IPSec Policy List
Consumables Status Report
You can check the consumables status. Consumables Status Report
PCL Font List
You can check the list of available fonts for the machine. PCL Font List (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
PS Font List
You can check the fonts available in PS mode. PS Font List (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
㻢㻡㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0CY
TX Result Report
You can check the fax or e-mail/I-Fax logs of sent documents as well as documents scanned to a shared folder or FTP server by printing
a TX Result Report. The report can be printed either every time a transmission is completed or only when a sending error occurs.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <Fax TX Result Report> or <E-Mail/File TX Result Report> Select
the print setting
<Off>
Select if you do not want to print TX Result Reports.
<On>
Select to print a TX Result Report every time you send a document.
<Only When Error Occurs>
Select to print a TX Result Report only when a sending error occurs.
Example: Fax sending (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Example: Scanning to e-mail/I-Fax/shared folder/FTP Server
Result
"OK" indicates that the transmission was completed successfully while "NG" and three digits (an error code) indicates that the
transmission failed ( When an Error Code Appears).
Department ID
The Department ID is shown when Department ID Management is enabled.
Sent/Error
For e-mail, TX Result Reports indicate the transmission result between the machine and the mail server, not between the machine
and the destination address. Even if the transmission fails, a three-digit error code will not be printed. To check the error code,
print a Communication Management Report ( Communication Management Report ).
㻢㻡㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
To print a part of a fax document on the report
When you select <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>, a part of a fax document can be included in the report. Set <Include TX
Image> to <On>.
㻢㻡㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0E0
Communication Management Report
You can check the fax and e-mail logs of sent and received documents by printing a Communication Management Report. The report can
be printed automatically after every 40 transmissions, or you can print it manually.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <Communication Management Report> Select the print setting
<Auto Print (40 Transmissions)>
Select <On> to print the report automatically after every 40 transmissions, or <Off> if you do not want to print the report
automatically.
<Separate TX/RX>
Select <On> to print sent and received reports separately, or <Off> to print both reports on one sheet.
Print the Report Manually
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Communication Management Report> Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>
Example:
Result
"OK" indicates that the transmission was completed successfully while "NG" and three digits (an error code) indicates that the
transmission failed ( When an Error Code Appears). For e-mail, Communication Management Reports indicate the transmission
result between the machine and the mail server, not between the machine and the destination address.
㻢㻢㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0E1
RX Result Report
You can check the logs of received fax and I-Fax documents by printing an RX Result Report. The report can be printed either every time
a transmission is completed or only when a receiving error occurs.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Report Settings> <RX Result Report> Select the print setting
<Off>
Select if you do not want to print RX Result Reports.
<On>
Select to print an RX Result Report every time you receive a document.
<Only When Error Occurs>
Select to print an RX Result Report only when a receiving error occurs.
Example:
Result
"OK" indicates that the transmission was completed successfully while "NG" and three digits (an error code) indicates that the
transmission failed ( When an Error Code Appears).
㻢㻢㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0E2
Department ID Management Report
When Department ID Management is enabled, you can check the total volume of printouts for each <Department ID> by printing a
Department ID Management Report. By checking the printout totals, you can better manage your paper and toner cartridge supplies.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Department ID Management Report> Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>
Example:
LINKS
Setting the Department ID Management
㻢㻢㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0E3
Address Book List
You can check the list of destinations registered in the Address Book as <Coded Dial>, <Favorites>, and <Group Dial> by printing an
Address Book List.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Address Book List> Select the setting you want to print out Check that
the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>
Example: <Coded Dial>
Example: <Favorites>
Example: <Group Dial>
LINKS
Registering in the Address Book
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
㻢㻢㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0E4
User Data List/System Manager Data List
You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List) as well as the content that has been registered in the machine by printing a
User Data List or a System Manager Data List. Both lists include the paper size and type registered in the machine, the print settings of
<TX Result Report>, <Communication Management Report>, and <RX Result Report>.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <User Data List> or <System Manager Data List> Check that the size and
type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>
Example:
The User Data List does not include the setting lists of <Network Settings>, <System Management Settings>, or a portion of
<Fax Settings>. To check all the settings items, including <Network Settings>, <System Management Settings>, and all <Fax
Settings>, print the <System Manager Data List>.
LINKS
TX Result Report
Communication Management Report
RX Result Report
Loading Paper
㻢㻢㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0E5
IPSec Policy List
You can check the list of policy names and the IPSec settings registered in the machine by printing an IPSec Policy List.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <IPSec Policy List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the
screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>
Example:
LINKS
Configuring IPSec Settings
㻢㻢㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0EH
Consumables Status Report
You can check the consumables status installed in the machine.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <Consumables Status Report> Check that the size and type of paper
displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <OK> <Yes>
Example:
LINKS
Replacing Toner Cartridges
㻢㻢㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0E6
PCL Font List
You can print a list to check the fonts available in PCL mode.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <PCL Font List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the
screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>
Example:
㻢㻢㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0EF
PS Font List
You can print a list to check the fonts available in PS mode.
<Menu> <Output Report> <Print List> <PS Font List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the
screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>
Example:
㻢㻢㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0E7
Viewing the Counter Value
You can check separate totals for the number of pages used for color printouts and black and white printouts. These totals include faxes,
reports, and lists, in addition to copies and printouts of data from computers.
MF729Cx
( ) Select the item you want to check Check the number of pages printed
Counters
Select the counter to check the counter value. Items have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.
Counter Value
You can check the count of the selected item.
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw / MF623Cn
<Device Status> <Check Counter> <Color Total> or <Black & White Total>
Counters
Select the counter to check the counter value. Items have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.
Counter Value
You can check the count of the selected item.
㻢㻢㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0EJ
Using a USB Memory Device to Export/Import Registered Data
Data such as Address Book entries and machine settings can be exported and saved to a USB memory device. You can also import the
data saved to a USB memory device. Because data exported from the machine can be imported into other models, this provides a simple
way to copy information such as Address Book entries onto multiple machines .
Importing of Address Book data exported from this machine may not be supported on some models. Note also that you can only import and export data other
than Address Book entries, such as machine settings, between the same model.
Exporting Registered Data to a USB Memory Device
Importing Registered Data from a USB Memory Device
Do not turn OFF the machine until the export/import process is complete
It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may result in damage
to data or the machine.
Do not operate the machine during the export/import process
Before exporting/importing, check that no operations such as printing documents are currently in progress.
In situations where you want to selectively import or export settings data (e.g. only export Address Book entries), run the
procedure from the Remote UI.
Where settings cannot be imported or exported, the same will apply if you run the procedure from the Remote UI.
Saving/Loading Registered Data
Available USB Memory Devices
You can use USB memory devices with the following format styles.
FAT16 (memory capacity: up to 2 GB)
FAT32 (memory capacity: up to 32 GB)
Do not use non-standard USB memory devices. You may not be able to export/import data properly with some USB
memory devices.
Do not connect anything other than a USB memory device. USB memory devices cannot be connected via a USB hub or an
extension cable.
Do not use USB memory devices with special functions such as built-in security functions.
*
*
㻢㻣㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0EK
Exporting Registered Data to a USB Memory Device
Data such as Address Book entries and machine settings can be exported and saved to a USB memory device. It is recommended that
you regularly back up important settings.
Connect a USB memory device to the USB port (USB2.0).
The USB port on the right side of the machine toward the rear is not available.
Do not disconnect, jostle, or turn OFF the machine or USB memory device while the data is being transferred.
Press and tap <Menu>.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Import/Export of Settings> <Export>.
Enter the password, and tap <Apply>.
Enter a password for the export data up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
This password will be required when you import the data to the machine. Importing Registered Data from a USB Memory
Device
Enter the password again for confirmation, and tap <Apply>.
}
Exporting starts.
If the <Address Book PIN> screen appears
If a PIN has been set for the Address Book, the <Address Book PIN> screen appears during exporting. Enter the Address Book
PIN and tap <Apply>. Tap <Skip> to cancel Address Book data exporting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻢㻣㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Disconnect the USB memory device from the USB port (USB2.0).
1Press .
2Press .
3Tap <Device Status>.
4Tap <Remove Memory Media>.
Wait until the <The memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.
5Disconnect the USB memory device.
7
㻢㻣㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0EL
Importing Registered Data from a USB Memory Device
Use this procedure to import data that was exported from the machine to a USB memory device. If the models are the same, you can
also import the settings from another machine to this machine.
Importing Address Book data will overwrite the Address Book entries currently registered on the machine.
Connect a USB memory device to the USB port (USB2.0).
The USB port on the right side of the machine toward the rear is not available.
Do not remove, bump or jostle the USB memory device while data is being imported or exported.
Press and tap <Menu>.
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Import/Export of Settings> <Import>.
Check the message and tap <Yes>.
Enter the password, and tap <Apply>.
Enter the password that was set when exporting the data.
Importing starts. The machine automatically restarts after the import is complete.
If the <Address Book PIN> screen appears
If a PIN has been set for the Address Book, the <Address Book PIN> screen appears during importing. Enter the Address Book
PIN and tap <Apply>. Tap <Skip> to cancel Address Book data importing.
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻢㻣㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Disconnect the USB memory device from the USB port (USB2.0).
1Press .
2Press .
3Tap <Device Status>.
4Tap <Remove Memory Media>.
Wait until the <The memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.
5Disconnect the USB memory device.
7
㻢㻣㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0E9
Initializing Menu
You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List). Depending on the settings selected, you may need to restart the
machine after initialization.
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Initialize Menu> Select the item you want to initialize <Yes>
Restart the machine if necessary
Items for initializing
Select the setting you want to initialize.
When <System Management Settings> is selected
Select the specific system management settings that you want to initialize and tap <Yes>.
Settings to be initialized
Select the settings to be initialized.
<Initialize All>
Initializes all the system management settings.
If Remote UI settings are initialized
The Remote UI PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the Remote UI PIN. Setting a Remote UI
PIN
㻢㻣㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
<Initialize All>
Initializes all the settings on the machine.
You can use the procedure below to restore the default <Network Settings>. Select <Menu> <Network
Settings> <Initialize Network Settings> <Yes> and then restart the machine.
㻢㻣㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0EA
Initializing Key and Certificate
You can restore the settings of the key pairs and digital certificates. Note that all the key pairs that you registered in the machine and
certificates (except the preinstalled digital certificates) will be deleted after initializing.
After initializing, functions that require key pairs such as SSL encrypted communication and TLS of the IEEE 802.1X
authentication are not available. To use these functions, configure the settings for the key pairs and activate the functions
again.
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Initialize Key and Certificate> <Yes>
LINKS
Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates
㻢㻣㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0EC
Initializing Address Book
You can restore the settings of the Address Book. Note that all the information registered in the Address Book will be deleted after
initializing.
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Initialize Address Book> <Yes>
LINKS
Registering in the Address Book
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
㻢㻣㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0ER
Appendix
This chapter contains technical specifications of this machine, instructions on how to use the e-Manual, disclaimers, copyright information,
and other important information for customers.
㻢㻤㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0ES
Feature Highlights
Give the features that are described in this section a try. The features are grouped under four headings: "Going Green and Saving
Money," "Improving Efficiency," "Going Digital," and "So Much More."
㻢㻤㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0EU
Going Green and Saving Money
2-Sided Printing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Print Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet
Sleep Mode
You can use 2-sided printing for copies, print jobs sent from your computer, and even incoming faxes. Because you'll only
be using half the paper you would otherwise, you can cut your paper costs in half. To save even more, combine 2-sided
printing with N on 1 printing of multiple pages on one sheet of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single sheet,
which is both economical and environmentally friendly.
To make 2-sided copies: 2-Sided Copying (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
To print 2-sided documents from your computer: Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw
/ MF724Cdw)
To print 2-Sided incoming faxes: Print on Both Sides
To really start saving paper, shrink multiple pages onto a single sheet - 2 or 4 pages for copies, and up to 16 pages for
print jobs sent from your computer. This is even more effective when used together with 2-sided printing .
2-sided printing is only available for MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw.
To copy multiple pages of a document onto one sheet: Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on
1)
To print multiple pages of a document onto one sheet: Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet
*
*
For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that powers down a machine when nobody is using it has become an
essential feature. This machine will enter sleep mode automatically, and can also be put to sleep whenever you want.
Press once to put the machine to sleep. Press it again to instantly wake the machine back into action.
㻢㻤㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Save Toner
Paperless Faxing (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
For more information about this function, see Entering Sleep Mode.
Got multi-page documents or drafts that don't need presentation-quality printing?
There's a setting that uses less toner. Give it a try and save toner and money.
For more information about this function, see Saving Toner.
Assume you need paper to fax? Those old paper printouts you always make are a thing of the past. Send documents by
fax just as they are, created on your computer. It's paperless, so it's fast. And, received documents are first stored in
memory, allowing you to print out only those needed and eliminating worry about paper getting used on direct mailings,
etc.
For more information about this function, see Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF628Cw).
For more information about this function, see Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception).
㻢㻤㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0EW
Improving Efficiency
Address Book
Frequently used Settings in One Touch
Print Images Right Off Your USB Stick
Entering fax and e-mail addresses in the Address Book saves you the inconvenience of entering them number-by-number,
letter-by-letter every time you have something to send. Display the addresses you use most frequently with the
<Favorites> feature to quickly and easily send what you need to the people who need it. You can save your Address Book
data on your computer and feel secure knowing that your important contact information is backed up.
To use the machine to enter addresses in the Address Book: Registering in the Address Book
To use your computer to enter addresses in the Address Book: Registering Address Book from Remote UI
To select an Address Book address as a fax destination: Specifying from Address Book (Fax)
To select an Address Book address as an e-mail destination: Specifying from Address Book
To save Address Book addresses on your computer or to export Address Book addresses that are saved on your computer
to the machine: Saving/Loading Registered Data
To save Address Book addresses on your USB stick or to export Address Book addresses that are saved on your USB stick
to the machine: Using a USB Memory Device to Export/Import Registered Data
Always making 2-sided copies in black and white. Always scanning in the same format and to the same save destination.
Frequently used settings like these can be registered to a single shortcut button. This is convenient by allowing you to
specify involved operations all in a single touch.
2-sided printing is only available for MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw.
To register your favorite copy settings: Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings
To register your favorite fax settings: Registering Frequently Used Fax Settings
To register your favorite scan settings: Registering Frequently Used Scan Settings (E-mail/I-Fax/Shared
Folder/FTP Server)
*
*
Plug a USB stick into the machine and you can print images and documents directly, without using a computer. You can
even preview JPEG and other images before you print, so there is no wasted paper. You can also scan handwritten
㻢㻤㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Remote Management with Remote UI
Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation
memos, etc. and save them directly to a USB stick. Convenient for carrying about.
For more information about this function, see Printing from USB Memory (USB Print).
For more information about this function, see Scanning Documents Directly to USB Memory.
Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer, all without having to go over to the machine. Configure settings
and keep an eye on the machine's status with an intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface that you'll master
immediately. Save your time and energy for things other than taking care of the machine.
For more information about this function, see Using Remote UI.
You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching between 1-sided and 2-sided printing, etc.
intuitively on the preview image in the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to conveniently make settings
while viewing how settings are applied.
For more information, see Printing a Document.
㻢㻤㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0EX
Going Digital
Scan and E-mail
Scan and Share
Scan Only What You Need
E-mail scanned documents without even turning on your computer. Just convert your scanned document into an e-mail
attachment right from the machine. If you're one of those people who'd rather send a fax than mess around with a
computer, this feature is for you.
For more information about this function, see Sending Documents as E-mails Directly from the Machine .
Say you've got a paper copy of a report for a company-wide meeting. Scan it, convert it, and now everyone can see it.
It's saved directly in a shared folder on your network, so there's no need to print out copies and pass them out. Once you
start talking about hundreds of pages of documents that everyone needs, there's just no other way to go.
For more information about this function, see Saving Documents Directly to a Shared Folder/FTP Server .
What if you're scanning a whole page of a newspaper but all you're really interested in is a headline and a photo? Use
ScanGear MF. You can select what you want from a preview, and then have the scanner disregard the rest. Otherwise
you'll have to use an editing program to crop out everything you don't need.
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as
scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal
and/or civil liability. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise
reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced,
you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.
㻢㻤㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Searchable PDFs
Add Images to a Work in Progress
For more information about this function, see Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF.
Searching of text in a PDF can be done with a "searchable PDF". By scanning an original with both text and images, text
portions are converted by OCR into text data. In addition to being able to search for text information, you can also copy
required portions into an Excel spreadsheet or Word document in Microsoft Office. Eliminate the need to type in customer
data, addresses, etc. from scratch.
For more information about this function, see Selecting a File Format.
For more information, see [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
Some applications work with the machine to let you easily import scanned images directly into documents you're working
on. This way you can skip the steps of opening a separate application just for receiving the scanned images and then
exporting them to the application you're really using.
For more information about this function, see Scanning Using an Application.
㻢㻤㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0EY
So Much More
Using a smartphone/tablet
Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print
Keep Your Printouts Private (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
At times such as when you want to quickly print out a proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a business
destination, or scan materials handed out at a meeting using a smartphone, Canon Mobile Application comes in handy.
Even in environments without a wireless LAN router, you can connect to the machine with a mobile device wirelessly and
directly.
PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities for work/play with functionality made for this age of speed.
For more information, see Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device.
Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or cell phone, send your data, and out come your printed documents.
With this machine, Google Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever you want from wherever you want.
For more information about this function, see Using Google Cloud Print.
Normally, when you print something from your computer, it comes out of the printer right away. However, if you have
sensitive documents, this may not be what you want. Just use secure printing and no one will be able to print your
documents without entering your password on the machine's operation panel. Don't let your confidential documents lie
exposed on the tray for everyone to see.
㻢㻤㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Go Wireless (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Get Faxes Wherever You Go (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Make Posters
Make Booklets (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
For more information about this function, see Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) (MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw).
No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you've got a WPS wireless LAN router, bypass the settings process
altogether and be ready to go before you know it. Enjoy the kind of clutter-free and easy to use document system that
you can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n for stress-free wireless, and also supports WEP and
WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for tighter security.
For more information about this function, see Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw /
MF628Cw).
Never worry about missing a fax when you're out of the office. Set a forwarding destination and any fax that comes in on
the machine will go right to you. Better yet, make the forwarding destination the e-mail address for your tablet or mobile.
For more information about this function, see Forwarding Received Faxes.
Blow up a regular one-sheet printout and make an exceptionally large poster. A large poster will be printed out on nine
sheets. Put them together in a 3x3 grid, and voila!
For more information about this function, see Printing Posters.
Sometimes your documents deserve better presentation than a staple in the upper-left corner. Making booklets is easy.
The print driver will take care of the page positioning for you. All you have to do is fold the pages and staple them along
the middle.
㻢㻤㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0F0
Specifications
The machine specifications are subject to change without prior notice due to improvements of the machine.
Machine Specifications
Wireless LAN Specifications (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw / MF628Cw)
Document Type
Scan Area
Paper
Copy Specifications
Fax Specifications (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF628Cw)
Scanner Specifications
Printer Specifications
Specifications for E-mail Sending
Specifications for Scanning to Shared Folders
㻢㻥㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0F1
Machine Specifications
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
Type Personal Desktop
Power Supply 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
(Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased the product.)
Power Consumption
Maximum
1,200 W or less
Average consumption during standby mode
Approx. 25 W
Average consumption during sleep mode
Approx. 1 W
Average consumption during sleep mode (by Wireless Connections)
Approx. 2 W
When the power switch is turned OFF
0.5 W or less
Warm-up Time
(From power ON until
machine enters standby)
23 seconds or less
Weight Approx. 31 kg
Dimensions
(W x L x H)
In the normal state
430 x 484 x 479 mm
When the optional Cassette Feeding Module-V1 is installed
430 x 484 x 579 mm
When the optional handset is installed
510 x 484 x 479 mm
Environmental
Conditions
Temperature: 10 to 30°C
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH (no condensation)
Host Interface
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
Hi-Speed USB
USB
IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Infrastructure mode)
Noise
(measured in accordance
with ISO 7779, declared
noise emission in
accordance with ISO 9296)
LwAd (Declared A-weighted sound power level (1 B = 10 dB))
During standby mode: 3.9 B or less
During printing: 6.5 B or less
LpAm (Declared A-weighted emission sound pressure level (Bystander position))
During standby mode: Approx. 25 dB
During printing: Approx. 50 dB
Color Compatibility Full Color
Gradation 256 gradations
Acceptable
Documents Supported Document Types
Acceptable Paper
Stock Paper
Printable Range Printable Area
Scan Range Scan Area
The current value displayed on the rating label indicates average current consumption.
Warm-up time may vary depending on the use conditions and environment of the machine.
The value indicates the mass of the main unit including toner cartridges.
*1
*2
*3
*1
*2
*3
㻢㻥㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Type Personal Desktop
Power Supply 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
(Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased the product.)
Power Consumption
Maximum
900 W or less
Average consumption during standby mode
Approx. 20 W
Average consumption during sleep mode
Approx. 1 W
Average consumption during sleep mode (by Wireless Connections)
Approx. 2 W
When the power switch is turned OFF
0.5 W or less
Warm-up Time
23 seconds or less
Weight Approx. 26 kg
Dimensions
(W x L x H)
In the normal state
430 x 484 x 429 mm
When the optional handset is installed
510 x 484 x 429 mm
Environmental
Conditions
Temperature: 10 to 30°C
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH (no condensation)
Host Interface
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
Hi-Speed USB
USB
IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Infrastructure mode)
Noise
(measured in accordance
with ISO 7779, declared
noise emission in
accordance with ISO 9296)
LwAd (Declared A-weighted sound power level (1 B = 10 dB))
During standby mode: Inaudible
During printing: 6.2 B or less (Color)
During printing: 6.3 B or less (B/W)
LpAm (Declared A-weighted emission sound pressure level (Bystander position))
During standby mode: Inaudible
During printing: Approx. 48 dB
Color Compatibility Full Color
Gradation 256 gradations
Acceptable
Documents Supported Document Types
Acceptable Paper
Stock Paper
Printable Range Printable Area
Scan Range Scan Area
The current value displayed on the rating label indicates average current consumption.
Warm-up time may vary depending on the use conditions and environment of the machine.
The value indicates the mass of the main unit including toner cartridges.
For MF628Cw only.
Indicates that the sound pressure level of each bystander position is below the ISO 7779 absolute criteria for the background noise level.
*1
*2
(From
power
ON
until
machine
enters
standby)
*3
*4
*5
*5
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
㻢㻥㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0F3
Wireless LAN Specifications
Standard IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11n
Transmission Scheme DS-SS System, OFDM System
Frequency Range 2,412 to 2,472 MHz
Maximum Radio-
Frequency Power
Transmitte
15.98 dBm
Communication Mode Infrastructure Mode
Security WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Connection Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup
㻢㻥㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0F4
Document Type
Supported Document Types
Platen Glass Feeder
Type
Plain paper/Heavy paper/Photograph/Small documents (for example, index
cards)/Special types of paper (for example, tracing paper, transparencies,
etc.)/Booklet (Up to 20 mm thickness)
Plain paper
(one-page document/Multi-page
documents of the same size,
thickness and weight)
Size
(W x L) Up to 215.9 x 297 mm
Maximum size: 215.9 x 355.6
mm
Minimum size: 139.7 x 128 mm
Weight Up to 2 kg 50 to 105 g/m²
Paper
Capacity 1 sheet Up to 50 sheets (A4, 80 g/m²)
㻢㻥㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0F5
Scan Area
The shaded areas in the table below indicate the scan area of the document. Make sure that text and images in your documents fit
within the shaded area. The scan area varies depending on the function used and where documents are placed (in the feeder or on the
platen glass).
Platen Glass Feeder
Copy
The scan area for copying may differ from the
printable area. Printable Area
The scan area for copying may differ from the
printable area. Printable Area
Fax
(MF729Cx /
MF728Cdw /
MF628Cw)
Scan
Saving in a Computer Saving in a Computer
The whole document can be scanned.
Saving in a USB Memory/Sending by E-
mail/Sending by I-Fax/Sending to a File
Server/Sending to a FTP Server
Saving in a USB Memory/Sending by E-
mail/Sending by I-Fax/Sending to a File
Server/Sending to a FTP Server
The whole document can be scanned.
㻢㻥㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0F6
Paper
Supported Paper Sizes
Paper sizes that can be loaded in the paper drawer, the manual feed slot, and optional paper drawers are listed below.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
A4 (210.0 x 297.0 mm)
B5 (182.0 x 257.0 mm)
A5 (148.0 x 210.0 mm)
Legal (215.9 x 355.6 mm)
Letter (215.9 x 279.4 mm)
Statement (139.7 x 215.9 mm)
Executive (184.1 x 266.7 mm)
Officio (215.9 x 317.5 mm)
B-officio (215.9 x 355 mm)
M-officio (215.9 x 341 mm)
Government - Letter (203.2 x 266.7 mm)
Government - Legal (203.2 x 330.2 mm)
Foolscap (215.9 x 330.2 mm)
AFLS (206 x 337 mm)
ind-LGL (215 x 345 mm)
Envelope COM10 (104.7 x 241.3 mm)
Envelope Monarch (98.4 x 190.5 mm)
Envelope C5 (162 x 229 mm)
Envelope DL (110 x 220 mm)
Custom Paper Size
Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
The machine can print received fax documents.
You can load Envelope Monarch only in the manual feed slot.
Custom paper size of 100 to 215.9 mm in width and 148 to 355.6 mm in length can be loaded in the paper drawer. Custom paper size of 76.2 to 215.9
mm in width and 127 to 355.6 mm in length can be loaded in the manual feed slot.
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
A4 (210.0 x 297.0 mm)
B5 (182.0 x 257.0 mm)
A5 (148.0 x 210.0 mm)
Legal (215.9 x 355.6 mm)
Letter (215.9 x 279.4 mm)
Statement (139.7 x 215.9 mm)
Executive (184.1 x 266.7 mm)
Officio (215.9 x 317.5 mm)
B-officio (215.9 x 355 mm)
M-officio (215.9 x 341 mm)
Government - Letter (203.2 x 266.7 mm)
Government - Legal (203.2 x 330.2 mm)
*1 *2
*1
*1
*1 *2
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*3
*4
*1
*2
*3
*4
*1
*1
㻢㻥㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Foolscap (215.9 x 330.2 mm)
AFLS (206 x 337 mm)
ind-LGL (215 x 345 mm)
Envelope COM10 (104.7 x 241.3 mm)
Envelope Monarch (98.4 x 190.5 mm)
Envelope C5 (162 x 229 mm)
Envelope DL (110 x 220 mm)
Index Card (76.2 x 127 mm)
Custom Paper Size
The machine can print received fax documents.
You can load Index Card only in the manual feed slot.
Custom paper size of 83 to 215.9 mm in width and 127 to 355.6 mm in length can be loaded in the paper drawer or the manual feed slot.
The default paper size of the machine is set to A4. Change the paper size setting when using a different size of paper.
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
Paper Type and Paper Source Capacity
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
Paper Type Paper Capacity for Paper Drawer Paper Capacity for Manual Feed Slot
Plain paper 60 to 90 g/m² 250 sheets 50 sheets
Heavy paper
86 to 119 g/m² 200 sheets 30 sheets
120 to 163 g/m² 150 sheets 20 sheets
Recycled
paper 60 to 74 g/m² 250 sheets 50 sheets
Color paper 60 to 74 g/m² 250 sheets 50 sheets
Coated paper
100 to 110 g/m²
50 sheets
20 sheets
120 to 130 g/m²
155 to 165 g/m²
210 to 220 g/m²
Transparency 20 sheets
Label 50 sheets 20 sheets
Envelope 10 sheets 5 sheets
Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
Auto 2-sided printing is available on A4 or Letter size paper.
Use laser printer transparencies.
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Paper Type Paper Capacity for Paper Drawer Paper Capacity for Manual Feed Slot
*2
*3
*1
*2
*3
*1
*1
*1
*1
*2
*2
*2
*3
*1
*2
*3
㻢㻥㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Plain paper 60 to 90 g/m² 150 sheets 1 sheet
Heavy paper
85 to 120 g/m² 120 sheets 1 sheet
121 to 163 g/m² 100 sheets 1 sheet
Recycled paper 60 to 74 g/m² 150 sheets 1 sheet
Color paper 60 to 74 g/m² 150 sheets 1 sheet
Coated paper
100 to 110 g/m²
100 sheets
1 sheet
111 to 130 g/m²
131 to 160 g/m²
161 to 220 g/m² -
Thin Paper 60 g/m² 150 sheets 1 sheet
Transparency 50 sheets 1 sheet
Label 50 sheets 1 sheet
Index Card 15 sheets 1 sheet
Envelope 10 sheets 1 sheet
Use laser printer transparencies.
Paper Type and Setting for the Machine
Loading Paper
Printable Area
The shaded areas in the image below indicate the printable area of the document.
*1
*1
㻢㻥㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0F7
Copy Specifications
Scan
Resolution
Text/Photo/Map (Speed) (Color)
300 x 300 dpi
Text/Photo/Map, Text/Photo/Map (Speed) (B/W)
300 x 600 dpi
Text/Photo/Map (Quality), Printed Image, Text
600 x 600 dpi
Output
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Copy Ratio 100% 1:1, 400% Max, 200%, 141% A5->A4, 70% A4->A5, 50%, 25% Min
Copy
Speed
(A4 Plain
Direct)
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
Color: 20 cpm
B/W: 20 cpm
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Color: 14 cpm
B/W: 14 cpm
Continuous
Copying
Capacity
Maximum 999 copies
First Copy
Time
(A4)
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
Platen glass (Color): 16.2 seconds or less
Platen glass (B/W): 15.5 seconds or less
Feeder (Color): 16.7 seconds or less
Feeder (B/W): 16.4 seconds or less
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Platen glass (Color): 19 seconds or less
Platen glass (B/W): 19 seconds or less
Feeder (Color): 19 seconds or less
Feeder (B/W): 19 seconds or less
The copy speed on A4 size plain paper on one-side printing is measured during continuous copying. However, this varies depending on the use conditions
and environment of the machine.
*1
*1
㻣㻜㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0F8
Fax Specifications
Line Used Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
Communication
Mode Super G3, G3
Compression
Method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Modem Speed Super G3: 33.6 Kbps, G3: 14.4 Kbps
Automatic Fallback
Transmission
Speed
Approx. 3 seconds per page
(ECM-JBIG, transmitting from the memory at 33.6 Kbps)
Sending from
Memory/Receiving
in Memory
Maximum approx. 512 pages (Total pages of transmission/reception)
(Maximum number of fax jobs that can be sent from the memory: 30 jobs/Maximum number of fax jobs
that can be received into the memory: 90 jobs)
Fax Resolution
Normal: 200 x 100 dpi
Fine: 200 x 200 dpi
Photo: 200 x 200 dpi
Superfine: 200 x 400 dpi
Ultrafine: 400 x 400 dpi
Dialing
Favorites (19 destinations)
Coded dialing (281 destinations)
Group dialing (299 destinations)
Address Book dialing
Regular dialing (with numeric keys)
Automatic redialing
Manual redialing
Sequential broadcast (310 destinations)
Receiving
Automatic reception
Manual reception
Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25)
Reports
TX Result Report
Communication Management Report
(By default, auto output every 40 destinations)
RX Result Report
Telephone Type Handset (optional)/External telephone/External telephone with the built-in answer function/Data modem
Depending on your locale or your telephone connection, you may be unable to perform data communication. In this case, contact your local authorized
Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Based on ITU-T (ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector) Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.
*1
*2
*2
*1
*2
㻣㻜㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0F9
Scanner Specifications
Type Color scanner
Maximum
Scan Size
Platen glass: up to 216 x 297 mm
Feeder: up to 216 x 356 mm
Scan
Resolution
Optical resolution
Platen glass: up to 600 x 600 dpi
Feeder: up to 300 x 300 dpi
Software interpolation resolution
9,600 x 9,600 dpi
Scan Speed
(A4, 300 x 600
dpi)
Color: 10 sheets/minute
Black and White: 20 sheets/minute
Driver
TWAIN
WIA 2.0 (Windows Vista/7/8)
ICA (Mac OS X 10.6.x or later)
The communication time is not included.
*1
*1
㻣㻜㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FA
Printer Specifications
Printing
Method Indirect electrostatic system (On-demand fixing)
Paper
Capacity
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
Manual feed slot: Approx. 50 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)
Paper drawer: Approx. 250 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)
Cassette Feeding Module-V1 (optional): Approx. 250 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Manual feed slot: 1 sheet
Paper drawer: Approx 150 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)
Output Tray
Capacity
(a fresh stack
of A4 size
paper)
Approx. 125 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)
Print
Speed
(A4 Plain
Direct)
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw (1-sided printing)
Color: 20 ppm
B/W: 20 ppm
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw (2-sided printing)
Color: up to 10 ppm (pages per minute), 5 spm (sheets per minute)
B/W: up to 10 ppm (pages per minute), 5 spm (sheets per minute)
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Color: 14 ppm
B/W: 14 ppm
First Print
Time
(A4)
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
Color: 14.5 seconds or less
B/W: 14.5 seconds or less
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Color: 18 seconds or less
B/W: 18 seconds or less
Output
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Gradation 256 gradations
Toner
Cartridges Consumables
May varies depending on the installation environment and paper type used.
The print speed on A4 size plain paper is measured during continuous printing. However, this varies depending on the use conditions and environment of the
machine.
May vary depending on the output environment.
*1
*2
*3
*1
*2
*3
㻣㻜㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FC
Specifications for E-mail Sending
Communication
Protocol SMTP
Data Format PDF, PDF (Compact), PDF (Compact/OCR), PDF (OCR), JPEG, TIFF
Resolution
Black and White
JPEG: 300 dpi
TIFF: 300 dpi (MMR Compression)
PDF/PDF (OCR): 300 dpi (MMR Compression)
PDF (Compact)/PDF (Compact/OCR): Text 300 dpi, Background 150 dpi
Color
JPEG: 300 dpi
TIFF: 300 dpi (JPEG Compression)
PDF/PDF (OCR): 200 dpi (JPEG Compression)
PDF (Compact)/PDF (Compact/OCR): Text 300 dpi, Background 150 dpi
System
Environment
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012
Solaris Version 2.6 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
Mac OS X
Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Color Mode Color, Black/White
Inputted
Image Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Paper Size A4, A5
POP3 is available to use only when authenticating before sending.
*1
*1
㻣㻜㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FE
Specifications for Scanning to Shared Folders
Communication
Protocol SMB (TCP/IP)
Data Format PDF, PDF (Compact), PDF (Compact/OCR), PDF (OCR), JPEG, TIFF
Resolution
Black and White
JPEG: 300 dpi
TIFF: 300 dpi (MMR Compression)
PDF/PDF (OCR): 300 dpi (MMR Compression)
PDF (Compact)/PDF (Compact/OCR): Text 300 dpi, Background 150 dpi
Color
JPEG: 300 dpi
TIFF: 300 dpi (JPEG Compression)
PDF/PDF (OCR): 200 dpi (JPEG Compression)
PDF (Compact)/PDF (Compact/OCR): Text 300 dpi, Background 150 dpi
System
Environment
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012
Solaris Version 2.6 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
Mac OS X
Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Color Mode Color, Black/White
Inputted
Image Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Paper Size A4, A5
㻣㻜㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FF
Consumables
The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in this machine. Purchase consumables at your
local authorized Canon dealer. Observe safety and health precautions when storing and handling consumables ( Consumables).
Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or document type, you may need to replace consumables
before the end of the estimated lifetime.
Replacement toner cartridges are different from the supplied toner cartridges, so the yield may also differ.
Specifying an auto shutdown time shorter than the default setting (4 hours) may shorten the life of the toner cartridges.
Toner Cartridges
Supplied Toner Cartridges
The average yields of the toner cartridges that come with the machine are shown in the table below.
The average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19798" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic
electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization])
when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
Black: 1,200 sheets
Composite Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan): 1,400 sheets
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Black: 800 sheets
Composite Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan): 800 sheets
Replacement Toner Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield of toner cartridge
Canon Cartridge 718 Black 3,400 sheets
Canon Cartridge 718 Yellow
Canon Cartridge 718 Magenta
Canon Cartridge 718 Cyan
Composite Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan): 2,900 sheets
MF628Cw / MF623Cn
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield of toner cartridge
Canon Cartridge 731 Black
Canon Cartridge 731 H Black
1,400 sheets
2,400 sheets
Canon Cartridge 731 Yellow
Canon Cartridge 731 Magenta
Canon Cartridge 731 Cyan
Composite Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan): 1,500 sheets
*
*
*
*
㻣㻜㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0H1
Optional Items
The functionality of the machine can be fully utilized by using the optional items described below. Optional items can be purchased from
the retail outlet where you purchased the machine or from your local Canon dealer.
Cassette Feeding Module-V1 (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Copy Card Reader-F1 (MF729Cx)
System Options (MF729Cx)
License Registration (MF729Cx)
In addition to the provided standard paper drawer and manual feed slot, you can install the optional paper
drawer to the machine. Adding the drawer enables you to load different sizes of paper in each drawer and
enables the machine to hold up to 550 sheets (with the original drawer, manual feed slot, and optional paper
drawer).
Paper
Capacity 250 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)
Available
Paper Paper
Power Supply From main unit
Dimensions
(W x L x H) 430 x 454 x 102 mm
Weight Approx. 4 kg
The card control system simplifies the logon process of Department ID Management by using the control card instead of entering the
department ID. You can log on to the machine by inserting a control card and log off by removing it.
Card slot
Insert the control card into the card slot when the logon screen is displayed. Remove the control card from the card slot after
using the machine. The main screen appears on the display after you log on, and the logon screen appears on the display after
you log off.
Control card
You can use the control card shown below. Make sure that the card is facing in the correct direction when you insert it into the
card slot.
Available
Cards Magnetic
Cassette Feeding Module-V1 (MF729Cx / MF728Cdw / MF724Cdw)
Copy Card Reader-F1 (MF729Cx)
㻣㻜㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Card Readout
Method Magnetic readout
Magnetic
Card Reading
Direction
Face up
Store/Replay Replay
Dimensions
(H x W x D) 40 mm x 88 mm x 96 mm (excluding the attachment kit and cable)
Weight Approximately 200 g (including the attachment kit and cable)
This section describes the system related optional items and their functions.
Barcode Printing Kit
This option enables you to generate bar codes in various formats. Note that if you want to print bar codes, PCL must be enabled. For
information on using the Barcode Printing Kit, see the Barcode Printing Guide (PDF manual). Click the icon below to select a language to
view the guide in.
Send PDF Security Feature Set
You can enhance the security of PDF files with the Send PDF Security Feature Set. This option enables you to add a digital signature to
PDF files or to create encrypted PDF files when scanning documents.
To activate certain system options, you need to obtain a license key and register the key to the machine.
Obtaining a License Key
You can obtain a license key by using a web browser. Access the License Management System (http://www.canon.com/lms/license) and
follow the procedure. As a part of the procedure, you are required to enter the following numbers.
License Access Number
Check the license access number provided on the License Access Number Certificate that is included in the package of the option.
Serial Number of the Machine
Check the serial number of the machine by pressing ( ) <Check Device Configuration>.
Registering a License Key
Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen..
Tap <System Management Settings>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .Logging on to the
Machine
Tap <Register License>.
System Options (MF729Cx)
License Registration (MF729Cx)
1
2
3
㻣㻜㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Confirm the message on the screen, and tap <OK>.
Enter the license key using the numeric keys, and tap <Register>.
Registration starts. Wait until the <Installation complete. Effective after the main power is turned OFF and ON.> message is
displayed.
If the <Registering... Do not turn the main power OFF.> message is displayed, enable the functions that are required to
activate the option and register the license key again.
Tap <Close>.
4
5
6
㻣㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FH
Manuals Included with the Machine
The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Getting Started Read this manual first. It describes basic setup procedures, from removing the packing
materials to setting up the machine.
Wireless LAN
Setting
Guide (MF729Cx
/ MF728Cdw /
MF724Cdw /
MF628Cw)
This manual describes the procedure for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN router, it
also contains information for troubleshooting when configuring the settings. Read this manual
with Getting Started.
e-Manual (This
Manual)
This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed using a
Web browser. You can browse information by category or enter a keyword to search for pages
on a specific topic. Using e-Manual
MF Driver
Installation
Guide
This manual describes how to install the MF drivers, MF Scan Utility, and the supplied
software on the provided DVD-ROM.
Send Setting
Guide
This manual describes how to configure settings and prepare for sending scanned images by
e-mail and saving scanned images to shared folders.
㻣㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FJ
Using e-Manual
The e-Manual is a manual that can be viewed on your computer that describes all of the functions of the machine. You can search from
your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly find the page you are looking for. You can use the e-Manual by installing it on your
computer, or start the e-Manual directly from the provided DVD-ROM. Installing e-Manual
How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for
You can find the page you are looking for using the following 3 methods.
Search the contents
You can find the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the [Contents] tab on the left side of the screen, and selecting
the [Chapter icon] next to the topic.
Top Page
Topic Page
Search by keyword
Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "fax" or "wireless LAN", and the pages containing the keyword are displayed. You
can find the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword
search also supports the AND Boolean to search for multiple keywords.
Search Tab
Search the site map
Click [Site Map] on the top part of the screen, and a list of all the e-Manual topics is displayed. From there you can find the topic
you are looking for.
Site Map
System Requirements
To use the e-Manual, the following Web browsers are required. The content of the e-Manual may not display correctly if a
browser not listed below is used.
Windows:
Internet Explorer 8.0/9.0/10.0/11.0
Firefox 24.x ESR/26.x/29.x/30.x/31.x/31.x ESR/32.x/33.x/34.x/35.x/36.x/37.x/
38.x/39.x
Mac OS:
Safari 7.x/8.x
Firefox 24.x ESR/26.x/29.x/30.x/31.x/31.x ESR/32.x/33.x/34.x/35.x/36.x/37.x/
38.x/39.x
The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM provided for this product may include manuals in PDF format. If you do not have access to Adobe
Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging
Technologies.
About the latest e-Manual
For the latest e-Manual, see the Canon Web site.
㻣㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FK
Installing e-Manual
Install the e-Manual on your computer by using the provided DVD-ROM that comes with the machine.
Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
Click [Custom Installation].
If the above screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen.
If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
Select [USB Connection], and click [Next].
Select [USB Connection], even if connected using a network.
Clear all the check boxes except for [Manuals], and click [Install].
1
2
3
4
㻣㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Read the License Agreement and click [Yes] to agree.
Select a language and click [NEXT].
Select the folder to install to, and click [Install].
The installation begins.
Wait a moment. This process may take some time.
Click [Exit].
Click [Next] [Exit].
5
6
7
8
9
㻣㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Viewing the e-Manual
Double-click the shortcut icon of the e-Manual on the desktop.
If a security warning message appears
Click [Allow blocked content].
TIPS for Viewing the e-Manual Directly from the provided DVD-ROM
1Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
If the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen does not appear, remove the provided DVD-ROM from the
drive and then insert it again, or see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen.
2Click [Manuals].
3Click [e-Manual].
㻣㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FL
Uninstalling e-Manual
You can remove the e-Manual from the computer to restore the computer to the same state it was in before the e-Manual was installed.
Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
Click [Start Software Programs].
If the above screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen.
If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
Click [Start] for [Manual Uninstaller].
Click [Next].
Uninstall begins.
Wait a moment. This process may take some time.
Click [Exit].
1
2
3
4
5
㻣㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [Back] [Exit].
6
㻣㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FR
Screen Layout of e-Manual
The e-Manual is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.
Top Page
Appears when e-Manual is started.
Canon
Click to return to the top page.
[Contents] tab/[Search] tab
Click to toggle the display between the table of contents and search.
Contents
The titles of chapters are displayed ( ). Place the mouse pointer over one of the titles, and topics of the chapter are displayed
on the right. Click a topic and its page is displayed.
[Top]
Click to return to the top page.
[Site map]
Click to display all the e-Manual topics.
㻣㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Help]
Click to display information on how to view the e-Manual, how to perform a search, and other information.
[Print]
Click to print the displayed content.
Feature Highlights
Provides a variety of practical examples of ways to use the machine. Click / / / to toggle the display of practical
examples by category, or click the sliding display for more information about each category. The sliding display can be stopped
by moving the pointer onto it. Feature Highlights
[Quick Help] / [Troubleshooting] / [Maintenance]
Click to view how to solve problems or maintain the machine.
[For Mac OS Users]
Click to view precautions when using Mac OS.
[Notice]
Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.
[Office Locations]
Click to display contact information for any inquiries about the machine.
Feature Highlights
Provides a variety of practical examples of ways to use the machine.
/
Click to display the detailed information. Click again to close the window.
Click to display the corresponding topic page.
Topic Page
Contains information about how to configure and use the machine.
㻣㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Contents]
The chapter icons and titles are displayed.
[Expand all]/[Collapse all]
Click [Expand all] to display all of the subsections of all topics. Click [Collapse all] to close all of the subsections of all the
topics.
Chapter icons
Click a chapter icon to navigate to the top of the corresponding chapter.
Topic page
Displays the topics of the selected chapter. If "+" is displayed on the topic, clicking it displays the subsections of that topic.
Click "-" to close the expanded topic.
[Print all]
All pages of the selected chapter are opened in a separate window. The chapter can be printed if necessary.
Navigation
See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.
Click to return to the page top.
/
Click to display the previous or following topic.
Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web browser.
Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click again to close the detailed descriptions.
Search Tab
Contains a text box to perform a search and find the page you are looking for.
㻣㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
[Enter keyword(s) here]
Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results in the search result list ( ). Separate keywords with
a space and search for pages containing all keywords. Enclose (a) keyword(s) in quotation marks to search only for pages with
exact matches.
[Search options]
Click to specify search conditions such as scope of search and fuzzy match conditions. To display the conditions, click this
button when it is gray. To close the display, click the button when it is orange.
Search scope selector
Specifies the search scope. You can efficiently search for topics by narrowing the search scope. The search scope selector is
especially useful when you can predict the general location of the topic that you are looking for.
Search options selector
Select the check box to make your search case-sensitive.
[Search with these conditions]
Click to display the search results with the conditions specified with and .
Search result list
Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specified keywords. From the results, locate the page you are looking
for and click the topic title of the page. If the results cannot be displayed on one page, click / or a page number to
display the results on the corresponding page.
Site Map
Displays the table of contents for the e-Manual.
㻣㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Chapter icons
Click to jump to the topic of the selected chapter.
Title (Topic)
Displays titles and topics. Click a title or topic to jump to the page.
Click to return to the page top.
/
Click to go to the previous or next chapter.
㻣㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FS
Viewing e-Manual
Marks
Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and other information are
indicated using the marks below.
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed
correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To
use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully, and make sure not to
perform the described operations.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the
machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure.
Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.
Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual
Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:
Type Example
Keys on the
operation panel
(B&W)
Settings
displayed on the
operation panel
<Timer Settings>
<Specify the destination.>
Buttons and
other text
interfaces
displayed on the
computer display
[Preferences]
Computer Screens Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the e-Manual are those for the MF729Cx. Depending on the operating system you are using,
the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from the actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and
software may differ depending on their version.
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, illustrations used in the e-Manual are those for the MF729Cx. When differences are significant, multiple
illustrations are used with the model names, such as "MFXXXX / MFXXXX."
㻣㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FU
Others
This section describes basic Windows operations and includes disclaimers, copyright information, and other information.
㻣㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FW
Basic Windows Operations
Displaying [Computer] or [My Computer]
Displaying the Printer Folder
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen
Printing a Test Page in Windows
Checking the Bit Architecture
Viewing the Computer Name
Checking the LPR/RAW Printer Port
Displaying [Computer] or [My Computer]
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Computer].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer] [Computer] or [This PC].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer] [Computer] or [This PC].
Windows Server 2003
[Start] select [My Computer].
Displaying the Printer Folder
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel] [Printer].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Devices and Printers].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows Server 2003
[Start] select [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
Open Windows Explorer.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008
[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer].
Select [Network] or [My Network Places] in printer server.
To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for computers.
1
2
㻣㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Shared printers are displayed.
1
Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen
If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided DVD-ROM, follow the
procedure below. The DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The DVD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the
computer you are using.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and files] or [Start Search] press the [ENTER] key.
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windows Server 2003
[Start] [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Printing a Test Page in Windows
You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.
Load A4 size paper in the manual feed slot. Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click the icon for the machine's printer driver and then click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
1
2
3
㻣㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.
The test page is printed.
Checking the Bit Architecture
If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.
Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
Check the bit architecture.
For 32-bit versions
[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.
For 64-bit versions
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
4
1
2
3
㻣㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Viewing the Computer Name
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012
1Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel]
2Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Security] or [System and Maintenance] [System].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
Windows Server 2003
1[Start] select [Control Panel].
2Click the [System].
3Click the [Computer Name] tab.
4Click [Change].
Checking the LPR/RAW Printer Port
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Right-click the machine's icon and then click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
1
2
㻣㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Check the port settings.
Click the [Ports] tab.
Make sure that the correct port is selected for the printer.
3
㻣㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FX
For Mac OS Users
Your machine may have not come with a driver for Mac OS depending on when you purchased the machine. The drivers are
uploaded to the Canon website when they become needed. Check the operating system of your computer and download
the appropriate driver from the Canon website. For the driver installation procedure and how to operate the driver, see the
MF Driver Installation Guide.
In the e-Manual and MF Driver Installation Guide, methods to operate in the Windows environment are explained as examples. To view
how to use the driver and utility for Mac OS, see the following guide or help.
Function Object Reference
Print function
Installing the Driver
Getting Started
MF Driver Installation Guide
Canon MF Printer Driver Guide
Using each feature Driver's Help
Canon MF Printer Driver Guide
Fax function
Installing the Driver
Getting Started
MF Driver Installation Guide
Canon Fax Driver Guide
Using each feature Driver's Help
Canon Fax Driver Guide
Scan function
Installing the Driver
Getting Started
MF Driver Installation Guide
Canon Scanner Driver Guide
Scanning
(Setting the MF Scan Utility or ScanGear MF) Canon Scanner Driver Guide
Displaying the Driver Guide
Double-click the following HTML file in the [Documents] folder on the provided DVD-ROM.
Canon MF Printer Driver Guide
[Documents]-[Print]-[XXXXXX] -[Guide]-[index.html]
Canon Fax Driver Guide
[Documents]-[FAX]-[XXXXXX] -[Guide]-[index.html]
Canon Scanner Driver Guide
[Documents]-[Scan]-[XXXXXX] -[Guide]-[index.html]
For [XXXXXX], select your desired language.
Displaying the Driver Help
Click [ ] on the driver.
*
*
*
*
㻣㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0FY
Notice
Third Party Services and Software
Third Party Software
EMC requirements of EC Directive
This equipment conforms with the essential EMC requirements of EC Directive. We declare that this product conforms with the EMC
requirements of EC Directive at nominal mains input 230 V, 50 Hz although the rated input of the product is 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz.
Use of shielded cable is necessary to comply with the technical EMC requirements of EC Directive.
Laser Safety Information
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this equipment is hermetically
sealed within the protective housing and external cover. No radiation can leak from the machine in the normal operation of the product
by the user.
This machine is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product under IEC60825-1: 2007, EN60825-1: 2007.
220 to 240 V Model
The label shown below is attached to the laser scan unit on the machine.
This machine has been classified under IEC60825-1: 2007, EN60825-1: 2007 and conforms to the following classes:
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASSE 1
APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LÁSER DE CLASE 1
APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1
LUOKAN 1 LASER-TUOTE
LASERPRODUKT KLASS 1
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the manuals for the machine may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WEEE Directive
㻣㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive
(2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy
metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable
threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new
similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and
accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to
potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will
contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your
household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-europe.com/battery.
International ENERGY STAR Program
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Canon Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR Program for
energy efficiency.
The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international program that promotes energy saving
through the use of computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy
consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily.
The targeted products are office equipment, such as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. The
standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2 established by the IPv6 Forum.
Wireless LAN Regulatory Information
Regulatory information for users in Jordan
MF729Cx/MF728Cdw/MF724Cdw/MF628Cw includes approved Wireless LAN Module (Model name: AW-NM383).
Contains Wireless LAN Module approved by TRC/SS/2014/38
Regulatory information for users in UAE
MF729Cx/MF728Cdw/MF724Cdw/MF628Cw includes approved Wireless LAN Module (Model name: AW-NM383).
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER0126617/14
DEALER No: DA0060877/11
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS
PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
Copyright
Copyright CANON INC. 2015
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or
computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the
®
㻣㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
prior written permission of Canon Inc.
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, Mac OS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome, Android, Google Docs and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc. UFST® is a trademark
of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593; 6,754,382;
7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems Incorporated
unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems' implementation of the PostScript
language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item refers to a printing
device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and
not to devices or items that purport to
be merely compatible with the PostScript language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.
Copyright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems Incorporated
unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems' implementation of the PostScript
language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item refers to a printing
device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and
not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript language.
㻣㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe LiveCycle® Policy Server, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
㻣㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
0SCJ-0H6
Contact Us
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.
16-6, Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON CHINA CO. LTD.
2F Jinbao Building No.89, Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, PRC
CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD
1 Fusionopolis Place, #15-10, Galaxis, Singapore 138522
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD
Building A, The Park Estate, 5 Talavera Road, Macquarie Park, NSW 2113, Australia
CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES
http://www.canon.com/
㻣㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻣㻟㻡
㻝㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Introduction 3
About the Drivers and Software 4
Supported Operating Systems 5
Selecting the Driver to Be Installed 6
Installing 7
Installing from the Supplied DVD-ROM 8
Installing after Downloading from the Canon Website 22
Installing to Use WSD 29
Uninstalling 34
Troubleshooting 37
Appendix 38
Using the Installation Guide 39
Screen Configuration of the Installation Guide 40
Viewing the Installation Guide 43
Other 44
Basic Windows Operations 45
Notice 47
㻞㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-000
Introduction
This Installation Guide mainly explains how to install and uninstall the MF Drivers and MF Scan Utility.
System requirements for installation of the MF Drivers or MF Scan Utility. Supported Operating Systems
Installing
This section explains how to install the MF Drivers and MF Scan Utility so the machine is ready to print from a computer. Installing
Uninstalling
This section explains how to uninstall the MF Drivers or MF Scan Utility. Uninstalling
Troubleshooting
This section explains how to resolve problems that may occur during installation and uninstallation of the MF Drivers or MF Scan Utility.
Troubleshooting
Appendix
This section explains how to use the Installation Guide and basic Windows operations. Appendix
㻟㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-001
About the Drivers and Software
Be sure to read the following before installing the MF Drivers or other software. How to install differs with the connection method and
environment.
MF Drivers
Printer driver You can print from an application to the machine once you have the printer driver installed on your
computer.
Fax driver
If you install the fax driver on your computer, you can select "Print" from an application, select the Canon
fax driver as a printer, and specify the output destination and options. The fax driver converts the data into
an image that conforms to standard fax protocols so that the data can be printed or saved using the
recipient's fax machine.
Scanner driver You can use the machine as a scanner once you have the scanner driver installed on your computer.
Network
Scanner
Selector
You need this utility software to use the machine as a network scanner. It is automatically installed along
with the scanner driver.
MF Scan Utility The MF Scan Utility provides a group of commands for you to open a scanned image in an application, send it
as an e-mail attachment file, store it on the hard disk, etc.
Toner Status This application informs you with the amount of cartridge consumption on the computer it is installed on
(pop-up display). You can also access a site for purchasing cartridges directly from the application.
Additional Software Programs
Canon MF/LBP
Wireless Setup
Assistant
You can check the SSID, the network key, etc. when connecting to a wireless LAN using "Canon MF/LBP
Wireless Setup Assistant".
Presto!
PageManager You can handle scanned images in many ways using this software.
Fax driver may not be supplied depending on the model you are using.
This software may not be supplied depending on your model or your country or region.
Depending on the operating system you are using, some functions of the driver software included in the DVD-ROM may
not be usable. The newest software is posted on the Canon web site. Please verify the operating environment etc. and
download the appropriate software if required.
*1
*2
*1
*2
㻠㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-002
Supported Operating Systems
Check the following for MF Driver and MF Scan Utility support for each OS.
:Supported
:Not supported
Windows Vista/7/8 Windows Server 2003/Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Printer driver
(UFRII LT)
Printer driver
(UFRII LT (V4))
Printer driver
(PCL5)
Printer driver
(PCL6)
Printer driver
(PS)
Fax driver
Scanner driver
Network Scanner
Selector
MF Scan Utility
Toner Status
Canon MF/LBP
Wireless Setup
Assistant
Presto!
PageManager
*1 Supported only over network connection.
*2 Supported only with Windows 8.1.
*3 Supported only with Windows Server 2012 R2.
*4 Supported only over wireless LAN connection.
*5 These software may not be supplied depending on your model or your country or region.
*1 *1
*2 *3
*5 *1 *1
*5 *1 *1
*5 *1 *1
*5 *1 *1
*1
*5
*4 *4 *4
㻡㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-003
Selecting the Driver to Be Installed
Before installing the MF Drivers, on the machine, specify the connection method with the computer and the types of drivers to use.
Press and tap <Menu>.
If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press . (Logging on to the
Machine: e-Manual)
Tap <System Management Settings>.
Tap <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>.
Tap <Network> or <USB>.
Select the driver you are using.
Selectable page description language
Network
FAX
UFRII LT
UFRII LT (V4)
PCL5
PCL6
PS
USB
UFRII LT
UFRII LT (V4)
PCL5
PCL6
PS
Restart the machine.
If you selected <USB> in step 4, turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON.
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻢㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-004
Installing
This section explains how to install the MF Drivers and MF Scan Utility so the machine is ready to print from a computer.
Installing from the Supplied DVD-ROM
Install the MF Drivers and MF Scan Utility from the DVD-ROM that is supplied with the machine. Perform the setup procedure, from
connecting the machine and your computer to installation of the drivers. Installing from the Supplied DVD-ROM
Installing after Downloading from the Canon Website
The latest MF Driver and MF Scan Utility versions are available for downloading from the Canon website. Download the MF Drivers or MF
Scan Utility if, for example, the drivers on the DVD-ROM do not support the operating system of your computer. Installing after
Downloading from the Canon Website
Adding a WSD Network Printer
If you are using Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012, you can use WSD (Web Services on Devices) to add a network
printer. Installing to Use WSD
㻣㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-005
Installing from the Supplied DVD-ROM
The order of operations in Easy Installation is "Install the drivers" "Install the software supplied with the DVD-ROM" "Install the e-
Manual". For more information about how to connect the machine and a computer, see "Getting Started" before starting.
You can choose to install standard software and the e-Manual with [Easy Installation], or specify the software and manuals to install with
[Custom Installation].
Installing with [Easy Installation]
Installing with [Custom Installation]
Checking the Results of the Installation
When connecting the machine to a computer via a USB cable
Follow the on-screen instructions to connect a USB cable. If a USB cable is connected before the drivers are installed, remove
the cable and re-install the drivers.
A USB cable is not included with the machine. Prepare one separately.
The options to be displayed differ depending on your country or region.
Prepare to Install.
USB Connection
Turn OFF the machine.
Wired/Wireless LAN Connection
Connect the machine to a computer via the network.
Before starting installation of the drivers, configure network settings. For more information about how to configure network
settings, see "Getting Started".
Log on to the computer with an administrator account.
Insert the supplied DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
Click [Easy Installation].
If you do not want to install the e-Manual on your computer or want to customize installed software, click [Custom
Installing with [Easy Installation]
1
2
3
4
㻤㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Installation].
If the above screen does not appear, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen.
If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
Select the connection method with the computer.
USB Connection
Select [USB Connection], and click [Next].
Wired/Wireless LAN Connection
Select [Network Connection], and click [Next].
In Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012, this screen is not displayed. Proceed to the following procedure.
Click [Install].
Read the License Agreement and click [Yes] to agree.
5
6
7
㻥㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Click [Next].
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.
USB Connection
1Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the machine and a computer via USB cable and turn ON the
machine.
2Click [Exit].
8
9
㻝㻜㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Wired/Wireless LAN Connection
Installation of the drivers is complete.
If you cannot confirm that the machine and computer are connected
The screen below may appear in instances such as when it took time to connect the machine with a computer via
USB cable. Turn OFF the machine, reconnect the cable, and then turn ON the machine again.
1When the following screen appears, click [Yes].
2Select the machine, and click [Next].
㻝㻝㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Follow the on-screen instructions to install Toner Status.
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the e-Manual.
Read the information in the following screen carefully, select [Accept] or [Do Not Accept], and click [Next].
If no machines are displayed in [Device List]
Check the computer and machine connection and IP address settings (Viewing Network Settings: e-Manual), and
click [Update Device List]. If the machine is still not displayed at all, click [Search by IP Address] enter the IP
address set on the machine [OK].
3Check the settings, and click [Start].
Installation of the drivers is complete.
10
11
12
㻝㻞㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
If you select [Accept], the Product Extended Survey Program is installed.
The Product Extended Survey Program is a program to send basic information related to installation and usage of the printer to
Canon every month for 10 years. It does not send any other information, including your personal information. You can uninstall
the Product Extended Survey Program at any time. Uninstalling the Product Extended Survey Program
Click [Next].
Select the [Restart Computer Now (Recommended)] check box, and click [Restart] after removing the DVD-
ROM.
Prepare to Install.
USB Connection
Turn OFF the machine.
Wired/Wireless LAN Connection
Connect the machine to a computer via the network.
Before starting installation of the drivers, configure network settings. For more information about how to configure network
settings, see "Getting Started".
Log on to the computer with an administrator account.
Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
Insert the User supplied DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
Click [Custom Installation].
Installing with [Custom Installation]
13
14
1
2
3
4
㻝㻟㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
If you want to install standard software and the e-Manual on your computer, click [Easy Installation].
If the above screen does not appear, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen.
If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
Select the connection method with the computer.
USB Connection
Select [USB Connection], and click [Next].
Wired/Wireless LAN Connection
Select [Network Connection], and click [Next].
In Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012, this screen is not displayed. Proceed to the following procedure.
Select the check box next to the application you want to install and click [Install].
5
6
㻝㻠㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Read the License Agreement, and click [Yes] to agree.
Click [Next].
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.
USB Connection
1Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the machine and a computer via USB cable and turn ON the
machine.
7
8
9
㻝㻡㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Wired/Wireless LAN Connection
2Click [Exit].
Installation of the drivers is complete.
If you cannot confirm that the machine and computer are connected
The screen below may appear in instances such as when it took time to connect the machine with a computer via
USB cable. Turn OFF the machine, reconnect the cable, and then turn ON the machine again.
1When the following screen appears, click [Yes].
㻝㻢㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
2Select the machine, and click [Next].
If no machines are displayed in [Device List]
Check the computer and machine connection and IP address settings (Viewing Network Settings: e-Manual), and
click [Update Device List]. If the machine is still not displayed at all, click [Search by IP Address] enter the IP
address set on the machine [OK].
3Select the drivers to install, and click [Next].
To obtain device information for using a print server
Select the [Canon Driver Information Assist Service] check box.
4Select the check box for the printer driver being installed, and click [Next].
This screen is not displayed depending on the model you are using. Proceed to the following procedure.
㻝㻣㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
5Specify details for each driver.
[Printer Name]/[Fax Name]
Change the name as necessary.
[Use as Shared Printer]/[Use as Shared Fax]
Select the check box if you want to share the machine (using the computer where you are performing the
installation as a print server). Setting Up Print Server: e-Manual
[Shared Name]
Change the shared name as necessary.
[Drivers to Add]
If you have selected the [Use as Shared Printer]/[Use as Shared Fax] check box, install additional drivers as
necessary.
Select the operating system, and click [OK] to install additional drivers.
6Check the displayed information, and click [Start].
㻝㻤㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Follow the on-screen instructions to install MF Scan Utility.
Follow the on-screen instructions to install Toner Status.
Follow the on-screen instructions to install Presto! PageManager and the e-Manual.
Read the information in the following screen carefully, select [Accept] or [Do Not Accept], and click [Next].
7Configure the machine normally used and make a test print.
To configure the machine as the machine normally used, select the driver, and click [Next].
To print a test page, check the driver.
8Click [Exit].
In Windows Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012, MF Scan Utility is not installed. Proceed to step 11.
Installation of the drivers is complete.
10
11
12
13
㻝㻥㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
If you select [Accept], the Product Extended Survey Program is installed.
The Product Extended Survey Program is a program to send basic information related to installation and usage of the printer to
Canon every month for 10 years. It does not send any other information, including your personal information. You can uninstall
the Product Extended Survey Program at any time. Uninstalling the Product Extended Survey Program
Click [Next].
Select the [Restart Computer Now (Recommended)] check box, and click [Restart] after removing the DVD-
ROM.
You can check whether the MF Drivers, MF Scan Utility, e-Manual, and etc. are installed correctly or not by whether the icons appear.
Printer driver
When the printer driver is installed correctly, an icon for the installed printer appears in the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder
Fax driver
When the fax driver is installed correctly, an icon for the installed fax appears in the printer folder. Displaying the
Printer Folder
Scanner driver (network connection)
When the scanner driver is installed correctly, an icon for the installed scanner appears in the [Scanners and
Cameras] or [Scanners and Cameras Properties] folder.
Scanner driver (USB connection)
Checking the Results of the Installation
14
15
㻞㻜㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
When the scanner driver is installed correctly, an icon for the installed scanner appears in the [Scanners and
Cameras] or [Scanners and Cameras Properties] folder.
MF Scan Utility
When MF Scan Utility is installed correctly, an MF Scan Utility icon appears in the [MF Scan Utility] folder located in
the [Canon] folder on the [start] menu.
Network Scanner Selector
When Network Scanner Selector is installed correctly, a Network Scanner Selector icon appears in the taskbar.
e-Manual
When the e-Manual is installed correctly, an e-Manual icon appears on the desktop.
If you install the e-Manual with [Custom Installation], the icon does not appear.
Toner Status
When Toner Status is installed correctly, a Toner Status icon appears in the taskbar.
If the icon is not displayed
Uninstall the drivers ( Uninstalling the MF Drivers) and repeat the setup from the beginning.
Other software
You can install Presto! PageManager with [Custom Installation]. When Presto! PageManager is installed correctly, a Presto!
PageManager icon appears on the desktop.
㻞㻝㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-006
Installing after Downloading from the Canon Website
Install the MF Drivers or MF Scan Utility after downloading the latest version from the Canon website.
Installing the MF Drivers
Installing the MF Scan Utility
Checking the Results of the Installation
When connecting the machine to a computer via a USB cable
Follow the on-screen instructions to connect a USB cable. If a USB cable is connected before the drivers are installed, remove
the cable and re-install the drivers.
A USB cable is not included with the machine. Prepare one separately.
If an older version is already installed, a screen similar to the following appears when installing the new version, and
installation is canceled. Uninstall the older version before installing the new version. Uninstalling
Prepare to Install.
USB Connection
Turn OFF the machine.
Wired/Wireless LAN Connection
Connect the machine to a computer via the network.
Before starting installation of the drivers, configure network settings. For more information about how to configure network
settings, see "Getting Started".
Log on to the computer with an administrator account.
Download the drivers from the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).
For more information about how to download the drivers, see the driver download page for your machine.
Double-click the downloaded installer and click [Next].
Read the License Agreement, and click [Yes] to agree.
Installing the MF Drivers
1
2
3
4
5
㻞㻞㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.
USB Connection
1Select [USB Connection], and click [Next].
2Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the machine and a computer via USB cable and turn ON the
machine.
3Click [Exit].
6
㻞㻟㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Wired/Wireless LAN Connection
Installation of the drivers is complete.
If you cannot confirm that the machine and computer are connected
The screen below may appear in instances such as when it took time to connect the machine with a computer via
USB cable. Turn OFF the machine, reconnect the cable, and then turn ON the machine again.
1Select [Network Connection], and click [Next].
2When the following screen appears, click [Yes].
㻞㻠㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
In Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012, this screen is not displayed. Proceed to the following procedure.
3Select the machine, and click [Next].
If no machines are displayed in [Device List]
Check the computer and machine connection and IP address settings (Viewing Network Settings: e-Manual),
and click [Update Device List]. If the machine is still not displayed at all, click [Search by IP Address] enter
the IP address set on the machine [OK].
4Select the drivers to install, and click [Next].
If you did not select either [Printer] or [Fax], proceed to step 6.
To obtain device information for using a print server
Select the [Canon Driver Information Assist Service] check box.
5Select the printer drivers to install, and click [Next].
This screen is not displayed depending on the model you are using. Proceed to the following procedure.
㻞㻡㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
6Specify details for each driver.
[Printer Name]/[Fax Name]
Change the name as necessary.
[Use as Shared Printer]/[Use as Shared Fax]
Select the check box if you want to share the machine (using the computer where you are performing the
installation as a print server). Setting Up Print Server :e-Manual
[Shared Name]
Change the shared name as necessary.
[Drivers to Add]
If you have selected the [Use as Shared Printer]/[Use as Shared Fax] check box, install additional drivers as
necessary.
Select the operating system, and click [OK] to install additional drivers.
7Check the displayed information, and click [Start].
㻞㻢㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Log on to the computer with an administrator account.
Download the MF Scan Utility from the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).
For more information about how to download the MF Scan Utility, see the driver download page for your machine.
Unzip the downloaded file.
Click [Next].
Read the License Agreement, and click [Yes] to agree.
Click [Complete].
You can check whether the MF Drivers are installed correctly or not by whether the icons appear.
Printer driver
When the printer driver is installed correctly, an icon for the installed printer appears in the printer folder
(Displaying the Printer Folder).
8Configure the machine normally used and make a test print.
To configure the machine as the machine normally used, select the driver, and click [Next].
To print a test page, check the driver.
9Click [Exit].
Installation of the drivers is complete.
Installing the MF Scan Utility
Checking the Results of the Installation
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻞㻣㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Fax driver
When the fax driver is installed correctly, an icon for the installed fax appears in the printer folder ( Displaying the
Printer Folder).
Scanner driver (network connection)
When the scanner driver is installed correctly, an icon for the installed scanner appears in the [Scanners and
Cameras] or [Scanners and Cameras Properties] folder.
Scanner driver (USB connection)
When the scanner driver is installed correctly, an icon for the installed scanner appears in the [Scanners and
Cameras] or [Scanners and Cameras Properties] folder.
MF Scan Utility
When MF Scan Utility is installed correctly, an MF Scan Utility icon appears in the [MF Scan Utility] folder located in
the [Canon] folder on the [start] menu.
Network Scanner Selector
When Network Scanner Selector is installed correctly, a Network Scanner Selector icon appears in the taskbar.
If the icon is not displayed
Uninstall the drivers ( Uninstalling the MF Drivers) and repeat the installation from the beginning.
㻞㻤㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-007
Installing to Use WSD
If you are using Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012, you can print by using the WSD (Web Services on Devices) protocol. If
you want to use WSD, first install the printer driver and then add a network printer.
Installing the MF Drivers
Adding a Network Printer
Log on to the computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder
Click [Add a printer] or [Add Printer].
Click [Add a local printer].
Check that [LPT1] is selected under [Use an existing port], and click [Next].
Click [Have Disk].
Installing the MF Drivers
1
2
3
4
5
6
㻞㻥㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Click [Browse].
Specify the folder where the drivers are stored, select the Inf file, and click [Open].
Specify the folder containing the drivers either on the DVD-ROM or in the file you downloaded as follows. Drivers you can specify
differ with your model.
Specify the folder for your language in [xxxx].
UFR II
[intdrv] [UFRII] [XXXX]* [32bit] or [x64] [Driver] folders of the DVD-ROM or downloaded file.
PS
[intdrv] [PS] [XXXX]* [32bit] or [x64] [Driver] folders of the DVD-ROM or downloaded file.
PCL5
[intdrv] [PCL] [XXXX]* [32bit] or [x64] [Driver] [pcl5e_5c] folders of the DVD-ROM or downloaded file.
PCL6
[intdrv] [PCL] [XXXX]* [32bit] or [x64] [Driver] [pcl6] folders of the DVD-ROM or downloaded file.
Fax
[intdrv] [FAX] [XXXX]* [32bit] or [x64] [Driver] folders of the DVD-ROM or downloaded file.
You must select the drivers to use beforehand on the machine. About the Drivers and Software
If you do not know whether to specify the 32-bit version or the 64-bit version. Checking the Bit Architecture
Click [OK].
Select your printer, and click [Next].
*
7
8
9
10
㻟㻜㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Change the printer name as necessary, and click [Next].
Select [Do not share this printer], and click [Next].
If you want to share the printer, make sharing settings for the printer added with Adding a Network Printer. (Setting Up
Print Server: e-Manual)
Click [Finish].
To set the printer as the normally-used printer, select the [Set the default printer] check box.
Installation is complete, and an icon for the installed printer is displayed in the printer folder.
11
12
13
㻟㻝㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Open the network folder.
Windows Vista/Server 2008
[Start] select [Network].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] [Computer] select [Network].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [File Explorer] select [Network].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] [File Explorer] select [Network].
Right-click the newly added printer icon, and click [Install].
Installation for using WSD is complete when an icon for the printer is added to the printer folder.
Deleting unneeded printer icons
When you have finished installing the network printer, the icon added in step 13 of Installing the MF Drivers is no longer
needed. To delete the icon, right-click it and select [Remove device] or [Delete] click [Yes].
Adding a Network Printer
1
2
㻟㻞㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
㻟㻟㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-008
Uninstalling
When you no longer need installed MF Drivers, MF Scan Utility, the Product Extended Survey Program, or Toner Status you can uninstall
them to delete them from your computer.
Uninstalling the MF Drivers
Uninstalling the MF Scan Utility
Uninstalling the Product Extended Survey Program
Uninstalling the Toner Status
Log on to the computer with an administrator account.
Display [Programs and Features] or [Add or Remove Programs]. Displaying [Programs and Features] or [Add or
Remove Programs]
Select the MF Drivers that you want to uninstall, and click [Uninstall/Change] or [Change/Remove].
The uninstaller starts.
If you cannot find the drivers that you want to uninstall
Uninstalling the MF Drivers
Start the uninstaller from the supplied DVD-ROM or from the MF Drivers file that you downloaded.
1Insert the supplied DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
To start the uninstaller from the MF Drivers file that you downloaded, carry out the following step.
2Open the folder where the uninstaller is stored.
32-bit operating system
[us_eng] or [uk_eng] [32bit] [misc] folders of the DVD-ROM or downloaded file
64-bit operating system
[us_eng] or [uk_eng] [x64] [misc] folders of the DVD-ROM or downloaded file
If you do not know whether to specify the 32-bit version or the 64-bit version for Windows Vista/7/8/Server
2008/Server 2012, see Checking the Bit Architecture.
3Double-click "DelDrv.exe".
1
2
3
㻟㻠㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Click [Delete].
Click [Yes].
The uninstall starts.
Log on to the computer with an administrator account.
Display [Programs and Features] or [Add or Remove Programs]. Displaying [Programs and Features] or [Add or
Remove Programs]
Select the [Canon MF Scan Utility], and click [Uninstall/Change] or [Change/Remove].
The uninstaller starts.
Click [Yes].
Click [OK].
Log on to the computer with an administrator account.
Display [Programs and Features] or [Add or Remove Programs]. Displaying [Programs and Features] or [Add or
Remove Programs]
Uninstalling the MF Scan Utility
Uninstalling the Product Extended Survey Program
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
㻟㻡㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Select [Canon Laser Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program], and click [Uninstall] or [Remove].
The uninstaller starts.
Click [OK].
Log on to the computer with an administrator account.
Display [Programs and Features] or [Add or Remove Programs]. Displaying [Programs and Features] or [Add or
Remove Programs]
Select [Toner Status], and click [Uninstall] or [Remove].
The uninstaller starts.
Click [Uninstall].
Click [OK].
Uninstalling the Toner Status
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
㻟㻢㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-009
Troubleshooting
If you encounter problems during installation or uninstallation of the MF Drivers and MF Scan Utility, see the following sections before
contacting Canon.
Trouble with Installation
Trouble after Upgrading the Operating System
Cannot install the software
When you are in an IPv6 environment, the Software Programs/Manuals Setup screen may not appear, and you cannot install
the MF drivers. Install the drivers using the WSD port.
Installing the MF Drivers
If an error occurs during the installation, uninstall the software, restart your computer, and install it again.
Uninstalling the MF Drivers
Installing the MF Drivers
Quit all running applications and install the software again.
Applications installed from the DVD-ROM supplied with the machine are not properly registered in the MF Scan Utility
Applications are automatically registered to the MF Scan Utility once they have been installed. They are not, however, if
installed while the MF Scan Utility is open. To access these applications from the utility, you need to manually register them to
the utility. For more information, see [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
Cannot use the software after upgrading the operating system
Reinstall the software after uninstalling the software.
Uninstalling
Installing
Trouble with Installation
Trouble after Upgrading the Operating System
㻟㻣㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-00A
Appendix
The Appendix provides information you should know, such as how to use the Installation Guide, disclaimers, and copyright information.
㻟㻤㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-00C
Using the Installation Guide
The Installation Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer. It provides information about the installation of drivers. You
can find pages quickly by searching for what you want to do or by entering keywords.
How to Find the Topic You Are Looking For
You can find the page you are looking for using the following three methods.
Search the contents
You can find the page you are looking for by selecting a topic from the [Contents] tab on the left side of the screen, or by
selecting a chapter icon from the icons next to the topics.
Top Page
Topic Page
Search by keyword
You can search by entering keywords, such as "USB" or "environment". Pages containing the keywords are displayed. You can also
enter phrases such as "install the MF Drivers". The search will find topics containing all of the words in the phrase (AND search).
Search Tab
Search the site map
Click [Site Map] on the top part of the screen to display a list of all the Installation Guide topics. From there you can find the topic
you are looking for.
Site Map
System requirements
To use the Installation Guide, one of the following Web browsers is required. The content of the Installation Guide may not
display correctly if a browser not listed below is used.
Internet Explorer 8.0/9.0/10.0/11.0, Firefox 24.x ESR/26.x/29.x/30.x/31.x/31.x
ESR/32.x/33.x/34.x/35.x/36.x/37.x/38.x/39.x
㻟㻥㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-00E
Screen Configuration of the Installation Guide
The Installation Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.
Top Page
This page appears when the Installation Guide is started.
Canon logo
Click to return to the top page from any other page.
[Contents] tab/[Search] tab
Click to toggle the display between the [Contents] tab and [Search] tab.
Contents
Displays the titles of chapters ( ). Place the mouse pointer over one of the titles to display the topics in that chapter on the
right. Click a topic to display its page.
[Top]
Click to return to the top page from any other page.
[Site Map]
Click to display the titles of all Installation Guide topics.
[Help]
Click to display information on how to view the Installation Guide, how to perform a search, and other information.
[Print]
Click to print the currently displayed topic page.
[Notice]
Click to view important information you should know when using the printer.
Topic Page
Topic pages contain information about how to install drivers.
㻠㻜㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
[Contents]
Chapter icons and topic titles are displayed in this tab.
[Expand All]/[Collapse All]
Click [Expand All] to display all of the subsections of all topics. Click [Collapse All] to close all of the subsections of all the
topics.
Chapter icons
Click a chapter icon to navigate to the top of the corresponding chapter.
Topics
Displays the topics of the selected chapter. If "+" is displayed on a topic, clicking it displays the subsections of that topic. Click
"-" to close an expanded topic.
[Print all]
All pages of the selected chapter are opened in a separate window. You can print them as necessary.
Navigation
This shows which chapter topic you are currently viewing.
Click to return to the page top.
/
Click to display the previous or next topic.
Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click the [Back] button on your Web browser.
Click to display hidden detailed descriptions. Click again to close the detailed descriptions.
Search Tab
This tab contains a text box to perform a search and find the page you are looking for.
㻠㻝㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
[Enter keyword(s) here]
Enter one or more keywords and click to display search results in a results list. You can enter a phrase to find pages that
contain all of the words in the phrase. To find an exact phrase, enclose it in double quotation marks.
[Search options]
Click to specify search conditions such as the scope of the search and case sensitivity.
Search scope selector
You can use this to select the individual chapters to search. This allows you to search more efficiently, when you can predict
the chapters containing the topic that you are looking for.
Search options selector
Select the check box to make your search case-sensitive.
[Search with these conditions]
and specify the conditions. After setting them, press this to perform the search and display the results in the [Result]
list.
Result list
This displays pages that contain the specified keywords. From the results, locate the page you are looking for and click the
topic title of the page. If the results cannot be displayed on one page, click / or a page number to display the results on
the corresponding page.
Site Map
This page displays the titles of all topics in the Installation Guide.
Chapter icons
Click to jump to the table of contents of the selected chapter.
Topic titles
Displays titles and topics. Click a title to jump to the corresponding topic page.
Click to return to the page top.
/
Click to go to the previous or next chapter.
㻠㻞㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-00F
Viewing the Installation Guide
Marks
Restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the printer, useful tips, and other information are indicated using the marks
below.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the printer
correctly and avoid damage to the printer or property.
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure.
Buttons
Buttons on the computer display are indicated with the following notation:
Example from the Installation Guide: [Next]
Computer Screens
Depending on the operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays in this guide may differ slightly from the displays
that you see. Also, the appearance of MF Drivers and software may differ depending on their version.
㻠㻟㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-00H
Other
This section describes basic Windows operations and includes disclaimers, copyright information, and other information.
㻠㻠㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-00J
Basic Windows Operations
Displaying the Printer Folder
Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen
Checking the Bit Architecture
Displaying [Programs and Features] or [Add or Remove Programs]
Displaying the Printer Folder
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel] [Printer].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Devices and Printers].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows Server 2003
[Start] select [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].
Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen
If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after you insert the DVD-ROM, follow the procedure
below. This following example uses "D:" as the name of the DVD-ROM drive. The DVD-ROM drive name may be different on your
computer.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2
[Start] enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and files] or [Start Search] press the [ENTER] key on the keyboard.
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK].
Windows Server 2003
[Start] select [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK].
Checking the Bit Architecture
If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows, follow the procedure below to check.
Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012/Server 2012 R2
Click [System and Security] or [System and Maintenance] [System].
Windows Server 2008
1
2
㻠㻡㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
Double-click [System].
Check the bit architecture.
32-bit operating systems
[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.
64-bit operating systems
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
Displaying [Programs and Features] or [Add or Remove Programs]
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] [Control Panel] select [Uninstall a Program].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Control Panel] select [Uninstall a Program].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] [Control Panel] select [Uninstall a Program].
Windows Server 2003
[Start] [Control Panel] select [Add or Remove Programs].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Programs and Features].
3
㻠㻢㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣
0UFE-00K
Notice
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS
PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
Copyright
Copyright CANON INC. 2015
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or
computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of Canon Inc.
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
㻠㻣㻌㻛㻌㻠㻣